Binder1 PDF

Operations & Maintenance (O&M)
Manual
Version 9.1
09/01/2015
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sr.NO Description Page No.
1 SAFETY CHECKLIST 3
2 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS 4
3 INITIAL INSPECTION, SHIPPING ARRANGEMENTS 5
4 INSTALLATION 6
5 STORAGE-STORAGE CONSIDERATIONS 7
6 OPERATING & MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS FOR -TOP ENTRY 9

AGITATORS
7 OPERATING THE MIXER 9
8 REPLACING THE MECHANICAL SEAL 10
9 MECHANICAL SEAL INSTALLATION 11
10 START UP 11
11 BOLT TIGHTENING TORQUE RECOMMENDATIONS 12
12 MOTOR MAINTENANCE AND STORAGE 14
13 GEAR DRIVE LUBRICATION 16
14 OIL CHANGE INTERVALS 17
15 GEAR DRIVE BEARING LUBRICATION 17
16 LUBRICATION INTERVALS 17
17 MOTOR - O & M MANUAL 18
18 GEARBOX - O & M MANUAL 31
2
Safety Check List
Important
Before installing or storing your mixer, please read this manual as it includes important
information that can have an effect on the warranty of your equipment.
All GALAXY INDUSTRIAL EQUIPMENTS PVT LTD. Mixers and are provided with properly
designed lifting devices and safety covers to avoid potential injury and/or equipment
damage. The following SAFETY CHECKS LIST should be THOROUGHLY REVIEWED AND
ADHERED TO before operating or performing maintenance on the mixer. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY.
1. Use only the lifting device provided on your unit to install the mixer. Use shouldered
eyebolts and tighten securely to handle component parts. We strongly recommend
that the hoist rings be of safety swivel type with 360º rotational capability.
2. DO NOT connect the motor to the power source until all components are assembled,
the mixer is installed, and all hardware is tightened to the proper torque, which is
specified in the operation and maintenance manuals supplied by GALAXY
INDUSTRIAL EQUIPMENTS PVT LTD.
3. DO NOT operate shaft-sealing devices at temperatures or pressures higher than

those specified in the manual or on the nameplates.
4. Prior to servicing the mixer, electrically disconnect power.
5. DO NOT touch rotating mixer parts.
6. DO NOT operate mixer for service other than its intended use.
7. DO NOT make any field changes or modifications (horsepower, output speed, shaft
lengths, impellers, etc) without reviewing the changes with your GALAXY
INDUSTRIAL EQUIPMENTS PVT LTD. Sales Representative or the GALAXY INDUSTRIAL
EQUIPMENTS PVT LTD. Customer Service Department.
8. DO NOT install an Variable Frequency Drive without first consulting your GALAXY
INDUSTRIAL EQUIPMENTS PVT LTD. Sales Representative or the GALAXY INDUSTRIAL
EQUIPMENTS PVT LTD. Customer Service Department to determine the compatibility
of the existing motor with the Variable Frequency Drive.
9. Before operating the mixer, it is important to check the following items:

a. Make sure the mixer is properly grounded.
b. Ensure all protective guards and covers are installed.
c. Ensure all detachable components are securely coupled to the mixer.
d. Thoroughly REVIEW and ADHERE TO the mixer operating instructions supplied by
GALAXY INDUSTRIAL EQUIPMENTS PVT LTD.
e. Ensure the mixer output shaft rotates freely by hand.
3
f. Ensure all personnel and equipment are clear of rotating parts.
g. Ensure all external connections (electrical, hydraulic, pneumatic, etc.) have been
completed as per the applicable codes.
10. DO NOT enter the mixing vessel UNLESS:

a. The mixer power supply is locked out.
b. The mixer shaft is firmly attached to the mixer drive or the shaft is
supported securely from below.
c. You have followed applicable confined space regulations.
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR GALAXY INDUSTRIAL EQUIPMENTS PVT. LTD.
This GALAXY INDUSTRIAL EQUIPMENTS PVT LTD. mixer is a piece of precision machinery of
the highest quality. It is designed to operate satisfactorily under all the conditions normally
encountered.
With proper care, this GALAXY INDUSTRIAL EQUIPMENTS PVT LTD. mixer will give years of
trouble free service. If you should have any questions regarding its operation that is not
answered in this manual, contact your authorized GALAXY PROCESS SYSTEM mixer
Representative.
WARNING: Before attempting any maintenance or service on this machine, it is

essential that the power source to the motor be locked out
FAILURE TO LOCK OUT THE MOTOR POWER SOURCE BEFORE SERVICE OR MAINTENANCE
ACTIONS CAN RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.
WARNING: EYE PROTECTION MUST BE WORN AT ALL TIMES WHILE SERVICING THIS
MIXER.
4
SECTION 1 - INITIAL INSPECTION, SHIPPING ARRANGEMENTS
1.1 As soon as the unit is uncrated, check for possible shipping damage. Report any
damage immediately to the carrier and our factory. DO NOT proceed with the servicing
or installations of any unit with shipping damage unless so directed by the factory.
1.2 The mixer is shipped as a complete unit, whenever possible, ready to install after
unbolting from the shipping skid. If shipping restrictions limit overall size, drives and/or
motors may be shipped disassembled. Any grease lubricated bearings in the unit have
been serviced at the factory.
1.3 Various small components, such as impeller hardware, plugs, etc. are often packed
separately to avoid damage during assembly or to ensure that the unit remains sealed
and properly preserved during shipment. These components should be identified and
assembled.to.the.unit.
1.4 SHIPPING.PROTECTION
All units are treated with corrosion inhibitors for protection during shipment and
possible short term storage.
a. External Steel Surfaces - All external steel surfaces not protected with permanent
coatings are covered with a rust preventative that is easily removed with kerosene
or a similar solvent. All preservatives must be removed before checking shaft
alignments. Do not remove any wrappings or rotate the shafts until the unit is ready
for operation.
b. Protection Period - Factory applied inhibitors will protect units from internal
corrosion for periods up to 1 (one) year if stored indoors in clean,
temperature controlled, dry surroundings. Review Section 3 of this manual
carefully if the unit is to be stored in conditions other than those described
above prior to installation.
5
SECTION 2-INSTALLATION
2.1 Refer to the Installation Drawings OR G.A. Drawing
a. Proper mixer location and off bottom distance.

b. Design loads, mounting details and requirements of the mixer outboard supports.
c. A minimum clearance of 75mm is required between totally enclosed fan cooled
motors and the outer tank wall to ensure adequate motor ventilation. The motor
must be wired for the rotation as indicated by the rotation arrow.
d. The minimum opening required to pass the impeller into the tank.
2.2 CAUTION: NEVER use the motor eyebolt to lift or support the assembled mixer.
DO NOT hoist, handle or rest the unit on any shaft extension.
a. Mount mixer flange to the tank flange with the appropriate gasket and secure in
place.
b. Assemble the impeller to the mixer shaft. The impeller hub is normally shipped.
assembled to the in-tank shaft. The impeller will be found attached to the shipping
skid floor.
IMPORTANT: The impeller must be installed on the shaft with the end of the hub stamped
“MIXER” or “Motor” nearest the motor end of the mixer.
When installing the impeller, refer to the impeller drawing and instructions. Make sure the
impeller hardware is tightened to the specific torques in the impeller instructions. A torque
wrench must be used to tighten all bolts to their specified torque values, lighten all other
hardware to the values shown at the end of the maintenance instructions.
c. Motor Power Connections - In order to ensure proper functioning of the unit, it is

essential that the motor maintenance instructions in this manual and the nameplate
be reviewed before connecting to power source.
2.3 MECHANICAL SEALS - Wherever Applicable !!!
a) Be sure the seal support assembly is in the operating position. Refer to seal
instructions for correct positioning.
b) Connect seal lubricant lines if required.
MECHANICAL SEAL
The sealing faces of the mechanical seal must be lubricated by the fluid in the tank or by
flushing fluid for units equipped with a flushing arrangement. Therefore, DO NOT OPERATE
THE MIXER WHEN THE TANK LIQUID LEVEL IS BELOW THE SEAL OR IF THE FLOW OF
FLUSHING IS DISRUPTED.
6
SECTION 3- STORAGE
FAILURE TO PROPERLY STORE AND PROTECT EQUIPMENT AS OUTLINED MAY VOID ANY
WARRANTY, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED.
3.1 STORAGE CONSIDERATIONS
GALAXY INDUSTRIAL EQUIPMENTS PVT LTD., like all precision equipment, must be protected
against corrosion during prolonged periods of inactivity. The primary cause of corrosion is
condensation due to fluctuating temperatures, high humidity, or both. Properly treated and
located in clean, dry surroundings, inactive equipment can be successfully stored for up to
one year without damage from corrosive attack.
Electric motors or other prime movers are not prepared for indoor storage beyond the
periods shown below by GALAXY INDUSTRIAL EQUIPMENTS PVT LTD. Outdoor storage of
electric motors is not recommended by any motor manufacturer. For storage periods
beyond those shown below, refer to motor maintenance instructions furnished with this
manual for further details.
3.2 STORAGE OF NEW UNITS
GALAXY INDUSTRIAL EQUIPMENTS PVT LTD. Mixers are factory treated with high quality
corrosion inhibitors and rust preventatives. With reasonable care at the site, the products
will effectively protect new, uninstalled units from corrosion due to water and water
vapour, for up to one year, depending on how the unit is stored.
NOTE: Outdoor, unprotected storage is not permitted under any circumstances unless the
unit has been specifically prepared for such storage at the factory prior to shipment.
 Uninstalled, Protected Storage and Installed, Inoperative Units - Depending on the

conditions under which a new unit which has not been installed is stored, the initial
factory applied corrosion protection treatment will last up to one year. Actual
preservation periods, as a function of storage conditions, are defined in Table 4.
7
Table 4 - Corrosion Protection Periods
PROTECTION PERIOD, MONTHS
Storage Conditions
Initials PERIODIC INSPECTION
Indoors in a dry, ambient
atmosphere with 12 12
controlled temperatures
Indoors in a dry ambient
atmosphere without 6 6
temperature control
Outdoors as crated with
suitable protection from
the elements. Coverings
must be waterproof, but
have provisions for free
circulation of air to avoid 4 4
buildups of condensation.
Equipment must be
elevated at least 12 inches
above ground level to
reduce moisture pickup
 Periodic Inspection -All protective coatings and wrappings must be maintained in

good condition. Stored units should be visually inspected periodically to ensure that
the factory wrappings and coatings are intact. If factory wrappings and coatings are
accidentally removed or damaged, reapply them over the exposed areas.
 Refer to electric motor maintenance instructions furnished with this manual for
further details on represervation of the electric motor.
3.3 STORAGE OF DEACTIVATED UNITS
Under normal circumstances, units that have been in service, but will be idle less than 3
months, must be run for at least 15 minutes every week, to redistribute grease, and receive
regular maintenance. If this procedure is followed carefully, such units do not require
represervation.
Cover units stored outdoors with waterproof covering, allowing for free air circulation. b.
Periodic Inspection - All protective coatings and wrappings must be maintained in good
condition. Stored units should be visually inspected periodically to ensure that the factory
wrappings and coatings are intact. If factory wrappings and coatings are accidentally
removed or damaged, reapply them over the exposed areas.
8
Refer to electric motor maintenance instructions furnished with this manual for further
details on represervation of the electric motor.
3.4 START-UP PREPARATION
When a unit is removed from storage, perform the following steps before placing the unit in
service:
1. Remove all wrappings and-coverings.

2. Check the unit for free rotation.
3. Install all safety guards.
OPERATING & MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS FOR GALAXY INDUSTRIAL EQUIPMENTS

PVT LTD -TOP ENTRY AGITATORS
This GALAXY INDUSTRIAL EQUIPMENTS PVT LTD. mixer is a piece of precision machinery of
the highest quality. It is designed to operate satisfactorily under all the conditions normally
encountered.
With proper care, this GALAXY INDUSTRIAL EQUIPMENTS PVT LTD. mixer will give years of
trouble free service. If you should have any questions regarding its operation that are not
answered in this manual, contact your authorized GALAXY INDUSTRIAL EQUIPMENTS PVT
LTD. mixer Representative.
SECTION 1 - OPERATING THE MIXER
GALAXY INDUSTRIAL EQUIPMENTS PVT LTD. mixers are designed to operate continuously under
all standard conditions where the liquid level is at least 1.5 x Impeller Diameter above the
mixer centreline. It is not good practice, however, to operate continuously when extreme
vortxing or surging occurs. At the end of the mixing cycle, it is good practice to turn off the
mixer before the tank has drained to a level which will result in excessive splashing.
Be sure that the shut off device is in the open position before operating the mixer.
Before operating the mixer check all bolts and fasteners for tightness. Make sure that the
impeller blade hardware is torque to the value given in the instruction manual before
installing in the tank
GALAXY INDUSTRIAL EQUIPMENTS PVT LTD. mixers are manufactured and assembled to provide
long, trouble free service when properly maintained. If it becomes necessary to disassemble
the unit, careful precise re-assembly is necessary. At the end of two (2) weeks service, check
all fasteners and mounting hardware for tightness.
9
This mixer is equipped with a GALAXY INDUSTRIAL EQUIPMENTS PVT LTD. SINGLE SEAL
ASSEMBLY The fluid in the tank lubricates the sealing faces of the GALAXY INDUSTRIAL
EQUIPMENTS PVT LTD. seal. Therefore it is very important to maintain the minimum tank
liquid level as mentioned above.
Dirt on the motor case acts as an insulator and will prevent proper cooling. Always keep the
motor clean. Refer to Motor Maintenance Instructions furnished with this manual for
further details.
SECTION 2- REPLACING THE MECHANICAL SEAL
2.1 MECHANICAL SEAL REMOVAL:
Remove both side covers and disconnect any seal lubricant lines.
If any seal setting clips were supplied, install them and then loosen the seal drive set screws
but do not remove.
Remove the single shaft bolt in the shaft drive collar
1. Loosen the nuts on the inside of the seal carrier assembly and tighten the outside
nuts until the shaft is firmly seated (the seal carrier assembly will move approx.
10mm towards the flange). A ‘telltale’ is provided on the seal carrier assembly. Use
this to confirm that the shut-off has sealed correctly.
2. Loosen the bolts securing the shaft drive collar to the driven and the quill shaft and
remove the shaft drive collar. Be careful not to loose the shaft key
3. Remove the thrust ring
4. Remove any screws securing the mechanical seal.
5. Pull the seal assembly back until the stationary seal face is clear of the seal carrier
assembly
Depending on the type of mechanical seal fitted it may be necessary to remove the
seal setting clips and the seal retainer plate so that the seal can pass.
2.2 MECHANICAL SEAL INSTALLATION:
1. The greatest care must be exercised in the handling and installation of the
mechanical seal. The efficiency of the seal depends on the degree of surface finish of
the lapped faces and proper alignment. Dirt and scratches on the lapped faces will
permit leakage. The seal faces are extremely fragile and sharp blows, tapping or
other impacts are to be avoided.
10
2. Seal installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. Ensure that all O-ring
surfaces are free of dirt and lubricated. The running clearance ‘X’ of the seal carrier
assembly is determined by the setting bolts. Ensure these are firmly seated before
positioning the seal carrier assembly.
3. Install the shaft retaining bolt and tighten to the torque listed in Table with the bolt
lubricated.
SECTION 3 – START UP
1. The gear drive dipstick and breather assembly are removed prior to shipment, and
replaced with solid plugs to provide an airtight gear drive housing. The dipstick and
breather are packed separately with other installation hardware. Install the dipstick
and breather assembly prior to start up.
2. FILL THE GEAR DRIVE WITH OIL TO THE PROPER LEVEL. The oil capacity is shown on
the unit nameplate. However, use the dipstick full mark as an accurate guide. Oil
type and viscosity recommendations are given, as well as a table of typical oils which
fall into the recommended viscosity ranges.
3. Connect the motor to a power source that matches the line voltage specified on the
order and according to the wiring diagram on the motor nameplate.
4. Before permanently connecting the motor leads, check impeller shaft rotation. Jog
the motor until it is determined rotation is correct, and make permanent
connections. Refer to motor maintenance instructions furnished with this manual for
further details.
5. NEVER start up the unit with the impeller imbedded in solids or set–up liquids.
6. Lubricate and adjust packing on stuffing box models. Packing should be ”run–in” per
instructions before pressurizing vessels.
7. Add lubricant and pressurize mechanical seal chambers per instructions
11
SECTION 3- BOLT TIGHTENING TORQUE RECOMMENDATIONS
Inadequately or improperly tightened hardware can loosen due to vibration or the load
reactions imposed by fluid forces. This can result in reduced equipment service life or
damage and failure.
Recommended torques for tightening bolts and screws on GALAXY INDUSTRIAL

EQUIPMENTS PVT LTD. Mixers and Aerators and their mounting structures are listed in
Table 7 for your general reference. These average torque values should be considered only
as guides and not as absolute values.
The amount of torque required to maintain a tight connection can vary considerably for
bolts of the same size under different operating conditions. Variations such as basic joint
design, compression factors, type and strength of base and hardware material, surface
finish of mating parts and lubrication are only some of the factors that influence the
tightness of bolted connections for given bolt torques.
UNLESS SPECIFICALLY LISTED ELSEWHERE IN THE DETAILED INSTRUCTIONS, TIGHTEN THE

MIXER AND MOUNTING HARDWARE TO THE RECOMMENDED VALUES SHOWN IN TABLE 7.
Certain assembly connections may require special torques which are not listed in the table.
These torques can be found in the detailed assembly and disassembly sections of your
manual. REVIEW YOUR MANUAL CAREFULLY TO DETERMINE WHERE SPECIAL TORQUES
ARE.REQUIRED.
For severe duty service, torques higher than listed, to tighten a bolt to maximum capacity,
can often be used. However, due to the many variables previously mentioned, the only
absolute method to determine optimum torque is deliberately yield a bolt under actual
conditions. If a bolt does yield or shear, 75% of the torque applied in yielding the bolt can be
used to obtain a tight connection that is satisfactory.
12
ALL BOLTS SHOULD BE RETIGHTENED AFTER THE UNIT HAS BEEN RUN UNDER LOAD FOR
TWO (2) WEEKS, AND AT EACH SCHEDULED SHUT DOWN THEREAFTER.
Table 7 - Recommended Tightening Torques
Stainless Steel Grade 8.8

Bolt Size (Metric)
Nm. Nm.
M5-0.8 3.6 4.6
M6-1.O 6 8
M8-1.25 15 19
M10-1.5 29 38
M12-1.75 51 66
M14-2.0* 82 105
M16-2.O 127 164
M18-2.5* 175 233
M20-2.5 248 331
M22-2.5* 338 450
M24-3.O 429 572
M27-3.O* - 837
M30-3.5 - 1136
M33-3.5* - 1545
* These are Non-Preferred Sizes
1. ALL BOLTS SHOULD BE COATED WITH OIL, GREASE, OR AN ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND

WHENEVER POSSIBLE. THE THREADS AND BEARING FACE OF BOLT HEADS AND/OR
NUTS SHOULD BE LUBRICATED. IF IT BECOMES NECESSARY TO MAKE A DRY THREAD
CONNECTION, MULTIPLY THE VALUES x 1.33.
2.
IF FRICTION LOCKING DEVICES SUCH AS NYLOK INSERTS OR UPSET THREADS ARE
USED THEN MULTIPLY THE VALUES BY 1.15.
13
SECTION 4 --- MOTOR MAINTENANCE AND STORAGE
1. To insure continued reliable operation of electric motors, the following basic rule
applies: KEEP THE MOTOR CLEAN, DRY AND PROPERLY LUBRICATED. Motors should
be inspected at regular intervals with frequency depending upon the type of motor
and the service. Windings should be cleaned by blowing or vacuuming dust from
them. Ventilating openings must be kept clear. If dust and dirt is to be removed with
a vacuum cleaner, nozzles should be of the non—metallic type. Deposits of dirt and
grease may be removed by using a commercially available low volatile solvent. DO
NOT USE GASOLINE OR OTHER FLAMMABLE SOLVENTS.
2. Terminal connections and assembly hardware may loosen from vibration during
service and should be tightened.
3. Insulation resistance should be checked at operative temperature and humidity

conditions to determine possible deterioration of insulation due to excessive
moisture or extremes in operating environment. If wide variations are detected,
motors should be reconditioned.
4. LUBRICATION - Prior to shipment, motor bearings are greased with the proper
amount and grade of lubricant by the motor vendor. Motors equipped with sealed
bearings require no additional lubrication. Motors equipped with open or shielded
bearings require lubrication periodically. It is recommended that the bearing
lubricant be inspected at the end of two or three months to determine the necessity
to add grease. Frequency of re—lubrication will vary with particular application and
can be determined with periodic
Inspection. The following table offers suggested re-lubrication frequency based on general
operating conditions.
Types of General Conditions HP Range Re-Lubrication
Service Frequency
Standard 8 Hrs per day, normal or light loading, 1 ½ -7 ½ 3Yrs
Clean,100ºF Maximum Ambient 10-40 1Yrs
50-150 6months
200-350 3months
Severe 24 Hrs per day operation or Shock 1 ½ -7 ½ 1 ½ Yrs
10-40 6months
14
Loading, vibration or in dirt or dust 50-150 3months
@ 40-50ºC(100-120ºF) Ambient. 200-350 1 ½ months
Very Severe Heavy Shock or vibration, dirt or dust, 1 ½ -7 ½ 6months
High ambient temperature. 10-40 3months
50-150 2months
200-350 1months
All motors over 1500 RPM should be checked for re-lubrication at three month intervals.
CAUTION: The greatest cause of bearing failure is over greasing rather than under
greasing.
4.5 TYPE OF LUBRICANT

For best results, grease should be compounded from a lithium soap base and a good grade
of petroleum oil. It should be of No. 2 consistency and stabilized against oxidation. Most
leading oil companies have special bearing greases that are satisfactory.
4.6 LUBRICATION PROCEDURE
A) Motors equipped with grease fittings or plugs:
1. Motor should be warm and disconnected from power source.
2. Clean the exterior of the motor.
3. Remove all pipe plugs and relief plugs.
(For some TEFC motors, it may be necessary to remove caps on fan cover and
hexagonal rod through fan cover to gain access to grease plugs and relief plugs)
4. Using a low pressure, hand operated grease gun, pump in dean grease until it
appears at the relief hole or along motor shaft.
5. Run the motor with the plugs removed for approximately two (2) hours.
6. Stop the motor and wipe away excess grease at relief or along shaft and replace
plugs.
B) Motors not having pipe plugs or grease fittings in bearing housings can be re—lubricated
by removing end shields from motor, cleaning grease cavities and refilling cavities to
capacity with new grease.
CAUTION: Bearings and grease must be kept free of dirt.
C) Oil lubricated motors — (sleeve bearing equipped) Oil should be added annually after 3
years of normal or 1 year of heavy duty service. Electric motor or SAE 20 oil should be
used. For more specific maintenance and lubrication instructions, contact your local
motor manufacturer representative.
D) Windings to be megged at the time equipment is put into storage. At the time of
removal from storage, the resistance reading must not have dropped more than 50% from
15
the initial reading. Any drop below this point necessitates electrical or mechanical drying.
Where a large quantity of motors is stored, an inspection or sampling should be made by
removing the end brackets and visually inspecting for the presence of water in the grease,
or rust on the bearing. If present, replace the bearings and re-lubricate.
g. All external parts and motors subjected to corrosion should be protected by a corrosive
resistant coating.
h. Where motors are not stored in the original containers, the mounting must be such that
the drains and breathers are fully operable. In this respect, the drains must be kept at the
lowest point in the motor and/or the drain plugs removed so that all condensation can
automatically drain out.
i. All other storage conditions apply, including rotation of motor shafts. Where such
conditions cannot be met, then the equipment must be treated the same as if it were
mounted in its normal position, and all protective devices such as heaters, breathers and
drains fully operable.
SECTION 5 – GEAR DRIVE LUBRICATION
5.1 GEAR DRIVE OIL LUBRICATION:
Fill the gear drive to the proper level with an industrial type petroleum
based rust and oxidation inhibited (R & O) gear oil of the recommended viscosity. The unit
may be filled by removing the bushing below the breather assembly
NOTE: EXTREME PRESSURE (EP) GEAR OILS ARE NOT RECOMMENDED. DO NOT USE
WITHOUT SPECIFIC FACTORY APPROVAL.
In areas with seasonal temperature changes, use an oil with a viscosity that suits the
average temperature range. If your particular temperature range overlaps the temperature
ranges above, use the higher viscosity oil if the predominant temperature is above the
midpoint of the range selected.
5.2 OIL CHANGE INTERVALS
a. The gear case oil capacity is stamped on the nameplate. However, use the dipstick full
mark as the accurate guide. Physical size variations of the gears and internal components
can change the capacity by small amounts.
b. The lubricant in a new gear drive should be drained and the gear case flushed after two
(2) weeks of operation. Drain the unit while the oil is still at operating temperature. Flush
the housing thoroughly with a flushing oil that has a viscosity of 215 SSU or less, provided
the unit can be run at no load. If the unit is run under load, use a higher viscosity
comparable to the oil used in the unit.
16
c. The original oil can be reused provided it is filtered and free of water condensate.
Otherwise, new oil should be used. Run the original oil through a filter of no more than 10
microns. DO NOT use filters with substances such as Fuller’s earth which can remove
lubricant additives.
d. The recommended oil change frequency for units operating under favorable conditions is
every 2500 operating hours, or six months, whichever occurs first.
e. More frequent oil changes at intervals of one to three months will be necessary for
unfavorable operating conditions which tend to deteriorate oil and/or cause condensation.
Rapid changes in oil temperatures caused by intermittent operation or wide fluctuations in
ambient temperatures or operation in humid atmospheres, all promote condensation
which can result in the formation of harmful sludge.
Harmful vapors or chemical fumes and dusty atmospheres also tend to deteriorate oil and
the beneficial additives.
f. Reputable lubricant suppliers can test oil and recommend economical oil change
schedules when adverse operating conditions are present. Severe duty applications should
be referred to our factory for specific recommendations.
g. Check the oil level at regular intervals. DO NOT overfill as leakage and overheating can
occur.
5.3 GEAR DRIVE BEARING LUBRICATION
All gear drive bearings are oil splash lubricated except the low speed shaft bearings which is
situated in a dry well. This bearing is initially lubricated at the factory and should be re-
lubricated at regular intervals with a premium quality lithium soap NLGI #2 consistency
grease having rust and oxidation inhibitors and a base viscosity of at least 500 SSU at 100° F.
To insure that this bearing receives an adequate supply of fresh grease.
This re-greasable bearing is initially lubricated at the factory with a lithium base grease, but
requires re-lubrication at regular intervals. Be sure to clean all grease fittings and greasing
equipment thoroughly before attempting to lubricate this bearing. Also, make sure that the
recommended grease used is clean and free of contamination.
5.4 LUBRICATION INTERVALS Open type bearings require fresh lubricant at regular
intervals. The frequency of re-lubrication depends on the extent of atmospheric
contamination, humidity, variations in ambient temperature and actual bearing operating
temperatures. Bearings operating at high temperatures require
fresh grease at more frequent intervals.
17
BEARING LUBRICANT INTERVALS
BEARING OPERATING REGREASING INTERVAL

TEMPERATURE (°F) (MONTHS)
UNDER 160 6
160 – 185 5
186 – 200 4
5.5 Bearing operating temperatures can be determined with a surface pyrometer or

thermometer. For inaccessible bearings, grease or oil temperatures can be measured. Add
10° F to lubricant temperatures to compensate for heat transfer loss. Periodic temperature
checks should be made to establish lubrication
intervals and also to detect potential problems that can result from overheating.
18
ABB machinery drives
User’s manual
ACS355 drives
List of related manuals
Drive manuals and guides Code (English)
ACS355 user’s manual 3AUA0000066143
ACS355 drives with IP66/67 / UL Type 4x enclosure 3AUA0000066066
supplement
ACS355 quick installation guide 3AUA0000092940
ACS355 common DC application guide 3AUA0000070130
Option manuals and guides

FCAN-01 CANopen adapter module user’s manual 3AFE68615500
FDNA-01 DeviceNet adapter module user’s manual 3AFE68573360
FECA-01 EtherCAT® adapter module user’s manual 3AUA0000068940
FENA-01/-11/-21 Ethernet adapter module user's manual 3AUA0000093568
FEPL-02 Ethernet POWERLINK adapter module user’s 3AUA0000123527
manual
FLON-01 LONWORKS® adapter module user’s manual 3AUA0000041017
FMBA-01 Modbus adapter module user’s manual 3AFE68586704
FPBA-01 PROFIBUS DP adapter module user’s manual 3AFE68573271
FRSA-00 RS-485 adapter board user’s manual 3AFE68640300
MFDT-01 FlashDrop user’s manual 3AFE68591074
MPOT-01 potentiometer module instructions for 3AFE68591082
installation and use
MREL-01 output relay module user’s manual 3AUA0000035974
MTAC-01 pulse encoder interface module user’s manual 3AFE68591091
MUL1-R1 installation instructions for ACS150, ACS310, 3AFE68642868
ACS320, ACS350 and ACS355
MUL1-R3 installation instructions for ACS310, ACS320, 3AFE68643147
ACS350 and ACS355
MUL1-R4 installation instructions for ACS310, ACS320, 3AUA0000025916
ACS350 and ACS355
SREA-01 Ethernet adapter module quick start-up guide 3AUA0000042902
SREA-01 Ethernet adapter module user’s manual 3AUA0000042896
ACS355 and AC500-eCo application guide 2CDC125152M0201
AC500-eCo PLC and ACS355 quick installation guide 2CDC125145M0201
Maintenance manuals and guides

Guide for capacitor reforming in ACS50, ACS55, ACS150, 3AFE68735190
ACS310, ACS350, ACS355, ACS550, ACH550 and R1-
R4 OINT/SINT boards
You can find manuals and other product documents in PDF format on the Internet. See section
Document library on the Internet on the inside of the back cover. For manuals not available in the
Document library, contact your local ABB representative.
User’s manual
ACS355
Table of contents
1. Safety
4. Mechanical installation
6. Electrical installation
8. Start-up, control with I/O

and ID run
3AUA0000066143 Rev C
EN
 2015 ABB Oy. All Rights Reserved. EFFECTIVE: 2015-04-30
5
Table of contents
List of related manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1. Safety
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Use of warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Safety in installation and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Electrical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
General safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Safe start-up and operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Electrical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Safety
General safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2. Introduction to the manual

Applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Target audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Purpose of the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Contents of this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Related documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Categorization by frame size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Quick installation and commissioning flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3. Operation principle and hardware description

Operation principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Product overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Overview of power and control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Type designation label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Type designation key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4. Mechanical installation
Checking the installation site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Requirements for the installation site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Checking the delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Install the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Fasten clamping plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Attach the optional fieldbus module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
6
5. Planning the electrical installation

Implementing the AC power line connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Using an input choke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Selecting the supply disconnecting device (disconnecting means) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
European union . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Other regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Checking the compatibility of the motor and drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Checking the compatibility of the drive when multiple motors are connected to the drive . . . 40
Selecting the power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
General rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Alternative power cable types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Motor cable shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Additional US requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Selecting the control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
General rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Relay cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Control panel cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Routing the cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Control cable ducts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Protecting the drive, input power cable, motor and motor cable in short-circuit situations and
against thermal overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Protecting the drive and input power cable in short-circuit situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Protecting the motor and motor cable in short-circuit situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Protecting the drive, motor cable and input power cable against thermal overload . . . . . 46
Protecting the motor against thermal overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Implementing the Safe torque off (STO) function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Using residual current devices (RCD) with the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Using a safety switch between the drive and the motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Implementing a bypass connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Protecting the contacts of relay outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
6. Electrical installation
Checking the insulation of the assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Input power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Motor and motor cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Checking the compatibility with IT (ungrounded) and corner-grounded TN systems . . . . . . . 50
Connecting the power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Connection procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Connecting the control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
I/O terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Default I/O connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Connection procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
7
7. Installation checklist
Checking the installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
8. Start-up, control with I/O and ID run

Starting up the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Starting up the drive without a control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Performing a manual start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Performing a guided start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Controlling the drive through the I/O interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Performing the ID run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
ID run procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
9. Control panels
About control panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Basic control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Reference mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Parameter mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Copy mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Basic control panel alarm codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Assistant control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Parameters mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Assistants mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Changed parameters mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Fault logger mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Time and date mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Parameter backup mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
I/O settings mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
10. Application macros

What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Overview of macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Summary of the I/O connections of the application macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
ABB standard macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Default I/O connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
3-wire macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Default I/O connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
8
Alternate macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Default I/O connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Motor potentiometer macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Hand/Auto macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
PID control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Torque control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
AC500 Modbus macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
User macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
11. Program features

Start-up assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Default order of the tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
List of the tasks and the relevant drive parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Contents of the assistant displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Local control vs. external control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Local control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
External control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Block diagram: Start, stop, direction source for EXT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Block diagram: Reference source for EXT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Reference types and processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Reference trimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Programmable analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Programmable analog output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Programmable digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Programmable relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Frequency input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Transistor output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
9
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Actual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Motor identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Power loss ride-through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
DC magnetizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Maintenance trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
DC hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Speed compensated stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Flux braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Flux optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Acceleration and deceleration ramps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Critical speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Constant speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Custom U/f ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Speed controller tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Speed control performance figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Torque control performance figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Scalar control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
IR compensation for a scalar controlled drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Programmable protection functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
AI<Min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Panel loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
External fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Stall protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Motor thermal protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Underload protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Earth fault protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Incorrect wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Input phase loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Pre-programmed faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Overcurrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
DC overvoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
10
DC undervoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Drive temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Short-circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Internal fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Operation limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Power limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Automatic resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Supervisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Parameter lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
PID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Process controller PID1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
External/Trim controller PID2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Block diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Sleep function for the process PID (PID1) control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Control of a mechanical brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Operation time scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
State shifts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Jogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Real-time clock and timed functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Real-time clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Timed functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Sequence programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
State shifts ......................................................... 171
11
Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Safe torque off (STO) function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
12. Actual signals and parameters

Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Fieldbus addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Fieldbus equivalent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Storing the parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Default values with different macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Differences between the default values in E and U type drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Actual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
01 OPERATING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
04 FAULT HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
10 START/STOP/DIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
11 REFERENCE SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
12 CONSTANT SPEEDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
13 ANALOG INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
14 RELAY OUTPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
15 ANALOG OUTPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
16 SYSTEM CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
18 FREQ IN & TRAN OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
19 TIMER & COUNTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
20 LIMITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
21 START/STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
22 ACCEL/DECEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
23 SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
24 TORQUE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
25 CRITICAL SPEEDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
26 MOTOR CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
29 MAINTENANCE TRIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
30 FAULT FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
31 AUTOMATIC RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
32 SUPERVISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
33 INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
34 PANEL DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
36 TIMED FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
40 PROCESS PID SET 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
41 PROCESS PID SET 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
42 EXT / TRIM PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
43 MECH BRK CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
50 ENCODER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
51 EXT COMM MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
52 PANEL COMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
53 EFB PROTOCOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
54 FBA DATA IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
12
55 FBA DATA OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

84 SEQUENCE PROG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
98 OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
99 START-UP DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
13. Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus

System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Setting up communication through the embedded Modbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Drive control parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Fieldbus control interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Control word and Status word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Fieldbus references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Reference selection and correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Fieldbus reference scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Reference handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Actual value scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Modbus mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Register mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Function codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Exception codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Communication profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
ABB drives communication profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
DCU communication profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
14. Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter

System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Setting up communication through a fieldbus adapter module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Drive control parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Fieldbus control interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Control word and Status word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Communication profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Fieldbus references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Reference selection and correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Fieldbus reference scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Reference handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Actual value scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
15. Fault tracing

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Alarm and fault indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
How to reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
13
Fault history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Alarm messages generated by the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Alarms generated by the basic control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Fault messages generated by the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Embedded fieldbus faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
No master device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Same device address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Incorrect wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
16. Maintenance and hardware diagnostics

Maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Cooling fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Replacing the cooling fan (frame sizes R1…R4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Reforming the capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Power connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Cleaning the control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Changing the battery in the assistant control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
17. Technical data

Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Power cable sizes and fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Alternate short-circuit protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Dimensions, weights and free space requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Dimensions and weights ............................................... 381
Free space requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Losses, cooling data and noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Losses and cooling data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Terminal and lead-through data for the power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Terminal and lead-through data for the control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Electric power network specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Motor connection data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Control connection data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Clearance and creepage distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Brake resistor connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Common DC connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Degrees of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Applicable standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
14
CE marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Compliance with the European EMC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Compliance with EN 61800-3:2004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Category C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Category C2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Category C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
UL marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
UL checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
C-Tick marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
TÜV NORD Safety Approved mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
RoHS marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Compliance with the Machinery Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
18. Dimension drawings

Frame sizes R0 and R1, IP20 (cabinet installation) / UL open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Frame sizes R0 and R1, IP20 / NEMA 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Frame size R2, IP20 (cabinet installation) / UL open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Frame size R2, IP20 / NEMA 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
19. Appendix: Resistor braking

Planning the braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Selecting the brake resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Selecting the brake resistor cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Placing the brake resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Protecting the system in brake circuit fault situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Electrical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
20. Appendix: Extension modules

Extension modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
MTAC-01 pulse encoder interface module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
MREL-01 output relay module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
MPOW-01 auxiliary power extension module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Electrical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
15
21. Appendix: Safe torque off (STO)

What this appendix contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Compliance with the European Machinery Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Connection principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Connection with internal +24 V DC power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Connection with external +24 V DC power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Wiring examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Activation switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Cable types and lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Grounding of protective shields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Operation principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Start-up including acceptance test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Competence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Acceptance test reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Acceptance test procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Proof test interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Fault tracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Safety data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Declaration of conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
22. Appendix: Permanent magnet synchronous motors (PMSMs)

Setting the parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Start mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Smooth start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Speed controller tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Adjusting motor speed estimation gain in case of an over current failure . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Further information
Product and service inquiries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Product training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Document library on the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
16
Safety 17
1
Safety
What this chapter contains
The chapter contains safety instructions which you must follow when installing,
operating and servicing the drive. If ignored, physical injury or death may follow, or
damage may occur to the drive, motor or driven equipment. Read the safety
instructions before you work on the drive.
Use of warnings
Warnings caution you about conditions which can result in serious injury or death
and/or damage to the equipment, and advise on how to avoid the danger. The
following warning symbols are used in this manual:
Electricity warning warns of hazards from electricity which can cause

physical injury and/or damage to the equipment.
General warning warns about conditions, other than those caused by

electricity, which can result in physical injury and/or damage to the equipment.
18 Safety
Safety in installation and maintenance

These warnings are intended for all who work on the drive, motor cable or motor.
 Electrical safety
WARNING! Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or

death, or damage to the equipment.
Only qualified electricians are allowed to install and maintain the drive!
• Never work on the drive, motor cable or motor when input power is applied. After
disconnecting the input power, always wait for 5 minutes to let the intermediate
circuit capacitors discharge before you start working on the drive, motor or motor
cable.
Always ensure by measuring with a multimeter (impedance at least 1 Mohm) that
1. there is no voltage between the drive input phases U1, V1 and W1 and the
ground
2. there is no voltage between terminals BRK+ and BRK- and the ground.
• Do not work on the control cables when power is applied to the drive or to the
external control circuits. Externally supplied control circuits may carry dangerous
voltage even when the input power of the drive is switched off.
• Do not make any insulation or voltage withstand tests on the drive.
• Disconnect the internal EMC filter when installing the drive on an IT system (an
ungrounded power system or a high-resistance-grounded [over 30 ohms] power
system), otherwise the system will be connected to ground potential through the
EMC filter capacitors. This may cause danger or damage the drive. See page 50.
Note: When the internal EMC filter is disconnected, the drive is not EMC
compatible without an external filter.
• Disconnect the internal EMC filter when installing the drive on a corner-grounded
TN system, otherwise the drive will be damaged. See page 50. Note: When the
internal EMC filter is disconnected, the drive is not EMC compatible without an
external filter.
• All ELV (extra low voltage) circuits connected to the drive must be used within a
zone of equipotential bonding, ie, within a zone where all simultaneously
accessible conductive parts are electrically connected to prevent hazardous
voltages appearing between them. This is accomplished by a proper factory
grounding.
Note:
• Even when the motor is stopped, dangerous voltage is present at the power
circuit terminals U1, V1, W1 and U2, V2, W2 and BRK+ and BRK-.
Safety 19
Permanent magnet synchronous motor drives

These are additional warnings concerning permanent magnet synchronous motor
drives. Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death, or damage to the
equipment.
WARNING! Do not work on the drive when the permanent magnet

synchronous motor is rotating. Also, when the supply power is switched off and
the inverter is stopped, a rotating permanent magnet synchronous motor feeds power
to the intermediate circuit of the drive and the supply connections become live.
Before installation and maintenance work on the drive:
• Stop the motor.
• Ensure that there is no voltage on the drive power terminals according to step 1 or
2, or if possible, according to the both steps.
1. Disconnect the motor from the drive with a safety switch or by other means.
Measure that there is no voltage present on the drive input or output terminals
(U1, V1, W1, U2, V2, W2, BRK+, BRK-).
2. Ensure that the motor cannot rotate during work. Make sure that no other
system, like hydraulic crawling drives, is able to rotate the motor directly or
through any mechanical connection like felt, nip, rope, etc. Measure that there
is no voltage present on the drive input or output terminals (U1, V1, W1, U2,
V2, W2, BRK+, BRK-). Ground the drive output terminals temporarily by
connecting them together as well as to the PE.
 General safety

• The drive is not field repairable. Never attempt to repair a malfunctioning drive;
contact your local ABB representative or Authorized Service Center for
replacement.
• Make sure that dust from drilling does not enter the drive during the installation.
Electrically conductive dust inside the drive may cause damage or lead to
malfunction.
• Ensure sufficient cooling.
20 Safety
Safe start-up and operation

These warnings are intended for all who plan the operation, start up or operate the
drive.
 Electrical safety
Permanent magnet synchronous motor drives
These warnings concern permanent magnet synchronous motor drives. Ignoring the
instructions can cause physical injury or death, or damage to the equipment.
WARNING! It is not recommended to run the permanent magnet synchronous

motor over 1.2 times the rated speed. Motor overspeed may lead to
overvoltage which may permanently damage the drive.
 General safety

• Before adjusting the drive and putting it into service, make sure that the motor and
all driven equipment are suitable for operation throughout the speed range
provided by the drive. The drive can be adjusted to operate the motor at speeds
above and below the speed provided by connecting the motor directly to the
power line.
• Do not activate automatic fault reset functions if dangerous situations can occur.
When activated, these functions will reset the drive and resume operation after a
fault.
• Do not control the motor with an AC contactor or disconnecting device
(disconnecting means); use instead the control panel start and stop keys and
or external commands (I/O or fieldbus). The maximum allowed number of
charging cycles of the DC capacitors (ie, power-ups by applying power) is two per
minute and the maximum total number of chargings is 15 000.
Note:
• If an external source for start command is selected and it is ON, the drive will start
immediately after an input voltage break or fault reset unless the drive is
configured for 3-wire (a pulse) start/stop.
• When the control location is not set to local (LOC not shown on the display), the
stop key on the control panel will not stop the drive. To stop the drive using the
control panel, first press the LOC/REM key LOCREM and then the stop key .
Introduction to the manual 21
2
Introduction to the manual
The chapter describes applicability, target audience and purpose of this manual. It
describes the contents of this manual and refers to a list of related manuals for more
information. The chapter also contains a flowchart of steps for checking the delivery,
installing and commissioning the drive. The flowchart refers to chapters/sections in
this manual.
Applicability
The manual is applicable to the ACS355 drive firmware version 5.100 or later. See
parameter 3301 FIRMWARE on page 261.
Target audience
The reader is expected to know the fundamentals of electricity, wiring, electrical
components and electrical schematic symbols.
The manual is written for readers worldwide. Both SI and imperial units are shown.
Special US instructions for installations in the United States are given.
Purpose of the manual

This manual provides information needed for planning the installation, installing,
commissioning, using and servicing the drive.
22 Introduction to the manual
Contents of this manual

The manual consists of the following chapters:
• Safety (page 17) gives safety instructions you must follow when installing,
commissioning, operating and servicing the drive.
• Introduction to the manual (this chapter, page 21) describes applicability, target
audience, purpose and contents of this manual. It also contains a quick
installation and commissioning flowchart.
• Operation principle and hardware description (page 27) describes the operation
principle, layout, power connections and control interfaces, type designation label
and type designation information in short.
• Mechanical installation (page 33) tells how to check the installation site, unpack,
check the delivery and install the drive mechanically.
• Planning the electrical installation (page 39) tells how to check the compatibility of
the motor and the drive and select cables, protections and cable routing.
• Electrical installation (page 49) tells how to check the insulation of the assembly
and the compatibility with IT (ungrounded) and corner-grounded TN systems as
well as connect power cables and control cables.
• Installation checklist (page 59) contains a checklist for checking the mechanical
and electrical installation of the drive.
• Start-up, control with I/O and ID run (page 61) tells how to start up the drive as
well as how to start, stop, change the direction of the motor rotation and adjust the
motor speed through the I/O interface.
• Control panels (page 75) describes the control panel keys, LED indicators and
display fields and tells how to use the panel for control, monitoring and changing
the settings.
• Application macros (page 107) gives a brief description of each application macro
together with a wiring diagram showing the default control connections. It also
explains how to save a user macro and how to recall it.
• Program features (page 121) describes program features with lists of related user
settings, actual signals, and fault and alarm messages.
• Actual signals and parameters (page 179) describes actual signals and
parameters. It also lists the default values for the different macros.
• Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus (page 313) tells how the drive can be
controlled by external devices over a communication network using embedded
fieldbus.
• Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter (page 339) tells how the drive can be
controlled by external devices over a communication network using a fieldbus
adapter.
• Fault tracing (page 349) tells how to reset faults and view fault history. It lists all
alarm and fault messages including the possible cause and corrective actions.
• Maintenance and hardware diagnostics (page 369) contains preventive
maintenance instructions and LED indicator descriptions.

• Technical data (page 373) contains technical specifications of the drive, eg,
ratings, sizes and technical requirements as well as provisions for fulfilling the
requirements for CE and other marks.
• Dimension drawings (page 395) shows dimension drawings of the drive.
• Appendix: Resistor braking (page 405) tells how to select the brake resistor.
• Appendix: Extension modules (page 411) describes common features and
mechanical installation of the optional extension modules: MPOW-01 auxiliary
power extension module, MTAC-01 pulse encoder interface module and
MREL-01 output relay module. Specific features and electrical installation for the
MPOW-01 are also described; for information on the MTAC-01 and MREL-01,
refer to the corresponding user’s manual.
• Appendix: Safe torque off (STO) (page 417) describes STO features, installation
and technical data.
• Appendix: Permanent magnet synchronous motors (PMSMs) (page 431)
describes the parameter settings needed for permanent magnet synchronous
motors.
• Further information (inside of the back cover, page 435) tells how to make product
and service inquiries, get information on product training, provide feedback on
ABB Drives manuals and how to find documents on the Internet.
Related documents
See List of related manuals on page 2 (inside of the front cover).
Categorization by frame size

The ACS355 is manufactured in frame sizes R0…R4. Some instructions and other
information which only concern certain frame sizes are marked with the symbol of the
frame size (R0…R4). To identify the frame size of your drive, see the table in section
Ratings on page 374.
Quick installation and commissioning flowchart
Task See
Identify the frame size of your drive: R0…R4. Operation principle and hardware description:
Type designation key on page 31
Technical data: Ratings on page 374
Plan the installation: select the cables, etc. Planning the electrical installation on page 39
Check the ambient conditions, ratings and Technical data on page 373
required cooling air flow.
Unpack and check the drive. Mechanical installation: Unpacking on page

35
If the drive will be connected to an IT Operation principle and hardware description:

(ungrounded) or corner-grounded system, Type designation key on page 31
check that the internal EMC filter is not Electrical installation: Checking the
connected. compatibility with IT (ungrounded) and corner-
grounded TN systems on page 50
Install the drive on a wall or in a cabinet. Mechanical installation on page 33
Route the cables. Planning the electrical installation: Routing the

cables on page 45
Check the insulation of the input cable and the Electrical installation: Checking the insulation
motor and the motor cable. of the assembly on page 49
Connect the power cables. Electrical installation: Connecting the power

cables on page 51
Connect the control cables. Electrical installation: Connecting the control

cables on page 53
Check the installation. Installation checklist on page 59
Commission the drive. Start-up, control with I/O and ID run on page
61
Terms and abbreviations

Term/abbreviation Explanation
ACS-CP-A Assistant control panel, advanced operator keypad for communication
with the drive
ACS-CP-C Basic control panel, basic operator keypad for communication with the
drive
ACS-CP-D Assistant control panel for Asian languages, advanced operator keypad
for communication with the drive
Brake chopper Conducts the surplus energy from the intermediate circuit of the drive to
the brake resistor when necessary. The chopper operates when the DC
link voltage exceeds a certain maximum limit. The voltage rise is
typically caused by deceleration (braking) of a high inertia motor.
Brake resistor Dissipates the drive surplus braking energy conducted by the brake
chopper to heat. Essential part of the brake circuit. See Brake chopper.
Capacitor bank See DC link capacitors.
Control board Circuit board in which the control program runs.
CRC Cyclic redundancy check
DC link DC circuit between rectifier and inverter
DC link capacitors Energy storage which stabilizes the intermediate circuit DC voltage.
DCU Drive control unit
Drive Frequency converter for controlling AC motors
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EFB Embedded fieldbus
ESP Enhanced Sequence Program
FBA Fieldbus adapter
FCAN Optional CANopen adapter module
FDNA Optional DeviceNet adapter module
FECA Optional EtherCAT adapter module
FENA Optional Ethernet adapter module for EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP and
PROFINET IO protocols
FLON Optional LONWORKS® adapter module
FMBA Optional Modbus RTU adapter module
FPBA Optional PROFIBUS DP adapter module
Frame (size) Refers to drive physical size, for example R1 and R2. To determine the
frame size of a drive, refer to the rating table in chapter Technical data
on page 373.
FRSA RSA-485 adapter board
I/O Input/Output
ID run Identification run
IGBT Insulated gate bipolar transistor
Intermediate circuit See DC link.
Term/abbreviation Explanation
Inverter Converts direct current and voltage to alternating current and voltage.
IT system Type of supply system that has no (low-impedance) connection to
ground/earth.
LRFI Series of optional EMC filters
LSW Least significant word
Macro Pre-defined default values of parameters in drive control program. Each
macro is intended for a specific application. See Parameter.
MFDT-01 FlashDrop, a tool for configuring an unpowered drive
MMP Manual motor protector
MPOT Potentiometer module
MPOW Auxiliary power extension module
MREL Relay output module
MSW Most significant word
MTAC Pulse encoder interface module
MUL1-R1 Option kit for R1 frame sizes for compliance with NEMA 1
Parameter User-adjustable operation instruction to the drive, or signal measured or
calculated by the drive
PLC Programmable logic controller
PMSM Permanent magnet synchronous motor
PROFIBUS, Registered trademarks of PI - PROFIBUS & PROFINET International
PROFIBUS DP,
PROFINET IO
R1, R2, ... Frame (size)
RCD Residual current device
Rectifier Converts alternating current and voltage to direct current and voltage.
RFI Radio-frequency interference
RTU Remote terminal unit
SIL Safety integrity level. See Appendix: Safe torque off (STO) on page 417.
SREA-01 Ethernet adapter module
STO Safe torque off. See Appendix: Safe torque off (STO) on page 417.
TN system Type of supply system that provides a direct connection to ground/earth.
Operation principle and hardware description 27
3
Operation principle and
hardware description
The chapter briefly describes the operation principle, layout, type designation label
and type designation information. It also shows a general diagram of power
connections and control interfaces.
Operation principle
The ACS355 is a wall or cabinet mountable drive for controlling asynchronous AC
induction motors and permanent magnet synchronous motors.
The figure below shows the simplified main circuit diagram of the drive. The rectifier
converts three-phase AC voltage to DC voltage. The capacitor bank of the
intermediate circuit stabilizes the DC voltage. The inverter converts the DC voltage
back to AC voltage for the AC motor. The brake chopper connects the external brake
resistor to the intermediate DC circuit when the voltage in the circuit exceeds its
maximum limit.
Rectifier Capacitor Inverter

U1 bank U2
AC supply V1 V2 M AC motor
W2
3~
W1
Brake chopper
BRK- BRK+ / Common DC terminals

28 Operation principle and hardware description
Product overview
 Layout
The layout of the drive is presented below. The construction of the different frame
sizes R0…R4 varies to some extent.
Covers on (R0 and R1) Covers off (R0 and R1)

1
2 3a 3b
5 7
6
8
9
8
10
12
4 3c 11
13
14
17 15
2 17 16
1 Cooling outlet through top cover 10 EMC filter grounding screw (EMC).
2 Mounting holes Note: The screw is on the front in frame
3 Panel cover (a) / basic control panel (b) / size R4.
assistant control panel (c) 11 Varistor grounding screw (VAR)
4 Terminal cover (or optional potentiometer 12 Fieldbus adapter (serial communication)
unit MPOT-01) connection
5 Panel connection 13 I/O connections
6 Option connection 14 Input power connection (U1, V1, W1),
7 STO (Safe torque off) connection brake resistor connection (BRK+, BRK-)
8 FlashDrop connection and motor connection (U2, V2, W2).
9 Power OK and Fault LEDs. See section 15 I/O clamping plate
LEDs on page 372. 16 Clamping plate
17 Clamps
 Overview of power and control connections

The diagram gives an overview of connections. I/O connections are parameterable.
See chapter Application macros on page 107 for I/O connections for the different
macros and chapter Electrical installation on page 49 for installation in general.
8
Control panel
(RJ-45)
Modbus RTU
Screen 1 SCR (RS-232)
2 AI1 S1 AO 7
Analog input 1 Analog output
AI1
AI2
0…10 V 3 GND mA GND 8 0…20 mA
ON
Reference voltage 4 +10V V 1 2

+10 V DC, max. 10 mA PROGRAMMABLE RELAY
Analog input 2 5 AI2 AND DIGITAL OUTPUTS
ROCOM
6 GND 17
9 +24 V RONC 18 Relay output
Aux. voltage output 250 V AC / 30 V DC / 6 A
+24 V DC, max. 200 mA 10 GND RONO
19
11 DCOM DOSRC
20
DOOUT Digital/frequency output,
12 DI1 21 PNP transistor type
DOGND 30 V DC, max. 100 mA
PROGRAMMABLE 13 DI2 22
DIGITAL INPUTS
14 DI3 X1C:STO
15 DI4 OUT1 1
DI5 can also be used 16 DI5 OUT2 2
as a frequency input
3
IN1
6 4
FlashDrop IN2
Extension modules
6 MPOW-01
MREL-01
10 MTAC-01
Fieldbus adapter
EMC EMC filter grounding screw
VAR Varistor grounding screw

PE PE
Common DC
L1 U1 or U2
brake M
L2 V1 V2
chopper 3~
L3 W1 BRK+ BRK- W2
3-phase Input EMC Output AC motor
power choke filter choke
supply,
200…480
V AC t° Brake resistor
Type designation label

The type designation label is attached to the left side of the drive. An example label
and explanation of the label contents are shown below.
ACS355-03E-08A8-4 1
IP20 / UL Open type 2 lllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllll
UL Type 1 with MUL1 option S/N MYYWWRXXXX 4
PN 4 kW (5 HP) llllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllll
U1 3~400 V / 480 V 3AUA00000XXXX 5
I1 3 14A/11A
RoHS
I1 with ext. choke 7.7 A / 6.4A 6
f1 48…63 Hz
U2 3~0…U1 V N713
I2 8.8 A (150% 1/10 min)
f2 0… Hz
1 Type designation, see section Type designation key on page 31

2 Degree of protection by enclosure (IP and UL/NEMA)
3 Nominal ratings, see section Ratings on page 374.
4 Serial number of format MYYWWRXXXX, where
M: Manufacturer
YY: 10, 11, 12, … for 2010, 2011, 2012, …
WW: 01, 02, 03, … for week 1, week 2, week 3, …
R: A, B, C, … for product revision number
XXXX: Integer starting every week from 0001
5 ABB MRP code of the drive
6 CE marking and C-Tick, C-UL US, RoHS and TÜV NORD marks (the label of your drive
shows the valid markings)
Type designation key

The type designation contains information on the specifications and configuration of
the drive. You find the type designation on the type designation label attached to the
drive. The first digits from the left express the basic configuration, for example
ACS355-03E-07A3-4. The optional selections are given after that, separated by +
signs, for example +J404. The explanations of the type designation selections are
described below.
ACS355-03E-07A3-4+J404+...
ACS355 product series
1-phase/3-phase
01 = 1-phase input
03 = 3-phase input
Configuration
E = EMC filter connected, 50 Hz frequency
U = EMC filter disconnected, 60 Hz frequency
See section Differences between the default values in E and U type drives.
Output current rating
In format xxAy, where xx indicates the integer part and y the fractional part,
eg, 07A3 means 7.3 A.
For more information, see section Ratings on page 374.
Input voltage range

2 = 200…240 V AC
4 = 380…480 V AC
Options
B063 = IP66/IP67/UL Type 4x enclosure K473 = FENA-11EtherNet/IP / Modbus

(product variant) TCP/PROFINET IO
J400 = ACS-CP-A assistant control panel 1) K475 = FENA-21EtherNet/IP / Modbus
J404 = ACS-CP-C basic control panel 1) TCP/PROFINET IO
J402 = MPOT-01 potentiometer H376 = Cable gland kit (IP66/IP67/UL Type 4x)
K451 = FDNA-01 DeviceNet F278 = Input switch kit
K452 = FLON-01 LONWORKS® C169 = Pressure compensation valve
K454 = FPBA-01 PROFIBUS DP
K457 = FCAN-01 CANopen Extension modules
K458 = FMBA-01 Modbus RTU G406 = MPOW-01 auxiliary power extension
K466 = FENA-01EtherNet/IP / Modbus module
TCP/PROFINET IO L502 = MTAC-01 pulse encoder interface
K469 = FECA-01 EtherCAT module
K470 = FEPL-02 Ethernet POWERLINK L511 = MREL-01 output relay module
1) The ACS355 is compatible with panels that have the following panel revisions and panel firmware
versions. To find out the revision and firmware version of your panel, see page 76.
Panel type Type code Panel revision Panel firmware version
Basic control panel ACS-CP-C M or later 1.13 or later
Assistant control panel ACS-CP-A F or later 2.04 or later
Assistant control panel (Asia) ACS-CP-D Q or later 2.04 or later
Note that unlike the other panels, the ACS-CP-D is ordered with a separate material code.
Mechanical installation 33
4
Mechanical installation
The chapter tells how to check the installation site, unpack, check the delivery and
install the drive mechanically.
Checking the installation site

The drive may be installed on the wall or in a cabinet. Check the enclosure
requirements for the need to use the NEMA 1 option in wall installations (see chapter
Technical data on page 373).
The drive can be installed in three different ways, depending on the frame size:
a) back mounting (all frame sizes)
b) side mounting (frame sizes R0…R2)
c) DIN rail mounting (all frame sizes).
The drive must be installed in an upright position.
Check the installation site according to the requirements below. Refer to chapter
Dimension drawings on page 395 for frame details.
 Requirements for the installation site

Operation conditions
See chapter Technical data on page 373 for the allowed operation conditions of the
drive.
Wall
The wall should be as close to vertical and even as possible, of non-flammable
material and strong enough to carry the weight of the drive.
34 Mechanical installation
Floor
The floor/material below the installation should be non-flammable.
Free space around the drive

The required free space for cooling above and below the drive is 75 mm (3 in). No
free space is required on the sides of the drive, so drives can be mounted
immediately next to each other.
Required tools
To install the drive, you need the following tools:
• screwdrivers (as appropriate for the mounting hardware used)
• wire stripper
• tape measure
• drill (if the drive will be installed with screws/bolts)
• mounting hardware: screws or bolts (if the drive will be installed with
screws/bolts). For the number of screws/bolts, see With screws on page 36.
Unpacking
The drive (1) is delivered in a package that also contains the following items (frame
size R1 shown in the figure):
• plastic bag (2) including clamping plate (also used for I/O cables in frame sizes
R3 and R4), I/O clamping plate (for frame sizes R0…R2), fieldbus option ground
plate, clamps and screws
• panel cover (3)
• mounting template, integrated into the package (4)
• user’s manual (5)
• possible options (fieldbus, potentiometer, extension module, all with instructions,
basic control panel or assistant control panel).
5
2
3
Checking the delivery

Check that there are no signs of damage. Notify the shipper immediately if damaged
components are found.
Before attempting installation and operation, check the information on the type
designation label of the drive to verify that the drive is of the correct type. See section
Type designation label on page 30.
Installing
The instructions in this manual cover drives with the IP20 degree of protection. To
comply with NEMA 1, use the MUL1-R1, MUL1-R3 or MUL1-R4 option kit, which is
delivered with multilingual installation instructions (3AFE68642868, 3AFE68643147
or 3AUA0000025916, respectively).
To obtain a higher degree of protection, the drive must be installed inside a cabinet. If
there are sand, dust or other impurities in the operating environment, a typical
minimum requirement for the installation cabinet is IP54 degree of protection.
 Install the drive

Install the drive with screws or on a DIN rail as appropriate.
Note: Make sure that dust from drilling does not enter the drive during the installation.
With screws
1. Mark the hole locations using for example the mounting template cut out from the
package. The locations of the holes are also shown in the drawings in chapter
Dimension drawings on page 395. The number and location of the holes used
depend on how the drive is installed:
a) back mounting (frame sizes R0…R4): four holes
b) side mounting (frame sizes R0…R2): three holes; one of the bottom holes is
located in the clamping plate.
2. Fix the screws or bolts to the marked locations.
3. Position the drive onto the screws on the wall.
4. Tighten the screws in the wall securely.
On DIN rail
1. Click the drive to the rail.
To detach the drive, press the release lever on top of the drive (1b).
1 1b
 Fasten clamping plates

Note: Make sure that you do not throw the clamping plates away as they are required
for proper grounding of the power and control cables as well as the fieldbus option.
1. Fasten the clamping plate (A) to the plate at the bottom of the drive with the
provided screws.
2. For frame sizes R0…R2, fasten the I/O clamping plate (B) to the clamping plate
with the provided screws.
5
8
6 4
C
B
7
1 4 7
2
2
1
A 3
 Attach the optional fieldbus module

1. Connect the power and control cables as instructed in chapter Electrical
installation on page 49.
2. Place the fieldbus module on the option ground plate (C) and tighten the
grounding screw on the left corner of the fieldbus module. This fastens the
module to the option ground plate (C).
3. If the terminal cover is not already removed, push the recess in the cover and
simultaneously slide the cover off the frame.
4. Snap the fieldbus module attached to the option ground plate (C) in position so
that the module is plugged to the connection on the drive front and the screw
holes in the option ground plate (C) and the I/O clamping plate (B) are aligned.
5. Fasten the option ground plate (C) to the I/O clamping plate (B) with the provided
screws.
6. Slide the terminal cover back in place.
Planning the electrical installation 39
5
Planning the electrical
installation
The chapter contains the instructions that you must follow when checking the
compatibility of the motor and drive, and selecting cables, protections, cable routing
and way of operation for the drive.
Note: The installation must always be designed and made according to applicable
local laws and regulations. ABB does not assume any liability whatsoever for any
installation which breaches the local laws and/or other regulations. Furthermore, if the
recommendations given by ABB are not followed, the drive may experience problems
that the warranty does not cover.
Implementing the AC power line connection

See the requirements in section Electric power network specification on page 385.
Use a fixed connection to the AC power line.
WARNING! As the leakage current of the device typically exceeds 3.5 mA, a
fixed installation is required according to IEC 61800-5-1.
 Using an input choke

An input choke is required in case of unstable supply networks. An input choke can
also be used for decreasing the input current.
40 Planning the electrical installation
Selecting the supply disconnecting device (disconnecting

means)
Install a hand-operated supply disconnecting device (disconnecting means) between
the AC power source and the drive. The disconnecting device must be of a type that
can be locked to the open position for installation and maintenance work.
 European union
To meet the European Union Directives, according to standard EN 60204-1, Safety of
Machinery, the disconnecting device must be one of the following types:
• a switch-disconnector of utilization category AC-23B (EN 60947-3)
• a disconnector having an auxiliary contact that in all cases causes switching
devices to break the load circuit before the opening of the main contacts of the
disconnector (EN 60947-3)
• a circuit breaker suitable for isolation in accordance with EN 60947-2.
 Other regions
The disconnecting device must conform to the applicable safety regulations.
Checking the compatibility of the motor and drive

Check that the 3-phase AC induction motor and the drive are compatible according to
the rating table in section Ratings on page 374. The table lists the typical motor power
for each drive type.
Only one permanent magnet synchronous motor can be connected to the inverter
output.
Checking the compatibility of the drive when multiple

motors are connected to the drive
The drive is selected based on the sum of the connected motor powers. Typically,
overdimensioning of the drive and the use of external output chokes is
recommended.
When one drive controls several motors, only scalar control is possible. Motor
parameters (PN, I2N) are given as the sum of the nominal values of the motors.
Nominal speed is given as an average of the motors. It is recommended to limit the
maximum current according to the actual need and it should not exceed 1.1 · I2N
(parameter 2003 MAX CURRENT).
When multiple motors are connected, the sum of the output cable lengths must not
exceed the maximum allowed cable length (see Maximum recommended motor
cable length on page 386). If motor contactors are used, switching the contactors
during run is not recommended.
When more than 4 motors need to be controlled by one drive, contact your local ABB
representative.
Selecting the power cables

 General rules
Dimension the input power and motor cables according to local regulations.
• The input power and the motor cables must be able to carry the corresponding
load currents. See section Ratings on page 374 for the rated currents.
• The cable must be rated for at least 70 °C (158 °F) maximum permissible
temperature of the conductor in continuous use. For US, see section Additional
US requirements on page 43.
• The conductivity of the PE conductor must be equal to that of the phase
conductor (same cross-sectional area).
• 600 V AC cable is accepted for up to 500 V AC.
• Refer to chapter Technical data on page 373 for the EMC requirements.
A symmetrical shielded motor cable (see the figure below) must be used to meet the
EMC requirements of the CE and C-Tick marks.
A four-conductor system is allowed for input cabling, but a shielded symmetrical
cable is recommended.
Compared to a four-conductor system, the use of a symmetrical shielded cable
reduces electromagnetic emission of the whole drive system as well as motor bearing
currents and wear.
 Alternative power cable types

Power cable types that can be used with the drive are presented below.
Motor cables Note: A separate PE conductor is required

(recommended for input cables also) if the conductivity of the cable shield is not
sufficient for the purpose.
Symmetrical shielded cable: three phase
conductors, a concentric or otherwise
symmetrically constructed PE conductor
and a shield
PE Shield Shield
conductor
and shield
PE
PE
Allowed as input cables

Shield
A four-conductor system: three phase
conductors and a protective conductor
PE PE
 Motor cable shield

To function as a protective conductor, the shield must have the same cross-sectional
area as the phase conductors when they are made of the same metal.
To effectively suppress radiated and conducted radio-frequency emissions, the shield
conductivity must be at least 1/10 of the phase conductor conductivity. The
requirements are easily met with a copper or aluminum shield. The minimum
requirement of the motor cable shield of the drive is shown below. It consists of a
concentric layer of copper wires. The better and tighter the shield, the lower the
emission level and bearing currents.
Insulation jacket Copper wire screen Cable core

 Additional US requirements
Type MC continuous corrugated aluminum armor cable with symmetrical grounds or
shielded power cable is recommended for the motor cables if metallic conduit is not
used.
The power cables must be rated for 75 °C (167 °F).
Conduit
Where conduits must be coupled together, bridge the joint with a ground conductor
bonded to the conduit on each side of the joint. Bond the conduits also to the drive
enclosure. Use separate conduits for input power, motor, brake resistors and control
wiring. Do not run motor wiring from more than one drive in the same conduit.
Armored cable / shielded power cable

Six-conductor (three phases and three ground) type MC continuous corrugated
aluminum armor cable with symmetrical grounds is available from the following
suppliers (trade names in parentheses):
• Anixter Wire & Cable (Philsheath)
• BICC General Corp (Philsheath)
• Rockbestos Co. (Gardex)
• Oaknite (CLX).
Shielded power cable is available from the following suppliers:
• Belden
• LAPPKABEL (ÖLFLEX)
• Pirelli.
Selecting the control cables

 General rules
All analog control cables and the cable used for the frequency input must be shielded.
Use a double-shielded twisted pair cable (Figure a, for example JAMAK by Draka NK
Cables) for analog signals. Employ one individually shielded pair for each signal. Do
not use common return for different analog signals.
A double-shielded cable is the best alternative for low-voltage digital signals, but a
single-shielded or unshielded twisted multipair cable (Figure b) is also usable.
However, for frequency input, always use a shielded cable.
a b
Double-shielded twisted Single-shielded twisted

multipair cable multipair cable
Run analog and digital signals in separate cables.

Relay-controlled signals, providing their voltage does not exceed 48 V, can be run in
the same cables as digital input signals. It is recommended that the relay-controlled
signals are run as twisted pairs.
Never mix 24 V DC and 115/230 V AC signals in the same cable.
 Relay cable
The cable type with braided metallic screen (for example ÖLFLEX by LAPPKABEL)
has been tested and approved by ABB.
 Control panel cable

In remote use, the cable connecting the control panel to the drive must not exceed
3 m (10 ft). The cable type tested and approved by ABB is used in control panel
option kits.
Routing the cables

Route the motor cable away from other cable routes. Motor cables of several drives
can be run in parallel installed next to each other. It is recommended that the motor
cable, input power cable and control cables are installed on separate trays. Avoid
long parallel runs of motor cables with other cables to decrease electromagnetic
interference caused by the rapid changes in the drive output voltage.
Where control cables must cross power cables make sure that they are arranged at
an angle as near to 90 degrees as possible.
The cable trays must have good electrical bonding to each other and to the grounding
electrodes. Aluminum tray systems can be used to improve local equalizing of
potential.
A diagram of the cable routing is shown below.
Motor cable
Drive min. 300 mm (12 in)

Power cable
Input power cable Motor cable

min. 200 mm (8 in) 90° min. 500 mm (20 in)
Control cables
 Control cable ducts
24 V 230 V 24 V 230 V
Not allowed unless the 24 V cable is Lead 24 V and 230 V control cables in
insulated for 230 V or insulated with an separate ducts inside the cabinet.
insulation sleeving for 230 V.
Protecting the drive, input power cable, motor and motor

cable in short-circuit situations and against thermal
overload
 Protecting the drive and input power cable in short-circuit situations
Arrange the protection according to the following guidelines.
Circuit diagram Short-circuit protection
Distribution Input cable Drive Protect the drive and input
board cable with fuses. See
footnote 1).
1)
M
3~
1)
Size the fuses or manual motor protectors (MMP) according to instructions given in chapter
Technical data on page 373. The fuses or MMPs will protect the input cable in short-circuit
situations, restrict drive damage and prevent damage to adjoining equipment in case of a
short-circuit inside the drive.
 Protecting the motor and motor cable in short-circuit situations

The drive protects the motor and motor cable in a short-circuit situation when the
motor cable is dimensioned according to the nominal current of the drive. No
additional protection devices are needed.
 Protecting the drive, motor cable and input power cable against
thermal overload
The drive protects itself and the input and motor cables against thermal overload
when the cables are dimensioned according to the nominal current of the drive. No
additional thermal protection devices are needed.
WARNING! If the drive is connected to multiple motors, a separate thermal

overload switch must be used for protecting each cable and motor. These
devices may require a separate fuse to cut off the short-circuit current.
 Protecting the motor against thermal overload

According to regulations, the motor must be protected against thermal overload and
the current must be switched off when overload is detected. The drive includes a
motor thermal protection function that protects the motor and switches off the current
when necessary. It is also possible to connect a motor temperature measurement to
the drive. The user can tune both the thermal model and the temperature
measurement function further by parameters.
The most common temperature sensors are:
• motor sizes IEC 180…225: thermal switch (for example Klixon)
• motor sizes IEC 200…250 and larger: PTC or Pt100.
For more information on the thermal model, see section Motor thermal protection on
page 148. For more information on the temperature measurement function, see
section Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O on page 157.
Implementing the Safe torque off (STO) function

See Appendix: Safe torque off (STO) on page 417.
Using residual current devices (RCD) with the drive

ACS355-01x drives are suitable to be used with residual current devices of Type A,
ACS355-03x drives with residual current devices of Type B. For ACS355-03x drives,
other measures for protection in case of direct or indirect contact, such as separation
from the environment by double or reinforced insulation or isolation from the supply
system by a transformer, can also be applied.
Using a safety switch between the drive and the motor

It is recommended to install a safety switch between the permanent magnet
synchronous motor and the drive output. This is needed to isolate the motor from the
drive during maintenance work on the drive.
Implementing a bypass connection
WARNING! Never connect the supply power to the drive output terminals U2,
V2 and W2. Power line voltage applied to the output can result in permanent
damage to the drive.
If frequent bypassing is required, employ mechanically connected switches or

contactors to ensure that the motor terminals are not connected to the AC power line
and drive output terminals simultaneously.
Protecting the contacts of relay outputs

Inductive loads (relays, contactors, motors) cause voltage transients when switched
off.
Equip inductive loads with noise attenuating circuits (varistors, RC filters [AC] or
diodes [DC]) in order to minimize the EMC emission at switch-off. If not suppressed,
the disturbances may connect capacitively or inductively to other conductors in the
control cable and form a risk of malfunction in other parts of the system.
Install the protective component as close to the inductive load as possible. Do not
install protective components at the I/O terminal block.
Varistor
Drive
230 V AC relay
output
RC filter
Drive
230 V AC relay
output
Diode
Drive
24 V DC relay
output
Electrical installation 49
6
Electrical installation
The chapter tells how to check the insulation of the assembly and the compatibility
with IT (ungrounded) and corner-grounded TN systems as well as connect power
cables and control cables.
WARNING! The work described in this chapter may only be carried out by a
qualified electrician. Follow the instructions in chapter Safety on page 17.
Ignoring the safety instructions can cause injury or death.
Make sure that the drive is disconnected from the input power during
installation. If the drive is already connected to the input power, wait for
5 minutes after disconnecting the input power.
Checking the insulation of the assembly

 Drive
Do not make any voltage tolerance or insulation resistance tests (for example hi-pot
or megger) on any part of the drive as testing can damage the drive. Every drive has
been tested for insulation between the main circuit and the chassis at the factory.
Also, there are voltage-limiting circuits inside the drive which cut down the testing
voltage automatically.
 Input power cable

Check the insulation of the input power cable according to local regulations before
connecting to the drive.
50 Electrical installation
 Motor and motor cable

Check the insulation of the motor and motor cable as follows:
1. Check that the motor cable is connected to the motor and disconnected from the
drive output terminals U2, V2 and W2.
2. Measure the insulation resistance between each phase
conductor and the Protective Earth conductor using a U1 M
V1
measuring voltage of 500 V DC. The insulation resistance W1
3~
ohm
of an ABB motor must exceed 100 Mohm (reference value PE
at 25 °C or 77 °F). For the insulation resistance of other

motors, please consult the manufacturer’s instructions.
Note: Moisture inside the motor casing will reduce the insulation resistance. If
moisture is suspected, dry the motor and repeat the measurement.
Checking the compatibility with IT (ungrounded) and

corner-grounded TN systems
WARNING! Disconnect the internal EMC filter when installing the drive on an
IT system (an ungrounded power system or a high-resistance-grounded [over
30 ohms] power system), otherwise the system will be connected to ground potential
through the EMC filter capacitors. This may cause danger or damage the drive.
Disconnect the internal EMC filter when installing the drive on a corner-grounded TN
system, otherwise the drive will be damaged
Note: When the internal EMC filter is disconnected, the drive is not EMC compatible
without an external filter.
1. If you have an IT (ungrounded) or corner-grounded TN system, disconnect the

internal EMC filter by removing the EMC screw. For 3-phase U-type drives (with
type designation ACS355-03U-), the EMC screw is already removed at the factory
and replaced by a plastic one.
EMC screw in R0…R2.

In R3, the screw is a little further up.
1 EMC screw in R4, IP20

EMC (behind cover in R4, NEMA 1)
VAR 1
EMC
Connecting the power cables

 Connection diagram
Drive
INPUT OUTPUT
PE U1/L V1/N W1 BRK+ BRK- U2 V2 W2
1)
2)
For alternatives,
see section PE
Selecting the V1
supply U1 W1
disconnecting
device Optional brake
resistor or 3~
(disconnecting Motor
means) on page 4) Common DC 3)
40. L1/L L2/N L3
1)
Ground the other end of the PE conductor at the distribution board.
2) Use a separate grounding cable if the conductivity of the cable shield is insufficient (smaller
than the conductivity of the phase conductor) and there is no symmetrically constructed
grounding conductor in the cable. See section Selecting the power cables on page 41.
3) For more information on Common DC, see ACS355 Common DC application guide
(3AUA0000070130 [EN]).
4)
In one-phase installations, connect the neutral cable here.
Note:
Do not use an asymmetrically constructed motor cable.
If there is a symmetrically constructed grounding conductor in the motor cable in addition to
the conductive shield, connect the grounding conductor to the grounding terminal at the drive
and motor ends.
Route the motor cable, input power cable and control cables separately. For more
information, see section Routing the cables on page 45.
Grounding of the motor cable shield at the motor end

For minimum radio frequency interference:
• ground the cable by twisting the shield as follows:
flattened width > 1/5 · length b > 1/5 · a
• or ground the cable shield 360 degrees at the lead-
through of the motor terminal box. a b
 Connection procedure
1. Strip the input power cable. Ground the bare shield of the cable (if any) 360
degrees under the grounding clamp. Fasten the grounding conductor (PE) of the
input power cable under the grounding clamp. Connect the phase conductors to
the U1, V1 and W1 terminals. Use a tightening torque of 0.8 N·m (7 lbf·in) for
frame sizes R0…R2, 1.7 N·m (15 lbf·in) for R3 and 2.5 N·m (22 lbf·in) for R4.
3. Strip the input power cable. Ground the bare shield of the cable (if any) 360
degrees under the grounding clamp. Twist the shield to form as short a pigtail as
possible. Fasten the twisted shield under the grounding clamp. Connect the
phase conductors to the U2, V2 and W2 terminals. Use a tightening torque of
0.8 N·m (7 lbf·in) for frame sizes R0…R2, 1.7 N·m (15 lbf·in) for R3 and 2.5 N·m
(22 lbf·in) for R4.
2. Connect the optional brake resistor to the BRK+ and BRK- terminals with a
shielded cable using the same procedure as for the motor cable in the previous
step.
3. Secure the cables outside the drive mechanically.
1 3 2
1 2
Connecting the control cables

 I/O terminals
The figure below shows the I/O terminals. Tightening torque is 0.4 N·m / 3.5 lbf·in.
X1C:STO
X1A: X1B:
1 2 3 4 1: SCR 17: ROCOM
2: AI1 18: RONC
3: GND 19: RONO
4: +10 V 20: DOSRC
5: AI2 21: DOOUT
6: GND 22: DOGND
7: AO
8: GND X1C:STO
9: +24 V 1: OUT1
10: GND 2: OUT2
11: DCOM 3: IN1
12: DI1 4: IN2
13: DI2
14: DI3
15: DI4
16: DI5 digital or frequency input
S1: Selects voltage or current as

the signal types for analog
inputs AI1 and AI2.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 17 18 19
S1
mA
V
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20 21 22
AI1
AI2
X1A X1B
Voltage and current selection for analog inputs

Switch S1 selects voltage (0 [2]…10 V / -10…10 V) or current (0 [4]…20 mA /
-20…20 mA) as the signal types for analog inputs AI1 and AI2. The factory settings
are unipolar voltage for AI1 (0 [2]…10 V) and unipolar current for AI2 (0 [4]…20 mA),
which correspond to the default usage in the application macros. The switch is
located to the left of I/O terminal 9 (see the I/O terminal figure above).
ON
Top position (ON): I (0 [4]…20 mA, default for AI2; or -20…20 mA)
S1
1 2 Bottom position (OFF): U (0 [2]…10 V, default for AI1; or -10…10 V)
AI1
AI2
Voltage and current connection for analog inputs

Bipolar voltage (-10…10 V) and current (-20…20 mA) are also possible. If a bipolar
connection is used instead of a unipolar one, see section Programmable analog
inputs on page 132 for how to set parameters accordingly.
Unipolar voltage Bipolar voltage Unipolar/Bipolar current

1…10 kohm SCR SCR SCR
AI AI AI
GND GND GND
+10V Use external power supply.
+10 V GND -10 V
PNP and NPN configuration for digital inputs

You can wire the digital input terminals in either a PNP or NPN configuration.
PNP connection (source) NPN connection (sink)

X1 X1
9 +24V 9 +24V
10 GND 10 GND
11 DCOM 11 DCOM
12 DI1 12 DI1
13 DI2 13 DI2
14 DI3 14 DI3
15 DI4 15 DI4
16 DI5 16 DI5
External power supply for digital inputs

For using an external +24 V supply for the digital inputs, see the figure below.
PNP connection (source) NPN connection (sink)

X1 X1
9 +24V 9 +24V
0 V DC 10 GND +24 V DC 10 GND
11 DCOM 11 DCOM
+24 V DC 0 V DC
12 DI1 12 DI1
13 DI2 13 DI2
14 DI3 14 DI3
15 DI4 15 DI4
16 DI5 16 DI5
Frequency input
If DI5 is used as a frequency input, see section Frequency input on page 135 for how
to set parameters accordingly.
Connection examples of two-wire and three-wire sensors

Hand/Auto, PID control, and Torque control macros (see section Application macros,
pages 114, 115 and 116, respectively) use analog input 2 (AI2). The macro wiring
diagrams on these pages use an externally powered sensor (connections not shown).
The figures below give examples of connections using a two-wire or three-wire
sensor/transmitter supplied by the drive auxiliary voltage output.
Note: Maximum capability of the auxiliary 24 V (200 mA) output must not be
exceeded.
Two-wire sensor/transmitter
X1A
P
- 4…20 mA
5 AI2 Process actual value measurement or reference,
I + 6 GND 0(4)…20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm
…
9 +24V Auxiliary voltage output, non-isolated,
10 GND +24 V DC, max. 200 mA
Note: The sensor is supplied through its current output and the drive feeds the supply
voltage (+24 V). Thus the output signal must be 4…20 mA, not 0…20 mA.
Three-wire sensor/transmitter
X1A
OUT (0)4…20 mA
P 5 AI2 Process actual value measurement or reference,
- 6 GND 0(4)…20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm
I
+ …
9 +24V Auxiliary voltage output, non-isolated,
10 GND +24 V DC, max. 200 mA
 Default I/O connection diagram

The default connection of the control signals depends on the application macro in
use, which is selected with parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO.
The default macro is the ABB standard macro. It provides a general purpose I/O
configuration with three constant speeds. Parameter values are the default values
given in section Default values with different macros on page 180. For information on
other macros, see chapter Application macros on page 107.
The default I/O connections for the ABB standard macro are given in the figure below.
X1A
1 SCR Signal cable shield (screen)
2 AI1 Output frequency reference: 0…10 V 1)
1…10 kohm
3 GND Analog input circuit common
4 +10V Reference voltage: +10 V DC, max. 10 mA
5 AI2 Not in use by default. 0…10 V
max. 500 ohm 6 GND Analog input circuit common
7 AO Output frequency value: 0…20 mA
4)
8 GND Analog output circuit common
9 +24V Auxiliary voltage output: +24 V DC, max. 200 mA
10 GND Auxiliary voltage output common
11 DCOM Digital input common
12 DI1 Stop (0) / Start (1)
13 DI2 Forward (0) / Reverse (1)
14 DI3 Constant speed selection 2)
16 DI5 Acceleration and deceleration selection 3)
X1B
17 ROCOM Relay output 1
18 RONC No fault [Fault (-1)]
19 RONO
20 DOSRC Digital output, max. 100 mA
21 DOOUT No fault [Fault (-1)]
22 DOGND
X1C:STO
1 OUT1 STO (Safe torque off) connection
2 OUT2
3 IN1
4 IN2
1) AI1 is used as a speed reference if vector mode is 3) 0 = ramp times according to parameters 2202 and
selected. 2203.
2) See parameter group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS: 1 = ramp times according to parameters 2205 and
2206.
DI3 DI4 Operation (parameter) 4)
360 degree grounding under a clamp.
0 0 Set speed through AI1
1 0 Speed 1 (1202) Tightening torque: 0.4 N·m / 3.5 lbf·in.
0 1 Speed 2 (1203)
1 1 Speed 3 (1204)
 Connection procedure
1. Remove the terminal cover by simultaneously pushing the recess and sliding the
cover off the frame.
2. Analog signals: Strip the outer insulation of the analog signal cable 360 degrees
and ground the bare shield under the clamp.
3. Connect the conductors to the appropriate terminals. Use a tightening torque of
0.4 N·m (3.5 lbf·in).
4. Twist the grounding conductors of each pair in the analog signal cable together
and connect the bundle to the SCR terminal (terminal 1).
5. Digital signals: Strip the outer insulation of the digital signal cable 360 degrees
and ground the bare shield under the clamp.
6. Connect the conductors of the cable to the appropriate terminals. Use a tightening
torque of 0.4 N·m (3.5 lbf·in).
7. For double-shielded cables, twist also the grounding conductors of each pair in
the cable together and connect the bundle to the SCR terminal (terminal 1).
8. Secure all cables outside the drive mechanically.
9. Unless you need to install the optional fieldbus module (see section Attach the
optional fieldbus module on page 38), slide the terminal cover back in place.
10. Connect STO conductors to the appropriate terminals. Use a tightening torque of
0.4 N·m (3.5 lbf·in).
2
10
3
4
1
6
2
Installation checklist 59
7
Installation checklist
This chapter contains a list for checking the mechanical and electrical installation of
the drive.
Checking the installation

Check the mechanical and electrical installation of the drive before start-up. Go
through the checklist below together with another person. Read chapter Safety on
page 17 of this manual before you work on the drive.
Check
MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
The ambient operating conditions are within allowed limits. (See Mechanical installation:
Checking the installation site on page 33 as well as Technical data: Losses, cooling data
and noise on page 382 and Ambient conditions on page 389.)
The drive is fixed properly on an even vertical non-flammable wall. (See Mechanical
installation on page 33.)
The cooling air will flow freely. (See Mechanical installation: Free space around the drive
on page 34.)
The motor and the driven equipment are ready for start. (See Planning the electrical
installation: Checking the compatibility of the motor and drive on page 40 as well as
Technical data: Motor connection data on page 385.)
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION (See Planning the electrical installation on page 39 and
Electrical installation on page 49.)
For ungrounded and corner-grounded systems: The internal EMC filter is disconnected
(EMC screw removed).
The capacitors are reformed if the drive has been stored over a year.
60 Installation checklist
Check
The drive is grounded properly.
The input power voltage matches the drive nominal input voltage.
The input power connections at U1/L, V1/N and W1 are OK and tightened with the correct
torque.
Appropriate input power fuses and disconnector are installed.
The motor connections at U2, V2 and W2 are OK and tightened with the correct torque.
The motor cable, input power cable and control cables are routed separately.
The external control (I/O) connections are OK.
Safe torque off (STO) connections, operation and reaction are OK.
The input power voltage cannot be applied to the output of the drive (with a bypass
connection).
Terminal cover and, for NEMA 1, hood and connection box, are in place.
Start-up, control with I/O and ID run 61
8
Start-up, control with I/O and
ID run
The chapter tells how to:
• perform the start-up
• start, stop, change the direction of the motor rotation and adjust the speed of the
motor through the I/O interface
• perform an Identification run for the drive.
Using the control panel to do these tasks is explained briefly in this chapter. For
details on how to use the control panel, refer to chapter Control panels on page 75.
62 Start-up, control with I/O and ID run
Starting up the drive
WARNING! The start-up may only be carried out by a qualified

electrician.
The safety instructions given in chapter Safety on page 17 must be followed during
the start-up procedure.
The drive will start up automatically at power-up if the external run command is on
and the drive is in the remote control mode.
Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger. De-couple the
driven machine if:
• there is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation, or
• an ID run needs to be performed during the drive start-up. ID run is essential only
in applications that require the ultimate in motor control accuracy.
• Check the installation. See the checklist in chapter Installation checklist on page
59.
How you start up the drive depends on the control panel you have, if any.
• If you have no control panel, follow the instructions given in section Starting up
the drive without a control panel on page 62.
• If you have a basic control panel (ACS-CP-C), follow the instructions given in
section Performing a manual start-up on page 63.
• If you have an assistant control panel (ACS-CP-A, ACS-CP-D), you can either
run the Start-up assistant (see section Performing a guided start-up on page 68)
or perform a manual start-up (see section Performing a manual start-up on page
63).
The Start-up assistant, which is included in the assistant control panel only, guides
you through all essential settings to be done. In the manual start-up, the drive
gives no guidance; you go through the very basic settings by following the
instructions given in section Performing a manual start-up on page 63.
 Starting up the drive without a control panel

POWER-UP
Apply input power and wait for a moment.
Check that the red LED is not lit and the green LED is lit but not blinking.
The drive is now ready for use.
 Performing a manual start-up

For the manual start-up, you can use the basic control panel or the assistant control
panel. The instructions below are valid for both control panels, but the displays shown
are the basic control panel displays, unless the instruction applies to the assistant
control panel only.
Before you start, ensure that you have the motor nameplate data on hand.
POWER-UP
Apply input power.
The basic control panel powers up into the
Output mode.
REM
OUTPUT
00
.
FWD
Hz
The assistant control panel asks if you want to REM CHOICE

run the Start-up assistant. If you press
EXIT
, the Do you want to
use the start-up
Start-up assistant is not run, and you can assistant?
Yes
continue with manual start-up in a similar manner No
as described below for the basic control panel. EXIT 00:00 OK
MANUAL ENTRY OF START-UP DATA (parameter group 99)

If you have an assistant control panel, select the REM PAR EDIT
language (the basic control panel does not 9901 LANGUAGE
support languages). See parameter 9901 for the ENGLISH
values of the available language alternatives. [0]
For instructions on how to set parameters with the CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
assistant control panel, see section Assistant control
panel on page 86.
Select the motor type (9903).
• 1 (AM): Asynchronous motor
REM
9903 PAR FWD
• 2 (PMSM): Permanent magnet synchronous
motor.
Setting of parameter 9903 is shown below as an
example of parameter setting with the basic control
panel. You find more detailed instructions in section
Basic control panel on page 76.
1. To go to the Main menu, press if the bottom
line shows OUTPUT; otherwise press
repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom.
REM
rEF
MENU FWD
2. Press keys / until you see “PAr”, and
press . REM
-01- PAR FWD
3. Find the appropriate parameter group with keys
/ and press . REM
9901 PAR FWD
4. Find the appropriate parameter in the group with

keys / . REM
9903PAR FWD
5. Press and hold for about two seconds until the
parameter value is shown with SET under the value. REM
1PAR SET FWD
6. Change the value with keys / . The value
changes faster while you keep the key pressed
down.
REM
2PAR SET FWD
7. Save the parameter value by pressing .
REM
9903PAR FWD
Select the application macro (parameter 9902)
according to how the control cables are
connected.
REM
9902PAR FWD
The default value 1 (ABB STANDARD) is suitable in
most cases.
Select the motor control mode (parameter 9904).
1 (VECTOR: SPEED) is suitable in most cases.
2 (VECTOR: TORQ) is suitable for torque control
REM
9904PAR FWD
applications.
3 (SCALAR: FREQ) is recommended
• for multimotor drives when the number of the motors
connected to the drive is variable
• when the nominal motor current is less than 20% of
the nominal current of the drive
• when the drive is used for test purposes with no
motor connected.
3 (SCALAR: FREQ) is not recommended for
permanent magnet synchronous motors.
Enter the motor data from the motor nameplate. Note: Set the motor data to
exactly the same value as on
Asynchronous motor nameplate example:
the motor nameplate. For
example, if the motor nominal
ABB Motors speed is 1470 rpm on the
3 motor M2AA 200 MLA 4 nameplate, setting the value of
IEC 200 M/L 55 parameter 9908 MOTOR NOM
No SPEED to 1500 rpm results in
Ins.cl. F IP 55
the wrong operation of the
V Hz kW r/min A cos IA/IN t E/s
690 Y 50 30 1475 32.5 0.83 drive.
400 D 50 30 1475 56 0.83
660 Y 50 30 1470 34 0.83 380 V
380 D 50 30 1470 59 0.83 supply
415 D 50 30 1475 54 0.83 voltage
440 D 60 35 1770 59 0.83
Cat. no 3GAA 202 001 - ADA
6312/C3 6210/C3 180

IEC 34-1
Permanent magnet synchronous motor

nameplate example:
• motor nominal voltage (parameter 9905).

For permanent magnet synchronous motors, enter
the back emf voltage at nominal speed here.
REM
9905
PAR FWD
Otherwise use nominal voltage and perform ID run.
If the voltage is given as voltage per rpm, eg, 60 V
per 1000 rpm, the voltage for 3000 rpm nominal
speed is 3 · 60 V = 180 V.
• nominal motor current (parameter 9906)
Allowed range: 0.2…2.0 · I2N A
REM
9906
PAR FWD
• motor nominal frequency (parameter 9907)
REM
9907
PAR FWD
• motor nominal speed (parameter 9908)
REM
9908
PAR FWD
• motor nominal power (parameter 9909)
REM
9909
PAR FWD
Select the motor identification method (parameter 9910).

The default value 0 (OFF/IDMAGN) using the identification magnetization is
suitable for most applications. It is applied in this basic start-up procedure. Note
however that this requires that parameter 9904 is set to 1 (VECTOR: SPEED)
or 2 (VECTOR: TORQ).
If your selection is 0 (OFF/IDMAGN), move to the next step.
Value 1 (ON) should be selected if:
• the operation point is near zero speed, and/or
• operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque over a wide speed
range and without any measured speed feedback is required.
If you decide to perform the ID run (value 1 [ON]), continue by following the
separate instructions given on page 71 in section ID run procedure and then
return to step DIRECTION OF THE MOTOR ROTATION on page 66.
IDENTIFICATION MAGNETIZATION WITH ID RUN SELECTION 0 (OFF/IDMAGN)
Press key LOC
REM to switch to local control (LOC
shown on the left).

Press to start the drive. The motor model is
now calculated by magnetizing the motor for 10
to 15 s at zero speed.
DIRECTION OF THE MOTOR ROTATION
Check the direction of the motor rotation.
• If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on
xxx
LOC
the left), switch to local control by pressing LOC
REM .
.
SET FWD
Hz
• To go to the Main menu, press if the

bottom line shows OUTPUT; otherwise press
repeatedly until you see MENU at the
bottom.
• Press keys / until you see “rEF” and
press .
• Increase the frequency reference from zero to
a small value with key .
• Press to start the motor.
• Check that the actual direction of the motor is
the same as indicated on the display (FWD
means forward and REV reverse).
• Press to stop the motor. forward reverse
direction direction
To change the direction of the motor rotation:
• Invert the phases by changing the value of

9914
LOC
parameter 9914 to the opposite, ie, from
0 (NO) to 1 (YES), or vice versa. PAR FWD
• Verify your work by applying input power and
repeating the check as described above.
SPEED LIMITS AND ACCELERATION/DECELERATION TIMES
Set the minimum speed (parameter 2001).
2001
LOC
PAR FWD
Set the maximum speed (parameter 2002).
2002
LOC
PAR FWD
Set the acceleration time 1 (parameter 2202).
2202
LOC
Note: Set also acceleration time 2 (parameter
2205) if two acceleration times will be used in the PAR FWD
application.
Set the deceleration time 1 (parameter 2203).
2203
LOC
Note: Set also deceleration time 2 (parameter
2206) if two deceleration times will be used in the PAR FWD
application.
SAVING A USER MACRO AND FINAL CHECK
The start-up is now completed. However, it might LOC
be useful at this stage to set the parameters
required by your application and save the
9902
PAR FWD
settings as a user macro as instructed in section
User macros on page 119.
Check that the drive state is OK.
Basic control panel: Check that there are no
faults or alarms shown on the display.
If you want to check the LEDs on the front of the
drive, switch first to remote control (otherwise a
fault is generated) before removing the panel and
verifying that the red LED is not lit and the green
LED is lit but not blinking.
Assistant control panel: Check that there are no
faults or alarms shown on the display and that the
panel LED is green and does not blink.
 Performing a guided start-up

To be able to perform the guided start-up, you need the assistant control panel.
Guided start-up is applicable to AC induction motors.
Before you start, ensure that you have the motor nameplate data on hand.
POWER-UP
Apply input power. The control panel first asks if you REM CHOICE
want to use the Start-up assistant. Do you want to
use the start-up
• Press
OK
(when Yes is highlighted) to run the assistant?
Yes
Start-up assistant. No
EXIT
EXIT 00:00 OK
• Press if you do not want to run the Start-up
assistant.
OK
• Press key to highlight No and then press REM CHOICE
if you want to make the panel ask (or not ask) the Show start-up
assistant on
question about running the Start-up assistant again next boot?
Yes
the next time you switch on the power to the drive. No
EXIT 00:00 OK
SELECTING THE LANGUAGE

If you decided to run the Start-up assistant, the REM PAR EDIT
display then asks you to select the language. Scroll 9901 LANGUAGE
to the desired language with keys / and ENGLISH
SAVE
press to accept. [0]
EXIT EXIT 00:00 SAVE
If you press , the Start-up assistant is stopped.
STARTING THE GUIDED SET-UP
The Start-up assistant now guides you through the REM PAR EDIT
set-up tasks, starting with the motor set-up. Set the 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT
motor data to exactly the same value as on the motor 220 V
nameplate.
EXIT 00:00 SAVE
Scroll to the desired parameter value with keys
SAVE
/ and press to accept and continue
with the Start-up assistant.
EXIT
Note: At any time, if you press , the Start-up
assistant is stopped and the display goes to the
Output mode.
The basic start-up is now completed. However, it REM CHOICE
might be useful at this stage to set the parameters Do you want to
continue with
required by your application and continue with the application setup?
Continue
application set-up as suggested by the Start-up Skip
assistant. EXIT 00:00 OK
Select the application macro according to which the REM PAR EDIT
control cables are connected. 9902 APPLIC MACRO
ABB STANDARD
[1]
EXIT 00:00 SAVE
Continue with the application set-up. After REM CHOICE
completing a set-up task, the Start-up assistant Do you want to
continue with
suggests the next one. EXT1 reference setup?
OK
Continue
• Press (when Continue is highlighted) to Skip
EXIT 00:00 OK
continue with the suggested task.
• Press key to highlight Skip and then press
OK
to move to the following task without doing the
suggested task.
EXIT
• Press to stop the Start-up assistant.
DIRECTION OF THE MOTOR ROTATION
Press LOC
REM to switch to local control (LOC shown on
the left).
• If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on the LOC xx.xHz
status line), switch to local control by pressing LOC
REM . xx.x Hz
• If you are not in the Output mode, press
EXIT
x .x A
repeatedly until you get there. xx.x %
DIR 00:00 MENU
• Increase the frequency reference from zero to a
small value with key .
• Press to start the motor.
• Check that the actual direction of the motor is the
same as indicated on the display ( means
forward and reverse).
• Press to stop the motor. forward reverse
direction direction
To change the direction of the motor rotation:
• Invert the phases by changing the value of LOC PAR EDIT
parameter 9914 to the opposite, ie, from 0 (NO) to 9914 PHASE INVERSION
1 (YES), or vice versa. YES
• Verify your work by applying input power and [1]
CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
repeating the check as described above.
FINAL CHECK
After the whole set-up is completed, check that there
are no faults or alarms shown on the display and the
panel LED is green and does not blink.
Controlling the drive through the I/O interface

The table below instructs how to operate the drive through the digital and analog
inputs when:
• the motor start-up is performed, and
• the default (standard) parameter settings are valid.
Displays of the basic control panel are shown as an example.
PRELIMINARY SETTINGS
If you need to change the direction of rotation, check
that parameter 1003 DIRECTION is set to 3
(REQUEST).
Ensure that the control connections are wired See section Default I/O
according to the connection diagram given for the connection diagram on page
ABB standard macro. 55.
Ensure that the drive is in remote control. Press key In remote control, the panel
REM to switch between remote and local control.
LOC display shows text REM.
STARTING AND CONTROLLING THE SPEED OF THE MOTOR

Start by switching digital input DI1 on.
Basic control panel: Text FWD starts flashing fast and
stops after the setpoint is reached
REM
OUTPUT
00
. FWD
Hz
Assistant control panel: The arrow starts rotating. It is

dotted until the setpoint is reached.
Regulate the drive output frequency (motor speed) by
adjusting the voltage of analog input AI1. REM
OUTPUT
500
. FWD
Hz
CHANGING THE DIRECTION OF THE MOTOR ROTATION

Reverse direction: Switch digital input DI2 on.
REM
OUTPUT
500
. Hz
REV
Forward direction: Switch digital input DI2 off.
REM
OUTPUT
500
. FWD
Hz
STOPPING THE MOTOR

Switch digital input DI1 off. The motor stops.
Basic control panel: Text FWD starts flashing slowly.
REM
OUTPUT
00
. FWD
Hz
Assistant control panel: The arrow stops rotating.

Performing the ID run

The drive estimates motor characteristics automatically when the drive is started for
the first time and after any motor parameter (group 99 START-UP DATA) is changed.
This is valid when parameter 9910 ID RUN has value 0 (OFF/IDMAGN).
In most applications there is no need to perform a separate ID run. The ID run should
be selected if:
• vector control mode is used (parameter 9904 = 1 [VECTOR: SPEED] or
2 [VECTOR: TORQ]), and
• operation point is near zero speed and/or
• operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque, over a wide speed
range, and without any measured speed feedback (ie, without a pulse encoder) is
needed or
• permanent magnet synchronous motor is used and the back emf voltage is
unknown.
Note: If motor parameters (group 99 START-UP DATA) are changed after the ID run,
it must be repeated.
 ID run procedure
The general parameter setting procedure is not repeated here. For basic control
panel, see page 76 and for assistant control panel, see page 86 in chapter Control
panels. The ID run cannot be performed without a control panel.
PRE-CHECK
WARNING! The motor will run at up to approximately 50…80% of the
nominal speed during the ID run. The motor will rotate in the forward
direction. Ensure that it is safe to run the motor before performing the ID run!
De-couple the motor from the driven equipment.
If parameter values (group 01 OPERATING DATA to group 98 OPTIONS) are
changed before the ID run, check that the new settings meet the following
conditions:
2001 MINIMUM SPEED < 0 rpm
2002 MAXIMUM SPEED > 80% of the motor rated speed
2003 MAX CURRENT > I2N
2017 MAX TORQUE 1 > 50% or 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 > 50%, depending on
which limit is in use according to parameter 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL.
Check that the Run enable signal is on (parameter 1601).
Ensure that the panel is in local control (LOC shown at the top). Press key LOC
REM to
switch between local and remote control.
ID RUN WITH THE BASIC CONTROL PANEL

Change parameter 9910 ID RUN to 1 (ON). Save LOC
the new setting by pressing . 9910
PAR FWD
1
LOC
PAR SET FWD

If you want to monitor actual values during the ID
00
LOC
run, go to the Output mode by pressing
repeatedly until you get there. OUTPUT
. FWD
Hz
Press to start the ID run. The panel keeps

A2019
LOC
switching between the display that was shown
when you started the run and the alarm display FWD
presented on the right.
In general, it is recommended not to press any
control panel keys during the ID run. However,
you can stop the ID run at any time by pressing
.
After the ID run is completed, the alarm display is
F0011
LOC
not shown any more.
If the ID run fails, the fault display presented on FWD
the right is shown.
ID RUN WITH THE ASSISTANT CONTROL PANEL
Change parameter 9910 ID RUN to 1 (ON). Save REM PAR EDIT
SAVE
the new setting by pressing . 9910 ID RUN
ON
[1]
CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
If you want to monitor actual values during the ID LOC 50.0Hz
EXIT
run, go to the Output mode by pressing 0.0 Hz
repeatedly until you get there. 0.0 A
0.0 %
DIR 00:00 MENU
Press to start the ID run. The panel keeps LOC ALARM

switching between the display that was shown
when you started the run Run and the alarm
ALARM 2019
ID RUN
display presented on the right.
00:00
In general, it is recommended not to press any
control panel keys during the ID run. However,
you can stop the ID run at any time by pressing
.
After the ID run is completed, the alarm display is LOC FAULT

not shown any more.
FAULT 11
If the ID run fails, the fault display presented on ID RUN FAIL
the right is shown.
00:00
Control panels 75
9
Control panels
The chapter describes the control panel keys, LED indicators and display fields. It
also instructs in using the panel in control, monitoring and changing the settings.
About control panels

Use a control panel to control the ACS355, read status data, and adjust parameters.
The drive works with either of two different control panel types:
• Basic control panel – This panel (described in section Basic control panel on page
76) provides basic tools for manual entry of parameter values.
• Assistant control panel – This panel (described in section Assistant control panel
on page 86) includes pre-programmed assistants to automate the most common
parameter setups. The panel provides language support. It is available with
different language sets.
76 Control panels
Applicability
The manual is applicable to panels with the panel revisions and the panel firmware
versions given in the table below.
Panel type Type code Panel revision Panel firmware
version
Basic control panel ACS-CP-C M or later 1.13 or later
Assistant control panel ACS-CP-A F or later 2.04 or later
Assistant control panel (Asia) ACS-CP-D Q or later 2.04 or later
To find out the panel revision, see the label on the back of the panel. An example
label and explanation of the label contents are shown below.
1 ABB Oy, ACS-CP-A

2 S/N M0935E0001 RoHS 3
1 Panel type code

2 Serial number of format MYYWWRXXXX, where
M: Manufacturer
YY: 09, 10, 11, …, for 2009, 2010, 2011, …
WW: 01, 02, 03, … for week 1, week 2, week 3, …
R: A, B, C, … for panel revision
XXXX: Integer starting every week from 0001
3 RoHS mark (the label of your drive shows the valid markings)
To find out the panel firmware version of your assistant control panel, see page 90.
For the basic control panel, see page 79.
See parameter 9901 LANGUAGE to find out the languages supported by the different
assistant control panels.
Basic control panel

 Features
The basic control panel features:
• numeric control panel with an LCD display
• copy function – parameters can be copied to the control panel memory for later
transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system.
Control panels 77
 Overview
The following table summarizes the key functions and displays on the basic control
panel.
No. Use
1 LCD display – Divided into five areas:
a. Upper left – Control location:
LOC: drive control is local, that is, from the 1a LOC A 1b
control panel 1c 11
.
REM: drive control is remote, such as the drive 1d OUTPUT FWD 1e
I/O or fieldbus.
b. Upper right – Unit of the displayed value.
c. Center – Variable; in general, shows parameter 2 3
4
and signal values, menus or lists. Shows also
fault and alarm codes. 6 5 7
d. Lower left and center – Panel operation state: 8 9
OUTPUT: Output mode
PAR: Parameter mode
MENU: Main menu.
FAULT : Fault mode.
e. Lower right – Indicators:
FWD (forward) / REV (reverse): direction of the motor rotation
Flashing slowly: stopped
Flashing rapidly: running, not at setpoint
Steady: running, at setpoint
SET : Displayed value can be modified (in the Parameter and Reference modes).
2 RESET/EXIT – Exits to the next higher menu level without saving changed values.
Resets faults in the Output and Fault modes.
3 MENU/ENTER – Enters deeper into menu level. In the Parameter mode, saves the
displayed value as the new setting.
4 Up –
• Scrolls up through a menu or list.
• Increases a value if a parameter is selected.
• Increases the reference value in the Reference mode.
• Holding the key down changes the value faster.
5 Down –
• Scrolls down through a menu or list.
• Decreases a value if a parameter is selected.
• Decreases the reference value in the Reference mode.
• Holding the key down changes the value faster.
6 LOC/REM – Changes between local and remote control of the drive.
7 DIR – Changes the direction of the motor rotation.
8 STOP – Stops the drive in local control.
9 START – Starts the drive in local control.
78 Control panels
 Operation
You operate the control panel with the help of menus and keys. You select an option,
eg, operation mode or parameter, by scrolling the and arrow keys until the
option is visible in the display and then pressing the key.
With the key, you return to the previous operation level without saving the made
changes.
The basic control panel has five panel modes: Output mode, Reference mode,
Parameter mode, Copy mode and Fault mode. The operation in the first four modes
is described in this chapter. When a fault or alarm occurs, the panel goes
automatically to the Fault mode showing the fault or alarm code. You can reset the
fault or alarm in the Output or Fault mode (see chapter Fault tracing on page 349).
After the power is switched on, the panel is in the
Output mode, where you can start, stop, change the
direction, switch between local and remote control and
REM
OUTPUT
491
. FWD
Hz
monitor up to three actual values (one at a time). To do

other tasks, go first to the Main menu and select the
appropriate mode.
REM
MENU
PAr FWD
How to do common tasks

The table below lists common tasks, the mode in which you can perform them and the page
number where the steps to do the task are described in detail.
Task Mode Page
How to find out the panel firmware version At power up 79
How to switch between local and remote control Any 79
How to start and stop the drive Any 79
How to change the direction of the motor rotation Any 80
How to browse the monitored signals Output 80
How to set the speed, frequency or torque reference Reference 81
How to change the value of a parameter Parameter 82
How to select the monitored signals Parameter 83
How to reset faults and alarms Output, Fault 349
How to copy parameters from the drive to the control panel Copy 85
How to restore parameters from the control panel to the drive Copy 85
Control panels 79
How to find out the panel firmware version

Step Action Display
1. If the power is switched on, switch it off.
2. Keep key pressed down while you switch on the
power and read the panel firmware version shown on
the display. X.X X
When you release the key, the panel goes to the
Output mode.
How to start, stop and switch between local and remote control
You can start, stop and switch between local and remote control in any mode. To be
able to start or stop the drive, the drive must be in local control.
Step Action Display
1. • To switch between remote control (REM shown on
491
LOC
the left) and local control (LOC shown on the left),
press LOC
REM .
OUTPUT
. FWD
Hz
Note: Switching to local control can be disabled

with parameter 1606 LOCAL LOCK.
After pressing the key, the display briefly shows
LoC
LOC
message “LoC” or “rE”, as appropriate, before
returning to the previous display.
FWD
The very first time the drive is powered up, it is in

remote control (REM) and controlled through the
drive I/O terminals. To switch to local control (LOC)
and control the drive using the control panel, press
REM . The result depends on how long you press
LOC
the key:
• If you release the key immediately (the display
flashes “LoC”), the drive stops. Set the local
control reference as instructed on page 81.
• If you press the key for about two seconds
(release when the display changes from “LoC”
to “LoC r”), the drive continues as before. The
drive copies the current remote values for the
run/stop status and the reference, and uses
them as the initial local control settings.
• To stop the drive in local control, press . Text FWD or REV on the bottom
line starts flashing slowly.
• To start the drive in local control, press . Text FWD or REV on the bottom
line starts flashing rapidly. It
stops flashing when the drive
reaches the setpoint.
80 Control panels
How to change the direction of the motor rotation

You can change the direction of the motor rotation in any mode.
Step Action Display
1. If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on the
491
LOC
left), switch to local control by pressing LOC
display briefly shows message “LoC” before
REM . The
OUTPUT
. FWD
Hz
returning to the previous display.

2. To change the direction from forward (FWD shown at
491
LOC
the bottom) to reverse (REV shown at the bottom), or
vice versa, press .
OUTPUT
. Hz
REV
Note: Parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to 3

(REQUEST).
 Output mode
In the Output mode, you can:
• monitor actual values of up to three group 01 OPERATING DATA signals, one
signal at a time
• start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.
You get to the Output mode by pressing until the display shows text OUTPUT at
the bottom.
The display shows the value of one group 01
OPERATING DATA signal. The unit is shown on the
right. Page 83 tells how to select up to three signals to
REM
OUTPUT
491
. FWD
Hz
be monitored in the Output mode. The table below

shows how to view them one at a time.
How to browse the monitored signals

Step Action Display
1. If more than one signals have been selected to be
monitored (see page 83), you can browse them in
the Output mode.
REM
OUTPUT
491
. FWD
Hz
To browse the signals forward, press key
05
repeatedly. To browse them backward, press key A
repeatedly.
REM
OUTPUT
. FWD
REM
OUTPUT
107
. FWD
%
Control panels 81
 Reference mode
In the Reference mode, you can:
• set the speed, frequency or torque reference
How to set the speed, frequency or torque reference

Step Action Display
1. Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in
the Output mode, otherwise by pressing
REM
PAr
MENU FWD
2. If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on the

PAr
LOC
left), switch to local control by pressing LOC
REM . The
display briefly shows “LoC” before switching to local

MENU FWD
control.
Note: With group 11 REFERENCE SELECT, you
can allow the reference modification in remote
control (REM).
3. If the panel is not in the Reference mode (“rEF” not
rEF
LOC
visible), press key or until you see “rEF”
and then press . Now the display shows the
MENU FWD
current reference value with SET under the value.
491
LOC
. SET FWD
Hz
4. • To increase the reference value, press .

500
LOC
• To decrease the reference value, press
The value changes immediately when you press the
.
.
SET FWD
Hz
key. It is stored in the drive permanent memory and

restored automatically after power switch-off.
82 Control panels
 Parameter mode
In the Parameter mode, you can:
• view and change parameter values
• select and modify the signals shown in the Output mode
How to select a parameter and change its value

Step Action Display
rEF
LOC
MENU FWD
2. If the panel is not in the Parameter mode (“PAr” not

PAr
LOC
visible), press key or until you see “PAr”
and then press . The display shows the number
MENU FWD
of one of the parameter groups.
-01-
LOC
PAR FWD
3. Use keys and to find the desired

-11-
LOC
parameter group.
PAR FWD
4. Press . The display shows one of the

1101
LOC
parameters in the selected group.
PAR FWD
5. Use keys and to find the desired

1103
LOC
parameter.
PAR FWD
6. Press and hold for about two seconds until the

1
LOC
display shows the value of the parameter with SET
underneath indicating that changing of the value is
PAR SET FWD
now possible.
Note: When SET is visible, pressing keys and
simultaneously changes the displayed value to
the default value of the parameter.
7. Use keys and to select the parameter
2
LOC
value. When you have changed the parameter value,
SET starts flashing.
PAR SET FWD
• To save the displayed parameter value, press

1103
LOC
.
• To cancel the new value and keep the original, PAR FWD
press .
Control panels 83
How to select the monitored signals

Step Action Display
1. You can select which signals are monitored in the
103
LOC
Output mode and how they are displayed with group
34 PANEL DISPLAY parameters. See page 82 for
PAR SET FWD
detailed instructions on changing parameter values.
104
By default, the display shows three signals. LOC
Signal 1: 0102 SPEED for macros 3-wire, Alternate,

Motor potentiometer, Hand/Auto and PID control; PAR SET FWD
0103 OUTPUT FREQ for macros ABB standard and
105
LOC
Torque control
Signal 2: 0104 CURRENT
PAR SET FWD
Signal 3: 0105 TORQUE.
To change the default signals, select up to three
signals from group 01 OPERATING DATA to be
shown.
Signal 1: Change the value of parameter 3401
SIGNAL1 PARAM to the index of the signal
parameter in group 01 OPERATING DATA
(= number of the parameter without the leading
zero), eg, 105 means parameter 0105 TORQUE.
Value 100 means that no signal is displayed.
Repeat for signals 2 (3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM) and 3
(3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM). For example, if 3401 = 0
and 3415 = 0, browsing is disabled and only the
signal specified by 3408 appears in the display. If all
three parameters are set to 0, ie, no signals are
selected for monitoring, the panel displays text “n.A”.
2. Specify the decimal point location, or use the decimal
9
LOC
point location and unit of the source signal (setting 9
[DIRECT]). Bar graphs are not available for basic
PAR SET FWD
control panel. For details, see parameter 3404.
Signal 1: parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM
Signal 3: parameter 3418 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM.
3. Select the units to be displayed for the signals. This
3
LOC
has no effect if parameter 3404/3411/3418 is set to 9
(DIRECT). For details, see parameter 3405.
PAR SET FWD
Signal 1: parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT
Signal 2: parameter 3412 OUTPUT2 UNIT
Signal 3: parameter 3419 OUTPUT3 UNIT.
84 Control panels
Step Action Display

4. Select the scalings for the signals by specifying the
00
LOC
minimum and maximum display values. This has no
effect if parameter 3404/3411/3418 is set to 9 .
PAR SET FWD
Hz
(DIRECT). For details, see parameters 3406 and

3407.
5000
LOC
Signal 1: parameters 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN and 3407
OUTPUT1 MAX
.
PAR SET FWD
Hz

OUTPUT2 MAX
OUTPUT3 MAX.
 Copy mode
The basic control panel can store a full set of drive parameters and up to three user
sets of drive parameters to the control panel. Uploading and downloading can be
performed in local control. The control panel memory is non-volatile.
In the Copy mode, you can do the following:
• Copy all parameters from the drive to the control panel (uL – Upload). This
includes all defined user sets of parameters and internal (not adjustable by the
user) parameters such as those created by the ID run.
• Restore the full parameter set from the control panel to the drive (dL A –
Download all). This writes all parameters, including the internal non-user-
adjustable motor parameters, to the drive. It does not include the user sets of
parameters.
Note: Only use this function to restore a drive, or to transfer parameters to
systems that are identical to the original system.
• Copy a partial parameter set from the control panel to a drive (dL P – Download
partial). The partial set does not include user sets, internal motor parameters,
parameters 9905…9909, 1605, 1607, 5201, nor any group 51 EXT COMM
MODULE and 53 EFB PROTOCOL parameters.
The source and target drives and their motor sizes do not need to be the same.
• Copy user set 1 parameters from the control panel to the drive (dL u1 – Download
user set 1). A user set includes group 99 START-UP DATA parameters and the
internal motor parameters.
The function is only shown on the menu when user set 1 has been first saved
using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO (see section User macros on page 119)
and then uploaded to panel.
user set 2). As dL u1 – Download user set 1 above.
user set 2). As dL u1 – Download user set 1 above.
• Start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.
Control panels 85
How to upload and download parameters

For the upload and download functions available, see above. Note that the drive has
to be in local control for uploading and downloading.
Step Action Display
PAr
LOC
repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom. – If
MENU FWD
REM is shown on the left, press first LOC
REM to switch to
local control.
2. If the panel is not in the Copy mode (“CoPY” not
CoPY
LOC
visible), press key or until you see
“CoPY”.
MENU FWD
Press .
uL
LOC
MENU FWD
3. To upload all parameters (including user sets) from

uL
LOC
the drive to the control panel, step to “uL” with keys
and .
MENU FWD
Press . During the transfer, the display shows

uL 50
LOC
the transfer status as a percentage of completion. %
FWD
To perform downloads, step to the appropriate

dL A
LOC
operation (here “dL A”, Download all, is used as an
example) with keys and .
MENU FWD
Press . During the transfer, the display shows

dL 50
LOC
the transfer status as a percentage of completion. %
FWD
 Basic control panel alarm codes

In addition to the faults and alarms generated by the drive (see chapter Fault tracing
on page 349), the basic control panel indicates control panel alarms with a code of
form A5xxx. See section Alarms generated by the basic control panel on page 354 for
a list of the alarm codes and descriptions.
86 Control panels
Assistant control panel

 Features
The assistant control panel features:
• alphanumeric control panel with an LCD display
• language selection for the display
• Start-up assistant to ease drive commissioning
• copy function – parameters can be copied to the control panel memory for later
transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system.
• context-sensitive help
• real time clock.
Control panels 87
 Overview
The following table summarizes the key functions and displays on the assistant
control panel.
No. Use 1
1 Status LED – Green for normal operation. If LED is
flashing, or red, see section LEDs on page 372. 2a LOC 49.1Hz
2 LCD display – Divided into three main areas: 49. 1 Hz

2b 0. 5 A
a. Status line – variable, depending on the mode of 10. 7 %
operation, see section Status line on page 88. 2c DIR 00:00 MENU
b. Center – variable; in general, shows signal and
parameter values, menus or lists. Shows also 3 4
faults and alarms. 5
c. Bottom line – shows current functions of the two 7 6 8
soft keys and, if enabled, the clock display.
9 10
3 Soft key 1 – Function depends on the context. The
text in the lower left corner of the LCD display
indicates the function.
4 Soft key 2 – Function depends on the context. The text in the lower right corner of the
LCD display indicates the function.
5 Up –
• Scrolls up through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD display.
• Increments a value if a parameter is selected.
• Increments the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted.
Holding the key down changes the value faster.
6 Down –
• Scrolls down through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD display.
• Decrements a value if a parameter is selected.
• Decrements the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted.
Holding the key down changes the value faster.
7 LOC/REM – Changes between local and remote control of the drive.
8 Help – Displays context-sensitive information when the key is pressed. The information
displayed describes the item currently highlighted in the center of the display.
9 STOP – Stops the drive in local control.
10 START – Starts the drive in local control.
88 Control panels
Status line
The top line of the LCD display shows the basic status information of the drive.
LOC 49.1Hz LOC MAIN MENU 1
1 2 4 1 2 3 4
No. Field Alternatives Significance

1 Control location LOC Drive control is local, that is, from the
control panel.
REM Drive control is remote, such as the drive
I/O or fieldbus.
2 State Forward shaft direction
Reverse shaft direction
Rotating arrow Drive is running at setpoint.
Dotted rotating arrow Drive is running but not at setpoint.
Stationary arrow Drive is stopped.
Dotted stationary arrow Start command is present, but the motor is
not running, eg, because start enable is
missing.
3 Panel operation • Name of the current mode
mode • Name of the list or menu shown
• Name of the operation state, eg, PAR
EDIT.
4 Reference value or • Reference value in the Output mode
number of the • Number of the highlighted item, eg,
selected item mode, parameter group or fault.
 Operation
You operate the control panel with menus and keys. The keys include two context-
sensitive soft keys, whose current function is indicated by the text shown in the
display above each key.
You select an option, eg, operation mode or parameter, by scrolling the and
arrow keys until the option is highlighted (in reverse video) and then pressing
the relevant soft key. With the right soft key you usually enter a mode, accept an
option or save the changes. The left soft key is used to cancel the made changes
and return to the previous operation level.
The assistant control panel has nine panel modes: Output mode, Parameter mode,
Assistants mode, Changed parameters mode, Fault logger mode, Time and date
mode, Parameter backup mode, I/O settings mode and Fault mode. The operation in
the first eight modes is described in this chapter. When a fault or alarm occurs, the
panel goes automatically to the Fault mode showing the fault or alarm. You can reset
it in the Output or Fault mode (see chapter Fault tracing on page 349).
Control panels 89
Initially, the panel is in the Output mode, where you can LOC 49.1Hz
start, stop, change the direction, switch between local and 49.1 Hz
remote control, modify the reference value and monitor up 0.5 A
to three actual values. 10.7 %
DIR 00:00 MENU
To do other tasks, go first to the Main menu and select the
LOC MAIN MENU 1
appropriate mode on the menu. The status line (see
section Status line on page 88) shows the name of the
PARAMETERS
current menu, mode, item or state.
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT 00:00 ENTER
How to do common tasks

The table below lists common tasks, the mode in which you can perform them and
the page number where the steps to do the task are described in detail.
Task Mode Page
How to get help Any 90
How to find out the panel version At power up 90
How to adjust the display contrast Output 93
How to switch between local and remote control Any 91
How to start and stop the drive Any 92
How to change the direction of the motor rotation Output 92
How to set the speed, frequency or torque reference Output 93
How to change the value of a parameter Parameters 94
How to select the monitored signals Parameters 95
How to do guided tasks (specification of related parameter sets) Assistants 96
with assistants
How to view and edit changed parameters Changed 98
parameters
How to view faults Fault logger 99
How to reset faults and alarms Output, Fault 349
How to show/hide the clock, change date and time formats, set the Time and date 100
clock and enable/disable automatic clock transitions according to
the daylight saving changes
How to copy parameters from the drive to the control panel Parameter 103
backup
How to restore parameters from the control panel to the drive Parameter 103
backup
How to view backup information Parameter 104
backup
How to edit and change parameter settings related to I/O terminals I/O settings 105
90 Control panels
How to get help

Step Action Display
1. Press ? to read the context-sensitive help text for the LOC PAR GROUPS 10
item that is highlighted. 01 OPERATING DATA
03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS
04 FAULT HISTORY
10 START/STOP/DIR
11 REFERENCE SELECT
EXIT 00:00 SEL
If help text exists for the item, it is shown on the display. LOC HELP
This group defines
external sources
(EXT1 and EXT2) for
commands that enable
start, stop and
EXIT 00:00
2. If the whole text is not visible, scroll the lines with keys LOC HELP
and . external sources
(EXT1 and EXT2) for
commands that enable
start, stop and
direction changes.
EXIT 00:00
3. After reading the text, return to the previous display by LOC PAR GROUPS 10
EXIT
pressing . 01 OPERATING DATA
04 FAULT HISTORY
10 START/STOP/DIR
11 REFERENCE SELECT
EXIT 00:00 SEL
How to find out the panel version

Step Action Display
1. If the power is switched on, switch it off.
2. Keep key ? pressed down while you switch on the PANEL VERSION INFO
power and read the information. The display shows the Panel SW: x.xx
following panel information: Rom CRC: xxxxxxxxxx
Flash Rev: x.xx
Panel SW: panel firmware version xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
ROM CRC: panel ROM check sum
Flash Rev: flash content version
Flash content comment.
When you release the ? key, the panel goes to the
Output mode.
Control panels 91
How to start, stop and switch between local and remote control
You can start, stop and switch between local and remote control in any mode. To be
able to start or stop the drive, the drive must be in local control.
Step Action Display
1. • To switch between remote control (REM shown on the LOC MESSAGE
status line) and local control (LOC shown on the status Switching to the
line), press LOC
REM .
local control mode.
Note: Switching to local control can be disabled with

00:00
parameter 1606 LOCAL LOCK.
The very first time the drive is powered up, it is in
remote control (REM) and controlled through the drive
I/O terminals. To switch to local control (LOC) and
control the drive using the control panel, press LOC
REM .
The result depends on how long you press the key:

• If you release the key immediately (the display
flashes “Switching to the local control mode”), the
drive stops. Set the local control reference as
instructed on page 93.
• If you press the key for about two seconds, the drive
continues as before. The drive copies the current
remote values for the run/stop status and the
reference, and uses them as the initial local control
settings.
• To stop the drive in local control, press . The arrow ( or ) on the
status line stops rotating.
• To start the drive in local control, press . The arrow ( or ) on the
status line starts rotating. It
is dotted until the drive
reaches the setpoint.
92 Control panels
 Output mode
In the Output mode, you can:
• monitor actual values of up to three signals in group 01 OPERATING DATA
• change the direction of the motor rotation
• set the speed, frequency or torque reference
• adjust the display contrast
EXIT
You get to the Output mode by pressing repeatedly.
The top right corner of the LOC 49.1Hz LOC 5.0Hz
display shows the reference 49.1 Hz Hz50%
value. The center can be 0.5 A 0.4 A
configured to show up to three 10.7 % 24.4 %
signal values or bar graphs. If DIR 00:00 MENU DIR 00:00 MENU
just one or two signals are
selected for display, the number and name of each displayed signal are shown in
addition to the value or bar graph. See page 95 for instructions on selecting and
modifying the monitored signals.
How to change the direction of the motor rotation

Step Action Display
EXIT
1. If you are not in the Output mode, press repeatedly REM 49.1Hz
until you get there.
49.1 Hz
0.5 A
10.7 %
DIR 00:00 MENU
2. If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on the status LOC 49.1Hz
line), switch to local control by pressing LOC
REM . The display
briefly shows a message about changing the mode and

49.1 Hz
then returns to the Output mode. 0.5 A
10.7 %
DIR 00:00 MENU
3. To change the direction from forward ( shown on the LOC 49.1Hz
status line) to reverse ( shown on the status line), or
vice versa, press
DIR
.
49.1 Hz
0.5 A
Note: Parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to 3
10.7 %
DIR 00:00 MENU
(REQUEST).
Control panels 93
How to set the speed, frequency or torque reference

Step Action Display
EXIT
1. If you are not in the Output mode, press repeatedly REM 49.1Hz
49.1 Hz
0.5 A
10.7 %
DIR 00:00 MENU
2. If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on the status LOC 49.1Hz
line), switch to local control by pressing LOC
REM . The display
briefly shows a message about changing the mode and

49.1 Hz
then returns to the Output mode. 0.5 A
Note: With group 11 REFERENCE SELECT, you can 10.7 %
DIR 00:00 MENU
allow the reference modification in remote control.
3. • To increase the highlighted reference value shown in LOC 50.0Hz
the top right corner of the display, press . The
value changes immediately. It is stored in the drive
50.0 Hz
permanent memory and restored automatically after 0.5 A
power switch-off. 10.7 %
DIR 00:00 MENU
• To decrease the value, press .
How to adjust the display contrast

Step Action Display
EXIT
1. If you are not in the Output mode, press repeatedly LOC 49.1Hz
49.1 Hz
0.5 A
10.7 %
DIR 00:00 MENU
MENU
2. • To increase the contrast, press keys and LOC 49.1Hz
simultaneously.
• To decrease the contrast, press keys
MENU
and
49.1 Hz
simultaneously.
0.5 A
10.7 %
DIR 00:00 MENU
 Parameters mode
In the Parameters mode, you can:
• view and change parameter values
94 Control panels
How to select a parameter and change its value

Step Action Display
MENU
1. Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in the LOC MAIN MENU 1
EXIT
Output mode, otherwise by pressing repeatedly until PARAMETERS
you get to the Main menu.
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT 00:00 ENTER
2. Go to the Parameters mode by selecting PARAMETERS LOC PAR GROUPS 01
on the menu with keys and , and pressing 01 OPERATING DATA
ENTER 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS
.
04 FAULT HISTORY
10 START/STOP/DIR
11 REFERENCE SELECT
EXIT 00:00 SEL
3. Select the appropriate parameter group with keys LOC PAR GROUPS 99
and . 99 START-UP DATA
01 OPERATING DATA
04 FAULT HISTORY
10 START/STOP/DIR
EXIT 00:00 SEL
SEL
Press . LOC PARAMETERS
9901 LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
9902 APPLIC MACRO
9903 MOTOR TYPE
9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE
EXIT 00:00 EDIT
4. Select the appropriate parameter with keys and LOC PARAMETERS
. The current value of the parameter is shown 9901 LANGUAGE
below the selected parameter. 9902 APPLIC MACRO
ABB STANDARD
9903 MOTOR TYPE
EXIT 00:00 EDIT
EDIT
Press . LOC PAR EDIT
9902 APPLIC MACRO
ABB STANDARD
[1]
CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
5. Specify a new value for the parameter with keys LOC PAR EDIT
and .
9902 APPLIC MACRO
Pressing the key once increments or decrements the
value. Holding the key down changes the value faster. 3-WIRE
Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the displayed [2]
CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
value with the default value.
SAVE
6. • To save the new value, press . LOC PARAMETERS
• To cancel the new value and keep the original, press 9901 LANGUAGE
CANCEL 9902 APPLIC MACRO
. 3-WIRE
9903 MOTOR TYPE
EXIT 00:00 EDIT
Control panels 95
How to select the monitored signals

Step Action Display
1. You can select which signals are monitored in the Output LOC PAR EDIT
mode and how they are displayed with group 34 PANEL
DISPLAY parameters. See page 94 for detailed 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM
instructions on changing parameter values. OUTPUT FREQ
By default, the display shows three signals. [103]
CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
Signal 1: 0102 SPEED for macros 3-wire, Alternate,
Motor potentiometer, Hand/Auto and PID control; LOC PAR EDIT
0103 OUTPUT FREQ for macros ABB standard and 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM
Torque control
Signal 2: 0104 CURRENT
CURRENT
[104]
Signal 3: 0105 TORQUE. CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
To change the default signals, select up to three signals LOC PAR EDIT
from group 01 OPERATING DATA to be shown.
3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM
Signal 1: Change the value of parameter 3401 SIGNAL1
PARAM to the index of the signal parameter in group 01
TORQUE
[105]
OPERATING DATA (= number of the parameter without
CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
the leading zero), eg, 105 means parameter 0105
TORQUE. Value 0 means that no signal is displayed.
Repeat for signals 2 (3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM) and 3
(3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM).
2. Select how you want the signals to be displayed: as a LOC PAR EDIT
decimal number or a bar graph. For decimal numbers,
you can specify the decimal point location, or use the 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM
decimal point location and unit of the source signal DIRECT
(setting 9 [DIRECT]). For details, see parameter 3404. [9]
Signal 1: parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
Signal 3: parameter 3418 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM.
3. Select the units to be displayed for the signals. This has LOC PAR EDIT
no effect if parameter 3404/3411/3418 is set to 9
(DIRECT). For details, see parameter 3405. 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT
Signal 1: parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT Hz
Signal 2: parameter 3412 OUTPUT2 UNIT [3]
Signal 3: parameter 3419 OUTPUT3 UNIT. CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
4. Select the scalings for the signals by specifying the LOC PAR EDIT
minimum and maximum display values. This has no
effect if parameter 3404/3411/3418 is set to 9 (DIRECT). 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN
For details, see parameters 3406 and 3407. 0.0 Hz
OUTPUT1 MAX CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
Signal 2: parameters 3413 OUTPUT2 MIN and 3414 LOC PAR EDIT
OUTPUT2 MAX 3407 OUTPUT1 MAX
OUTPUT3 MAX.
500.0 Hz
CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
96 Control panels
 Assistants mode
When the drive is first powered up, the Start-up assistant guides you through the
setup of the basic parameters. The Start-up assistant is divided into assistants, each
of which is responsible for the specification of a related parameter set, for example
Motor set-up or PID control. The Start-up assistant activates the assistants one after
the other. You may also use the assistants independently. For more information on
the tasks of the assistants, see section Start-up assistant on page 121.
In the Assistants mode, you can:
• use assistants to guide you through the specification of a set of basic parameters
How to use an assistant

The table below shows the basic operation sequence which leads you through
assistants. The Motor set-up assistant is used as an example.
Step Action Display
MENU
EXIT
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT 00:00 ENTER
2. Go to the Assistants mode by selecting ASSISTANTS on LOC ASSISTANTS 1
ENTER
the menu keys and , and pressing . Start-up assistant
Motor Set-up
Application
Speed control EXT1
Speed control EXT2
EXIT 00:00 SEL
3. Select the assistant with keys and , and LOC PAR EDIT
SEL
press .
9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT
If you select any other assistant than the Start-up
assistant, it guides you through the task of specification 200 V
of its parameter set as shown in steps 4. and 5. below.
After that you can select another assistant on the EXIT 00:00 SAVE
Assistants menu or exit the Assistants mode. The Motor
set-up assistant is used here as an example.
If you select the Start-up assistant, it activates the first LOC CHOICE
assistant, which guides you through the task of Do you want to
specification of its parameter set as shown in steps 4. continue with
application setup?
and 5. below. The Start-up assistant then asks if you Continue
want to continue with the next assistant or skip it – select Skip
the appropriate answer with keys and , and EXIT 00:00 OK
SEL
press . If you choose to skip, the Start-up assistant
asks the same question about the next assistant, and so
on.
Control panels 97
Step Action Display

4. • To specify a new value, press keys and . LOC PAR EDIT
9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT
240 V
EXIT 00:00 SAVE
• To ask for information on the requested parameter, LOC HELP
press key ? . Scroll the help text with keys and Set as given on the
EXIT motor nameplate.
. Close the help by pressing .
Voltage value must
correspond to motor
D/Y connection.
EXIT 00:00
5. • To accept the new value and continue to the setting of LOC PAR EDIT
SAVE
the next parameter, press .
EXIT 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR
• To stop the assistant, press .
1.2 A
EXIT 00:00 SAVE
98 Control panels
 Changed parameters mode

In the Changed parameters mode, you can:
• view a list of all parameters that have been changed from the macro default
values
• change these parameters
How to view and edit changed parameters

Step Action Display
MENU
EXIT
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT 00:00 ENTER
2. Go to the Changed parameters mode by selecting LOC CHANGED PAR
CHANGED PAR on the menu with keys and , 1202 CONST SPEED 1
ENTER 10.0 Hz
and pressing .
1203 CONST SPEED 2
1204 CONST SPEED 3
9902 APPLIC MACRO
EXIT 00:00 EDIT
3. Select the changed parameter on the list with keys LOC PAR EDIT
and . The value of the selected parameter is shown
EDIT 1202 CONST SPEED 1
below it. Press to modify the value.
10.0 Hz
CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
4. Specify a new value for the parameter with keys LOC PAR EDIT
and .
1202 CONST SPEED 1
value. Holding the key down changes the value faster. 15.0 Hz
Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the displayed
CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
value with the default value.
SAVE
5. • To accept the new value, press . If the new value LOC CHANGED PAR
is the default value, the parameter is removed from the 1202 CONST SPEED 1
list of changed parameters. 15.0 Hz
1203 CONST SPEED 2
• To cancel the new value and keep the original, press 1204 CONST SPEED 3
CANCEL 9902 APPLIC MACRO
.
EXIT 00:00 EDIT
Control panels 99
 Fault logger mode

In the Fault logger mode, you can:
• view the drive fault history of maximum ten faults (after a power off, only the three
latest faults are kept in the memory)
• see the details of the three latest faults (after a power off, the details of only the
most recent fault is kept in the memory)
• read the help text for the fault
How to view faults

Step Action Display
MENU
EXIT
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT 00:00 ENTER
2. Go to the Fault logger mode by selecting FAULT LOC FAULT LOGGER 1
LOGGER on the menu with keys and , and 10: PANEL LOSS
ENTER 19.03.05 13:04:57
pressing . The display shows the fault log starting
6: DC UNDERVOLT
with the latest fault. 7: AI1 LOSS
The number on the row is the fault code according to
EXIT 00:00 DETAIL
which the causes and corrective actions are listed in
chapter Fault tracing on page 349.
3. To see the details of a fault, select it with keys and LOC PANEL LOSS
DETAIL
, and press . DI STATUS AT FLT
00000 bin
FAULT TIME 1
13:04:57
FAULT TIME 2
EXIT 00:00 DIAG
DIAG
4. To show the help text, press . Scroll the help text with LOC DIAGNOSTICS
keys and . Check: comm lines
OK and connections,
After reading the help, press to return to the parameter 3002,
previous display. parameters in groups
10 and 11.
EXIT 00:00 OK
100 Control panels
 Time and date mode

In the Time and date mode, you can:
• show or hide the clock
• change date and time display formats
• set the date and time
• enable or disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving
changes
The assistant control panel contains a battery to ensure the function of the clock
when the panel is not powered by the drive.
How to show or hide the clock, change display formats, set the date and time
and enable or disable clock transitions due to daylight saving changes
Step Action Display
MENU
EXIT
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT 00:00 ENTER
2. Go to the Time and date mode by selecting TIME & LOC TIME & DATE 1
DATE on the menu with keys and , and CLOCK VISIBILITY
ENTER TIME FORMAT
pressing .
DATE FORMAT
SET TIME
SET DATE
EXIT 00:00 SEL
3. • To show (hide) the clock, select CLOCK VISIBLILITY LOC CLOCK VISIB 1
SEL
on the menu, press , select Show clock (Hide Show clock
SEL Hide clock
clock) and press , or, if you want to return to the
EXIT
previous display without making changes, press .
EXIT 00:00 SEL

• To specify the date format, select DATE FORMAT on LOC DATE FORMAT 1
SEL
the menu, press and select a suitable format. dd.mm.yy
OK CANCEL mm/dd/yy
Press to save or to cancel your changes.
dd.mm.yyyy
mm/dd/yyyy
CANCEL 00:00 OK
• To specify the time format, select TIME FORMAT on LOC TIME FORMAT 1
SEL
the menu, press and select a suitable format. 24-hour
OK CANCEL 12-hour
Press to save or to cancel your changes.
CANCEL 00:00 SEL

Control panels 101
Step Action Display

• To set the time, select SET TIME on the menu and LOC SET TIME
SEL
press . Specify the hours with keys and
OK
, and press .Then specify the minutes. Press
OK
to save or
CANCEL
to cancel your changes. 15:41
CANCEL 00:00 OK
• To set the date, select SET DATE on the menu and LOC SET DATE
SEL
press . Specify the first part of the date (day or
month depending on the selected date format) with
keys and , and press
OK
. Repeat for the 19.03.05
OK
second part. After specifying the year, press . To
CANCEL
cancel your changes, press . CANCEL 00:00 OK
• To enable or disable the automatic clock transitions LOC DAYLIGHT SAV 1
according to the daylight saving changes, select Off
SEL EU
DAYLIGHT SAVING on the menu and press .
US
Pressing ? opens the help that shows the beginning Australia1:NSW,Vict..
and end dates of the period during which daylight Australia2:Tasmania..
EXIT 00:00 SEL
saving time is used in each country or area whose
daylight saving changes you can select to be followed. LOC HELP
Scroll the help text with keys and . EU:
On: Mar last Sunday
• To disable automatic clock transitions according to Off: Oct last Sunday
the daylight saving changes, select Off and press US:
SEL
. EXIT 00:00
• To enable automatic clock transitions, select the
country or area whose daylight saving changes are
SEL
followed and press .
• To return to the previous display without making
EXIT
changes, press .
102 Control panels
 Parameter backup mode

The Parameter backup mode is used to export parameters from one drive to another
or to make a backup of the drive parameters. Uploading to the panel stores all drive
parameters, including up to three user sets, to the assistant control panel. The full set,
partial parameter set (application) and user sets can then be downloaded from the
control panel to another drive or the same drive. Uploading and downloading can be
performed in local control.
The control panel memory is non-volatile and does not depend on the panel battery.
In the Parameter backup mode, you can:
• Copy all parameters from the drive to the control panel (UPLOAD TO PANEL).
This includes all defined user sets of parameters and internal (not adjustable by
the user) parameters such as those created by the ID run.
• View the information about the backup stored to the control panel with UPLOAD
TO PANEL (BACKUP INFO). This includes, for example, the type and rating of
the drive where the backup was made. It is useful to check this information when
you are going to copy the parameters to another drive with DOWNLOAD FULL
SET to ensure that the drives match.
• Restore the full parameter set from the control panel to the drive (DOWNLOAD
FULL SET). This writes all parameters, including the internal non-user-adjustable
motor parameters, to the drive. It does not include the user sets of parameters.
Note: Only use this function to restore a drive from a backup or to transfer
parameters to systems that are identical to the original system.
• Copy a partial parameter set (part of the full set) from the control panel to a drive
(DOWNLOAD APPLICATION). The partial set does not include user sets, internal
motor parameters, parameters 9905…9909, 1605, 1607, 5201, nor any group 51
EXT COMM MODULE and 53 EFB PROTOCOL parameters.
The source and target drives and their motor sizes do not need to be the same.
• Copy user set 1 parameters from the control panel to the drive (DOWNLOAD
USER SET1). A user set includes group 99 START-UP DATA parameters and the
internal motor parameters.
The function is only shown on the menu when user set 1 has been first saved
using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO (see section user macros on page 119)
and then uploaded to the control panel with UPLOAD TO PANEL.
USER SET2). As DOWNLOAD USER SET1 above.
USER SET3). As DOWNLOAD USER SET1 above.
• Start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.
Control panels 103
How to upload and download parameters

For the upload and download functions available, see above. Note that the drive has
to be in local control for uploading and downloading.
Step Action Display
MENU
EXIT
you get to the Main menu. – If REM is shown on the
status line, press first LOC
REM to switch to local control.
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT 00:00 ENTER
2. Go to the Par backup mode by selecting PAR BACKUP LOC PAR BACKUP 1
on the menu with keys and , and pressing UPLOAD TO PANEL
ENTER BACKUP INFO
.
DOWNLOAD FULL SET
DOWNLOAD APPLICATION
DOWNLOAD USER SET1
EXIT 00:00 SEL
3. • To copy all parameters (including user sets and LOC PAR BACKUP
internal parameters) from the drive to the control Copying parameters
panel, select UPLOAD TO PANEL on the Par backup 50%
SEL
menu with keys and , and press .
During the transfer, the display shows the transfer
ABORT
status as a percentage of completion. Press if you ABORT 00:00
want to stop the operation.
After the upload is completed, the display shows a LOC MESSAGE
OK
message about the completion. Press to return to Parameter upload
the Par backup menu. successful
OK 00:00
• To perform downloads, select the appropriate LOC PAR BACKUP
operation (here DOWNLOAD FULL SET is used as an Downloading
example) on the Par backup menu with keys parameters (full
and , and press
SEL
. The display shows the set)
50%
transfer status as a percentage of completion. Press
ABORT
if you want to stop the operation. ABORT 00:00
After the download is completed, the display shows a LOC MESSAGE
OK
message about the completion. Press to return to Parameter download
the Par backup menu. successfully
completed.
OK 00:00
104 Control panels
How to view information about the backup

Step Action Display
MENU
EXIT
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT 00:00 ENTER
2. Go to the Par backup mode by selecting PAR BACKUP LOC PAR BACKUP 1
on the menu with keys and , and pressing UPLOAD TO PANEL
ENTER BACKUP INFO
.
DOWNLOAD FULL SET
DOWNLOAD USER SET1
EXIT 00:00 SEL
3. Select BACKUP INFO on the Par backup menu with keys LOC BACKUP INFO
SEL
and , and press . The display shows the DRIVE TYPE
following information about the drive where the backup ACS355
3304 DRIVE RATING
was made: 9A74i
DRIVE TYPE: type of the drive 3301 FIRMWARE
EXIT 00:00
DRIVE RATING: rating of the drive in format XXXYZ,
LOC BACKUP INFO
where ACS355
XXX: Nominal current rating. If 3304 DRIVE RATING
9A74i
present, an “A” indicates a decimal 3301 FIRMWARE
point, eg, 9A7 means 9.7 A. 241A hex
Y: 2 = 200 V EXIT 00:00
4 = 400 V
Z: i = European loading package
n = US loading package
FIRMWARE: firmware version of the drive.
You can scroll the information with keys and .
EXIT
4. Press to return to the Par backup menu. LOC PAR BACKUP 1
UPLOAD TO PANEL
BACKUP INFO
DOWNLOAD FULL SET
DOWNLOAD USER SET1
EXIT 00:00 SEL
Control panels 105
 I/O settings mode

In the I/O settings mode, you can:
• check the parameter settings related to any I/O terminal
• edit the parameter setting. For example, if “1103: REF1” is listed under Ain1
(Analog input 1), that is, parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT has value AI1, you can
change its value to, eg, AI2. You cannot, however, set the value of parameter
1106 REF2 SELECT to AI1.
How to edit and change parameter settings related to I/O terminals

Step Action Display
MENU
EXIT
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT 00:00 ENTER
2. Go to the I/O settings mode by selecting I/O SETTINGS LOC I/O SETTINGS 1
on the menu with keys and , and pressing DIGITAL INPUTS (DI)
ENTER ANALOG INPUTS (AI)
.
RELAY OUTPUTS (ROUT)
ANALOG OUTPUTS (AOUT)
PANEL
EXIT 00:00 SEL
3. Select the I/O group, eg, DIGITAL INPUTS, with keys LOC I/O SETTINGS
SEL
and , and press . After a brief pause, the -DI1-
display shows the current settings for the selection. 1001:START/STOP (E1)
-DI2-
1001:DIR (E1)
-DI3-
EXIT 00:00
4. Select the setting (line with a parameter number) with LOC PAR EDIT
EDIT
keys and , and press .
1001 EXT1 COMMANDS
DI1,2
[2]
CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
5. Specify a new value for the setting with keys and LOC PAR EDIT
.
1001 EXT1 COMMANDS
value. Holding the key down changes the value faster. DI1P,2P
Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the displayed [3]
value with the default value. CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
SAVE
6. • To save the new value, press . LOC I/O SETTINGS
• To cancel the new value and keep the original, press -DI1-
CANCEL 1001:START PLS(E1)
. -DI2-
1001:STOP PLS (E1)
-DI3-
EXIT 00:00
106 Control panels
Application macros 107
10
Application macros
The chapter describes the application macros. For each macro, there is a wiring
diagram showing the default control connections (digital and analog I/O). The chapter
also explains how to save a user macro and how to recall it.
Overview of macros
Application macros are pre-programmed parameter sets. While starting up the drive,
the user typically selects one of the macros - the one that is best suited for the
purpose - with parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO, makes the essential changes and
saves the result as a user macro.
The ACS355 has eight standard macros and three user macros. The table below
contains a summary of the macros and describes suitable applications.
Macro Suitable applications
ABB standard Ordinary speed control applications where no, one, two or three constant
speeds are used. Start/stop is controlled with one digital input (level start
and stop). It is possible to switch between two acceleration and
deceleration times.
3-wire Ordinary speed control applications where no, one, two or three constant
speeds are used. The drive is started and stopped with push buttons.
Alternate Speed control applications where no, one, two or three constant speeds
are used. Start, stop and direction are controlled by two digital inputs
(combination of the input states determines the operation).
Motor Speed control applications where no or one constant speed is used. The
potentiometer speed is controlled by two digital inputs (increase / decrease / keep
unchanged).
108 Application macros
Macro Suitable applications

Hand/Auto Speed control applications where switching between two control devices is
needed. Some control signal terminals are reserved for one device, the
rest for the other. One digital input selects between the terminals (devices)
in use.
PID control Process control applications, for example different closed loop control
systems such as pressure control, level control and flow control. It is
possible to switch between process and speed control: Some control
signal terminals are reserved for process control, others for speed control.
One digital input selects between process and speed control.
Torque control Torque control applications. It is possible to switch between torque and
speed control: Some control signal terminals are reserved for torque
control, others for speed control. One digital input selects between torque
and speed control.
AC500 Modbus Applications that require a complex control logic and when several drives
are connected together through a Modbus link. AC500-eCo PLC is used
for controlling and monitoring the system.
User The user can save the customized standard macro, ie, the parameter
settings including group 99 START-UP DATA, and the results of the motor
Identification run into the permanent memory, and recall the data at a later
time. For example, three user macros can be used when switching
between three different motors is required.
Summary of the I/O connections of the application macros

The following table gives the summary of the default I/O connections of all application
macros.
Input/ Macro
output ABB 3-wire Alternate Motor Hand/Auto PID Torque
standard potentiom. control control
AI1 Freq. ref. Speed ref. Speed ref. - Speed ref. Proc. ref. Speed ref.
(0…10 V) (Hand) (PID) / (Speed)
Freq. ref.
(Hand)
AI2 - - - - Speed ref. Process Torque
(0…20 mA) (Auto) value ref.
(Torque)
AO Output Speed Speed Speed Speed Speed Speed
freq.
DI1 Stop/Start Start Start (fwd) Stop/Start Stop/Start Stop/Start Stop/Start
(pulse) (Hand) (PID) (Speed)
DI2 Fwd/Rev Stop Start (rev) Fwd/Rev Fwd/Rev PID/Hand Fwd/Rev
(pulse) (Hand)
DI3 Const. Fwd/Rev Const. Speed ref. Hand/Auto Const. Speed/
speed speed up speed 1 Torque
input 1 input 1
DI4 Const. Const. Const. Speed ref. Fwd/Rev Run Const.
speed speed speed down (Auto) enable speed 1
input 2 input 1 input 2
DI5 Ramp pair Const. Ramp pair Const. Stop/Start Stop/Start Ramp pair
selection speed selection speed 1 (Auto) (Hand) selection
input 2
RO Fault (-1) Fault (-1) Fault (-1) Fault (-1) Fault (-1) Fault (-1) Fault (-1)
DO Fault (-1) Fault (-1) Fault (-1) Fault (-1) Fault (-1) Fault (-1) Fault (-1)
ABB standard macro

This is the default macro. It provides a general purpose I/O configuration with three
constant speeds. Parameter values are the default values given in section
Parameters on page 191.
If you use other than the default connections presented below, see section I/O
terminals on page 53.
 Default I/O connections

X1A
2 AI1 Output frequency reference: 0…10 V 1)
1…10 kohm
7 AO Output frequency value: 0…20 mA
4)
X1B
19 RONO
22 DOGND
1) 3)
AI1 is used as a speed reference if vector mode is 0 = ramp times according to parameters 2202 and
selected. 2203.
2) See parameter group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS: 1 = ramp times according to parameters 2205 and
2206.
DI3 DI4 Operation (parameter) 4)
360 degree grounding under a clamp.
0 0 Set speed through AI1 Tightening torque: 0.4 N·m / 3.5 lbf·in.
1 0 Speed 1 (1202) Safe torque off connections (X1C:STO; not shown in
0 1 Speed 2 (1203) the diagram) are jumpered by default.
1 1 Speed 3 (1204)
3-wire macro
This macro is used when the drive is controlled using momentary push-buttons. It
provides three constant speeds. To enable the macro, set the value of parameter
9902 APPLIC MACRO to 2 (3-WIRE).
For the parameter default values, see section Default values with different macros on
page 180. If you use other than the default connections presented below, see section
I/O terminals on page 53.
Note: When the stop input (DI2) is deactivated (no input), the control panel start and
stop buttons are disabled.

X1A
2 AI1 Motor speed reference: 0…10 V
1…10 kohm
7 AO Motor speed value: 0…20 mA
2)
12 DI1 Start (pulse )
13 DI2 Stop (pulse )
X1B
19 RONO
22 DOGND
1) 2)
See parameter group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS: 360 degree grounding under a clamp.
DI4 DI5 Operation (parameter) Tightening torque: 0.4 N·m / 3.5 lbf·in.
0 0 Set speed through AI1 Safe torque off connections (X1C:STO; not shown in
the diagram) are jumpered by default.
1 0 Speed 1 (1202)
0 1 Speed 2 (1203)
1 1 Speed 3 (1204)
Alternate macro
This macro provides an I/O configuration adapted to a sequence of DI control signals
used when alternating the rotation direction of the motor. To enable the macro, set the
value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 3 (ALTERNATE).

X1A
2 AI1 Motor speed reference: 0…10 V
1…10 kohm
3)
12 DI1 Start forward: If DI1 = DI2, the drive stops.
13 DI2 Start reverse
X1B
19 RONO
22 DOGND
1) See parameter group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS: 2) 0 = ramp times according to parameters 2202 and
2203.
DI3 DI4 Operation (parameter) 1 = ramp times according to parameters 2205 and
0 0 Set speed through AI1 2206.
1 0 Speed 1 (1202) 3) 360 degree grounding under a clamp.
0 1 Speed 2 (1203) Tightening torque: 0.4 N·m / 3.5 lbf·in.
1 1 Speed 3 (1204) Safe torque off connections (X1C:STO; not shown in
the diagram) are jumpered by default.
Motor potentiometer macro

This macro provides a cost-effective interface for PLCs that vary the speed of the
motor using only digital signals. To enable the macro, set the value of parameter 9902
APPLIC MACRO to 4 (MOTOR POT).

X1A
2)
14 DI3 Speed reference up 1)
15 DI4 Speed reference down 1)
16 DI5 Constant speed 1: parameter 1202
X1B
19 RONO
22 DOGND
1) If DI3 and DI4 are both active or inactive, the 2) 360 degree grounding under a clamp.
speed reference is unchanged. Tightening torque: 0.4 N·m / 3.5 lbf·in.
The existing speed reference is stored during stop Safe torque off connections (X1C:STO; not shown in
and power down. the diagram) are jumpered by default.
Hand/Auto macro
This macro can be used when switching between two external control devices is
needed. To enable the macro, set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to
5 (HAND/AUTO).
Note: Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting 0 (OFF).

X1A
2 AI1 Motor speed reference (Hand): 0…10 V
1…10 kohm
5 AI2 Motor speed reference (Auto): 0…20 mA 2)
max. 500 ohm
1)
12 DI1 Stop (0) / Start (1) (Hand)
13 DI2 Forward (0) / Reverse (1) (Hand)
14 DI3 Hand (0) / Auto (1) control selection
15 DI4 Forward (0) / Reverse (1) (Auto)
16 DI5 Stop (0) / Start (1) (Auto)
X1B
19 RONO
22 DOGND
1)
360 degree grounding under a clamp. Tightening torque: 0.4 N·m / 3.5 lbf·in.
2)
The signal source is powered externally. See the Safe torque off connections (X1C:STO; not shown in
manufacturer’s instructions. To use sensors the diagram) are jumpered by default.
supplied by the drive aux. voltage output, see page
55.
PID control macro

This macro provides parameter settings for closed-loop control systems such as
pressure control, flow control, etc. Control can also be switched to speed control
using a digital input. To enable the macro, set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC
MACRO to 6 (PID CONTROL).
Note: The default I/O connections described below are applicable to firmware version
5.050 or later. For the default values in earlier firmware versions, see Revision A of
this user’s manual.
Note: Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting 0 (OFF).

X1A
2 AI1 Proc. ref. (PID) / Motor freq. ref. (Hand): 0…10 V 1)
1…10 kohm
5 AI2 Process actual value: 4…20 mA 3)
max. 500 ohm
2)
12 DI1 Stop (0) / Start (1) (PID)
13 DI2 PID (0) / Hand (1) control selection
15 DI4 Run enable
16 DI5 Stop (0) / Start (1) (Hand)
X1B
19 RONO
22 DOGND
1)
Hand: 0…10 V -> speed reference. supplied by the drive aux. voltage output, see page
PID: 0…10 V -> 0…100% PID setpoint. 55.
2) 360 degree grounding under a clamp.
Tightening torque: 0.4 N·m / 3.5 lbf·in.
3) The signal source is powered externally. See the Safe torque off connections (X1C:STO; not shown in
manufacturer’s instructions. To use sensors the diagram) are jumpered by default.
Torque control macro

This macro provides parameter settings for applications that require torque control of
the motor. Control can also be switched to speed control using a digital input. To
enable the macro, set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 8 (TORQUE
CTRL).

X1A
2 AI1 Motor speed reference (Speed): 0…10 V
1…10 kohm
5 AI2 Motor torque reference (Torque): 4…20 mA 4)
max. 500 ohm
3)
12 DI1 Stop (0) / Start (1) (Speed)
13 DI2 Forward (0) / Reverse (1) 1)
14 DI3 Speed (0) / Torque (1) control selection
X1B
19 RONO
22 DOGND
1) Speed control: 4) The signal source is powered externally. See the

Changes rotation direction.
Torque control: Changes torque direction. manufacturer’s instructions. To use sensors
2) supplied by the drive aux. voltage output, see page
0 = ramp times according to parameters 2202 and
2203. 55.
1 = ramp times according to parameters 2205 and Tightening torque: 0.4 N·m / 3.5 lbf·in.
2206. Safe torque off connections (X1C:STO; not shown in
3)
360 degree grounding under a clamp. the diagram) are jumpered by default.
AC500 Modbus macro

The AC500 Modbus application macro configures the ACS355 drive communication
and control parameters to be applicable with the pre-engineered Starter kit for
AC500-eCo PLC and ACS355 drive over STD Modbus connection (FMBA-01
adapter).
The macro is available in ACS355 drives with firmware version 5.03C or later.
To activate the macro, set parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to AC500 MODBUS
(10).
AC500-eCo PLC
Modbus
Other
Drive devices
FMBA-01
Drive
X3
FMBA-01
adapter
Data flow
Control word (CW)
References
Process I/O (cyclic)
Status word (SW)
Actual values
Parameter R/W Service messages
requests/responses (acyclic)
The AC500 Modbus application macro default values for the drive parameters
correspond to the ABB standard macro (parameter 9902, value 1 (ABB STANDARD),
see section ABB standard macro on page 110), with the following differences:
No. Name Default value
1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 10 (COMM)
1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL 8 (COMM)
1103 REF1 SELECT 8 (COMM)
1604 FAULT RESET SEL 8 (COMM)
2201 ACC/DEC 1/2 SEL 0 (NOT SEL)
3018 COMM FAULT FUNC 1 (FAULT)
5302 EFB STATION ID 2
5303 EFB BAUD RATE 192 (19.2 kb/s)
5304 EFB PARITY 1 (8 NONE 1)
5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE 2 (ABB DRV FULL)
5310 EFB PAR 10 101
5311 EFB PAR 11 303
5312 EFB PAR 12 305
9802 COMM PROT SEL 1 (STD MODBUS)
Note: The default slave address of the drive is 2 (parameter 5303 EFB STATION ID),
but if several drives are used, the address must be unique for each drive.
For more information regarding the Starter kit configuration, please refer to
AC500-eCo and ACS355 quick installation guide (2CDC125145M0201 [English]),
and ACS355 and AC500-eCo application guide (2CDC125152M0201 [English]).
User macros
In addition to the standard application macros, it is possible to create three user
macros. The user macro allows the user to save the parameter settings, including
group 99 START-UP DATA, and the results of the motor identification into the
permanent memory and recall the data at a later time. The panel reference is also
saved if the macro is saved and loaded in local control. The remote control setting is
saved into the user macro, but the local control setting is not.
The steps below show how to create and recall User macro 1. The procedure for the
other two macros is identical, only the parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO values are
different.
To create User macro 1:
• Adjust the parameters. Perform the motor identification if it is needed in the
application but it is not done yet.
• Save the parameter settings and the results of the motor identification to the
permanent memory by changing parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to -1 (USER
S1 SAVE).
MENU
SAVE ENTER
• Press (assistant control panel) or (basic control panel) to save.
To recall User macro 1:

• Change parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 0 (USER S1 LOAD).
MENU
SAVE ENTER
• Press (assistant control panel) or (basic control panel) to load.
The user macro can also be switched through digital inputs (see parameter 1605
USER PAR SET CHG).
Note: User macro load restores the parameter settings, including group 99 START-
UP DATA and the results of the motor identification. Check that the settings
correspond to the motor used.
Hint: The user can, for example, switch the drive between three motors without
having to adjust the motor parameters and to repeat the motor identification every
time the motor is changed. The user needs only to adjust the settings and perform the
motor identification once for each motor and then to save the data as three user
macros. When the motor is changed, only the corresponding user macro needs to be
loaded, and the drive is ready to operate.
Program features 121
11
Program features
The chapter describes program features. For each feature, there is a list of related
user settings, actual signals, and fault and alarm messages.
Start-up assistant
 Introduction
The Start-up assistant (requires the assistant control panel) guides the user through
the start-up procedure, helping to enter the requested data (parameter values) to the
drive. The Start-up assistant also checks that the entered values are valid, ie, within
the allowed range.
The Start-up assistant calls other assistants, each of which guides the user through
the task of specifying a related parameter set. At the first start, the drive suggests
entering the first task, Language select, automatically. The user may activate the
tasks either one after the other as the Start-up assistant suggests, or independently.
The user may also adjust the drive parameters in the conventional way without using
the assistant at all.
See section Assistants mode on page 96 for how to start the Start-up assistant or
other assistants.
122 Program features
 Default order of the tasks

Depending on the selection made in the Application task (parameter 9902 APPLIC
MACRO), the Start-up assistant decides which consequent tasks it suggests. The
default tasks are shown in the table below.
Application selection Default tasks

ABB STANDARD Language select, Motor set-up, Application, Option modules, Speed
control EXT1, Speed control EXT2, Start/Stop control, Timed
functions, Protections, Output signals
3-WIRE Language select, Motor set-up, Application, Option modules, Speed
ALTERNATE Language select, Motor set-up, Application, Option modules, Speed
MOTOR POT Language select, Motor set-up, Application, Option modules, Speed
HAND/AUTO Language select, Motor set-up, Application, Option modules, Speed
PID CONTROL Language select, Motor set-up, Application, Option modules, PID
control, Speed control EXT2, Start/Stop control, Timed functions,
Protections, Output signals
TORQUE CTRL Language select, Motor set-up, Application, Option modules, Speed
control EXT2, Start/Stop control, Timed functions, Protections,
Output signals
AC500 MODBUS Language select, Motor set-up, Application, Option modules, Speed
 List of the tasks and the relevant drive parameters

Depending on the selection made in the Application task (parameter 9902 APPLIC
MACRO), the Start-up assistant decides which consequent tasks it suggests.
Name Description Set parameters
Language select Selecting the language 9901
Motor set-up Setting the motor data 9904…9909
Performing the motor identification. (If the 9910
speed limits are not in the allowed range:
Setting the limits.)
Application Selecting the application macro 9902, parameters
associated to the macro
Option modules Activating the option modules Group 35 MOTOR TEMP
MEAS, group 52 PANEL
COMM
9802
Speed control EXT1 Selecting the source for the speed 1103
reference
(If AI1 is used: Setting analog input AI1 (1301…1303, 3001)
limits, scale, inversion)
Setting the reference limits 1104, 1105
Setting the speed (frequency) limits 2001, 2002 (2007, 2008)
Setting the acceleration and deceleration 2202, 2203
times
Speed control EXT2 Selecting the source for the speed 1106
reference
Torque control Selecting the source for the torque 1106
reference
PID control Selecting the source for the process 1106
reference
Setting the speed (frequency) limits 2001, 2002 (2007, 2008)
Setting the source and limits for the 4016, 4018, 4019
process actual value
Name Description Set parameters

Start/Stop control Selecting the source for start and stop 1001, 1002
signals of the two external control
locations, EXT1 and EXT2
Selecting between EXT1 and EXT2 1102
Defining the direction control 1003
Defining the start and stop modes 2101…2103
Selecting the use of Run enable signal 1601
Protections Setting the current and torque limits 2003, 2017
Output signals Selecting the signals indicated through Group 14 RELAY
relay output RO1 and, if MREL-01 output OUTPUTS
relay module is in use, RO2…RO4.
Selecting the signals indicated through Group 15 ANALOG
analog output AO OUTPUTS
Setting the minimum, maximum, scaling
and inversion
Timed functions Setting the timed functions Group 36 TIMED
FUNCTIONS
Selecting the timed start/stop control for 1001, 1002
external control locations EXT1 and EXT2
Selecting timed EXT1/EXT2 control 1102
Activation of timed constant speed 1 1201
Selecting timed function status indicated 1401…1403, 1410
through relay output RO1 or, if MREL-01
output relay module is in use, RO2…RO4.
Selecting timed PID1 parameter set 1/2 4027
control
 Contents of the assistant displays

There are two types of displays in the Start-up assistant: Main displays and
information displays. The main displays prompt the user to feed in information. The
assistant steps through the main displays. The information displays contain help texts
for the main displays. The figure below shows a typical example of both and
explanations of the contents.
Main display Information display
REM PAR EDIT LOC HELP

Set exactly as given
9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT on the motor
1 220 V nameplate
2 If connected to
multiple motors
CANCEL 00:00 SAVE EXIT 00:00
1 Parameter Help text …

2 Feed-in field … help text continued
Local control vs. external control

The drive can receive start, stop and direction commands and reference values from
the control panel or through digital and analog inputs. Embedded fieldbus or an
optional fieldbus adapter enables control over an open fieldbus link. A PC equipped
with the DriveWindow Light 2 PC tool can also control the drive.
Local control Drive External control
Panel Panel
connection (X2) connection (X2)
or Embedded
FMBA adapter fieldbus
Control panel connected to X3 (Modbus*)
or Fieldbus adapter Fieldbus
PC tool connection (X3) adapter
Standard I/O
Potentiometer
* With SREA-01 Ethernet adapter module it is possible to use Modbus TCP/IP with the Ethernet. For
more information, see SREA-01 Ethernet adapter module user’s manual (3AUA0000042896 [English]).
 Local control
The control commands are given from the control panel keypad when the drive is in
local control. LOC indicates local control on the panel display.
Assistant control panel Basic control panel
LOC 49.1Hz
49.1 Hz
491
LOC
0.5 A . Hz
10.7 % OUTPUT FWD

DIR 00:00 MENU
The control panel always overrides the external control signal sources when used in
local control.
 External control
When the drive is in external (remote) control, the commands are given through the
standard I/O terminals (digital and analog inputs) and/or the fieldbus interface. In
addition, it is also possible to set the control panel as the source for the external
control.
External control is indicated with REM on the panel display.
Assistant control panel Basic control panel
REM 49.1Hz
49.1 Hz
0.5 A
10.7 %
REM
OUTPUT
491
. FWD
Hz
DIR 00:00 MENU
The user can connect the control signals to two external control locations, EXT1 or
EXT2. Depending on the user selection, either one is active at a time. This function
operates on a 2 ms time level.
 Settings
Panel key Additional information
LOC/REM Selection between local and external (remote) control
Parameter
1102 Selection between EXT1 and EXT2
1001/1002 Start, stop, direction source for EXT1/EXT2
1103/1106 Reference source for EXT1/EXT2
 Diagnostics
Actual signal Additional information
0111/0112 EXT1/EXT2 reference
 Block diagram: Start, stop, direction source for EXT1

The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for start, stop, and
direction for external control location EXT1.
DI1 Select
DI1
DI5 EXT1
DI5 Start/stop/
direction
Fieldbus selection
See chapters COMM
Embedded fieldbus Fieldbus control with
embedded fieldbus 1001
Fieldbus adapter on page 313 and
Fieldbus control with
fieldbus adapter on
page 339.
Control panel KEYPAD
Timed function TIMED FUNC 1…4
Timer/Counter START/STOP
Sequence SEQ PROG

programming
 Block diagram: Reference source for EXT1

The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for the speed
reference of external control location EXT1.
Select
AI1 AI1, AI2, DI3, DI4, DI5
AI2 EXT1
DI3 Reference
Fieldbus selection REF1
DI4 See chapters (Hz/rpm)
DI5 Fieldbus control with COMM
Embedded fieldbus embedded fieldbus
on page 313 and 1103
Fieldbus adapter fieldbus adapter on
page 339.
Frequency input FREQ INPUT
Control panel KEYPAD
Sequence SEQ PROG

programming
Reference types and processing

The drive can accept a variety of references in addition to the conventional analog
input and control panel signals.
• The drive reference can be given with two digital inputs: One digital input
increases the speed, the other decreases it.
• The drive can form a reference out of two analog input signals by using
mathematical functions: addition, subtraction, multiplication and division.
• The drive can form a reference out of an analog input signal and a signal received
through a serial communication interface by using mathematical functions:
addition and multiplication.
• The drive reference can be given with frequency input.
• In external control location EXT1/2, the drive can form a reference out of an
analog input signal and a signal received through Sequence programming by
using a mathematical function: addition.
It is possible to scale the external reference so that the signal minimum and
maximum values correspond to a speed other than the minimum and maximum
speed limits.
 Settings
Parameter Additional information
Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT External reference source, type and scaling
Group 20 LIMITS Operating limits
Group 22 ACCEL/DECEL Speed reference acceleration/deceleration ramps
Group 24 TORQUE CONTROL Torque reference ramp times
Group 32 SUPERVISION Reference supervision
 Diagnostics
0111/0112 REF1/REF2 reference
Group 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS References in different stages of the reference
processing chain
Reference trimming
In reference trimming, the external reference is corrected depending on the
measured value of a secondary application variable. The block diagram below
illustrates the function.
1105 REF1 MAX /

1108 REF2 MA 2)
Switch3) Select
Switch
max. 2 (DIRECT)
freq REF1 1
(Hz/rpm) / (PROPORTION
max. REF2 (%)1) AL)
speed REF1 (Hz/rpm) /
0 0 (NOT SEL) REF2 (%)1) Add
REF’
9904 Switch Mul.
MOTOR CTRL 4230 Mul.
MODE
max. 4231 TRIM SCALE

torque
4233
TRIM
SELECTION 1) Switch
PID2 ref PID2

PID2
PID2 act output
4232 CORRECTION SRC
REF1 (Hz/rpm) / REF2 (%) = Drive reference before trimming

REF’ = Drive reference after trimming
max. speed = par. 2002 (or 2001 if the absolute value is greater)
max. freq = par. 2008 (or 2007 if the absolute value is greater)
max. torque = par. 2014 (or 2013 if the absolute value is greater)
PID2 ref = par. 4210
PID2 act = par. 4214…4221
1) Note: Torque reference trimming is only for external reference REF2 (%)
2)
REF1 or REF2 depending on which is active. See parameter 1102.
3) When par. 4232 = PID2REF, the maximum trimming reference is defined by parameter
1105 when REF1 is active and by parameter 1108 when REF2 is active.
When par. 4232 = PID2OUTPUT, the maximum trimming reference is defined by parameter
2002 if parameter 9904 value is VECTOR: SPEED or VECTOR: TORQ and by parameter
2008 value if parameter 9904 value is SCALAR: FREQ.
 Settings
1102 REF1/2 selection
4230 …4232 Trimming function settings
4201 …4229 PID control settings
Group 20 LIMITS Drive operation limits
 Example
The drive runs a conveyor line. It is speed controlled but the line tension also needs
to be taken into account: If the measured tension exceeds the tension setpoint, the
speed will be slightly decreased, and vice versa.
To accomplish the desired speed correction, the user
• activates the trimming function and connects the tension setpoint and the
measured tension to it.
• tunes the trimming to a suitable level.
Speed controlled conveyor line
Drive rollers (pull)

Tension measurement
Simplified block diagram

Add
Speed reference Trimmed speed
PID reference
Tension
measurement
Tension
setpoint
Programmable analog inputs

The drive has two programmable analog voltage/current inputs. The inputs can be
inverted, filtered and the maximum and minimum values can be adjusted. The update
cycle for the analog input is 8 ms (12 ms cycle once per second). The cycle time is
shorter when information is transferred to the application program (8 ms -> 2 ms).
 Settings
Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT AI as reference source
Group 13 ANALOG INPUTS Analog input processing
3001, 3021, 3022, 3107 AI loss supervision
Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS AI in motor temperature measurement
Groups 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 AI as PID process control reference or actual value
…42 EXT / TRIM PID source
8420, 8425, 8426 AI as Sequence programming reference or trigger
8430, 8435, 8436 signal
…
8490, 8495, 8496
 Diagnostics
0120, 0121 Analog input values
1401 AI1/AI2 signal loss through RO 1
1402/1403/1410 AI1/AI2 signal loss through RO 2…4. With option
MREL-01 only.
Alarm
AI1 LOSS / AI2 LOSS AI1/AI2 signal below limit 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT /
3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT
Fault
AI1 LOSS / AI2 LOSS AI1/AI2 signal below limit 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT /
3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT
PAR AI SCALE Incorrect AI signal scaling (1302 < 1301 or 1305 <
1304)
Programmable analog output

One programmable current output (0…20 mA) is available. Analog output signal can
be inverted, filtered and the maximum and minimum values can be adjusted. The
analog output signals can be proportional to motor speed, output frequency, output
current, motor torque, motor power, etc. The update cycle for the analog output is
2 ms.
Analog output can be controlled with Sequence programming. It is also possible to
write a value to an analog output through a serial communication link.
 Settings
Group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS AO value selection and processing
Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS AO in motor temperature measurement
8423/8433/…/8493 AO control with Sequence programming
 Diagnostics
0124 AO value
0170 AO control values defined by Sequence programming
Fault
PAR AO SCALE Incorrect AO signal scaling (1503 < 1502)
Programmable digital inputs

The drive has five programmable digital inputs. The update time for the digital inputs
is 2 ms.
One digital input (DI5) can be programmed as a frequency input. See section
Frequency input on page 135.
 Settings
Group 10 START/STOP/DIR DI as start, stop, direction
Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT DI in reference selection, or reference source
Group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS DI in constant speed selection
Group 16 SYSTEM CONTROLS DI as external Run enable, fault reset or user macro
change signal
Group 19 TIMER & COUNTER DI as timer or counter control signal source
2013, 2014 DI as torque limit source
2109 DI as external emergency stop command source
2201 DI as acceleration and deceleration ramp selection
signal
2209 DI as zero ramp force signal
3003 DI as external fault source
Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS DI in motor temperature measurement
3601 DI as timed function enable signal source
3622 DI as booster activation signal source
4010/4110/4210 DI as PID controller reference signal source
4022/4122 DI as sleep function activation signal in PID1
4027 DI as PID1 parameter set 1/2 selection signal source
4228 DI as external PID2 function activation signal source
Group 84 SEQUENCE PROG DI as Sequence programming control signal source
 Diagnostics
0160 DI status
0414 DI status at the time the latest fault occurred
Programmable relay output

The drive has one programmable relay output. It is possible to add three additional
relay outputs with the optional MREL-01 output relay module. For more information,
see MREL-01 output relay module user's manual (3AUA0000035974 [English]).
With a parameter setting it is possible to choose what information to indicate through
the relay output: Ready, running, fault, alarm, etc. The update time for the relay
output is 2 ms.
A value can be written to a relay output through a serial communication link.
 Settings
Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS RO value selections and operation times
8423 RO control with Sequence programming
 Diagnostics
0134 RO Control word through fieldbus control
0162 RO 1 status
0173 RO 2…4 status. With option MREL-01 only.
Frequency input
Digital input DI5 can be programmed as a frequency input. Frequency input
(0…16000 Hz) can be used as the external reference signal source. The update time
for the frequency input is 50 ms. Update time is shorter when information is
transferred to the application program (50 ms -> 2 ms).
 Settings
Group 18 FREQ IN & TRAN OUT Frequency input minimum and maximum values and
filtering
1103/1106 External reference REF1/2 through frequency input
4010, 4110, 4210 Frequency input as PID reference source
 Diagnostics
0161 Frequency input value
Transistor output
The drive has one programmable transistor output. The output can be used either as
a digital output or frequency output (0…16000 Hz). The update time for the
transistor/frequency output is 2 ms.
 Settings
Group 18 FREQ IN & TRAN OUT Transistor output settings
8423 Transistor output control with Sequence programming
 Diagnostics
0163 Transistor output status
0164 Transistor output frequency
Actual signals
Several actual signals are available:
• Drive output frequency, current, voltage and power
• Motor speed and torque
• Intermediate circuit DC voltage
• Active control location (LOCAL, EXT1 or EXT2)
• Reference values
• Drive temperature
• Operating time counter (h), kWh counter
• Digital I/O and analog I/O status
• PID controller actual values.
Three signals can be shown simultaneously on the assistant control panel display
(one signal on the basic control panel display). It is also possible to read the values
through the serial communication link or through the analog outputs.
 Settings
1501 Selection of an actual signal to AO
1808 Selection of an actual signal to frequency output
Group 32 SUPERVISION Actual signal supervision
Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY Selection of an actual signals to be displayed on the
control panel
 Diagnostics
Groups 01 OPERATING DATA … Lists of actual signals
04 FAULT HISTORY
Motor identification
The performance of vector control is based on an accurate motor model determined
during the motor start-up.
A motor Identification magnetization is automatically performed the first time the start
command is given. During this first start-up, the motor is magnetized at zero speed
for several seconds to allow the motor model to be created. This identification method
is suitable for most applications.
In demanding applications a separate Identification run (ID run) can be performed.
 Settings
Parameter 9910 ID RUN
Power loss ride-through

If the incoming supply voltage is cut off, the drive will continue to operate by utilizing
the kinetic energy of the rotating motor. The drive will be fully operational as long as
the motor rotates and generates energy to the drive. The drive can continue the
operation after the break if the main contactor remained closed.
Uinput power
TM fout UDC
(N·m) (Hz) (Vdc) UDC
160 80 520
120 60 390
fout
80 40 260
TM
40 20 130
0 0 0 t (s)
1.6 4.8 8 11.2 14.4
UDC = Intermediate circuit voltage of the drive, fout = Output frequency of the drive,
TM = Motor torque
Loss of supply voltage at nominal load (fout = 40 Hz). The intermediate circuit DC voltage
drops to the minimum limit. The controller keeps the voltage steady as long as the input
power is switched off. The drive runs the motor in generator mode. The motor speed falls but
the drive is operational as long as the motor has enough kinetic energy.
 Settings
Parameter 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL
DC magnetizing
When DC magnetizing is activated, the drive automatically magnetizes the motor
before starting. This feature guarantees the highest possible break-away torque, up
to 180% of the motor nominal torque. By adjusting the premagnetizing time, it is
possible to synchronize the motor start and, eg, a mechanical brake release. The
Automatic start feature and DC magnetizing cannot be activated at the same time.
 Settings
Parameters 2101 START FUNCTION and 2103 DC MAGN TIME
Maintenance trigger
A maintenance trigger can be activated to show a notice on the panel display when,
eg, drive power consumption has exceeded the defined trigger point.
 Settings
Parameter group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG
DC hold
With the motor DC hold feature, it is possible Motor speed
to lock the rotor at zero speed. When both the DC hold
reference and the motor speed fall below the
preset DC hold speed, the drive stops the DC hold
motor and starts to inject DC into the motor. speed
t (s)
When the reference speed again exceeds the
DC hold speed, the normal drive operation Speed reference
resumes.
 Settings DC hold
speed
t (s)
Parameters 2101…2106
Speed compensated stop

Speed compensation stop is available, for
example, for applications where a conveyor Motor speed
needs to travel a certain distance after Stop command
receiving the stop command. At maximum Max. area A = area B
speed, the motor is stopped normally along speed
the defined deceleration ramp. Below A
maximum speed, stop is delayed by running Used
the drive at current speed before the motor is speed
ramped to a stop. As shown in the figure, the B
distance traveled after the stop command is t (s)
the same in both cases, that is, area A equals
area B.
Speed compensation can be restricted to forward or reverse rotating direction.
Note: The speed compensated stop feature is active only when the used speed is
more than 10% of the maximum speed.
 Settings
Parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION
Flux braking
The drive can provide greater deceleration by raising the level of magnetization in the
motor. By increasing the motor flux, the energy generated by the motor during
braking can be converted to motor thermal energy.
TBr
Motor speed (%)
TN
TBr = Braking torque
TN = 100 N·m
No Flux braking 60
Flux braking
40
Flux braking 20
No Flux braking
t (s) f (Hz)
50 Hz / 60 Hz
Braking torque (%) Rated

Flux braking motor power
100
1 1 7.5 kW
80 2 2.2 kW
3 0.37 kW
60
2
40
3
20
0 f (Hz)
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45
Braking torque (%)
No Flux braking
100
80
1
60
40
2
20 3
0 f (Hz)
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45
The drive monitors the motor status continuously, also during the Flux braking.
Therefore, Flux braking can be used both for stopping the motor and for changing the
speed. The other benefits of Flux braking are:
• The braking starts immediately after a stop command is given. The function does
not need to wait for the flux reduction before it can start the braking.
• The cooling of the motor is efficient. The stator current of the motor increases
during the Flux braking, not the rotor current. The stator cools much more
efficiently than the rotor.
 Settings
Parameter 2602 FLUX BRAKING
Flux optimization
Flux optimization reduces the total energy consumption and motor noise level when
the drive operates below the nominal load. The total efficiency (motor and the drive)
can be improved by 1% to 10%, depending on the load torque and speed.
 Settings
Parameter 2601 FLUX OPT ENABLE
Acceleration and deceleration ramps

Two user-selectable acceleration and
Motor speed
deceleration ramps are available. It is possible to
adjust the acceleration/deceleration times and Linear
the ramp shape. Switching between the two
ramps can be controlled through a digital input or
fieldbus.
S-curve
The available ramp shape alternatives are
Linear and S-curve.
Linear shape is suitable for drives requiring t (s)
steady or slow acceleration/deceleration. 2
S-curve shape is ideal for conveyors carrying fragile loads, or other applications
where a smooth transition is required when changing the speed.
 Settings
Parameter group 22 ACCEL/DECEL
Sequence programming offers eight additional ramp times. See section Sequence
programming on page 169.
Critical speeds
Critical speeds function is available for applications where it is necessary to avoid
certain motor speeds or speed bands because of, eg, mechanical resonance
problems. The user can define three critical speeds or speed bands.
 Settings
Parameter group 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS
Constant speeds
It is possible to define seven positive constant speeds. Constant speeds are selected
with digital inputs. Constant speed activation overrides the external speed reference.
Constant speed selections are ignored if
• torque control is active, or
• PID reference is being followed, or
• drive is in local control mode.
This function operates on a 2 ms time level.
 Settings
Group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS Constant speed settings
1207 Constant speed 6. Used also for jogging function. See
section Jogging on page 162.
1208 Constant speed 7. Used also for fault functions (see group
30 FAULT FUNCTIONS) and for jogging function (see
section Jogging on page 162).
Custom U/f ratio

The user can define a U/f curve (output voltage as a function of frequency). This
custom ratio is used only in special applications where linear and squared U/f ratio
are not sufficient (eg, when motor break-away torque needs to be boosted).
Voltage (V) Custom U/f ratio
Par. 2618
Par. 2616
Par. 2614
Par. 2612
Par. 2610
Par. 2603
f (Hz)
Par. 2611 Par. 2613 Par. 2615 Par. 2617 Par. 9907
Note: The U/f curve can be used in scalar control only, ie, when 9904 MOTOR CTRL
MODE setting is SCALAR: FREQ.
Note: The voltage and the frequency points of the U/f curve must fulfill the following
requirements:
2610 < 2612 < 2614 < 2616 < 2618 and
2611 < 2613 < 2615 < 2617 < 9907
WARNING! High voltage at low frequencies may result in poor performance or

motor damage (overheating).
 Settings
2605 Custom U/f ratio activation
2610…2618 Custom U/f ratio settings
 Diagnostics
Fault Additional information
PAR USER U/F Incorrect U/f ratio
Speed controller tuning

It is possible to manually adjust the controller gain, integration time and derivation
time, or let the drive perform a separate speed controller Autotune run (parameter
2305 AUTOTUNE RUN). In Autotune run, the speed controller is tuned based on the
load and inertia of the motor and the machine. The figure below shows speed
responses at a speed reference step (typically, 1 to 20%).
n
nN (%)
A B C D
t
A: Undercompensated
B: Normally tuned (autotuning)
C: Normally tuned (manually). Better dynamic performance than with B
D: Overcompensated speed controller
The figure below is a simplified block diagram of the speed controller. The controller
output is the reference for the torque controller.
Derivative
acceleration
compensation
Proportional,
integral +
Speed + Error + Torque
reference - value + reference
Derivative
Calculated actual speed
Note: The speed controller can be used in vector control, ie, when 9904 MOTOR
CTRL MODE setting is VECTOR: SPEED or VECTOR: TORQ.
 Settings
Parameter groups 23 SPEED CONTROL and 20 LIMITS
 Diagnostics
Actual signal 0102 SPEED
Speed control performance figures

The table below shows typical performance figures for speed control.
T (%)
TN
Tload
100
Speed No pulse With pulse
control encoder encoder
Static 20% of motor 2% of motor
accuracy nominal slip nominal slip t (s)
Dynamic < 1% s with < 1% s with
accuracy 100% torque 100% torque
nact-nref Area < 1% s
step step
nN
TN = rated motor torque
nN = rated motor speed
nact = actual speed
nref = speed reference
Torque control performance figures

The drive can perform precise torque control without any speed feedback from the
motor shaft. The table below shows typical performance figures for torque control.
T (%)
TN Tref
Torque No pulse With pulse 100
Tact
control encoder encoder 90
Non-linearity ± 5% with ± 5% with
nominal nominal
torque torque
(± 20% at the
most
demanding
operating
point)
Torque step < 10 ms with < 10 ms with 10 t (s)
rise time nominal nominal
torque torque < 5 ms
TN = rated motor torque
Tref = torque reference
Tact = actual torque
Scalar control
It is possible to select scalar control as the motor control method instead of vector
control. In the scalar control mode, the drive is controlled with a frequency reference.
It is recommended to activate the scalar control mode in the following special
applications:
• In multimotor drives: 1) if the load is not equally shared between the motors,
2) if the motors are of different sizes, or 3) if the motors are going to be changed
after the motor identification.
• If the nominal motor current is less than 20% of the nominal output current of the
drive.
• When the drive is used for test purposes with no motor connected.
The scalar control mode is not recommended for permanent magnet synchronous
motors.
In the scalar control mode, some standard features are not available.
 Settings
Parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE
IR compensation for a scalar controlled drive

IR compensation is active only when the motor
control mode is scalar (see section Scalar Motor voltage
control on page 146). When IR compensation is
IR compensation
activated, the drive gives an extra voltage boost
to the motor at low speeds. IR compensation is
useful in applications that require high break-
away torque. In vector control, no IR No compensation
compensation is possible/needed.
f (Hz)
 Settings
Parameter 2603 IR COMP VOLT
Programmable protection functions

 AI<Min
AI<Min function defines the drive operation if an analog input signal falls below the
set minimum limit.
Settings
Parameters 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION, 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT and 3022 AI2 FAULT
LIMIT
 Panel loss
Panel loss function defines the operation of the drive if the control panel selected as
the control location for the drive stops communicating.
Settings
Parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR
 External fault
External faults (1 and 2) can be supervised by defining one digital input as a source
for an external fault indication signal.
Settings
Parameters 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 and 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2
 Stall protection
The drive protects the motor in a stall situation. It is possible to adjust the supervision
limits (frequency, time) and choose how the drive reacts to the motor stall condition
(alarm indication / fault indication & drive stop / no reaction).
Settings
Parameters 3010 STALL FUNCTION, 3011 STALL FREQUENCY and 3012 STALL
TIME
 Motor thermal protection

The motor can be protected against overheating by activating the Motor thermal
protection function.
The drive calculates the temperature of the motor on the basis of the following
assumptions:
• The motor is in the ambient temperature of 30 °C (86 °F) when power is applied to
the drive.
• Motor temperature is calculated using either the user-adjustable or automatically
calculated motor thermal time constant and motor load curve (see the figures
below). The load curve should be adjusted if the ambient temperature exceeds
30 °C (86 °F).
Motor
load
100% Output current relative (%) to
nominal motor current
150
Break point
t
Motor load curve
Temp. P 3007 100 =
rise 127%
100%
P 3008 50
63% Zero speed load
t f
P 3009
}
Motor thermal time constant
Settings
Parameters 3005 MOT THERM PROT, 3006 MOT THERM TIME, 3007 MOT LOAD
CURVE, 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD and 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ
Note: It is also possible to use the motor temperature measurement function. See
section Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O on page 157.
 Underload protection
Loss of motor load may indicate a process malfunction. The drive provides an
underload function to protect the machinery and process in such a serious fault
condition. Supervision limits - underload curve and underload time - can be specified
as well as the action taken by the drive upon the underload condition (alarm
indication / fault indication & drive stop / no reaction).
Settings
Parameters 3013 UNDERLOAD FUNC, 3014 UNDERLOAD TIME and 3015
UNDERLOAD CURVE
 Earth fault protection

The Earth fault protection detects earth faults in the motor or motor cable. The
protection can be selected to be active during start and run or during start only.
An earth fault in the input power line does not activate the protection.
Settings
Parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT
 Incorrect wiring
Defines the operation when incorrect input power cable connection is detected.
Settings
Parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT
 Input phase loss

Input phase loss protection circuits supervise the input power cable connection status
by detecting intermediate circuit ripple. If a phase is lost, the ripple increases.
Settings
Parameter 3016 SUPPLY PHASE
Pre-programmed faults
 Overcurrent
The overcurrent trip limit for the drive is 325% of the drive nominal current.
 DC overvoltage
The DC overvoltage trip limit is 420 V (for 200 V drives) and 840 V (for 400 V drives).
 DC undervoltage
The DC undervoltage trip limit is adaptive. See parameter 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL.
 Drive temperature
The drive supervises the IGBT temperature. There are two supervision limits: Alarm
limit and fault trip limit.
 Short-circuit
If a short-circuit occurs, the drive will not start and a fault indication is given.
 Internal fault
If the drive detects an internal fault, the drive is stopped and a fault indication is given.
Operation limits
The drive has adjustable limits for speed, current (maximum), torque (maximum) and
DC voltage.
 Settings
Parameter group 20 LIMITS
Power limit
Power limitation is used to protect the input bridge and the DC intermediate circuit.
If the maximum allowed power is exceeded, the drive torque is automatically limited.
Maximum overload and continuous power limits depend on the drive hardware.
For specific values, see chapter Technical data on page 373.
Automatic resets
The drive can automatically reset itself after overcurrent, overvoltage, undervoltage,
external and “analog input below a minimum” faults. The Automatic resets must be
activated by the user.
 Settings
Group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET Automatic reset settings
 Diagnostics
Alarm Additional information
AUTORESET Automatic reset alarm
Supervisions
The drive monitors whether certain user selectable variables are within the user-
defined limits. The user may set limits for speed, current etc. The supervision status
can be indicated through relay or digital output.
The supervision functions operate on a 2 ms time level.
 Settings
Parameter group 32 SUPERVISION
 Diagnostics
1401 Supervision status through RO 1
1402/1403/1410 Supervision status through RO 2…4. With option
MREL-01 only.
1805 Supervision status through DO
8425, 8426 / 8435, 8436 /…/8495, Sequence programming state change according to
8496 supervision functions
Parameter lock
The user can prevent parameter adjustment by activating the parameter lock.
 Settings
Parameters 1602 PARAMETER LOCK and 1603 PASS CODE
PID control
There are two built-in PID controllers in the drive:
• Process PID (PID1) and
• External/Trim PID (PID2).
The PID controller can be used when the motor speed needs to be controlled based
on process variables such as pressure, flow or temperature.
When the PID control is activated, a process reference (setpoint) is connected to the
drive instead of a speed reference. An actual value (process feedback) is also
brought back to the drive. The drive compares the reference and the actual values,
and automatically adjusts the drive speed in order to keep the measured process
quantity (actual value) at the desired level (reference).
The control operates on a 2 ms time level.
 Process controller PID1

PID1 has two separate sets of parameters (40 PROCESS PID SET 1, 41 PROCESS
PID SET 2). Selection between parameter sets 1 and 2 is defined by a parameter.
In most cases when there is only one transducer signal wired to the drive, only
parameter set 1 is needed. Two different parameter sets (1 and 2) are used, eg, when
the load of the motor changes considerably in time.
 External/Trim controller PID2

PID2 (42 EXT / TRIM PID) can be used in two different ways:
• External controller: Instead of using additional PID controller hardware, the user
can connect PID2 output through drive analog output or fieldbus controller to
control a field instrument like a damper or a valve.
• Trim controller: PID2 can be used to trim or fine tune the reference of the drive.
See section Reference trimming on page 130.
 Block diagrams
The figure below shows an application example: The controller adjusts the speed of a
pressure boost pump according to the measured pressure and the set pressure
reference.
Example: PID control block diagram

Pressure boost pump
PID
A C S 6 0 0
%ref ref
Drive 4001 k
A C T P A R F U N C D R IV E
4002 ti Switch Frequency

E N T E R
Actual values
L O C R E S E T R E F
4003 td
R E M
i
reference
3 4014
. 4004 dFiltT
.. Speed
4021 4005 errVInv reference
2 0 ...1 0 b a r
4 ...2 0 m A AI1
PIDmax oh1
AI2
PIDmin ol1 9904 = 0
3
IMOT
…
%ref = 4010
PID act
AI selection Switch
PID1
Current n controller Panel ref2
PID ACT
Torque value
Power PID1 Out
COMM ACT 4014…4021/
4141…4121* Local ref
controller PID1.
Group
1106 switch
Limiter 40/41*
Panel ref1 LOC
Panel ref2 LOC/REM
switch Alarm
500% speed
-500%
Speed
EXT1 ref REM
1101 ref
select Constant
speed Limiter
Panel ref1 Group 30
AI n Control panel
…
AI2+SEQ 1103 Group 12 Average speed
1104 Const speed 7
EXT2 ref
Constant
select speed
Panel ref2
AI n
… EXT1/EXT2
Group 12 switch
AI2+SEQ 1106
PID act Switch Limiter

AI selection PID1
Current n controller
PID ACT
Torque value
Power 1107 1102
4014…4021/ PID1 Out
COMM ACT
4114…4121* Group 1106
40/41*
PID1 ref Limiter
select
Panel ref2
n
AI
… *Parameter 4027 selects between PID parameter set 1 and 2, ie, group 40 and 41.
The following figure presents the speed/scalar control block diagram for process
SEQ PROG 4012,4013/

4010/4110* 4112,4113*
 Settings
1101 Local control mode reference type selection
1102 EXT1/EXT2 selection
1106 PID1 activation
1107 REF2 minimum limit
1501 PID2 output (external controller) connection to AO
9902 PID control macro selection
Groups 40 PROCESS PID SET PID1 settings
1…41 PROCESS PID SET 2
Group 42 EXT / TRIM PID PID2 settings
 Diagnostics
0126/0127 PID 1/2 output value
0128/0129 PID 1/2 setpoint value
0130/0131 PID 1/2 feedback value
0132/0133 PID 1/2 deviation
0170 AO value defined by Sequence programming
Sleep function for the process PID (PID1) control

The sleep function operates on a 2 ms time level.
The block diagram below illustrates the sleep function enable/disable logic. The sleep
function can be put into use only when the PID control is active.
Switch
Compare Select
Output 1 NOT SEL
frequency
Delay
Motor 1<2 INTERNAL
DI1
And
speed . t Set/Reset
4023 2 . 4022
.
9904 %refActive
& S 1)
MOTOR CTRL 4024
MODE PIDCtrlActive
modulating
S/R
R
Or
5320 (B1)
<1
5320 (B2)
Compare
Select Delay Or
0132 1 NOT SEL
1>2 INTERNAL t StartRq <1
4025 2 DI1
.
.
. 4022 4026 1) 1 = Activate sleeping
0 = Deactivate sleeping
Motor speed: Actual speed of the motor

%refActive: The % reference (EXT REF2) is in use. See parameter 1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL.
PIDCtrlActive: Parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO = PID CONTROL.
modulating: Drive IGBT control is operating.
 Example
The time scheme below visualizes the operation of the sleep function.
Motor speed
td = Sleep delay (4024)

t<td td
Control panel
display:
Sleep level
(4023) PID SLEEP
t
Stop Start
Actual value
Wake-up delay
(4026)
Wake-up deviation
(4025)
Sleep function for a PID controlled pressure boost pump (when parameter 4022
SLEEP SELECTION is set to INTERNAL): The water consumption falls at night. As a
consequence, the PID process controller decreases the motor speed. However, due
to natural losses in the pipes and the low efficiency of the centrifugal pump at low
speeds, the motor does not stop but keeps rotating. The sleep function detects the
slow rotation, and stops the unnecessary pumping after the sleep delay has passed.
The drive shifts into sleep mode, still monitoring the pressure. The pumping restarts
when the pressure falls under the allowed minimum level and the wake-up delay has
passed.
 Settings
9902 PID control activation
4022…4026, 4122…4126 Sleep function settings
 Diagnostics
1401 PID sleep function status through RO 1
1402/1403/1410 PID sleep function status through RO 2…4. With option
MREL-01 only.
Alarm Additional information
PID SLEEP Sleep mode
Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O

This section describes the temperature measurement of one motor when the drive
I/O terminals are used as the connection interface.
Motor temperature can be measured using Pt100 or PTC sensors connected to
analog input and output.
One sensor Three sensors

AI1
AI1
Motor Motor GND
GND
T
T T T
AO
AO
GND
GND
3.3 nF
3.3 nF
WARNING! According to IEC 60664, the connection of the motor temperature

sensor requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts and
the sensor. Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creepage distance of 8 mm
(0.3 in) (400/500 V AC equipment).
If the assembly does not fulfill the requirement, the I/O board terminals must be
protected against contact and they may not be connected to other equipment, or the
temperature sensor must be isolated from the I/O terminals.
It is also possible to monitor motor temperature by connecting a PTC sensor and

a thermistor relay between the +24 V DC voltage supply offered by the drive and a
digital input. The figure below displays the connection.
Par. 3501 = THERM(0) or THERM(1)

Thermistor
relay
DI1…5
+24 V DC
T
Motor
WARNING! According to IEC 60664, the connection of the motor thermistor to

the digital input requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live
parts and the thermistor. Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creeping
distance of 8 mm (0.3 in) (400/500 V AC equipment).
If the thermistor assembly does not fulfill the requirement, the other I/O terminals of
the drive must be protected against contact, or a thermistor relay must be used to
isolate the thermistor from the digital input.
 Settings
Group 13 ANALOG INPUTS Analog input settings
Group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS Analog output settings
Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS Motor temperature measurement settings
Other
At the motor end the cable shield should be grounded through, eg, a 3.3 nF capacitor. If this is
not possible, the shield is to be left unconnected.
 Diagnostics
0145 Motor temperature
Alarm/Fault Additional information
MOTOR TEMP/MOT OVERTEMP Excessive motor temp
Control of a mechanical brake

The mechanical brake is used for holding the motor and driven machinery at zero
speed when the drive is stopped, or not powered.
 Example
The figure below shows a brake control application example.
WARNING! Make sure that the machinery into which the drive with brake
control function is integrated fulfills the personnel safety regulations. Note that
the frequency converter (a Complete Drive Module or a Basic Drive Module, as
defined in IEC 61800-2), is not considered a safety device mentioned in the
European Machinery Directive and related harmonized standards. Thus, the
personnel safety of the complete machinery must not be based on a specific
frequency converter feature (such as the brake control function), but it has to be
implemented as defined in the application specific regulations.
Brake control logic is integrated Power supply

in the drive application X1B
program. The user has to take 230 VAC
care of the power supply and 17 ROCOM
wiring. 18 RONC
Brake on/off control is through
19 RONO
relay output RO.
Emergency
brake
Motor Mechanical brake

 Operation time scheme

The time scheme below illustrates the operation of the brake control function. See
also section State shifts on page 161.
1 4
Start command
External speed
reference
Inverter modulating
2
Motor magnetized tmd
Open brake command

(RO/DO)
tod 3
Internal speed
reference (actual 7
ncs
motor speed)
Ioutput / Torque
Is/Ts Imem/Tmem
t
tcd
Is/Ts Brake open current/torque (parameter 4302 BRAKE OPEN LVL or

current/torque from parameter 0179 BRAKE TORQ MEM)
Imem/Tmem Brake close current/torque (saved in parameter 0179 BRAKE TORQ MEM)
tmd Motor magnetizing delay (parameter 4305 BRAKE MAGN DELAY)
tod Brake open delay (parameter 4301 BRAKE OPEN DLY)
ncs Brake close speed (parameter 4303 BRAKE CLOSE LVL)
tcd Mechanical brake close delay
 State shifts
From any state

1)
(rising edge)
NO 0/0/1
MODULATION
2)
OPEN
BRAKE 1/1/0
3)
A
RELEASE RFG 5)
INPUT 1/1/0
4)
RFG INPUT
TO ZERO 1/1/1
7)
6)
CLOSE
BRAKE 0/1/1
A
8) 9) RFG = Ramp function

generator in the speed control
loop (reference handling).
State (Symbol NN X/Y/Z )

- NN: State name
- X/Y/Z: State outputs/operations
X=1 Open the brake. The relay output set to brake on/off control energizes.
Y=1 Forced start. The function keeps the internal Start on until the brake is closed in
spite of the status of the external Start signal.
Z = 1 Ramp in zero. Forces the used speed reference (internal) to zero along a ramp.
State change conditions (Symbol )
1) Brake control active 0 -> 1 OR Inverter is modulating = 0
2) Motor magnetised = 1 AND Drive running = 1
3) Brake is open AND Brake open delay passed AND Start = 1
4) Start = 0
5) Start = 0
6) Start = 1
7) Actual motor speed < Brake close speed AND Start = 0
8) Start = 1
9) Brake is closed AND Brake close delay passed = 1 AND Start = 0
 Settings
1401/1805 Mechanical brake activation through RO 1 / DO
1402/1403/1410 Mechanical brake activation through RO 2…4. With
option MREL-01 only.
2112 Zero speed delay
Group 43 MECH BRK CONTROL Brake function settings
Jogging
The jogging function is typically used to control a cyclical movement of a machine
section. One push button controls the drive through the whole cycle: When it is on,
the drive starts, accelerates to a preset speed at a preset rate. When it is off, the drive
decelerates to zero speed at a preset rate.
The figure and table below describe the operation of the drive. They also represent
how the drive shifts to normal operation (= jogging inactive) when the drive start
command is switched on. Jog cmd = State of the jogging input, Start cmd = State of
the drive start command.
The function operates on a 2 ms time level
Speed
t
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Phase Jog Start Description

cmd cmd
1-2 1 0 Drive accelerates to the jogging speed along the acceleration ramp of the
jogging function.
2-3 1 0 Drive runs at the jogging speed.
3-4 0 0 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration ramp of the
jogging function.
4-5 0 0 Drive is stopped.
5-6 1 0 Drive accelerates to the jogging speed along the acceleration ramp of the
jogging function.
7-8 x 1 Normal operation overrides the jogging. Drive accelerates to the speed
reference along the active acceleration ramp.
8-9 x 1 Normal operation overrides the jogging. Drive follows the speed
reference.
9-10 0 0 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the active deceleration ramp.
10-11 0 0 Drive is stopped.
11-12 x 1 Normal operation overrides the jogging. Drive accelerates to the speed
reference along the active acceleration ramp.
12-13 x 1 Normal operation overrides the jogging. Drive follows the speed
reference.
13-14 1 0 Drive decelerates to the jogging speed along the deceleration ramp of the
jogging function.
15-16 0 0 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration ramp of the
jogging function.
x = state can be either 1 or 0
Note: The jogging is not operational when the drive start command is on.
Note: The jogging speed overrides the constant speeds.
Note: The jogging uses ramp stop even if parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION
selection is COAST.
Note: The ramp shape time is set to zero during the jogging (ie, linear ramp).
Jogging function uses constant speed 7 as jogging speed and
acceleration/deceleration ramp pair 2.
It is also possible to activate jogging function 1 or 2 through fieldbus. Jogging

function 1 uses constant speed 7 and jogging function 2 uses constant speed 6. Both
functions use acceleration/deceleration ramp pair 2.
 Settings
1010 Jogging activation
1208 Jogging speed
1208/1207 Jogging speed for jogging function 1/2 activated through
fieldbus
2112 Zero speed delay
2205, 2206 Acceleration and deceleration times
2207 Acceleration and deceleration ramp shape time: Set to
zero during the jogging (ie, linear ramp).
 Diagnostics
0302 Jogging 1/2 activation through fieldbus
1401 Jogging function status through RO 1
1402/1403/1410 Jogging function status through RO 2…4. With option
MREL-01 only.
1805 Jogging function status through DO
Real-time clock and timed functions

 Real-time clock
The real-time clock has the following features:
• four daily times
• four weekly times
• timed boost function, eg, a constant speed which is on for a certain pre-
programmed time.
• timer enable with digital inputs
• timed constant speed selection
• timed relay activation.
For more information, see Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS on page 269.
Note: To be able to use the timed functions, the internal clock has to be set first. For
information on the Time and date mode, see section Time and date mode on page
100.
Note: The timed functions work only when the assistant control panel is connected to
the drive.
Note: Removing the control panel for upload/download purposes does not affect the
clock.
Note: Daylight saving changeover is automatic if activated.
 Timed functions
A variety of drive functions can be time controlled, eg, start/stop and EXT1/EXT2
control. The drive offers
• four start and stop times (START TIME 1…START TIME 4, STOP TIME 1…STOP
TIME 4)
• four start and stop days (START DAY 1…START DAY 4, STOP DAY 1…STOP
DAY 4)
• four timed functions for collecting the selected time periods 1…4 together (TIMED
FUNC 1 SRC…TIMED FUNC 4 SRC)
• booster time (an additional booster time connected to timed functions).
Configuring the timed functions

You can use the Timed functions assistant for easy configuring. For more information
on the assistants, see section Assistants mode on page 96.
Use the control panel to configure the timer in four stages:

1. Enable the timer.
Configure how the timer is activated. The timer can be enabled from one of the
digital inputs or inverted digital inputs.
2. Set the time period.
Define the start and stop times and start and stop day when the timer operates.
These constitute a time period.
3. Create the timer.
Assign the selected time period to certain timer(s). Different time periods can be
collected in a timer and connected to parameters. The timer can act as the source
of start/stop and change direction commands, constant speed selection and relay
activation signals. Time periods can be in multiple timed functions, but a
parameter can only be connected to a single timer. It is possible to create up to
four timers.
4. Connect selected parameters to the timer.
A parameter can only be connected to one timer.
A timed function can be connected to multiple time periods.
Time period 1
3602 START TIME 1
3603 STOP TIME 1
3604 START DAY 1
3605 STOP DAY 1
Time period 2
3606 START TIME 2
3607 STOP TIME 2 Timed function 1
3608 START DAY 2 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC
3609 STOP DAY 2
Timed function 2
Time period 3
3627 TIMED FUNC 2 SRC
3610 START TIME 3
3611 STOP TIME 3
3612 START DAY 3 Timed function 3
3613 STOP DAY 3 3628 TIMED FUNC 3 SRC
Time period 4 Timed function 4

3614 START TIME 4 3629 TIMED FUNC 4 SRC
3615 STOP TIME 4
3616 START DAY 4
3617 STOP DAY 4
Booster
3622 BOOSTER SEL
3623 BOOSTER TIME
A parameter which is triggered by a timed function can be connected to only one

timed function at a time.
1001 EXT1 COMMANDS

Timed function 1
1002 EXT2 COMMANDS
1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL
1201 CONST SPEED SEL
Timed function 2
1209 TIMED MODE SEL
1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1
1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2, 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3,
1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 (with option MREL-01 only)
1805 DO SIGNAL
4027 PID 1 PARAM SET
4228 ACTIVATE
8402 SEQ PROG START
8406 SEQ LOGIC VAL 1
8425/35/45/55/65/75/85/95 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2 …
ST8 TRIG TO ST 2
8426/36/46/56/66/76/86/96 ST1 TRIG TO ST N …
ST8 TRIG TO ST N
 Example
Air conditioning is active on weekdays from 8:00 to 15:30 (8 a.m to 3:30 p.m) and on
Sundays from 12:00 to 15:00 (12 to 3 p.m). By pressing the extension time switch,
the air-conditioning is on for an extra hour.
Parameter Setting
3601 TIMERS ENABLE DI1
3602 START TIME 1 08:00:00
3603 STOP TIME 1 15:30:00
3604 START DAY 1 MONDAY
3605 STOP DAY 1 FRIDAY
3606 START TIME 2 12:00:00
3607 STOP TIME 2 15:00:00
3608 START DAY 2 SUNDAY
3609 STOP DAY 2 SUNDAY
3622 BOOSTER SEL DI5 (cannot be the same as parameter 3601 value)
3623 BOOSTER TIME 01:00:00
3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC T1+T2+B
 Settings
36 TIMED FUNCTIONS Timed functions settings
1001, 1002 Timed start/stop control
1102 Timed EXT1/EXT2 selection
1201 Timed constant speed 1 activation
1209 Timed speed selection
1401 Timed function status indicated through relay output RO 1
1402/1403/1410 Timed function status indicated through relay output
RO 2…4. With option MREL-01 only.
1805 Timed function status indicated through digital output DO
4027 Timed PID1 parameter set 1/2 selection
4228 Timed external PID2 activation
8402 Timed Sequence programming activation
8425/8435/…/8495 Sequence programming state change trigger with timed
8426/8436/…/8496 function
Timer
Drive start and stop can be controlled with timer functions.
 Settings
1001, 1002 Start/stop signal sources
Group 19 TIMER & COUNTER Timer for start and stop
 Diagnostics
0165 Start/stop control time count
Counter
Drive start and stop can be controlled with counter functions. The counter function
can also be used as state change trigger signal in Sequence programming. See
section Sequence programming on page 169.
 Settings
1001, 1002 Start/Stop signal sources
Group 19 TIMER & COUNTER Timer for start and stop
8425, 8426 / 8435, 8436 /…/8495, Counter signal as state change trigger in Sequence
8496 programming
 Diagnostics
0166 Start/stop control pulse count
Sequence programming
The drive can be programmed to perform a sequence where the drive shifts typically
through 1…8 states. User defines the operation rules for the whole sequence and for
each state. The rules of a particular state are effective when the Sequence program is
active and the program has entered the state. The rules to be defined for each state
are:
• Run, stop and direction commands for the drive (forward/reverse/stop)
• Acceleration and deceleration ramp time for the drive
• Source for the drive reference value
• State duration
• RO/DO/AO status
• Signal source for triggering the shift to the next state
• Signal source for triggering the shift to any state (1…8).
Every state can also activate drive outputs to give an indication to external devices.
Sequence programming allows state transitions either to the next state or to a
selected state. State change can be activated with, eg, timed functions, digital inputs
and supervision functions.
Sequence programming can be applied in simple mixer applications as well as in
more complicated traverse applications.
The programming can be done with control panel or with a PC tool. The drive is
supported by version 2.91 or later of the DriveWindow Light 2 PC tool which includes
a graphical Sequence programming tool.
Note: By default all Sequence programming parameters can be changed even when
the Sequence programming is active. It is recommended that after the Sequence
programming parameters are set, parameters are locked with parameter 1602
PARAMETER LOCK.
 Settings
1001/1002 Start, stop and direction commands for EXT1/EXT2
1102 EXT1/EXT2 selection
1106 REF2 source
1201 Constant speed deactivation. Constant speed always
overrides the Sequence programming reference.
1401 Sequence programming output through RO 1
1402/1403/1410 Sequence programming output through relay output
RO 2…4. With option MREL-01 only.
1501 Sequence programming output through AO
1601 Run enable activation/deactivation
1805 Sequence programming output through DO
Group 19 TIMER & COUNTER State change according to counter limit
Group 32 SUPERVISION Timed state change
2201…2207 Acceleration/deceleration and ramp time settings
Group 32 SUPERVISION Supervision settings
4010/4110/4210 Sequence programming output as PID reference signal
Group 84 SEQUENCE PROG Sequence programming settings
 Diagnostics
0167 Sequence programming status
0168 Sequence programming active state
0169 Current state time counter
0170 Analog output PID reference control values
0171 Executed sequence counter
 State shifts
Sequence programming
ENABLE 0167 bit 0 = 1
STATE 1
(par. 8420…8424) 0168 = 1 (State 1)
Go to state N (par 8426, 8427)* Go to state 2 (par 8425)*
STATE 2
State N (par. 8430…8434) 0168 = 2 (State 2)

STATE 3 0168 = 3 (State 3)
State N (par. 8440…8444)
STATE 4
State N (par. 8450…8454) 0168 = 4 (State 4)

STATE 5 0168 = 5 (State 5)
State N (par. 8460…8464)
State N STATE 6
(par. 8470…8474) 0168 = 6 (State 6)
STATE 7 0168 = 7 (State 7)

State N (par. 8480…8484)
STATE 8 0168 = 8 (State 8)

State N (par. 8490…8494)
State N
*State change to state N has a

higher priority than state change to
NN X NN = State
X = Actual signal
the next state. State change
 Example 1
ST1 ST2 ST3 ST4 ST3
50 Hz
0 Hz
-50 Hz
DI1
DI2
Seq. start State change trigger
Sequence programming is activated by digital input DI1.

ST1: Drive is started in reverse direction with -50 Hz reference and 10 s ramp time.
State 1 is active for 40 s.
ST2: Drive is accelerated to 20 Hz with 60 s ramp time. State 2 is active for 120 s.
ST3: Drive is accelerated to 25 Hz with 5 s ramp time. State 3 is active until the
Sequence programming is disabled or until booster start is activated by DI2.
ST4: Drive is accelerated to 50 Hz with 5 s ramp time. State 4 is active for 200 s and
after that the state shifts back to state 3.
Parameter Setting Additional information

1002 EXT2 COMMANDS SEQ PROG Start, stop, direction commands for EXT2
1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL EXT2 EXT2 activation
1106 REF2 SELECT SEQ PROG Sequence programming output as REF2
1601 RUN ENABLE NOT SEL Deactivation of Run enable
2102 STOP FUNCTION RAMP Ramp stop
2201 ACC/DEC 1/2 SEL SEQ PROG Ramp as defined by parameter 8422/…/8452.
8401 SEQ PROG ENABLE ALWAYS Sequence programming enabled
8402 SEQ PROG START DI1 Sequence programming activation through
digital input (DI1)
8404 SEQ PROG RESET DI1(INV) Sequence programming reset (ie, reset to state
1, when DI1 signal is lost (1 -> 0)
ST1 ST2 ST3 ST4 Additional

Par. Setting Par. Setting Par. Setting Par. Setting information
8420 ST1 REF 100% 8430 40% 8440 50% 8450 100% State
SEL reference
8421 ST1 START 8431 START 8441 START 8451 START Run, direction
COMMANDS REV FRW FRW FRW and stop
command
8422 ST1 10 s 8432 60 s 8442 5 s 8452 5 s Ramp time
RAMP
8424 ST1 40 s 8434 120 s 8444 8454 200 s State change
CHANGE DLY delay
8425 ST1 CHANG 8435 CHANG 8445 DI2 8455
TRIG TO ST 2 E DLY E DLY
8426 ST1 NOT SEL 8436 NOT SEL 8446 NOT SEL 8456 CHANG State change
TRIG TO ST N E DLY trigger
8427 ST1 - 8437 - 8447 - 8457 STATE 3

STATE N
 Example 2
ST2 (error:
acceleration
ST1 ST2 ST4 ST2 ST4 ST2 ST4 too slow) ST8
AI1 + 15%
ST3 ST3 ST3
AI1 + 10%
AI1
ST8
AI1 - 10% ERROR
ST5 ST5 ST5
AI1 - 15%
DI1
RO
Seq. start Error
Drive is programmed for traverse control with 30 sequences.

Sequence programming is activated by digital input DI1
ST1: Drive is started in forward direction with AI1 (AI1 + 50% - 50%) reference and
ramp pair 2. State shifts to the next state when reference is reached. All relay and
analog outputs are cleared.
ST2: Drive is accelerated with AI1 + 15% (AI1 + 65% - 50%) reference and 1.5 s
ramp time. State shifts to the next state when reference is reached. If reference is not
reached within 2 s, state shifts to state 8 (error state).
ST3: Drive is decelerated with AI1 + 10% (AI1 + 60% - 50%) reference and 0 s ramp
time1). State shifts to the next state when reference is reached. If reference is not
reached within 0.2 s, state shifts to state 8 (error state).
ST4: Drive is decelerated with AI1 - 15% (AI1 + 35% -50%) reference and 1.5 s ramp
time. State shifts to the next state when reference is reached. If reference is not
reached within 2 s, state shifts to state 8 (error state).2)
ST5: Drive is accelerated with AI1 -10% (AI1 + 40% -50%) reference and 0 s ramp
time1). State shifts to the next state when reference is reached. Sequence counter
value is increased by 1. If sequence counter elapses, state shifts to state 7 (sequence
completed).
ST6: Drive reference and ramp times are the same as in state 2. Drive state shifts
immediately to state 2 (delay time is 0 s).
ST7 (sequence completed): Drive is stopped with ramp pair 1. Digital output DO is
activated. If Sequence programming is deactivated by the falling edge of digital input
DI1, state machine is reset to state 1. New start command can be activated by digital
input DI1 or by digital inputs DI4 and DI5 (both inputs DI4 and DI5 must be
simultaneously active).
ST8 (error state): Drive is stopped with ramp pair 1. Relay output RO is activated. If
Sequence programming is deactivated by the falling edge of digital input DI1, state
machine is reset to state 1. New start command can be activated by digital input DI1
or by digital inputs DI4 and DI5 (both inputs DI4 and DI5 must be simultaneously
active).
1)
0 second ramp time = drive is accelerated/decelerated as rapidly as possible.
2)
State reference must be between 0…100%, ie, scaled AI1 value must be between
15…85%. If AI1 = 0, reference = 0% + 35% -50% = -15% < 0%.
Parameter Setting Additional information

1002 EXT2 COMMANDS SEQ PROG Start, stop, direction commands for EXT2
1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL EXT2 EXT2 activation
1106 REF2 SELECT AI1+SEQ Sequence programming output as REF2
PROG
1201 CONST SPEED SEL NOT SEL Deactivation of constant speeds
1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 SEQ PROG Relay output RO 1 control as defined by
parameter 8423/…/8493
1601 RUN ENABLE NOT SEL Deactivation of Run enable
1805 DO SIGNAL SEQ PROG Digital output DO control as defined by
parameter 8423/…/8493
2102 STOP FUNCTION RAMP Ramp stop
2201 ACC/DEC 1/2 SEL SEQ PROG Ramp as defined by parameter 8422/…/8452.
2202 ACCELER TIME 1 1s Acceleration/deceleration ramp pair 1
2203 DECELER TIME 1 0s
2205 ACCELER TIME 2 20 s Acceleration/deceleration ramp pair 2
2206 DECELER TIME 2 20 s
2207 RAMP SHAPE 2 5s Shape of the acceleration/deceleration ramp 2
3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 171 Sequence counter (signal 0171 SEQ CYCLE
CNTR) supervision
3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO 30 Supervision low limit
3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI 30 Supervision high limit
8401 SEQ PROG ENABLE EXT2 Sequence programming enabled
8402 SEQ PROG START DI1 Sequence programming activation through
digital input (DI1)
8404 SEQ PROG RESET DI1(INV) Sequence programming reset (ie, reset to
state 1, when DI1 signal is lost (1 -> 0)
8406 SEQ LOGIC VAL 1 DI4 Logic value 1
8407 SEQ LOGIC OPER 1 AND Operation between logic value 1 and 2
8408 SEQ LOGIC VAL 2 DI5 Logic value 2
8415 CYCLE CNT LOC ST5 TO NEXT Sequence counter activation, ie, sequence
count increases every time the state changes
from state 5 to state 6.
8416 CYCLE CNT RST STATE 1 Sequence counter reset during state transition
to state 1

8420 ST1 REF 50% 8430 65% 8440 60% 8450 35% State
SEL reference
8421 ST1 START 8431 START 8441 START 8451 START Run, direction
COMMANDS FRW FRW FRW FRW and stop
commands
8422 ST1 -0.2 8432 1.5 s 8442 0 s 8452 1.5 s Acceleration/
RAMP (ramp deceleration
pair 2) ramp time
8423 ST1 OUT R=0,D=0 8433 AO=0 8443 AO=0 8453 AO=0 Relay, digital
CONTROL ,AO=0 and analog
output control
8424 ST1 0s 8434 2 s 8444 0.2 s 8454 2 s State change
CHANGE DLY delay
8425 ST1 ENTER 8435 ENTER 8445 ENTER 8455 ENTER
TRIG TO ST 2 SETPNT SETPNT SETPNT SETPNT
8426 ST1 NOT SEL 8436 CHANG 8446 CHANG 8456 CHANG State change
TRIG TO ST N E DLY E DLY E DLY trigger
8427 ST1 STATE 1 8437 STATE 8 8447 STATE 8 8457 STATE 8

STATE N

8460 ST5 REF 40% 8470 65% 8480 0% 8490 0% State

SEL reference
8461 ST5 START 8471 START 8481 DRIVE 8491 DRIVE Run, direction
COMMANDS FRW FRW STOP STOP and stop
commands
8462 ST5 0s 8472 1.5 s 8482 -0.1 8492 -0.1 Acceleration/
RAMP (ramp (ramp deceleration
pair 1) pair 1) ramp time
8463 ST5 OUT AO=0 8473 AO=0 8483 DO=1 8493 RO=1 Relay, digital
CONTROL and analog
output control

8464 ST5 0.2 s 8474 0 s 8484 0 s 8494 0 s State change

CHANGE DLY delay
8465 ST5 ENTER 8475 NOT SEL 8485 NOT SEL 8495 LOGIC
TRIG TO ST6 SETPNT VAL
8466 ST5 SUPRV1 8476 CHANG 8486 LOGIC 8496 NOT SEL State change
TRIG TO ST N OVER E DLY VAL trigger
8467 ST5 STATE 7 8477 STATE 2 8487 STATE 1 8497 STATE 1

STATE N
Safe torque off (STO) function

See Appendix: Safe torque off (STO) on page 417.
Actual signals and parameters 179
12
Actual signals and parameters
The chapter describes the actual signals and parameters and gives the fieldbus
equivalent values for each signal/parameter. It also contains a table of the default
values for the different macros.
Terms and abbreviations

Term Definition
Actual signal Signal measured or calculated by the drive. Can be monitored by the user.
No user setting possible. Groups 01…04 contain actual signals.
Def Parameter default value
Parameter A user-adjustable operation instruction of the drive. Groups 10…99 contain
parameters.
Note: Parameter selections are shown on the basic control panel as integer
values. For example, parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS selection COMM
is shown as value 10 (which is equal to the fieldbus equivalent FbEq).
FbEq Fieldbus equivalent: The scaling between the value and the integer used in
serial communication.
E Refers to types 01E- and 03E- with European parametrization
U Refers to types 01U- and 03U- with US parametrization
Fieldbus addresses
For FCAN-01 CANopen adapter module, FDNA-01 DeviceNet adapter module,
FECA-01 EtherCAT adapter module, FENA-01 Ethernet adapter module, FEPL-02
Ethernet POWERLINK adapter module, FMBA-01 Modbus adapter module, FLON-
01 LonWorks® adapter module, and FPBA-01 PROFIBUS DP adapter module, see
the user’s manual of the adapter module.
180 Actual signals and parameters
Fieldbus equivalent
Example: If 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 (see page 225) is set from an external control
system, an integer value of 1000 corresponds to 100.0%. All the read and sent values
are limited to 16 bits (-32768…32767).
Storing the parameters

All parameter settings are stored automatically to the permanent memory of the drive.
However, if an external +24 V DC power supply is used for the drive control unit, it is
highly recommended to force a save using parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE before
powering down the control unit after any parameter changes.
Default values with different macros

When the application macro is changed (parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO), the
software updates the parameter values to their default values. The table below shows
the parameter default values for different macros. For other parameters, the default
values are the same for all macros (shown in the parameter list starting on page 191).
If you have made changes to the parameter values and want to restore the default
values, you must first select another macro (parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO), save
the change, select the original macro again and save. This restores the default
parameter values of the original macro.
The default values for the AC500 Modbus application macro correspond to the ABB
Standard macro with some differences, see section AC500 Modbus macro on page
117.
Index Name/ ABB 3-WIRE ALTERNA MOTOR HAND/ PID TORQUE
Selection STANDARD TE POT AUTO CONTROL CONTROL
9902 APPLIC 1= 2= 3= 4= 5= 6= 7=
MACRO ABB 3-WIRE ALTERNAT MOTOR HAND/AUT PID TORQUE
STANDARD E POT O CONTROL CTRL
1001 EXT1 2 = DI1,2 4= 9 = DI1F,2R 2 = DI1,2 2 = DI1,2 20 = DI5 2 = DI1,2
COMMANDS DI1P,2P,3
1002 EXT2 0 = NOT 0 = NOT 0 = NOT 0 = NOT 21 = DI5,4 1 = DI1 2 = DI1,2
COMMANDS SEL SEL SEL SEL
1003 DIRECTION 3= 3= 3= 3= 3= 1= 3=
REQUEST REQUEST REQUEST REQUEST REQUEST FORWARD REQUEST
1102 EXT1/EXT2 0 = EXT1 0 = EXT1 0 = EXT1 0 = EXT1 3 = DI3 -2 = 3 = DI3
SEL DI2(INV)
1103 REF1 SELECT 1 = AI1 1 = AI1 1 = AI1 12 = 1 = AI1 1 = AI1 1 = AI1
DI3U,4D(N
C)
1106 REF2 SELECT 2 = AI2 2 = AI2 2 = AI2 2 = AI2 2 = AI2 19 = 2 = AI2
PID1OUT
1201 CONST 9 = DI3,4 10 = DI4,5 9 = DI3,4 5 = DI5 0 = NOT 3 = DI3 4 = DI4
SPEED SEL SEL
1304 MINIMUM AI2 1.0% 1.0% 1.0% 1.0% 20.0% 20.0% 20.0%
1501 AO1 103 102 102 102 102 102 102
CONTENT SEL
1601 RUN ENABLE 0 = NOT 0 = NOT 0 = NOT 0 = NOT 0 = NOT 4 = DI4 0 = NOT
SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL
2201 ACC/DEC 1/2 5 = DI5 0 = NOT 5 = DI5 0 = NOT 0 = NOT 0 = NOT 5 = DI5
SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL
3201 SUPERV 1 103 102 102 102 102 102 102
PARAM
3401 SIGNAL1 103 102 102 102 102 102 102
PARAM
9904 MOTOR CTRL 3= 1= 1= 1= 1= 3= 2=
MODE SCALAR: VECTOR: VECTOR: VECTOR: VECTOR: SCALAR: VECTOR:
FREQ SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED FREQ TORQ
Note: It is possible to control several functions with one input (DI or AI), and there is a
chance of mismatch between these functions. In some cases it is desired to control
several functions with one input.
For example in the ABB standard macro, DI3 and DI4 are set to control constant
speeds. On the other hand, it is possible to select value 6 (DI3U,4D) for parameter
1103 REF1 SELECT. That would mean a mismatched duplicate functionality for DI3
and DI4: either constant speed or acceleration and deceleration. The function that is
not required must be disabled. In this case the constant speed selection must be
disabled by setting parameter 1201 CONST SPEED SEL to NOT SEL or to values
not related to DI3 and DI4.
Remember to also check the default values of the selected macro when configuring
the drive inputs.
Differences between the default values in E and U type

drives
The type designation label shows the type of the drive, see section Type designation
key on page 31.
The following table lists the differences between the parameter default values in the E
and U type drives.
No. Name E type U type
EMC filter screw EMC filter screw
connected disconnected
9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT 230/400V 230/460V
9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ 50 60
9909 MOTOR NOM POWER [kW] [hp]
1105 REF1 MAX 50 60
1202 CONST SPEED 1 5 6
2002 MAXIMUM SPEED 1500 1800
2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 50 60
Actual signals
Actual signals
No. Name/Value Description FbEq
01 OPERATING Basic signals for monitoring the drive (read-only)
DATA
0101 SPEED & DIR Calculated motor speed in rpm. A negative value indicates 1 = 1 rpm
reverse direction.
0102 SPEED Calculated motor speed in rpm 1 = 1 rpm
0103 OUTPUT Calculated drive output frequency in Hz. (Shown by default 1 = 0.1 Hz
FREQ on the panel Output mode display.)
0104 CURRENT Measured motor current in A. (Shown by default on the 1 = 0.1 A
panel Output mode display.)
0105 TORQUE Calculated motor torque as a percentage of the motor 1 = 0.1%
nominal torque
0106 POWER Measured motor power in kW 1 = 0.1
kW
0107 DC BUS Measured intermediate circuit voltage in V DC 1=1V
VOLTAGE
0109 OUTPUT Calculated motor voltage in V AC 1=1V
VOLTAGE
0110 DRIVE TEMP Measured IGBT temperature in °C 1 = 0.1 °C
0111 EXTERNAL External reference REF1 in rpm or Hz. Unit depends on 1 = 0.1 Hz
REF 1 parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE setting. / 1 rpm
0112 EXTERNAL External reference REF2 as a percentage. Depending on 1 = 0.1%
REF 2 the use, 100% equals the maximum motor speed, nominal
motor torque, or maximum process reference.
0113 CTRL Active control location. (0) LOCAL; (1) EXT1; (2) EXT2. See 1 = 1
LOCATION section Local control vs. external control on page 126.
0114 RUN TIME (R) Elapsed drive running time counter (hours). Runs when the 1 = 1 h
drive is modulating. The counter can be reset by pressing
the UP and DOWN keys simultaneously when the control
panel is in the Parameter mode.
0115 KWH kWh counter. The counter value is accumulated till it 1 = 1 kWh
COUNTER (R) reaches 65535 after which the counter rolls over and starts
again from 0. The counter can be reset by pressing UP and
DOWN keys simultaneously when the control panel is in the
Parameter mode.
0120 AI 1 Relative value of analog input AI1 as a percentage 1 = 0.1%
0121 AI 2 Relative value of analog input AI2 as a percentage 1 = 0.1%
0124 AO 1 Value of analog output AO in mA 1 = 0.1
mA
0126 PID 1 OUTPUT Output value of the process PID1 controller as a percentage 1 = 0.1%
0127 PID 2 OUTPUT Output value of the PID2 controller as a percentage 1 = 0.1%
Actual signals
0128 PID 1 SETPNT Setpoint signal (reference) for the process PID1 controller. -
Unit depends on parameter 4006 UNITS, 4007 UNIT
SCALE and 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET settings.
0129 PID 2 SETPNT Setpoint signal (reference) for the PID2 controller. Unit -
depends on parameter 4106 UNITS and 4107 UNIT SCALE
settings.
0130 PID 1 FBK Feedback signal for the process PID1 controller. Unit -
depends on parameter 4006 UNITS, 4007 UNIT SCALE
and 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET settings.
0131 PID 2 FBK Feedback signal for the PID2 controller. Unit depends on -
parameter 4106 UNITS and 4107 UNIT SCALE settings.
0132 PID 1 Deviation of the process PID1 controller, ie, the difference -
DEVIATION between the reference value and the actual value. Unit
depends on parameter 4006 UNITS, 4007 UNIT SCALE
and 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET settings.
0133 PID 2 Deviation of the PID2 controller, ie, the difference between -
DEVIATION the reference value and the actual value. Unit depends on
parameter 4106 UNITS and 4107 UNIT SCALE settings.
0134 COMM RO Relay output Control word through fieldbus (decimal). See 1=1
WORD parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1.
0135 COMM VALUE Data received from fieldbus 1=1
1
0136 COMM VALUE Data received from fieldbus 1=1
2
0137 PROCESS Process variable 1 defined by parameter group 34 PANEL -
VAR 1 DISPLAY
VAR 2 DISPLAY
VAR 3 DISPLAY
0140 RUN TIME Elapsed drive running time counter (thousands of hours). 1 = 0.01
Runs when the drive is modulating. Counter cannot be kh
reset.
0141 MWH MWH counter. The counter value is accumulated till it 1=1
COUNTER reaches 65535 after which the counter rolls over and starts MWh
again from 0. Cannot be reset.
0142 REVOLUTION Motor revolution counter (millions of revolutions). The 1=1
CNTR counter can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN keys Mrev
simultaneously when the control panel is in the Parameter
mode.
0143 DRIVE ON Drive control board power-on time in days. Counter cannot 1=1
TIME HI be reset. days
Actual signals
0144 DRIVE ON Drive control board power-on time in 2 second ticks (30 1=2s
TIME LO ticks = 60 seconds). Counter cannot be reset.
0145 MOTOR TEMP Measured motor temperature. Unit depends on the sensor 1=1
type selected by group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS
parameters.
0146 MECH ANGLE Calculated mechanical angle. 1 = 5001 PULSE NR. The 1=1
signal indicates the angle as a percentage of the number of
pulses per revolution.
0147 MECH REVS Mechanical revolutions, ie, the motor shaft revolutions 1=1
calculated by the encoder. Overflow is not prevented.
0148 Z PLS Encoder zero pulse detector. 0 = NOT DETECTED, 1 = 1=1
DETECTED DETECTED.
0150 CB TEMP Temperature of the drive control board in degrees Celsius 1 = 0.1 °C
(0.0…150.0 °C).
0158 PID COMM Data received from fieldbus for PID control (PID1 and PID2) 1 = 1
VALUE 1
0159 PID COMM Data received from fieldbus for PID control (PID1 and PID2) 1 = 1
VALUE 2
0160 DI 1-5 STATUS Status of digital inputs.
Example (panel):
• 10000 = DI1 is on, DI2…DI5 are off.
• 10010 = DI1 and DI4 are on, DI2, DI3 and DI5 are off.
Example (DWL2):
• 16 (decimal) = DI1 is on, DI2…DI5 are off.
• 18 (decimal) = DI1 and DI4 are on, DI2, DI3 and DI5 are
off.
0161 PULSE INPUT Value of frequency input in Hz 1 = 1 Hz
FREQ
0162 RO STATUS Status of relay output 1. 1 = RO is energized, 0 = RO is de- 1 = 1
energized.
0163 TO STATUS Status of transistor output, when transistor output is used as 1 = 1
a digital output.
0164 TO Transistor output frequency, when transistor output is used 1 = 1 Hz
FREQUENCY as a frequency output.
0165 TIMER VALUE Timer value of timed start/stop. See parameter group 19 1 = 0.01 s
TIMER & COUNTER.
0166 COUNTER Pulse counter value of counter start/stop. See parameter 1=1
VALUE group 19 TIMER & COUNTER.
Actual signals
0167 SEQ PROG Status word of the Sequence programming: 1=1
STS
Bit 0 = ENABLED (1 = enabled)
Bit 1 = STARTED
Bit 2 = PAUSED
Bit 3 = LOGIC VALUE (logic operation defined by
parameters 8406…8410).
0168 SEQ PROG Active state of the Sequence programming. 1…8 = state 1=1
STATE 1…8.
0169 SEQ PROG Current state time counter of the Sequence programming 1=2s
TIMER
0170 SEQ PROG AO Analog output control values defined by the Sequence 1 = 0.1%
VAL programming. See parameter 8423 ST1 OUT CONTROL.
0171 SEQ CYCLE Executed sequence counter of the Sequence programming. 1 = 1
CNTR See parameters 8415 CYCLE CNT LOC and 8416 CYCLE
CNT RST.
0172 ABS TORQUE Calculated absolute value of the motor torque as a 1 = 0.1%
percentage of the motor nominal torque
0173 RO 2-4 Status of the relays in the MREL-01 output relay module.
STATUS See MREL-01 output relay module user's manual
(3AUA0000035974 [English]).
Example: 100 = RO 2 is on, RO 3 and RO 4 are off.
0179 BRAKE TORQ Vector control: Torque value (0…180% of the motor nominal 1 = 0.1%
MEM torque) saved before the mechanical brake is taken in use.
Scalar control: Current value (0…180% of the motor
nominal current) saved before the mechanical brake is
taken in use.
This torque or current is applied when the drive is started.
See parameter 4307 BRK OPEN LVL SEL.
0180 ENC Monitors the synchronization of the measured position with 1 = 1
SYNCHRONIZ the estimated position for permanent magnet synchronous
ED motors. 0 = NOT SYNC, 1 = SYNC.
0181 EXTENSION Shows which optional extension module is connected to the 1 = 1
drive. 0 = NONE, 1 = EXTENSION MREL-01,
2 = EXTENSION MTAC-01, 3 = EXTENSION MPOW-01
03 FB ACTUAL Data words for monitoring the fieldbus communication
SIGNALS (read-only). Each signal is a 16-bit data word.
Data words are displayed on the panel in hexadecimal
format.
0301 FB CMD A 16-bit data word. See section DCU communication profile
WORD 1 on page 333.
0302 FB CMD A 16-bit data word. See section DCU communication profile
WORD 2 on page 333
Actual signals
0303 FB STS WORD A 16-bit data word. See section DCU communication profile
1 on page 333.
0304 FB STS WORD A 16-bit data word. See section DCU communication profile
2 on page 333
0305 FAULT WORD A 16-bit data word. For the possible causes and remedies
1 and fieldbus equivalents, see chapter Fault tracing on page
349.
Bit 0 = OVERCURRENT
Bit 1 = DC OVERVOLT
Bit 2 = DEV OVERTEMP
Bit 3 = SHORT CIRC
Bit 4 = Reserved
Bit 5 = DC UNDERVOLT
Bit 6 = AI1 LOSS
Bit 7 = AI2 LOSS
Bit 8 = MOT OVERTEMP
Bit 9 = PANEL LOSS
Bit 10 = ID RUN FAIL
Bit 11 = MOTOR STALL
Bit 12 = CB OVERTEMP
Bit 13 = EXT FAULT 1
Bit 14 = EXT FAULT 2
Bit 15 = EARTH FAULT
349.
Bit 0 = UNDERLOAD
Bit 1 = THERM FAIL
Bit 2…3 = Reserved
Bit 4 = CURR MEAS
Bit 5 = SUPPLY PHASE
Bit 6 = ENCODER ERR
Bit 7 = OVERSPEED
Bit 10 = CONFIG FILE
Bit 11 = SERIAL 1 ERR
Bit 12 = EFB CON FILE. Configuration file reading error.
Bit 13 = FORCE TRIP
Actual signals
Bit 14 = MOTOR PHASE
Bit 15 = OUTP WIRING
349.
Bit 0…2 Reserved
Bit 3 = INCOMPATIBLE SW
Bit 4 = SAFE TORQUE OFF
Bit 5 = STO1 LOST
Bit 6 = STO2 LOST
Bit 7…10 Reserved
Bit 11 = CB ID ERROR
Bit 12 = DSP STACK ERROR
Bit 13 = DSP T1 OVERLOAD…DSP T3 OVERLOAD
Bit 14 = SERF CORRUPT / SERF MACRO
Bit 15 = PAR PCU 1 / PAR PCU 2 / PAR HZRPM / PAR AI
SCALE / PAR AO SCALE / PAR FBUSMISS / PAR USER
U/F / PAR SETUP 1
0308 ALARM WORD A 16-bit data word. For the possible causes and remedies
349.
An alarm can be reset by resetting the whole alarm word:
Write zero to the word.
Bit 0 = OVERCURRENT
Bit 1 = OVERVOLTAGE
Bit 2 = UNDERVOLTAGE
Bit 3 = DIR LOCK
Bit 4 = IO COMM
Bit 5 = AI1 LOSS
Bit 6 = AI2 LOSS
Bit 7 = PANEL LOSS
Bit 8 = DEVICE OVERTEMP
Bit 9 = MOTOR TEMP
Bit 10 = UNDERLOAD
Bit 11 = MOTOR STALL
Bit 12 = AUTORESET
Actual signals
0309 ALARM WORD A 16-bit data word. For the possible causes and remedies
349.
An alarm can be reset by resetting the whole alarm word:
Write zero to the word.
Bit 0 = Reserved
Bit 1 = PID SLEEP
Bit 2 = ID RUN
Bit 3 = Reserved
Bit 4 = START ENABLE 1 MISSING
Bit 5 = START ENABLE 2 MISSING
Bit 6 = EMERGENCY STOP
Bit 7 = ENCODER ERROR
Bit 8 = FIRST START
Bit 9 = INPUT PHASE LOSS
Bit 12 = MOTOR BACK EMF
Bit 13 = SAFE TORQUE OFF
04 FAULT HISTORY Fault history (read-only)
0401 LAST FAULT Code of the latest fault. See chapter Fault tracing on page 1 = 1
349 for the codes. 0 = Fault history is clear (on panel display
= NO RECORD).
0402 FAULT TIME 1 Day on which the latest fault occurred. 1=1
Format: Date if the real time clock is operating. / The days
number of days elapsed after the power-on if the real time
clock is not used, or was not set.
0403 FAULT TIME 2 Time at which the latest fault occurred. 1=2s
Format on the assistant control panel: Real time (hh:mm:ss)
if the real time clock is operating. / Time elapsed after the
power-on (hh:mm:ss minus the whole days stated by signal
0402 FAULT TIME 1) if real time clock is not used, or was
not set.
Format on the basic control panel: Time elapsed after
power-on in 2 second ticks (minus the whole days stated by
signal 0402 FAULT TIME 1). 30 ticks = 60 seconds. For
example, value 514 equals 17 minutes and 8 seconds (=
514/30).
0404 SPEED AT FLT Motor speed in rpm at the time the latest fault occurred 1 = 1 rpm
0405 FREQ AT FLT Frequency in Hz at the time the latest fault occurred 1 = 0.1 Hz
Actual signals
0406 VOLTAGE AT Intermediate circuit voltage in V DC at the time the latest 1 = 0.1 V
FLT fault occurred
0407 CURRENT AT Motor current in A at the time the latest fault occurred 1 = 0.1 A
FLT
0408 TORQUE AT Motor torque as a percentage of the motor nominal torque 1 = 0.1%
FLT at the time the latest fault occurred
0409 STATUS AT Drive status in hexadecimal format at the time the latest
FLT fault occurred
0412 PREVIOUS Fault code of the 2nd latest fault. See chapter Fault tracing 1 = 1
FAULT 1 on page 349 for the codes.
0413 PREVIOUS Fault code of the 3rd latest fault. See chapter Fault tracing 1=1
FAULT 2 on page 349 for the codes.
0414 DI 1-5 AT FLT Status of digital inputs DI1…5 at the time the latest fault
occurred.
Example (panel):
• 10000 = DI1 is on, DI2…DI5 are off.
• 10010 = DI1 and DI4 are on, DI2, DI3 and DI5 are off.
Example (DWL2):
• 16 (decimal) = DI1 is on, DI2…DI5 are off.
• 18 (decimal) = DI1 and DI4 are on, DI2, DI3 and DI5 are
off.
Parameters
All parameters
No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq
10 START/STOP/DIR The sources for external start, stop and direction control
1001 EXT1 Defines the connections and the source for the start, stop DI1,2
COMMANDS and direction commands for external control location 1
(EXT1).
Note: Start signal must be reset if the drive has been
stopped through STO (Safe torque off) input (see parameter
3025 STO OPERATION) or emergency stop selection (see
parameter 2109 EMERG STOP SEL).
NOT SEL No start, stop and direction command source 0
DI1 Start and stop through digital input DI1. 0 = stop, 1 = start. 1
Direction is fixed according to parameter 1003 DIRECTION
(setting REQUEST = FORWARD).
DI1,2 Start and stop through digital input DI1. 0 = stop, 1 = start. 2
Direction through digital input DI2. 0 = forward, 1 = reverse.
To control direction, parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting
must be REQUEST.
DI1P,2P Pulse start through digital input DI1. 0 -> 1: Start. (In order to 3
start the drive, digital input DI2 must be activated prior to the
pulse fed to DI1.)
Pulse stop through digital input DI2. 1 -> 0: Stop. Direction
of rotation is fixed according to parameter 1003 DIRECTION
Note: When the stop input (DI2) is deactivated (no input),
the control panel start and stop keys are disabled.
DI1P,2P,3 Pulse start through digital input DI1. 0 -> 1: Start. (In order to 4
start the drive, digital input DI2 must be activated prior to the
pulse fed to DI1.)
Pulse stop through digital input DI2. 1 -> 0: Stop. Direction
through digital input DI3. 0 = forward, 1 = reverse. To control
direction, parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting must be
REQUEST.
DI1P,2P,3P Pulse start forward through digital input DI1. 0 -> 1: Start 5
forward. Pulse start reverse through digital input DI2. 0 -> 1:
Start reverse. (In order to start the drive, digital input DI3
must be activated prior to the pulse fed to DI1/DI2). Pulse
stop through digital input DI3. 1 -> 0: Stop. To control the
direction, parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting must be
REQUEST.
All parameters
KEYPAD Start, stop and direction commands through control panel 8
when EXT1 is active. To control the direction, parameter
1003 DIRECTION setting must be REQUEST.
DI1F,2R Start, stop and direction commands through digital inputs 9
DI1 and DI2.
DI1 DI2 Operation
0 0 Stop
1 0 Start forward
0 1 Start reverse
1 1 Stop
Parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting must be REQUEST.

COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the start and stop 10
commands, ie, Control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bits
0…1. The Control word is sent by the fieldbus controller
through the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus
(Modbus) to the drive. For the Control word bits, see section
DCU communication profile on page 333.
TIMED FUNC 1 Timed start/stop control. Timed function 1 active = start, 11
timed function 1 inactive = stop. See parameter group 36
TIMED FUNCTIONS.
TIMED FUNC 2 See selection TIMED FUNC 1. 12
DI5 Start and stop through digital input DI5. 0 = stop, 1 = start. 20
Direction is fixed according to parameter 1003 DIRECTION
DI5,4 Start and stop through digital input DI5. 0 = stop, 1 = start. 21
Direction through digital input DI4. 0 = forward, 1 = reverse.
To control direction, parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be
REQUEST.
TIMER STOP Stop when timer delay defined by parameter 1901 TIMER 22
DELAY has passed. Start with timer start signal. Source for
the signal is selected by parameter 1902 TIMER START.
TIMER START Start when timer delay defined by parameter 1901 TIMER 23
DELAY has passed. Stop when timer is reset by parameter
1903 TIMER RESET.
COUNTER Stop when counter limit defined by parameter 1905 24
STOP COUNTER LIMIT has been exceeded. Start with counter
start signal. Source for the signal is selected by parameter
1911 CNTR S/S COMMAND.
All parameters
COUNTR Start when counter limit defined by parameter 1905 25
START COUNTER LIMIT has been exceeded. Stop with counter
stop signal. Source for the signal is selected by parameter
1911 CNTR S/S COMMAND.
SEQ PROG Start, stop and direction commands through Sequence 26
programming. See parameter group 84 SEQUENCE
PROG.
1002 EXT2 Defines the connections and the source for the start, stop NOT SEL
COMMANDS and direction commands for external control location 2
(EXT2).
See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS.
1003 DIRECTION Enables the control of rotation direction of the motor, or fixes REQUES
the direction. T
FORWARD Fixed to forward 1
REVERSE Fixed to reverse 2
REQUEST Control of rotation direction allowed 3
1010 JOGGING SEL Defines the signal that activates the jogging function. See NOT SEL
section Control of a mechanical brake on page 159.
DI1 Digital input DI1. 0 = jogging inactive, 1 = jogging active. 1
DI2 See selection DI1. 2
COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for jogging 1 or 2 6
activation, ie, Control word 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 bits 20
and 21. The Control word is sent by the fieldbus controller
through the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus
(Modbus) to the drive. For the Control word bits, see section
DCU communication profile on page 333.
NOT SEL Not selected 0
DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI1. 1 = jogging inactive, 0 = jogging -1
active.
DI2(INV) See selection DI1(INV). -2
All parameters
11 REFERENCE Panel reference type, external control location selection and
SELECT external reference sources and limits
1101 KEYPAD REF Selects the type of the reference in local control mode. REF1(Hz/
SEL rpm)
REF1(Hz/rpm) Speed reference in rpm. Frequency reference (Hz) if 1
parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR:
FREQ.
REF2(%) %-reference 2
1102 EXT1/EXT2 Defines the source from which the drive reads the signal EXT1
SEL that selects between the two external control locations,
EXT1 or EXT2.
EXT1 EXT1 active. The control signal sources are defined by 0
parameters 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS and 1103 REF1
SELECT.
DI1 Digital input DI1. 0 = EXT1, 1 = EXT2. 1
EXT2 EXT2 active. The control signal sources are defined by 7
parameters 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS and 1106 REF2
SELECT.
COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for EXT1/EXT2 selection, 8
ie, Control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 5 (with ABB
drives profile 5319 EFB PAR 19 bit 11). The Control word is
sent by the fieldbus controller through the fieldbus adapter
or embedded fieldbus (Modbus) to the drive. For the Control
word bits, see sections DCU communication profile on page
333 and ABB drives communication profile on page 328.
TIMED FUNC 1 Timed EXT1/EXT2 control selection. Timed function 1 active 9
= EXT2, timed function 1 inactive = EXT1. See parameter
group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS.
DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI1. 1 = EXT1, 0 = EXT2. -1
All parameters
1103 REF1 SELECT Selects the signal source for external reference REF1. See AI1
section Block diagram: Reference source for EXT1 on page
128.
KEYPAD Control panel 0
AI1 Analog input AI1 1
AI1/JOYST Analog input AI1 as joystick. The minimum input signal runs 3
the motor at the maximum reference in the reverse
direction, the maximum input at the maximum reference in
the forward direction. Minimum and maximum references
are defined by parameters 1104 REF1 MIN and 1105 REF1
MAX.
Note: Parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to
REQUEST.
Speed ref par. 1301 = 20%, par 1302 = 100%

(REF1)
1105
1104
1104 -2% +2%
0 AI1
-1104
-1104
-1105 Hysteresis 4%
2 V / 4 mA 6 10 V / 20 mA of full scale
WARNING! If parameter 1301 MINIMUM AI1 is set to

0 V and analog input signal is lost (ie, 0 V), the
rotation of the motor is reversed to the maximum reference.
Set the following parameters to activate a fault when analog
input signal is lost:
Set parameter 1301 MINIMUM AI1 to 20% (2 V or 4 mA).
Set parameter 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT to 5% or higher.
Set parameter 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION to FAULT.
AI2/JOYST See selection AI1/JOYST. 4
DI3U,4D(R) Digital input DI3: Reference increase. Digital input DI4: 5
Reference decrease. Stop command resets the reference to
zero. Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 defines the rate of
the reference change.
DI3U,4D Digital input DI3: Reference increase. Digital input DI4: 6
Reference decrease. The program stores the active speed
reference (not reset by a stop command). When the drive is
restarted, the motor ramps up at the selected acceleration
rate to the stored reference. Parameter 2205 ACCELER
TIME 2 defines the rate of the reference change.
COMM Fieldbus reference REF1 8
All parameters
COMM+AI1 Summation of fieldbus reference REF1 and analog input AI. 9
See section Reference selection and correction on page
320.
COMM*AI1 Multiplication of fieldbus reference REF1 and analog input 10
AI1. See section Reference selection and correction on
page 320.
DI3U,4D(RNC) Digital input DI3: Reference increase. Digital input DI4: 11
zero.
The reference is not saved if the control source is changed
(from EXT1 to EXT2, from EXT2 to EXT1 or from LOC to
REM). Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 defines the rate
of the reference change.
DI3U,4D(NC) Digital input DI3: Reference increase. Digital input DI4: 12
Reference decrease.
The program stores the active speed reference (not reset by
a stop command). The reference is not saved if the control
source is changed (from EXT1 to EXT2, from EXT2 to EXT1
or from LOC to REM). When the drive is restarted, the motor
ramps up at the selected acceleration rate to the stored
reference. Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 defines the
rate of the reference change.
AI1+AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation: 14
REF = AI1(%) + AI2(%) - 50%
AI1*AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation: 15
REF = AI1(%) · (AI2(%) / 50%)
AI1-AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation: 16
REF = AI1(%) + 50% - AI2(%)
AI1/AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation: 17
REF = AI1(%) · (50% / AI2 (%))
KEYPAD(RNC) Defines the control panel as the reference source. Stop 20
command resets the reference to zero (the R stands for
reset). The reference is not copied if the control source is
changed (from EXT1 to EXT2, from EXT2 to EXT1).
KEYPAD(NC) Defines the control panel as the reference source. Stop 21
command does not reset the reference to zero. The
reference is stored. The reference is not copied if the control
source is changed (from EXT1 to EXT2, from EXT2 to
EXT1).
DI4U,5D See selection DI3U,4D. 30
DI4U,5D(NC) See selection DI3U,4D(NC). 31
FREQ INPUT Frequency input 32
All parameters
SEQ PROG Sequence programming output. See parameter 8420 ST1 33
REF SEL.
AI1+SEQ Addition of analog input AI1 and Sequence programming 34
PROG output
AI2+SEQ Addition of analog input AI2 and Sequence programming 35
PROG output
ODVA HZ REF ODVA AC/DC profile speed reference and actual values in 36
Hz
1104 REF1 MIN Defines the minimum value for external reference REF1. 0.0 Hz /
Corresponds to the minimum setting of the used source 1 rpm
signal.
0.0…599.0 Hz / Minimum value in rpm. Hz if parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL 1 = 0.1 Hz
0…30000 rpm MODE setting is SCALAR: FREQ. / 1 rpm
Example: Analog input AI1 is selected as the reference
source (value of parameter 1103 is AI1). The reference
minimum and maximum correspond to the 1301 MINIMUM
AI1 and 1302 MAXIMUM AI1 settings as follows:
REF (Hz/rpm)
REF1 MAX
(1105)
REF1 MIN
(1104) 1302 1301 AI1 signal (%)
-REF1 MIN 1301 1302
(1104)
-REF1 MAX
(1105)
1105 REF1 MAX Defines the maximum value for external reference REF1. E: 50.0 Hz
Corresponds to the maximum setting of the used source U: 60.0 Hz
signal.
0.0…599.0 Hz / Maximum value in rpm. Hz if parameter 9904 MOTOR 1 = 0.1 Hz
0…30000 rpm CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR: FREQ. See the example / 1 rpm
for parameter 1104 REF1 MIN.
1106 REF2 SELECT Selects the signal source for external reference REF2. AI2
KEYPAD See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 0
AI1 See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 1
AI2 See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 2
AI1/JOYST See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 3
AI2/JOYST See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 4
DI3U,4D(R) See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 5
All parameters
DI3U,4D See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 6
COMM See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 8
COMM+AI1 See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 9
COMM*AI1 See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 10
DI3U,4D(RNC) See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 11
DI3U,4D(NC) See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 12
AI1+AI2 See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 14
AI1*AI2 See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 15
AI1-AI2 See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 16
AI1/AI2 See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 17
PID1OUT PID controller 1 output. See parameter groups 19
40 PROCESS PID SET 1 and 41 PROCESS PID SET 2.
KEYPAD(RNC) See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 20
KEYPAD(NC) See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 21
DI4U,5D See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 30
DI4U,5D(NC) See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 31
FREQ INPUT See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 32
SEQ PROG See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 33
AI1+SEQ See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 34
PROG
AI2+SEQ See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 35
PROG
1107 REF2 MIN Defines the minimum value for external reference REF2. 0.0%
Corresponds to the minimum setting of the used source
signal.
0.0…100.0% Value as a percentage of the maximum frequency / 1 = 0.1%
maximum speed / nominal torque. See the example for
parameter 1104 REF1 MIN for correspondence to the
source signal limits.
1108 REF2 MA Defines the maximum value for external reference REF2. 100.0%
Corresponds to the maximum setting of the used source
signal.
0.0…100.0% Value as a percentage of the maximum frequency / 1 = 0.1%
maximum speed / nominal torque. See the example for
parameter 1104 REF1 MIN for correspondence to the
source signal limits.
1109 ODVA HZ REF Decimal point location for ODVA frequency reference values 1
SEL if parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT = ODVA HZ REF
SCALE 1 ODVA profile Hz reference 500 equals 50.0 Hz in EXT1. 1
SCALE 2 ODVA profile Hz reference 5000 equals 50.00 Hz in EXT1. 2
All parameters
12 CONSTANT Constant speed selection and values. See section Constant
SPEEDS speeds on page 142.
1201 CONST Activates the constant speeds or selects the activation DI3,4
SPEED SEL signal.
NOT SEL No constant speed in use 0
DI1 Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is 1
activated through digital input DI1. 1 = active, 0 = inactive.
DI1,2 Constant speed selection through digital inputs DI1 and 7
DI2.1 = DI active, 0 = DI inactive.
DI1 DI2 Operation
0 0 No constant speed
1 0 Speed defined by par. 1202 CONST SPEED 1
DI2,3 See selection DI1,2. 8

DI1,2,3 Constant speed selection through digital inputs DI1, DI2 and 12
DI3. 1 = DI active, 0 = DI inactive.
DI DI2 DI3 Operation
0 0 0 No constant speed
1 0 0 Speed defined by par. 1202 CONST SPEED 1
DI3,4,5 See selection DI1,2,3. 13

All parameters
TIMED FUNC 1 External speed reference, speed defined by parameter 15
1202 CONST SPEED 1 or speed defined by parameter
1203 CONST SPEED 2 is used, depending on the selection
of parameter 1209 TIMED MODE SEL and the state of
timed function 1. See parameter group 36 TIMED
FUNCTIONS.
TIMED External speed reference or speed defined by parameter 19
FUN1&2 1202 CONST SPEED 1 … 1205 CONST SPEED 4 is used,
depending on the selection of parameter 1209 TIMED
MODE SEL and the state of timed functions 1 and 2. See
parameter group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS.
DI1(INV) Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is -1
activated through inverted digital input DI1. 0 = active, 1 =
inactive.
inactive.
inactive.
inactive.
inactive.
DI1,2(INV) Constant speed selection through inverted digital inputs DI1 -7
and DI2. 1 = DI active, 0 = DI inactive.
DI1 DI2 Operation
1 1 No constant speed
DI2,3(INV) See selection DI1,2(INV). -8

All parameters
DI1,2,3(INV) Constant speed selection through inverted digital inputs DI1, -12
DI2 and DI3. 1 = DI active, 0 = DI inactive.
DI DI2 DI3 Operation
1 1 1 No constant speed
DI3,4,5(INV) See selection DI1,2,3(INV). -13

1202 CONST Defines constant speed (or drive output frequency) 1. E: 5.0 Hz
SPEED 1 U: 6.0 Hz
0.0…599.0 Hz / Speed in rpm. Output frequency in Hz if parameter 9904 1 = 0.1 Hz
0…30000 rpm MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR: FREQ. / 1 rpm
SPEED 2 U: 12.0 Hz
SPEED 3 U: 18.0 Hz
SPEED 4 U: 24.0 Hz
SPEED 5 U: 30.0 Hz
SPEED 6 U: 48.0 Hz
0…30000 rpm MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR: FREQ. Constant / 1 rpm
speed 6 is used also as jogging speed. See section Control
of a mechanical brake on page 159.
All parameters
SPEED 7 Constant speed 7 is used also as jogging speed (see U: 60.0 Hz
section Control of a mechanical brake on page 159) or with
fault functions (3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION and 3002 PANEL
COMM ERR).
0…30000 rpm MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR: FREQ. Constant / 1 rpm
speed 7 is used also as jogging speed. See section Control
of a mechanical brake on page 159.
1209 TIMED MODE Selects timed function activated speed. Timed function can CS1/2/3/4
SEL be used to change between the external reference and
constant speeds when parameter 1201 CONST SPEED
SEL selection is TIMED FUNC 1 … TIMED FUNC 4 or
TIMED FUN1&2.
EXT/CS1/2/3 When parameter 1201 CONST SPEED SEL = TIMED 1
FUNC 1 … TIMED FUNC 4, this timed function selects an
external speed reference or constant speed. 1 = timed
function active, 0 = timed function inactive.
Timed function 1…4 Operation
0 External reference
1 Speed defined by par. 1202 CONST
SPEED 1
When parameter 1201 CONST SPEED SEL = TIMED

FUN1&2, timed functions 1 and 2 select an external speed
reference or constant speed. 1 = timed function active, 0 =
timed function inactive.
Timed Timed Operation
function 1 function 2
0 0 External reference
1 0 Speed defined by par. 1202 CONST
SPEED 1
SPEED 2
SPEED 3
All parameters
CS1/2/3/4 When parameter 1201 CONST SPEED SEL = TIMED 2
FUNC 1 … TIMED FUNC 4, this timed function selects a
constant speed. 1 = timed function active, 0 = timed
function inactive.
Timed function 1…4 Operation
0 Speed defined by parameter 1202
CONST SPEED 1
1 Speed defined by parameter 1203
CONST SPEED 2
When parameter 1201 CONST SPEED SEL = TIMED

FUN1&2, timed functions 1 and 2 select a constant speed.
1 = timed function active, 0 = timed function inactive.
Timed Timed Operation
function 1 function 2
0 0 Speed defined by parameter 1202
CONST SPEED 1
CONST SPEED 2
CONST SPEED 3
CONST SPEED 4
13 ANALOG INPUTS Analog input signal processing

1301 MINIMUM AI1 Defines the minimum %-value that corresponds to minimum 1.0%
mA/(V) signal for analog input AI1. When used as a
reference, the value corresponds to the reference minimum
setting.
0…20 mA = 0…100%
4…20 mA = 20…100%
-10…10 mA = -50…50%
Example: If AI1 is selected as the source for external
reference REF1, this value corresponds to the value of
parameter 1104 REF1 MIN.
Note: MINIMUM AI1 value must not exceed MAXIMUM AI1
value.
-100.0…100.0% Value as a percentage of the full signal range. 1 = 0.1%
Example: If the minimum value for analog input is 4 mA, the
percentage value for 0…20 mA range is:
(4 mA / 20 mA) · 100% = 20%
All parameters
1302 MAXIMUM AI1 Defines the maximum %-value that corresponds to 100.0%
maximum mA/(V) signal for analog input AI1. When used as
a reference, the value corresponds to the reference
maximum setting.
0…20 mA = 0…100%
4…20 mA = 20…100%
-10…10 mA = -50…50%
Example: If AI1 is selected as the source for external
reference REF1, this value corresponds to the value of
parameter 1105 REF1 MAX.
-100.0…100.0% Value as a percentage of the full signal range. 1 = 0.1%
Example: If the maximum value for analog input is 10 mA,
the percentage value for 0…20 mA range is:
(10 mA / 20 mA) · 100% = 50%
1303 FILTER AI1 Defines the filter time constant for analog input AI1, ie, the 0.1 s
time within which 63% of a step change is reached.
% Unfiltered signal
100
63 Filtered signal
t
Time constant
0.0…10.0 s Filter time constant 1 = 0.1 s
1304 MINIMUM AI2 Defines the minimum %-value that corresponds to minimum 20%
mA/(V) signal for analog input AI2. See parameter 1301
MINIMUM AI1.
-100.0…100.0% See parameter 1301 MINIMUM AI1. 1 = 0.1%
1305 MAXIMUM AI2 Defines the maximum %-value that corresponds to 100.0%
maximum mA/(V) signal for analog input AI2. See
parameter 1302 MAXIMUM AI1.
-100.0…100.0% See parameter 1302 MAXIMUM AI1. 1 = 0.1%
1306 FILTER AI2 Defines the filter time constant for analog input AI2. See 0.1 s
parameter 1303 FILTER AI1.
All parameters
14 RELAY OUTPUTS Status information indicated through relay output, and relay
operating delays.
Note: Relay outputs 2…4 are available only if the MREL-01
output relay module is connected to the drive. See MREL-
01 output relay module user's manual (3AUA0000035974
[English]).
1401 RELAY Selects a drive status indicated through relay output RO 1. FAULT(-1)
OUTPUT 1 The relay energizes when the status meets the setting.
NOT SEL Not used 0
READY Ready to function: Run enable signal on, no fault, supply 1
voltage within acceptable range and emergency stop signal
off.
RUN Running: Start signal on, Run enable signal on, no active 2
fault.
FAULT(-1) Inverted fault. Relay is de-energized on a fault trip. 3
FAULT Fault 4
ALARM Alarm 5
REVERSED Motor rotates in reverse direction. 6
STARTED The drive has received start command. Relay is energized 7
even if Run enable signal is off. Relay is de-energized when
drive receives a stop command or a fault occurs.
SUPRV1 Status according to supervision parameters 3201…3203. 8
OVER See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION.
SUPRV1 See selection SUPRV1 OVER. 9
UNDER
UNDER
UNDER
AT SET POINT Output frequency is equal to the reference frequency. 14
FAULT(RST) Fault. Automatic reset after the autoreset delay. See 15
parameter group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET.
FLT/ALARM Fault or alarm 16
EXT CTRL Drive is under external control. 17
REF 2 SEL External reference REF 2 is in use. 18
CONST FREQ A constant speed is in use. See parameter group 12 19
CONSTANT SPEEDS.
All parameters
REF LOSS Reference or active control location is lost. 20
OVERCURRE Alarm/Fault by overcurrent protection function 21
NT
OVERVOLTAG Alarm/Fault by overvoltage protection function 22
E
DRIVE TEMP Alarm/Fault by drive overtemperature protection function 23
UNDERVOLTA Alarm/Fault by undervoltage protection function 24
GE
AI1 LOSS Analog input AI1 signal is lost. 25
AI2 LOSS Analog input AI2 signal is lost. 26
MOTOR TEMP Alarm/Fault by motor overtemperature protection function. 27
See parameter 3005 MOT THERM PROT.
STALL Alarm/Fault by stall protection function. See parameter 3010 28
STALL FUNCTION.
UNDERLOAD Alarm/Fault by underload protection function. See 29
parameter 3013 UNDERLOAD FUNC.
PID SLEEP PID sleep function. See parameter group 40 PROCESS PID 30
SET 1 / 41 PROCESS PID SET 2.
FLUX READY Motor is magnetized and able to supply nominal torque. 33
USER MACRO User macro 2 is active. 34
2
COMM Fieldbus control signal 0134 COMM RO WORD. 0 = de- 35
energize output, 1 = energize output.
0134 Binary RO4 RO3 RO2 DO RO1
value (MREL) (MREL) (MREL)
0 00000 0 0 0 0 0
1 00001 0 0 0 0 1
2 00010 0 0 0 1 0
3 00011 0 0 0 1 1
4 00100 0 0 1 0 0
5…30 … … … … … …
31 11111 1 1 1 1 1
COMM(-1) Fieldbus control signal 0134 COMM RO WORD. 0 = de- 36

energize output, 1 = energize output.
0134 Binary RO4 RO3 RO2 DO RO1
value (MREL) (MREL) (MREL)
0 00000 1 1 1 1 1
1 00001 1 1 1 1 0
2 00010 1 1 1 0 1
3 00011 1 1 1 0 0
4 00100 1 1 0 1 1
5…30 … … … … … …
31 11111 0 0 0 0 0
All parameters
TIMED FUNC 1 Timed function 1 is active. See parameter group 36 TIMED 37
FUNCTIONS.
FUNCTIONS.
FUNCTIONS.
FUNCTIONS.
MNT TRIG FAN Cooling fan running time counter is triggered. See 41
parameter group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG.
MNT TRIG Revolutions counter is triggered. See parameter group 29 42
REV MAINTENANCE TRIG.
MNT TRIG Run time counter is triggered. See parameter group 29 43
RUN MAINTENANCE TRIG.
MNT TRIG MWh counter is triggered. See parameter group 29 44
MWH MAINTENANCE TRIG.
SEQ PROG Relay output control with Sequence programming. See 50
parameter 8423 ST1 OUT CONTROL.
MBRK On/Off control of a mechanical brake. See parameter group 51
43 MECH BRK CONTROL.
JOG ACTIVE Jogging function active. See parameter 1010 JOGGING 52
SEL.
STO STO (Safe torque off) has been triggered. 57
STO(-1) STO (Safe torque off) is inactive and the drive operates 58
normally.
1402 RELAY See parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1. Available only if NOT SEL
OUTPUT 2 the MREL-01 output relay module is connected to the drive.
See parameter 0181 EXTENSION.
OUTPUT 3 the MREL-01 output relay module is connected to the drive.
See parameter 0181 EXTENSION.
1404 RO 1 ON Defines the operation delay for relay output RO 1. 0.0 s
DELAY
0.0…3600.0 s Delay time. The figure below illustrates the operation (on) 1 = 0.1 s
and release (off) delays for relay output RO.
Control event
Relay status
1404 On delay 1405 Off delay

All parameters
1405 RO 1 OFF Defines the release delay for relay output RO 1. 0.0 s
DELAY
0.0…3600.0 s Delay time. See the figure for parameter 1404 RO 1 ON 1 = 0.1 s
DELAY.
1406 RO 2 ON See parameter 1404 RO 1 ON DELAY. 0.0 s
DELAY
1407 RO 2 OFF See parameter 1405 RO 1 OFF DELAY. 0.0 s
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
OUTPUT 4 the MREL-01 output relay extension module is connected to
the drive. See parameter 0181 EXTENSION.
DELAY
DELAY
15 ANALOG Selection of the actual signals to be indicated through
OUTPUTS analog output and output signal processing.
1501 AO1 Connects a drive signal to analog output AO. 103
CONTENT SEL
x…x Parameter index in group 01 OPERATING DATA. For
example, 102 = 0102 SPEED.
1502 AO1 Defines the minimum value for the signal selected with -
CONTENT MIN parameter 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL.
AO minimum and maximum correspond to the 1504
MINIMUM AO1 and 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 settings as
follows:
AO (mA) AO (mA)
1505 1505
1504 1504
1502 1503 AO 1503 1502 AO

content content
x…x Setting range depends on the parameter 1501 AO1 -
CONTENT SEL setting.
All parameters
1503 AO1 Defines the maximum value for the signal selected with -
CONTENT parameter 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL. See the figure for
MAX
parameter 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN.
x…x Setting range depends on the parameter 1501 AO1 -
CONTENT SEL setting.
1504 MINIMUM AO1 Defines the minimum value for the analog output signal AO. 0.0 mA
See the figure for parameter 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN.
0.0…20.0 mA Minimum value 1=
0.1 mA
1505 MAXIMUM Defines the maximum value for the analog output signal AO. 20.0 mA
AO1 See the figure for parameter 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN.
0.0…20.0 mA Maximum value 1=
0.1 mA
1506 FILTER AO1 Defines the filter time constant for analog output AO, ie, the 0.1 s
time within which 63% of a step change is reached. See the
figure for parameter 1303 FILTER AI1.
16 SYSTEM Parameter view, Run enable, parameter lock etc.
CONTROLS
1601 RUN ENABLE Selects a source for the external Run enable signal. NOT SEL
NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external Run enable 0
signal.
DI1 External signal required through digital input DI1. 1 = Run 1
enable. If Run enable signal is switched off, the drive will not
start or coasts to stop if it is running.
COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for inverted Run enable 7
signal (Run disable), ie, Control word 0301 FB CMD WORD
1 bit 6 (with ABB drives profile 5319 EFB PAR 19 bit 3). The
Control word is sent by the fieldbus controller through the
fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus (Modbus) to the
drive. For the Control word bits, see sections DCU
communication profile on page 333 and ABB drives
communication profile on page 328.
DI1(INV) External signal required through inverted digital input DI1. 0 -1
= Run enable. If Run enable signal is switched on, the drive
will not start or coasts to stop if it is running.
All parameters
1602 PARAMETER Selects the state of the parameter lock. The lock prevents OPEN
LOCK parameter changing from the control panel.
LOCKED Parameter values cannot be changed from the control 0
panel. The lock can be opened by entering the valid code to
parameter 1603 PASS CODE.
The lock does not prevent parameter changes made by
macros or fieldbus.
OPEN The lock is open. Parameter values can be changed. 1
NOT SAVED Parameter changes from the control panel are not stored 2
into the permanent memory. To store changed parameter
values, set parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE value to
SAVE….
1603 PASS CODE Selects the pass code for the parameter lock (see 0
parameter 1602 PARAMETER LOCK).
0…65535 Pass code. Setting 358 opens the lock. The value reverts 1=1
back to 0 automatically.
1604 FAULT RESET Selects the source for the fault reset signal. The signal KEYPAD
SEL resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no
longer exists.
KEYPAD Fault reset only from the control panel 0
DI1 Reset through digital input DI1 (reset on the rising edge of 1
DI1) or from the control panel
START/STOP Reset along with the stop signal received through a digital 7
input, or from the control panel.
Note: Do not use this option when start, stop and direction
commands are received through fieldbus communication.
COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the fault reset signal, ie, 8
Control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 4 (with ABB drives
profile 5319 EFB PAR 19 bit 7). The Control word is sent by
the fieldbus controller through the fieldbus adapter or
embedded fieldbus (Modbus) to the drive. For the Control
word bits, see sections DCU communication profile on page
333 and ABB drives communication profile on page 328.
DI1(INV) Reset through inverted digital input DI1 (reset on the falling -1
edge of DI1) or from the control panel
All parameters
1605 USER PAR Enables the change of the User parameter set through a NOT SEL
SET CHG digital input. See parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO. The
change is only allowed when the drive is stopped. During
the change, the drive will not start.
Note: Always save the User parameter set with parameter
9902 after changing any parameter setting, or reperforming
the motor identification. The last settings saved by the user
are loaded into use whenever the power is switched off and
on again or the parameter 9902 setting is changed. Any
unsaved changes will be lost.
Note: The value of this parameter is not included in the
User parameter sets. A setting once made remains despite
User parameter set change.
Note: Selection of User parameter set 2 can be supervised
through relay outputs RO 1…4 and digital output DO. See
parameters 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 … 1403 RELAY
OUTPUT 3, 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 and 1805 DO
SIGNAL.
NOT SEL User parameter set change is not possible through a digital 0
input. Parameter sets can be changed only from the control
panel.
DI1 User parameter set control through digital input DI1. Falling 1
edge of digital input DI1: User parameter set 1 is loaded into
use. Rising edge of digital input DI1: User parameter set 2 is
loaded into use.
DI1,2 User parameter set selection through digital inputs DI1 and 7
DI2. 1 = DI active, 0 = DI inactive.
DI1 DI2 User parameter set
0 0 User parameter set 1

All parameters
DI1(INV) User parameter set control through inverted digital input -1
DI1. Falling edge of inverted digital input DI1: User
parameter set 2 is loaded into use. Rising edge of inverted
digital input DI1: User parameter set 1 is loaded into use.
DI1,2(INV) User parameter set selection through inverted digital inputs -7
DI1 and DI2. 1 = DI inactive, 0 =DI active.
DI1 DI2 User parameter set
DI2,3(INV) See selection DI1,2. -8

1606 LOCAL LOCK Disables entering local control mode or selects the source NOT SEL
for the local control mode lock signal. When local lock is
active, entering the local control mode is disabled
(LOC/REM key of the panel).
NOT SEL Local control is allowed. 0
DI1 Local control mode lock signal through digital input DI1. 1
Rising edge of digital input DI1: Local control disabled.
Falling edge of digital input DI1: Local control allowed.
ON Local control is disabled. 7
COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the local lock, ie, 8
Control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 14. The Control
word is sent by the fieldbus controller through the fieldbus
adapter or embedded fieldbus (Modbus) to the drive. For
the Control word bits, see section DCU communication
profile on page 333.
Note: This setting applies only for the DCU profile.
DI1(INV) Local lock through inverted digital input DI1. Rising edge of -1
inverted digital input DI1: Local control allowed. Falling edge
of inverted digital input DI1: Local control disabled.
All parameters
1607 PARAM SAVE Saves the valid parameter values to the permanent DONE
memory.
Note: A new parameter value of a standard macro is saved
automatically when changed from the panel but not when
altered through a fieldbus connection.
DONE Saving completed 0
SAVE… Saving in progress 1
1608 START Selects the source for the Start enable 1 signal. NOT SEL
ENABLE 1
Note: Functionality of the Start enable signal is different
from the Run enable signal.
Example: External damper control application using Start
enable and Run enable. Motor can start only after the
damper is fully open.
Drive started
Start/Stop
command
(group 10)
Start enable
signals
(1608 and 1609)
Relay energized
Relay Started
de- output status
energized (group 14)
Damper open
Damper Damper
closed closed Damper
status
Damper Damper
opening closing
time time
Run enable signal
from the damper end
switch when the
Motor damper is fully
speed opened. (1601)
Motor
status
Acceleration Deceleration
time (2202) time (2203)
NOT SEL Start enable signal is on. 0

DI1 External signal required through digital input DI1. 1 = Start 1
enable. If the Start enable signal is switched off, the drive
will not start or it coasts to stop if it is running and alarm
START ENABLE 1 MISSING (2021) is activated.
The drive can also ramp to stop depending on parameter
2102 STOP FUNCTION.
All parameters
COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the inverted Start 7
enable (Start disable) signal, ie, Control word 0302 FB CMD
WORD 2 bit 18 (bit 19 for Start enable 2). The Control word
is sent by the fieldbus controller through the fieldbus
DI1(INV) External signal required through inverted digital input DI1. 0 -1
= Start enable. If Start enable signal is switched off, the
drive will not start or it coasts to stop if it is running and
alarm START ENABLE 1 MISSING (2021) is activated.
1609 START Selects the source for the Start enable 2 signal. See NOT SEL
ENABLE 2 parameter 1608 START ENABLE 1.
See parameter 1608 START ENABLE 1.
1610 DISPLAY Activates/deactivates alarms OVERCURRENT (2001), NO
ALARMS OVERVOLTAGE (2002), PID SLEEP (2018) and DEVICE
OVERTEMP (2009). For more information, see chapter
Fault tracing on page 349.
NO Alarms are inactive. 0
YES Alarms are active. 1
All parameters
1611 PARAMETER Selects the parameter view, ie, which parameters are DEFAULT
VIEW shown.
Note: This parameter is visible only when it is activated by
the optional FlashDrop device. FlashDrop is designed for
fast copying of parameters to unpowered drives. It allows for
easy customization of the parameter list, eg, selected
parameters can be hidden. For more information, see
MFDT-01 FlashDrop user’s manual (3AFE68591074
[English]).
FlashDrop parameter values are activated by setting
parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 31 (LOAD FD SET).
DEFAULT Complete long and short parameter lists 0
FLASHDROP FlashDrop parameter list. Does not include short parameter 1
list. Parameters which are hidden by the FlashDrop device
are not visible.
1612 FAN Selects the fan to be switched on and off automatically or AUTO
CONTROL keeps the fan on all the time.
When the drive is used in ambient temperatures of 35 °C
(95 °F) and above, it is recommended to have the cooling
fan always on (selection ON).
AUTO Automatic fan control. The fan is switched on when the drive 0
is modulating. After the drive has stopped, the fan stays on
until the temperature of the drive has dropped below 55 °C
(131 °F). The fan then remains switched off until either the
drive is started or the temperature increases above 65 °C
(149 °F).
If the control board is powered from an external 24 V power
supply, the fan is switched off.
ON Fan always on 1
1613 FAULT RESET Resets the current fault. DEFAULT
DEFAULT No reset done. Current status continues. 0
RESET NOW Resets the current fault. After reset, the parameter value 1
returns to DEFAULT.
18 FREQ IN & TRAN Frequency input and transistor output signal processing.
OUT
1801 FREQ INPUT Defines the minimum input value when DI5 is used as a 0 Hz
MIN frequency input. See section Frequency input on page 135.
0…16000 Hz Minimum frequency 1 = 1 Hz
1802 FREQ INPUT Defines the maximum input value when DI5 is used as a 1000 Hz
MAX frequency input. See section Frequency input on page 135.
0…16000 Hz Maximum frequency 1 = 1 Hz
All parameters
1803 FILTER FREQ Defines the filter time constant for frequency input, ie, the 0.1 s
IN time within which 63% of a step change is reached. See
section Frequency input on page 135.
1804 TO MODE Selects the operation mode for the transistor output TO. DIGITAL
See section Transistor output on page 136.
DIGITAL Transistor output is used as a digital output DO. 0
FREQUENCY Transistor output is used as a frequency output FO. 1
1805 DO SIGNAL Selects a drive status indicated through digital output DO. FAULT(-1)
See parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1.
1806 DO ON DELAY Defines the operation delay for digital output DO. 0.0 s
0.0…3600.0 s Delay time 1 = 0.1 s
1807 DO OFF Defines the release delay for digital output DO. 0.0 s
DELAY
0.0…3600.0 s Delay time 1 = 0.1 s
1808 FO CONTENT Selects a drive signal to be connected to frequency output 104
SEL FO.
x…x Parameter index in group 01 OPERATING DATA. For 1=1
1809 FO CONTENT Defines the minimum frequency output FO signal value. -
MIN Signal is selected with parameter 1808 FO CONTENT SEL.
FO minimum and maximum correspond to 1811 MINIMUM
FO and 1812 MAXIMUM FO settings as follows:
FO FO
1812 1812
1811 1811
1809 1810 FO 1809 1810 FO

content content
x…x Setting range depends on parameter 1808 FO CONTENT -
SEL setting.
1810 FO CONTENT Defines the maximum frequency output FO signal value. -
MAX Signal is selected with parameter 1808 FO CONTENT SEL.
See parameter 1809 FO CONTENT MIN.
x…x Setting range depends on parameter 1808 FO CONTENT -
SEL setting.
1811 MINIMUM FO Defines the minimum value for frequency output FO. 10 Hz
10…16000 Hz Minimum frequency. See parameter 1809 FO CONTENT 1 = 1 Hz
MIN.
All parameters
1812 MAXIMUM FO Defines the maximum value for frequency output FO. 1000 Hz
10…16000 Hz Maximum frequency. See parameter 1809 FO CONTENT 1 = 1 Hz
MIN.
1813 FILTER FO Defines the filter time constant for frequency output FO, ie, 0.1 s
the time within which 63% of a step change is reached.
19 TIMER & Timer and counter for start and stop control
COUNTER
1901 TIMER DELAY Defines the time delay for the timer. 10.00 s
0.01…120.00 s Delay time 1 = 0.01 s
1902 TIMER START Selects the source for the timer start signal. NOT SEL
DI1(INV) Timer start through inverted digital input DI1. Timer start on -1
the falling edge of digital input DI1.
Note: Timer start is not possible when reset is active
(parameter 1903 TIMER RESET).
NOT SEL No start signal 0
DI1 Timer start through digital input DI1. Timer start on the rising 1
edge of digital input DI1.
Note: Timer start is not possible when reset is active
(parameter 1903 TIMER RESET).
START External start signal, eg, start signal through fieldbus 6
1903 TIMER RESET Selects the source for the timer reset signal. NOT SEL
DI1(INV) Timer reset through inverted digital input DI1. 0 = active, 1 = -1
inactive.
NOT SEL No reset signal 0
DI1 Timer reset through digital input DI1. 1 = active, 0 = inactive. 1
All parameters
START Timer reset at start. Start signal source is selected by 6
parameter 1902 TIMER START.
START (INV) Time reset at start (inverted), ie, timer is reset when start 7
signal is deactivated. Start signal source is selected by
parameter 1902 TIMER START.
RESET External reset, eg, reset through fieldbus 8
1904 COUNTER Selects the source for the counter enable signal. DISABLE
ENABLE D
DI1(INV) Counter enable signal through inverted digital input DI1. 0 = -1
active, 1 = inactive.
DISABLED No counter enable 0
DI1 Counter enable signal through digital input DI1. 1 = active, 0 1
= inactive.
ENABLED Counter enabled 6
1905 COUNTER Defines the counter limit. 1000
LIMIT
0…65535 Limit value 1=1
1906 COUNTER Selects the input signal source for the counter. PLS IN(DI
INPUT 5)
PLS IN(DI 5) Digital input DI5 pulses. When a pulse is detected, the 1
counter value increases by 1.
ENC W/O DIR Encoder pulse edges. When a rising or a falling edge is 2
detected, the counter value increases by 1.
ENC WITH DIR Encoder pulse edges. The direction of rotation is taken into 3
account. When a rising or a falling edge is detected and the
direction of rotation is forward, the counter value increases
by 1. When the direction of rotation is reverse, the counter
value decreases by 1.
All parameters
FILTERED DI5 Filtered digital input DI5 pulses. When a pulse is detected, 4
the counter value increases by 1.
Note: Due to filtering, the maximum input signal frequency
is 50 Hz.
1907 COUNTER Selects the source for the counter reset signal. NOT SEL
RESET
DI1(INV) Counter reset through inverted digital input DI1. 0 = active, 1 -1
= inactive.
DI1 Counter reset through digital input DI1. 1 = active, 0 = 1
inactive.
AT LIMIT Reset at the limit defined by parameter 1905 COUNTER 6
LIMIT
STRT/STP Counter reset at start/stop command. Source for the 7
CMD start/stop is selected by parameter 1911 CNTR S/S
COMMAND.
S/S CMD(INV) Counter reset at start/stop command (inverted), ie, counter 8
is reset when start/stop command is deactivated. Start
signal source is selected by parameter 1902 TIMER
START.
RESET Reset enabled 9
All parameters
OVERFLOW Counter moves between the minimum and maximum limits 10
and rolls over to the opposite limit, when either the minimum
or maximum limit is reached.
Minimum and maximum limits are set by parameters 1905
COUNTER LIMIT and 1908 COUNTER RES VAL. Greater
value from the two will be set as the maximum and the other
as the minimum.
When parameter 1909 COUNT DIVIDER or either of the
limits is changed so that the change causes the value of
parameter 0166 COUNTER VALUE to be outside of the
min/max limits, the counter is assigned to the closest limit
value.
Example: If the limits are set as shown in the figure below,
the value of parameter 0166 COUNTER VALUE changes as
follows:
• Counting up: … –> 19998 –> 19999 –> 20000 –> 100 –>
101 –> 102 …
• Counting down: … –> 102 –> 101 –> 100 –> 20000 –>
19999 –> 19998 …
65535
20000 1908 COUNTER RES VAL
0166 COUNTER VALUE
100 1905 COUNTER LIMIT
When 0166 COUNTER VALUE is equal to 1905 COUNTER

LIMIT, the counter limit values trigger state changes.
1908 COUNTER Defines the value for the counter after reset. 0
RES VAL
0…65535 Counter value 1=1
1909 COUNT Defines the divider for the pulse counter. 0
DIVIDER
0…12 Pulse counter divider N. Every 2N bit is counted. 1=1
1910 COUNT Defines the source for the counter direction selection. UP
DIRECTION
DI1(INV) Counter direction selection through inverted digital input -1
DI1. 1 = counts up, 0 = counts down.
All parameters
UP Counts up 0
DI1 Counter direction selection through digital input DI1. 0 = 1
counts up, 1 = counts down.
DOWN Counts down 6
1911 CNTR S/S Selects the source for the drive start/stop command when NOT SEL
COMMAND parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS value is set to
COUNTR START / COUNTER STOP.
DI1(INV) Start/stop command through inverted digital input DI1. -1
When parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS value is
COUNTER STOP: 0 = start. Stop when counter limit defined
by parameter 1905 COUNTER LIMIT has been exceeded.
When parameter 1001 value is COUNTR START: 0 = stop.
Start when counter limit defined by parameter 1905 has
been exceeded.
NOT SEL Not start/stop command source 0
DI1 Start/stop command through digital input DI1. 1
When parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS value is
COUNTER STOP: 1 = start. Stop when counter limit defined
by parameter 1905 COUNTER LIMIT has been exceeded.
When parameter 1001 value is COUNTR START: 1 = stop.
Start when counter limit defined by parameter 1905 has
been exceeded.
ACTIVATE External start/stop command, eg, through fieldbus 6
All parameters
20 LIMITS Drive operation limits.
Speed values are used in vector control and frequency
values are used in scalar control. The control mode is
selected by parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE.
2001 MINIMUM Defines the allowed minimum speed. 0 rpm
SPEED A positive (or zero) minimum speed value defines two
ranges, one positive and one negative.
A negative minimum speed value defines one speed range.
Speed
Speed
2001 value is > 0
2001 value is < 0 2002
2002 Allowed
Allowed speed range
speed range 2001
t t
0 0
-(2001)
Allowed
2001 speed range
-(2002)
-30000… Minimum speed 1 = 1 rpm

30000 rpm
2002 MAXIMUM Defines the allowed maximum speed. See parameter 2001 E: 1500 rpm
SPEED MINIMUM SPEED. /
U: 1800 rpm
0…30000 rpm Maximum speed 1 = 1 rpm
2003 MAX Defines the allowed maximum motor current. 1.8 · I2N A
CURRENT
0.0…1.8 · I2N A Current 1 = 0.1 A
2005 OVERVOLT Activates or deactivates the overvoltage control of the ENABLE
CTRL intermediate DC link.
Fast braking of a high inertia load causes the voltage to rise
to the overvoltage control limit. To prevent the DC voltage
from exceeding the limit, the overvoltage controller
automatically decreases the braking torque.
Note: If a brake chopper and resistor are connected to the
drive, the controller must be off (selection DISABLE) to
allow chopper operation.
DISABLE Overvoltage control deactivated 0
ENABLE Overvoltage control activated 1
EN WITH Both braking chopper and overvoltage controller are 2
BRCH enabled so that the braking chopper capability is used to its
maximum and the overvoltage controller is activated above
that.
All parameters
2006 UNDERVOLT Activates or deactivates the undervoltage control of the ENABLE(
CTRL intermediate DC link. TIME)
If the DC voltage drops due to input power cut off, the
undervoltage controller will automatically decrease the
motor speed in order to keep the voltage above the lower
limit. By decreasing the motor speed, the inertia of the load
will cause regeneration back into the drive, keeping the DC
link charged and preventing an undervoltage trip until the
motor coasts to stop. This will act as a power-loss ride-
through functionality in systems with a high inertia, such as
a centrifuge or a fan. See section Motor identification on
page 137.
DISABLE Undervoltage control deactivated 0
ENABLE(TIME) Undervoltage control activated. After being in undervoltage 1
control for 500 ms the drive faults and stops using an
emergency ramp.
ENABLE Undervoltage control activated. No operation time limit. 2
2007 MINIMUM Defines the minimum limit for the drive output frequency. 0.0 Hz
FREQ A positive (or zero) minimum frequency value defines two
ranges, one positive and one negative.
A negative minimum frequency value defines one speed
range.
Note: MINIMUM FREQ < MAXIMUM FREQ.
f
f 2007 value is > 0
2008 value is < 0 2008
2008 Allowed
Allowed frequency range
frequency range 2007
t t
0 0
-(2007)
Allowed
2007 frequency range
-(2008)
-599.0…599.0 Hz Minimum frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz

2008 MAXIMUM Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency. E: 50.0 Hz
FREQ U: 60.0 Hz
0.0…599.0 Hz Maximum frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz
2013 MIN TORQUE Selects the minimum torque limit for the drive. MIN
SEL TORQUE
1
MIN TORQUE Value defined by parameter 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 0
1
DI1 Digital input DI1. 0 = parameter 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 1
value. 1 = parameter 2016 MIN TORQUE 2 value.
All parameters
COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the torque limit 1/2 7
selection, ie, Control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 15.
The Control word is sent by the fieldbus controller through
the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus (Modbus) to the
drive. For the Control word bits, see section DCU
Minimum torque limit 1 is defined by parameter 2015 MIN
TORQUE 1 and minimum torque limit 2 is defined by
parameter 2016 MIN TORQUE 2.
EXT2 Value of signal 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 11
DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI1. 1 = value of parameter 2015 MIN -1
TORQUE 1 1. 0 = value of parameter 2016 MIN TORQUE
2.
2014 MAX TORQUE Selects the maximum torque limit for the drive. MAX
SEL TORQUE
1
MAX TORQUE Value of parameter 2017 MAX TORQUE 1
1
DI1 Digital input DI1. 0 = parameter 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 1
value. 1 = parameter 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 value.
All parameters
COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the torque limit 1/2 7
selection, ie, Control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 15.
The Control word is sent by the fieldbus controller through
the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus (Modbus) to the
drive. For the Control word bits, see section DCU
Maximum torque limit 1 is defined by parameter 2017 MAX
TORQUE 1 and maximum torque limit 2 is defined by
parameter 2018 MAX TORQUE 2.
EXT2 Value of signal 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 11
DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI1. 1 = parameter 2017 MAX -1
TORQUE 1 value. 0 = parameter 2018 MAX TORQUE 2
value.
2015 MIN TORQUE Defines minimum torque limit 1 for the drive. See parameter -300%
1 2013 MIN TORQUE SEL.
-600.0…0.0% Value as a percentage of the motor nominal torque 1 = 0.1%
2016 MIN TORQUE Defines minimum torque limit 2 for the drive. See parameter -300%
2 2013 MIN TORQUE SEL.
-600.0…0.0% Value as a percentage of the motor nominal torque 1 = 0.1%
2017 MAX TORQUE Defines maximum torque limit 1 for the drive. See 300%
1 parameter 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL.
0.0…600.0% Value as a percentage of the motor nominal torque 1 = 0.1%
2018 MAX TORQUE Defines maximum torque limit 2 for the drive. See 300%
2 parameter 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL.
0.0…600.0% Value as a percentage of the motor nominal torque 1 = 0.1%
All parameters
2020 BRAKE Selects the brake chopper control. INBUILT
CHOPPER When using the drive in a Common DC bus system, the
parameter must be set to EXTERNAL. When in Common
DC, the drive cannot feed or receive more power than PN.
INBUILT Internal brake chopper control. 0
Note: Ensure the brake resistor(s) is installed and the
overvoltage control is switched off by setting parameter
2005 OVERVOLT CTRL to selection DISABLE. See also
2005 OVERVOLT CTRL selection EN WITH BRCH.
EXTERNAL External brake chopper control. 1
Note: The drive is compatible only with ABB ACS-BRK-X
brake units.
Note: Ensure the brake unit is installed and the overvoltage
control is switched off by setting parameter 2005
OVERVOLT CTRL to selection DISABLE.
2021 MAX SPEED Maximum speed source for torque control PAR 2002
SEL
PAR 2002 Value of parameter 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED 0
EXT REF 1 Value of signal 0111 EXTERNAL REF 1 1
21 START/STOP Start and stop modes of the motor
2101 START Selects the motor starting method. AUTO
FUNCTION
AUTO The drive starts the motor instantly from zero frequency if 1
parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR:
FREQ. If flying start is required use selection SCAN START.
If parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE value is VECTOR:
SPEED or VECTOR: TORQ, the drive pre-magnetizes the
motor with DC current before the start. The pre-magnetizing
time is defined by parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME. See
selection DC MAGN.
For permanent magnet synchronous motors, flying start is
used if the motor is rotating.
All parameters
DC MAGN The drive pre-magnetizes the motor with DC current before 2
the start. The pre-magnetizing time is defined by parameter
2103 DC MAGN TIME.
If parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE value is VECTOR:
SPEED or VECTOR: TORQ, DC magnetizing guarantees
the highest possible break-away torque when the pre-
magnetizing is set long enough.
Note: Starting the drive connected to a rotating motor is not
possible when DC MAGN is selected. When a permanent
magnet synchronous motor is used, alarm MOTOR BACK
EMF (2029) is generated.
WARNING! The drive will start after the set pre-
magnetizing time has passed even if the motor
magnetization is not completed. In applications where a full
break-away torque is essential, always ensure that the
constant magnetizing time is long enough to allow
generation of full magnetization and torque.
TORQ BOOST Torque boost should be selected if a high break-away 4
torque is required. Used only when parameter 9904
MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR: FREQ.
The drive pre-magnetizes the motor with DC current before
the start. The pre-magnetizing time is defined by parameter
2103 DC MAGN TIME.
Torque boost is applied at start. Torque boost is stopped
when output frequency exceeds 20 Hz or when it is equal to
the reference value. See parameter 2110 TORQ BOOST
CURR.
Note: Starting the drive connected to a rotating motor is not
possible when TORQ BOOST is selected.
WARNING! The drive will start after the set pre-
magnetizing time has passed although the motor
magnetization is not completed. In applications where a full
break-away torque is essential, always ensure that the
constant magnetizing time is long enough to allow
generation of full magnetization and torque.
SCAN START Frequency scanning flying start (starting the drive 6
connected to a rotating motor). Based on frequency
scanning (interval 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ…2007 MINIMUM
FREQ) to identify the frequency. If frequency identification
fails, DC magnetization is used (see selection DC MAGN).
Not for multimotor drives.
All parameters
SCAN + Combines scanning start (starting the drive connected to a 7
BOOST rotating motor) and torque boost. See selections SCAN
START and TORQ BOOST. If frequency identification fails,
torque boost is used.
Used only when parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE
setting is SCALAR: FREQ.
AUTO2 Effective with asynchronous motors and vector:speed and 9
vector:torque modes. Reduces the motor bumping effect
during the start. Bumping effect can be further reduced with
the ramp stop and DC brake functions (operation also
affected).
Starting can further be smoothened by adjusting the DC
magnetization time up to 1 s (longer times do not apply).
Shorter time increases the breakaway torque but may
amplify the bumping effect.
Motor is started from the last known rotor position. This
reduces the backstroke effect caused by the rotor
reluctance flux.
Used only when parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE
setting is VECTOR: SPEED or VECTOR: TORQ.
2102 STOP Selects the motor stop function. See section Speed COAST
FUNCTION compensated stop on page 139.
COAST Stop by cutting off the motor power supply. The motor 1
coasts to stop.
RAMP Stop along a ramp. See parameter group 22 2
ACCEL/DECEL.
SPEED COMP Speed compensation is used for constant distance braking. 3
Speed difference (between used speed and maximum
speed) is compensated by running the drive with current
speed before the motor is stopped along a ramp. See
section Acceleration and deceleration ramps on page 141.
SPD COMP Speed compensation is used for constant distance braking if 4
FWD the direction of rotation is forward. Speed difference
(between used speed and maximum speed) is
compensated by running the drive with current speed before
the motor is stopped along a ramp. See section
Acceleration and deceleration ramps on page 141.
If the direction of rotation is reverse, the drive is stopped
along a ramp.
All parameters
SPD COMP Speed compensation is used for constant distance braking if 5
REV the direction of rotation is reverse. Speed difference
(between used speed and maximum speed) is
compensated by running the drive with current speed before
the motor is stopped along a ramp. See section
Acceleration and deceleration ramps on page 141.
If the direction of rotation is forward, the drive is stopped
along a ramp.
2103 DC MAGN Defines the pre-magnetizing time. See parameter 2101 0.30 s
TIME START FUNCTION. After the start command, the drive
automatically pre-magnetizes the motor for the defined time.
0.00…10.00 s Magnetizing time. Set this value long enough to allow full 1 = 0.01 s
motor magnetization. Too long a time heats the motor
excessively.
2104 DC HOLD CTL Activates the DC hold or DC braking function. NOT SEL
NOT SEL Inactive 0
DC HOLD DC hold function active. DC hold is not possible if parameter 1
9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR: FREQ.
When both the reference and the motor speed drop below
the value of parameter 2105 DC HOLD SPEED, the drive
will stop generating sinusoidal current and start to inject DC
into the motor. The current is set by parameter 2106 DC
CURR REF. When the reference speed exceeds parameter
2105 value, normal drive operation continues.
Motor speed
DC hold
t
Ref
DC hold speed
t
Note: DC hold has no effect if the start signal is switched

off.
Note: Injecting DC current into the motor causes the motor
to heat up. In applications where long DC hold times are
required, externally ventilated motors should be used. If the
DC hold period is long, the DC hold cannot prevent the
motor shaft from rotating if a constant load is applied to the
motor.
All parameters
DC BRAKING DC current braking function active. 2
If parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is set to COAST, DC
braking is applied after the start command is removed.
If parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is set to RAMP, DC
braking is applied after the ramp.
Coast mode Ramp mode
DC braking ON
Speed
Speed DC braking ON
2106
a 2106
2107
t 2107
t
a: Ramp release at zero speed
(1% of the nominal speed)
2105 DC HOLD Defines the DC hold speed. See parameter 2104 DC HOLD 5 rpm
SPEED CTL.
0…360 rpm Speed 1 = 1 rpm
2106 DC CURR REF Defines the DC hold current. See parameter 2104 DC 30%
HOLD CTL.
0…100% Value as a percentage of the nominal motor current 1 = 1%
(parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR)
2107 DC BRAKE Defines the DC brake time. 0.0 s
TIME
0.0…250.0 s Time 1 = 0.1 s
2108 START INHIBIT Sets the Start inhibit function on or off. If the drive is not OFF
actively started and running, the Start inhibit function
ignores a pending start command in any of the following
situations and a new start command is required:
• a fault is reset.
• Run enable signal activates while the start command is
active. See parameter 1601 RUN ENABLE.
• control mode changes from local to remote.
• external control mode switches from EXT1 to EXT2 or
from EXT2 to EXT1.
• the drive that is set to external pulse start (parameter
1001 EXT1 COMMANDS is set to DI1P,2P; DI1P,2P,3 or
DI1P,2P,3P) is powered up and the corresponding digital
inputs (DI1 and DI2 or DI3) are at high level during power-
up.
OFF Disabled 0
ON Enabled 1
All parameters
2109 EMERG STOP Selects the source for the external emergency stop NOT SEL
SEL command.
The drive cannot be restarted before the emergency stop
command is reset.
Note: The installation must include emergency stop devices
and any other safety equipment that may be needed.
Pressing the stop key on the drive’s control panel does
NOT:
• generate an emergency stop of the motor
• separate the drive from dangerous potential.
NOT SEL Emergency stop function is not selected 0
DI1 Digital input DI1. 1 = stop along the emergency stop ramp. 1
See parameter 2208 EMERG DEC TIME. 0 = emergency
stop command reset.
DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI. 0 = stop along the emergency stop -1
ramp. See parameter 2208 EMERG DEC TIME. 1 =
emergency stop command reset
2110 TORQ BOOST Defines the maximum supplied current during torque boost. 100%
CURR See parameter 2101 START FUNCTION.
15…300% Value as a percentage 1 = 1%
2111 STOP SIGNAL Defines the stop signal delay time when parameter 2102 0 ms
DLY STOP FUNCTION is set to SPEED COMP.
0…10000 ms Delay time 1 = 1 ms
All parameters
2112 ZERO SPEED Defines the delay for the Zero speed delay function. The 0.0 =
DELAY function is useful in applications where a smooth and quick NOT SEL
restarting is essential. During the delay the drive knows
accurately the rotor position.
No Zero speed delay With Zero speed delay
Speed Speed
Speed controller Speed controller

switched off: Motor remains live. Motor is
coasts to stop. decelerated to true 0
speed.
Zero speed Zero speed
t t
Delay
No Zero speed delay
The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along
a ramp. When the motor actual speed falls below an internal
limit (called Zero speed), the speed controller is switched
off. The inverter modulation is stopped and the motor coasts
to standstill.
With Zero speed delay
The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along
a ramp. When the actual motor speed falls below an internal
limit (called Zero speed), the zero speed delay function
activates. During the delay the functions keeps the speed
controller live: The inverter modulates, motor is magnetized
and the drive is ready for a quick restart.
0.0 = NOT SEL Delay time. If parameter value is set to zero, Zero speed 1 = 0.1 s
0.0…60.0 s delay function is disabled.
22 ACCEL/DECEL Acceleration and deceleration times
2201 ACC/DEC 1/2 Defines the source from which the drive reads the signal DI5
SEL that selects between the two ramp pairs,
acceleration/deceleration pair 1 and 2.
Ramp pair 1 is defined by parameters 2202…2204.
Ramp pair 2 is defined by parameters 2205…2207.
NOT SEL Ramp pair 1 is used. 0
DI1 Digital input DI1. 1 = ramp pair 2, 0 = ramp pair 1. 1
All parameters
COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for ramp pair 1/2 selection, 7
ie, Control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 10. The Control
word is sent by the fieldbus controller through the fieldbus
SEQ PROG Sequence programming ramp defined by parameter 8422 10
ST1 RAMP (or 8423/…/8492)
DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI1. 0 = ramp pair 2, 1 = ramp pair 1. -1
2202 ACCELER Defines the acceleration time 1, ie, the time required for the 5.0 s
TIME 1 speed to change from zero to the speed defined by
parameter 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ (in scalar control) / 2002
MAXIMUM SPEED (in vector control). The control mode is
• If the speed reference increases faster than the set
acceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the
acceleration rate.
• If the speed reference increases slower than the set
acceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the
reference signal.
• If the acceleration time is set too short, the drive will
automatically prolong the acceleration in order not to
exceed the drive operating limits.
Actual acceleration time depends on parameter 2204 RAMP
SHAPE 1 setting.
0.0…1800.0 s Time 1 = 0.1 s
All parameters
2203 DECELER Defines the deceleration time 1, ie, the time required for the 5.0 s
TIME 1 speed to change from the value defined by parameter 2008
MAXIMUM FREQ (in scalar control) / 2002 MAXIMUM
SPEED (in vector control) to zero. The control mode is
• If the speed reference decreases slower than the set
deceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the
reference signal.
• If the reference changes faster than the set deceleration
rate, the motor speed will follow the deceleration rate.
• If the deceleration time is set too short, the drive will
automatically prolong the deceleration in order not to
exceed drive operating limits.
If a short deceleration time is needed for a high inertia
application, the drive should be equipped with a brake
resistor.
Actual deceleration time depends on parameter 2204
RAMP SHAPE 1 setting.
0.0…1800.0 s Time 1 = 0.1 s
2204 RAMP SHAPE Selects the shape of the acceleration/deceleration ramp 1. 0.0 =
1 The function is deactivated during emergency stop and LINEAR
jogging.
0.0 = LINEAR 0.0: Linear ramp. Suitable for steady acceleration or 1 = 0.1 s
0.1…1000.0 s deceleration and for slow ramps.
0.1…1000.0 s: S-curve ramp. S-curve ramps are ideal for
conveyors carrying fragile loads, or other applications where
a smooth transition is required when changing from one
speed to another. The S-curve consists of symmetrical
curves at both ends of the ramp and a linear part in
between.
A rule of thumb:
A suitable relation between the ramp shape time and the
acceleration ramp time is 1/5.
Speed
Linear ramp: Par. 2204 = 0 s
Max
S-curve ramp:
Par. 2204 > 0 s
t
Par. 2202 Par. 2204
All parameters
2205 ACCELER Defines the acceleration time 2, ie, the time required for the 60.0 s
TIME 2 speed to change from zero to the speed defined by
parameter 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ (in scalar control) / 2002
MAXIMUM SPEED (in vector control). The control mode is
See parameter 2202 ACCELER TIME 1.
Acceleration time 2 is used also as jogging acceleration
time. See parameter 1010 JOGGING SEL.
0.0…1800.0 s Time 1 = 0.1 s
2206 DECELER Defines the deceleration time 2, ie, the time required for the 60.0 s
TIME 2 speed to change from the value defined by parameter 2008
MAXIMUM FREQ (in scalar control) / 2002 MAXIMUM
SPEED (in vector control) to zero. The control mode is
See parameter 2203 DECELER TIME 1.
Deceleration time 2 is used also as jogging deceleration
time. See parameter 1010 JOGGING SEL.
0.0…1800.0 s Time 1 = 0.1 s
2207 RAMP SHAPE Selects the shape of the acceleration/deceleration ramp 2. 0.0 =
2 The function is deactivated during emergency stop. LINEAR
During jogging, parameter value is set to zero (ie, linear
ramp). See 1010 JOGGING SEL.
0.0 = LINEAR See parameter 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1. 1 = 0.1 s
0.1…1000.0 s
2208 EMERG DEC Defines the time within which the drive is stopped if an 1.0 s
TIME emergency stop is activated. See parameter 2109 EMERG
STOP SEL.
0.0…1800.0 s Time 1 = 0.1 s
2209 RAMP INPUT 0 Defines the control for forcing the speed to 0 with the NOT SEL
currently used deceleration ramp (see parameters 2203
DECELER TIME 1 and 2206 DECELER TIME 2).
DI1 Digital input DI1. Defines digital input DI1 as the control for 1
forcing the speed to zero.
• Activating the digital input forces the speed to zero, after
which the speed will stay at zero.
• De-activating the digital input: speed control resumes
normal operation.
All parameters
COMM Defines bit 13 of Command word 1 as the control for forcing 7
the speed to zero. The Command word 1 is supplied
through fieldbus communication (parameter 0301).
DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI1. Defines inverted digital input DI1 -1
as the control for forcing the speed to zero.
• De-activating the digital input forces the speed to zero.
• Activating the digital input: speed control resumes normal
operation.
23 SPEED Speed controller variables. See section Speed controller
CONTROL tuning on page 144.
Note: These parameters do not affect drive operation in
scalar control, ie, when parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL
MODE setting is SCALAR: FREQ.
2301 PROP GAIN Defines a relative gain for the speed controller. High gain 5.00
may cause speed oscillation.
The figure below shows the speed controller output after an
error step when the error remains constant.
% Gain = Kp = 1
TI = Integration time = 0
Error TD= Derivation time = 0
value
Controller Controller output

e = Error
output = value
Kp · e
t
Note: For automatic setting of the gain, use autotune run
(parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN).
0.00…200.00 Gain 1 = 0.01
All parameters
2302 INTEGRATION Defines an integration time for the speed controller. The 0.50 s
TIME integration time defines the rate at which the controller
output changes when the error value is constant. The
shorter the integration time, the faster the continuous error
value is corrected. Too short an integration time makes the
control unstable.
%
Controller output
Gain = Kp = 1
Kp · e TI = Integration time > 0
TD= Derivation time = 0
Kp · e e = Error value
t
TI
Note: For automatic setting of the integration time, use

autotune run (parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN).
0.00…600.00 s Time 1 = 0.01 s
All parameters
2303 DERIVATION Defines the derivation time for the speed controller. 0 ms
TIME Derivative action boosts the controller output if the error
value changes. The longer the derivation time, the more the
speed controller output is boosted during the change. If the
derivation time is set to zero, the controller works as a PI
controller, otherwise as a PID controller.
The derivation makes the control more responsive for
disturbances.
%
Controller
Δe output
Kp · T D ·
Ts Kp · e Error value
Kp · e e = Error value
t
TI
Gain = Kp = 1
TI = Integration time > 0
TD= Derivation time > 0
Ts= Sample time period = 2 ms
Δe = Error value change between two samples
0.…10000 ms Time 1 = 1 ms
All parameters
2304 ACC Defines the derivation time for acceleration/(deceleration) 0.00 s
COMPENSATI compensation. In order to compensate inertia during
ON
acceleration, a derivative of the reference is added to the
output of the speed controller. The principle of a derivative
action is described for parameter 2303 DERIVATION TIME.
Note: As a general rule, set this parameter to the value
between 50 and 100% of the sum of the mechanical time
constants of the motor and the driven machine. (The speed
controller Autotune run does this automatically, see
parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN.)
The figure below shows the speed responses when a high
inertia load is accelerated along a ramp.
No acceleration Acceleration
compensation compensation
% %
t t
Speed reference
Actual speed
0.00…600.00 s Time 1 = 0.01 s
2305 AUTOTUNE Start automatic tuning of the speed controller. Instructions: OFF
RUN
• Run the motor at a constant speed of 20 to 40% of the
rated speed.
• Change the autotuning parameter 2305 to ON.
Note: The motor load must be connected to the motor.
OFF No autotuning 0
ON Activates the speed controller autotuning. The drive 1
• accelerates the motor
• calculates values for proportional gain, integration time
and acceleration compensation (parameter 2301 PROP
GAIN, 2302 INTEGRATION TIME and 2304 ACC
COMPENSATION values).
Setting is automatically reverted to OFF.
24 TORQUE Torque control variables
CONTROL
2401 TORQ RAMP Defines the torque reference ramp up time, ie, the minimum 0.00 s
UP time for the reference to increase from zero to the nominal
motor torque.
0.00…120.00 s Time 1 = 0.01 s
All parameters
2402 TORQ RAMP Defines the torque reference ramp down time, ie, the 0.00 s
DOWN minimum time for the reference to decrease from the
nominal motor torque to zero.
0.00…120.00 s Time 1 = 0.01 s
25 CRITICAL Speed bands within which the drive is not allowed to
SPEEDS operate.
2501 CRIT SPEED Activates/deactivates the critical speeds function. The OFF
SEL critical speed function avoids specific speed ranges.
Example: A fan has vibrations in the range of 18 to 23 Hz
and 46 to 52 Hz. To make the drive to jump over the
vibration speed ranges:
• Activate the critical speeds function.
• Set the critical speed ranges as in the figure below.
foutput (Hz)
1 Par. 2502 = 18 Hz
52 2 Par. 2503 = 23 Hz
46 3 Par. 2504 = 46 Hz
23 4 Par. 2505 = 52 Hz
18
freference (Hz)
1 2 3 4
OFF Inactive 0
ON Active 1
2502 CRIT SPEED 1 Defines the minimum limit for critical speed/frequency range 0.0 Hz /
LO 1. 1 rpm
0.0…599.0 Hz / Limit in rpm. Limit in Hz if parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL 1 = 0.1 Hz
0…30000 rpm MODE setting is SCALAR: FREQ. The value cannot be / 1 rpm
above the maximum (parameter 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI).
2503 CRIT SPEED 1 Defines the maximum limit for critical speed/frequency 0.0 Hz /
HI range 1. 1 rpm
0.0…599.0 Hz / Limit in rpm. Limit in Hz if parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL 1 = 0.1 Hz
0…30000 rpm MODE setting is SCALAR: FREQ. The value cannot be / 1 rpm
below the minimum (parameter 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO).
2504 CRIT SPEED 2 See parameter 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO. 0.0 Hz /
LO 1 rpm
0.0…599.0 Hz / See parameter 2502. 1 = 0.1 Hz
0…30000 rpm / 1 rpm
All parameters
2505 CRIT SPEED 2 See parameter 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI. 0.0 Hz /
HI 1 rpm
0…30000 rpm / 1 rpm
2506 CRIT SPEED 3 See parameter 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO. 0.0 Hz /
LO 1 rpm
0…30000 rpm / 1 rpm
2507 CRIT SPEED 3 See parameter 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI. 0.0 Hz /
HI 1 rpm
0…30000 rpm / 1 rpm
26 MOTOR Motor control variables
CONTROL
2601 FLUX OPT Activates/deactivates the flux optimization function. Flux OFF
ENABLE optimization reduces the total energy consumption and
motor noise level when the drive operates below the
nominal load. The total efficiency (motor and the drive) can
be improved by 1% to 10%, depending on the load torque
and speed. The disadvantage of this function is that the
dynamic performance of the drive is weakened.
OFF Inactive 0
ON Active 1
2602 FLUX Activates/deactivates the Flux braking function. See section OFF
BRAKING Flux braking on page 140.
OFF Inactive 0
MODERATE Flux level is limited during the braking. Deceleration time is 1
longer compared to full braking. The moderate mode is
always used with permanent magnet motor selection and
vector control.
FULL Maximum braking power. Almost all available current is 2
used to convert the mechanical braking energy to thermal
energy in the motor.
All parameters
2603 IR COMP Defines the output voltage boost at zero speed (IR Type
VOLT compensation). The function is useful in applications with a dependent
high break-away torque when vector control cannot be
applied.
To prevent overheating, set IR compensation voltage as low
as possible.
Note: The function can be used only when parameter 9904
MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR: FREQ.
The figure below illustrates the IR compensation.
Typical IR compensation values:
PN (kW) 0.37 0.75 2.2 4.0 7.5
200…240 V units
IR comp (V) 8.4 7.7 5.6 8.4 N/A
380…480 V units
IR comp (V) 14 14 5.6 8.4 7
Motor
voltage
A A = IR compensated
B = No compensation
2603
B
f (Hz)
2604
0.0…100.0 V Voltage boost 1 = 0.1 V
2604 IR COMP Defines the frequency at which the IR compensation is 0 V. 80%
FREQ See the figure for parameter 2603 IR COMP VOLT
Note: If parameter 2605 U/F RATIO is set to USER
DEFINED, this parameter is not active. The IR
compensation frequency is set by parameter 2610 USER
DEFINED U1.
0…100% Value as a percentage of the motor frequency 1 = 1%
2605 U/F RATIO Selects the voltage to frequency (U/f) ratio below the field LINEAR
weakening point. For scalar control only.
LINEAR Linear ratio for constant torque applications. 1
SQUARED Squared ratio for centrifugal pump and fan applications. 2
With squared U/f ratio the noise level is lower for most
operating frequencies. Not recommended for permanent
magnet synchronous motors.
USER Custom ratio defined by parameters 2610…2618. See 3
DEFINED section Custom U/f ratio on page 143.
All parameters
2606 SWITCHING Defines the switching frequency of the drive. Higher 4 kHz
FREQ switching frequency results in lower acoustic noise.
In multimotor systems, do not change the switching
frequency from the default value.
See also parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL and
section Switching frequency derating, I2N on page 376.
4 kHz Sets the switching frequency to 4 kHz. 1 = 1 kHz
8 kHz Sets the switching frequency to 8 kHz.
2607 SWITCH FREQ Selects the control method for the switching frequency. ON
CTRL Selection has no effect if parameter 2606 SWITCHING (LOAD)
FREQ is 4 kHz.
ON Drive maximum current is automatically derated according 1
to the selected switching frequency (see parameter 2607
SWITCH FREQ CTRL and section Switching frequency
derating, I2N on page 376) and adapted according to the
drive temperature.
It is recommended to use this selection when a specific
switching frequency is required with maximum performance.
fsw limit
16 kHz
Drive
temperature
4 kHz
T
80…100 °C * 100…120 °C *
* Temperature depends on the drive output frequency.

All parameters
ON (LOAD) The drive is started with 4 kHz switching frequency to gain 2
maximum output during the start. After start-up, the
switching frequency is controlled towards the selected value
(parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL) if the output
current or the temperature allows.
This selection provides adaptive switching frequency
control. Adaptation decreases the output performance in
some cases.
fsw limit
16 kHz
Drive current I2N
Drive
temperature
4 kHz
T
80…100 °C * 100…120 °C *
50% ** 100% **
* Temperature depends on the drive output frequency.

** Short term overloading is allowed with each switching
frequency depending on actual loading.
LONG CABLE Fixes switching frequency to 4 kHz and prolongs the 3
minimum pulse time enabling the use of longer cables.
2608 SLIP COMP Defines the slip gain for the motor slip compensation 0%
RATIO control. 100% means full slip compensation, 0% means no
slip compensation. Other values can be used if a static
speed error is detected despite the full slip compensation.
Can be used only in scalar control (ie, when parameter 9904
MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR: FREQ).
Example: 35 Hz constant speed reference is given to the
drive. Despite the full slip compensation (SLIP COMP
RATIO = 100%), a manual tachometer measurement from
the motor axis gives a speed value of 34 Hz. The static
speed error is 35 Hz - 34 Hz = 1 Hz. To compensate the
error, the slip gain should be increased.
0…200% Slip gain 1 = 1%
All parameters
2609 NOISE Enables the noise smoothing function. Noise smoothing DISABLE
SMOOTHING distributes the acoustic motor noise over a range of
frequencies instead of a single tonal frequency resulting in
lower peak noise intensity. A random component with an
average of 0 Hz is added to the switching frequency set by
parameter 2606 SWITCHING FREQ.
Note: Parameter has no effect if parameter 2606
SWITCHING FREQ is set to 16 kHz.
DISABLE Disabled 0
ENABLE Enabled 1
2610 USER Defines the first voltage point of the custom U/f curve at the 19% of
DEFINED U1 frequency defined by parameter 2611 USER DEFINED F1. UN
See section Custom U/f ratio on page 143.
0…120% of UN V Voltage 1=1V
2611 USER Defines the first frequency point of the custom U/f curve. 10.0 Hz
DEFINED F1
0.0…599.0 Hz Frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz
2612 USER Defines the second voltage point of the custom U/f curve at 38% of
DEFINED U2 the frequency defined by parameter 2613 USER DEFINED UN
F2. See section Custom U/f ratio on page 143.
2613 USER Defines the second frequency point of the custom U/f curve. 20.0 Hz
DEFINED F2
0.0…599.0 Hz Frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz
2614 USER Defines the third voltage point of the custom U/f curve at the 47.5% of
DEFINED U3 frequency defined by parameter 2615 USER DEFINED F3. UN
See section Custom U/f ratio on page 143.
2615 USER Defines the third frequency point of the custom U/f curve. 25.0 Hz
DEFINED F3
0.0…599.0 Hz Frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz
2616 USER Defines the fourth voltage point of the custom U/f curve at 76% of
DEFINED U4 the frequency defined by parameter 2617 USER DEFINED UN
F4. See section Custom U/f ratio on page 143.
2617 USER Defines the fourth frequency point of the custom U/f curve. 40.0 Hz
DEFINED F4
0.0…599.0 Hz Frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz
2618 FW VOLTAGE Defines the voltage of the U/f curve when frequency is equal 95% of
to or exceeds the motor nominal frequency (9907 MOTOR UN
NOM FREQ). See section Custom U/f ratio on page 143.
All parameters
2619 DC Enables or disables the DC voltage stabilizer. The DC DISABLE
STABILIZER stabilizer is used to prevent possible voltage oscillations in
the drive DC bus caused by motor load or weak supply
network. In case of voltage variation, the drive tunes the
frequency reference to stabilize the DC bus voltage and
therefore the load torque oscillation.
DISABLE Disabled 0
ENABLE Enabled 1
2621 SMOOTH Selects the forced current vector rotation mode at low NO
START speeds. When the smooth start mode is selected, the rate of
acceleration is limited by the acceleration and deceleration
ramp times (parameters 2202 and 2203). If the process
driven by the permanent magnet synchronous motor has
high inertia, slow ramp times are recommended.
Can be used for permanent magnet synchronous motors
only (see chapter Appendix: Permanent magnet
synchronous motors (PMSMs)).
NO Disabled 0
YES Enabled always when the frequency is below the smooth 1
start frequency (parameter 2623 SMOOTH START FRQ).
START ONLY Enabled below the smooth start frequency (parameter 2623 2
SMOOTH START FRQ) only when starting the motor.
2622 SMOOTH Current used in the current vector rotation at low speeds. 50%
START CUR Increase the smooth start current if the application requires
high pull-up torque. Decrease the smooth start current if
motor shaft swinging needs to be minimized. Note that
accurate torque control is not possible in the current vector
rotation mode.
10…100% Value as a percentage of the nominal motor current 1 = 1%
2623 SMOOTH Output frequency up to which the current vector rotation is 10%
START FRQ used.
2…100% Value as a percentage of the motor nominal frequency 1 = 1%
2624 SMOOTH The maximum time the smooth start feature is active. When 0 s
STRT TIME value is set to 0 (default), the smooth start time limitation is
not activated.
0.0…100.0 s Maximum time in seconds 1=1s
All parameters
2626 SPD EST BW Speed estimation bandwidth trimming. 0%
TRIM Effective only in vector:speed and vector:torque modes.
Speed estimation is trimmed to be very dynamic. When the
drive is used with non-dynamic loads such as compressors,
pumps and fans, this variable can be trimmed to a higher
value.
0…20% Speed estimation bandwidth 1 = 1%
29 MAINTENANCE Maintenance triggers
TRIG
2901 COOLING FAN Defines the trigger point for the drive cooling fan run time 0.0 kh
TRIG counter. Value is compared to parameter 2902 COOLING
FAN ACT value.
0.0…6553.5 kh Time. If parameter value is set to zero, the trigger is 1 = 0.1 kh
disabled.
2902 COOLING FAN Defines the actual value for the cooling fan run time counter. 0.0 kh
ACT When parameter 2901 COOLING FAN TRIG has been set
to a non zero value, the counter starts. When the actual
value of the counter exceeds the value defined by
parameter 2901, a maintenance notice is displayed on the
panel.
0.0…6553.5 kh Time. Parameter is reset by setting it to zero. 1 = 0.1 kh
2903 REVOLUTION Defines the trigger point for the motor revolution counter. 0 Mrev
TRIG Value is compared to parameter 2904 REVOLUTION ACT
value.
0…65535 Mrev Millions of revolutions. If parameter value is set to zero, the 1 =
trigger is disabled. 1 Mrev
2904 REVOLUTION Defines the actual value for the motor revolution counter. 0 Mrev
ACT When parameter 2903 REVOLUTION TRIG has been set to
a non zero value, the counter starts. When the actual value
of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter
2903, a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel.
0…65535 Mrev Millions of revolutions. Parameter is reset by setting it to 1=
zero. 1 Mrev
2905 RUN TIME Defines the trigger point for the drive run time counter. Value 0.0 kh
TRIG is compared to parameter 2906 RUN TIME ACT value.
0.0…6553.5 kh Time. If parameter value is set to zero, the trigger is 1 = 0.1 kh
disabled.
2906 RUN TIME Defines the actual value for the drive run time counter. 0.0 kh
ACT When parameter 2905 RUN TIME TRIG has been set to a
non zero value, the counter starts. When the actual value of
the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2905, a
maintenance notice is displayed on the panel.
0.0…6553.5 kh Time. Parameter is reset by setting it to zero. 1 = 0.1 kh
All parameters
2907 USER MWh Defines the trigger point for the drive power consumption 0.0 MWh
TRIG counter. Value is compared to parameter 2908 USER MWh
ACT value.
0.0… Megawatt hours. If parameter value is set to zero, the trigger 1 =
6553.5 MWh is disabled. 0.1 MWh
2908 USER MWh Defines the actual value of the drive power consumption 0.0 MWh
ACT counter. When parameter 2907 USER MWh TRIG has been
set to a non zero value, the counter starts. When the actual
value of the counter exceeds the value defined by
parameter 2907, a maintenance notice is displayed on the
panel.
00.0… Megawatt hours. Parameter is reset by setting it to zero. 1=
6553.5 MWh 0.1 MWh
30 FAULT Programmable protection functions
FUNCTIONS
3001 AI<MIN Defines the drive response if the analog input (AI) signal NOT SEL
FUNCTION drops below the fault limits and AI is used
• as the active reference source (group 11 REFERENCE
SELECT)
• as the process or external PID controllers' feedback or
setpoint source (group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1,
41 PROCESS PID SET 2 or 42 EXT / TRIM PID) and the
corresponding PID controller is active.
3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT and 3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT set the
fault limits.
NOT SEL Protection is inactive. 0
FAULT The drive trips on fault AI1 LOSS (0007) / AI2 LOSS (0008) 1
and the motor coasts to stop. Fault limit is defined by
parameter 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT / 3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT.
CONST SP 7 The drive generates alarm AI1 LOSS (2006) / AI2 LOSS 2
(2007) and sets the speed to the value defined by
parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7. Alarm limit is defined by
parameter 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT / 3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue
operation in case the analog input signal is lost.
LAST SPEED The drive generates alarm AI1 LOSS (2006) / AI2 LOSS 3
(2007) and freezes the speed to the level the drive was
operating at. The speed is determined by the average
speed over the previous 10 seconds. Alarm limit is defined
by parameter 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT / 3022 AI2 FAULT
LIMIT.
operation in case the analog input signal is lost.
All parameters
3002 PANEL COMM Selects how the drive reacts to a control panel FAULT
ERR communication break.
Note: When either of the two external control locations are
active, and start, stop and/or direction are through the
control panel – 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS / 1002 EXT2
COMMANDS = 8 (KEYPAD) – the drive follows the speed
reference according to the configuration of the external
control locations, instead of the value of the last speed or
parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7.
FAULT Drive trips on fault PANEL LOSS (0010) and the motor 1
coasts to stop.
CONST SP 7 The drive generates alarm PANEL LOSS (2008) and sets 2
the speed to the speed defined by parameter 1208 CONST
SPEED 7.
operation in case of a panel communication break.
LAST SPEED The drive generates alarm PANEL LOSS (2008) and 3
freezes the speed to the level the drive was operating at.
The speed is determined by the average speed over the
previous 10 seconds.
operation in case of a panel communication break.
3003 EXTERNAL Selects an interface for an external fault 1 signal. NOT SEL
FAULT 1
DI1 External fault indication through digital input DI1. 1
1 = Fault trip on EXT FAULT 1 (0014). Motor coasts to stop.
0 = No external fault.
DI1(INV) External fault indication through inverted digital input DI1. -1
0 = Fault trip on EXT FAULT 1 (0014). Motor coasts to stop.
1 = No external fault.
3004 EXTERNAL Selects an interface for an external fault 2 signal. NOT SEL
FAULT 2
See parameter 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1.
All parameters
3005 MOT THERM Selects how the drive reacts when the motor FAULT
PROT overtemperature is detected.
FAULT The drive trips on fault MOT OVERTEMP (0009) when the 1
temperature exceeds 110 °C, and the motor coasts to stop.
ALARM The drive generates alarm MOTOR TEMP (2010) when the 2
motor temperature exceeds 90 °C.
3006 MOT THERM Defines the thermal time constant for the motor thermal 500 s
TIME model, ie, the time within which the motor temperature has
reached 63% of the nominal temperature with steady load.
For thermal protection according to UL requirements for
NEMA class motors, use the rule of thumb: Motor thermal
time = 35 · t6. t6 (in seconds) is specified by the motor
manufacturer as the time the motor can safely operate at six
times its rated current.
Thermal time for a Class 10 trip curve is 350 s, for a Class
20 trip curve 700 s, and for a Class 30 trip curve 1050 s.
Motor load
Temp. rise
100%
63%
t
}
Par. 3006
256…9999 s Time constant 1=1s
All parameters
3007 MOT LOAD Defines the load curve together with parameters 3008 100%
CURVE ZERO SPEED LOAD and 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ.
With the default value 100%, motor overload protection is
functioning when the constant current exceeds 127% of the
parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR value.
The default overloadability is at the same level as what
motor manufacturers typically allow below 30 °C (86 °F)
ambient temperature and below 1000 m (3300 ft) altitude.
When the ambient temperature exceeds 30 °C (86 °F) or
the installation altitude is over 1000 m (3300 ft), decrease
the parameter 3007 value according to the motor
manufacturer’s recommendation.
Example: If the constant protection level needs to be 115%
of the nominal motor current, set parameter 3007 value to
91% (= 115/127·100%).
Output current relative (%) to
9906 MOTOR NOM CURR
150
Par. 3007 100 =

127%
Par. 3008 50
f
Par. 3009
50.…150% Allowed continuous motor load relative to the nominal motor 1 = 1%
current
3008 ZERO SPEED Defines the load curve together with parameters 3007 MOT 70%
LOAD LOAD CURVE and 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ.
25.…150% Allowed continuous motor load at zero speed as a 1 = 1%
percentage of the nominal motor current
All parameters
3009 BREAK POINT Defines the load curve together with parameters 3007 MOT 35 Hz
FREQ LOAD CURVE and 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD.
Example: Thermal protection trip times when parameters
3006…3008 have default values.
IO = Output current
IN = Nominal motor current
fO = Output frequency
fBRK = Break point frequency
IO/IN A = Trip time
A
3.5
3.0 60 s
2.5 90 s
2.0
180 s
1.5 300 s
600 s
1.0 ∞
0.5
fO/fBRK
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
1…250 Hz Drive output frequency at 100% load 1 = 1 Hz
All parameters
3010 STALL Selects how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition. The NOT SEL
FUNCTION protection wakes up if the drive has operated in a stall
region (see the figure below) longer than the time set by
parameter 3012 STALL TIME.
In vector control the user defined limit = 2017 MAX
TORQUE 1 / 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 (applies for positive
and negative torques).
In scalar control the user defined limit = 2003 MAX
CURRENT.
The control mode is selected by parameter 9904 MOTOR
CTRL MODE.
Torque (%) /
Current (A) Stall region
0.95 · User defined limit
f
Par. 3011
FAULT The drive trips on fault MOTOR STALL (0012) and the 1
motor coasts to stop.
ALARM The drive generates alarm MOTOR STALL (2012). 2
3011 STALL Defines the frequency limit for the stall function. See 20.0 Hz
FREQUENCY parameter 3010 STALL FUNCTION.
0.5…50.0 Hz Frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz
3012 STALL TIME Defines the time for the stall function. See parameter 3010 20 s
STALL FUNCTION.
1…400 s Time 1=1s
3013 UNDERLOAD Selects how the drive reacts to underload. The protection NOT SEL
FUNC wakes up if:
• the motor torque falls below the curve selected by
parameter 3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE,
• output frequency is higher than 10% of the nominal motor
frequency and
• the above conditions have been valid longer than the time
set by parameter 3014 UNDERLOAD TIME.
All parameters
FAULT The drive trips on fault UNDERLOAD (0017) and the motor 1
coasts to stop.
Note: Set parameter value to FAULT only after the drive ID
run is performed! If FAULT is selected, the drive may
generate an UNDERLOAD fault during ID run.
ALARM The drive generates alarm UNDERLOAD (2011). 2
3014 UNDERLOAD Defines the time limit for the underload function. See 20 s
TIME parameter 3013 UNDERLOAD FUNC.
10…400 s Time limit 1=1s
3015 UNDERLOAD Selects the load curve for the underload function. See 1
CURVE parameter 3013 UNDERLOAD FUNC.
TM = nominal torque of the motor
ƒN = nominal frequency of the motor (9907)
TM
(%)
Underload curve types
80 3
70%
60 2
50%
40 1 5
30%
20
4
0 f
fN 2.4 · fN
1…5 Number of the load curve type in the figure 1=1

3016 SUPPLY Selects how the drive reacts to supply phase loss, ie, when FAULT
PHASE DC voltage ripple is excessive.
FAULT The drive trips on fault SUPPLY PHASE (0022) and the 0
motor coasts to stop when the DC voltage ripple exceeds
14% of the nominal DC voltage.
LIMIT/ALARM Drive output current is limited and alarm INPUT PHASE 1
LOSS (2026) is generated when the DC voltage ripple
exceeds 14% of the nominal DC voltage.
There is a 10 s delay between the activation of the alarm
and the output current limitation. The current is limited until
the ripple drops under the minimum limit, 0.3 · Ihd.
ALARM The drive generates alarm INPUT PHASE LOSS (2026) 2
when the DC ripple exceeds 14% of the nominal DC
voltage.
All parameters
3017 EARTH FAULT Selects how the drive reacts when an earth (ground) fault is ENABLE
detected in the motor or the motor cable.
Note: Disabling earth (ground) fault may void the warranty.
DISABLE No action 0
ENABLE The drive trips on fault EARTH FAULT (0016) when the 1
earth fault is detected during run.
START ONLY The drive trips on fault EARTH FAULT (0016) when the 2
earth fault is detected before run.
3018 COMM FAULT Selects how the drive reacts in a fieldbus communication NOT SEL
FUNC break. The time delay is defined by parameter 3019 COMM
FAULT TIME.
After a start-up, the protection is inactive for 60 seconds.
FAULT Protection is active. The drive trips on fault SERIAL 1 ERR 1
(0028) and coasts to stop.
CONST SP 7 Protection is active. The drive generates alarm IO COMM 2
(2005) and sets the speed to the value defined by
parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7.
operation in case of a communication break.
LAST SPEED Protection is active. The drive generates alarm IO COMM 3
(2005) and freezes the speed to the level the drive was
operating at. The speed is determined by the average
speed over the previous 10 seconds.
operation in case of a communication break.
3019 COMM FAULT Defines the time delay for the fieldbus communication break 3.0 s
TIME supervision. See parameter 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC.
0.0…600.0 s Delay time 1 = 0.1 s
3021 AI1 FAULT Defines a fault level for analog input AI1. If parameter 3001 0.0%
LIMIT AI<MIN FUNCTION is set to FAULT, the drive trips on fault
AI1 LOSS (0007) when the analog input signal falls below
the set level.
Do not set this limit below the level defined by parameter
1301 MINIMUM AI1.
0.0…100.0% Value as a percentage of the full signal range 1 = 0.1%
All parameters
3022 AI2 FAULT Defines a fault level for analog input AI2. If parameter 3001 0.0%
LIMIT AI<MIN FUNCTION is set to FAULT, the drive trips on fault
AI2 LOSS (0008) when the analog input signal falls below
the set level.
Do not set this limit below the level defined by parameter
1304 MINIMUM AI2.
0.0…100.0% Value as a percentage of the full signal range 1 = 0.1%
3023 WIRING FAULT Selects how the drive reacts when incorrect input power and ENABLE
motor cable connection is detected (ie, the input power
cable is connected to the motor connection of the drive).
Note: Disabling wiring fault (ground fault) may void the
warranty.
DISABLE No action 0
ENABLE The drive trips on fault OUTP WIRING (0035). 1
3025 STO Selects how the drive reacts when the drive detects that the ONLY
OPERATION STO (Safe torque off) function is active. ALARM
ONLY FAULT The drive trips on fault SAFE TORQUE OFF (0044). 1
ALARM&FAUL The drive generates alarm SAFE TORQUE OFF (2035) 2
T when stopped and trips on fault SAFE TORQUE OFF
(0044) when running.
NO & FAULT The drive gives no indication to the user when stopped and 3
trips on fault SAFE TORQUE OFF (0044) when running.
ONLY ALARM The drive generates alarm SAFE TORQUE OFF (2035). 4
Note: The start signal must be reset (toggled to 0) if STO
(Safe torque off) has been used while the drive has been
running.
3026 POWER FAIL Selects how the drive reacts when the control board is ALARM
START externally powered by the MPOW-01 auxiliary power
extension module (see Appendix: Extension modules on
page 411) and start is requested by the user.
ALARM The drive generates alarm UNDERVOLTAGE (2003). 1
FAULT The drive trips on fault DC UNDERVOLT (0006). 2
NO The drive gives no indication to the user. 3
3027 OPTION COM Selects how the drive reacts when the MREL-01 output 1
LOSS relay module is removed from the drive, and parameters
1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2, 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 or 1410
RELAY OUTPUT 4 have non-zero values.
DISABLE No action. 0
ENABLE The drive trips on fault 1006 PAR EXT RO. 1
All parameters
3029 FAULT RAMP Enables the emergency ramp stop when the drive faults. 0
STOP
DISABLE Coast stop used. 0
ENABLE Fault ramp stop enabled. The drive stops using an 1
emergency ramp when a non-critical fault occurs.
The following critical faults will always cause the coast stop
regardless of the value of this parameter:
• 0001 OVERCURRENT
• 0002 DC OVERVOLT
• 0004 SHORT CIRC
• 0044 SAFE TORQUE OFF
• 0045 STO1 LOST
• 0046 STO2 LOST.
31 AUTOMATIC Automatic fault reset. Automatic resets are possible only for
RESET certain fault types and when the automatic reset function is
activated for that fault type.
3101 NUMBER OF Defines the number of automatic fault resets the drive 0
TRIALS performs within the time defined by parameter 3102 TRIAL
TIME.
If the number of automatic resets exceeds the set number
(within the trial time), the drive prevents additional automatic
resets and remains stopped. The drive must be reset from
the control panel or from a source selected by parameter
1604 FAULT RESET SEL.
Example: Three faults have occurred during the trial time
defined by parameter 3102. Last fault is reset only if the
number defined by parameter 3101 is 3 or more.
Trial time
t X = Automatic reset
X X X
0…5 Number of the automatic resets 1=1
3102 TRIAL TIME Defines the time for the automatic fault reset function. See 30.0 s
parameter 3101 NUMBER OF TRIALS.
1.0…600.0 s Time 1 = 0.1 s
3103 DELAY TIME Defines the time that the drive will wait after a fault before 0.0 s
attempting an automatic reset. See parameter 3101
NUMBER OF TRIALS. If delay time is set to zero, the drive
resets immediately.
0.0…120.0 s Time 1 = 0.1 s
All parameters
3104 AR Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the DISABLE
OVERCURRE overcurrent fault. Automatically resets fault
NT
OVERCURRENT (0001) after the delay set by parameter
3103 DELAY TIME.
DISABLE Inactive 0
ENABLE Active 1
OVERVOLTAG intermediate link overvoltage fault. Automatically resets fault
E
DC OVERVOLT (0002) after the delay set by parameter
3103 DELAY TIME.
DISABLE Inactive 0
ENABLE Active 1
UNDERVOLTA intermediate link undervoltage fault. Automatically resets
GE
fault DC UNDERVOLT (0006) after the delay set by
parameter 3103 DELAY TIME.
DISABLE Inactive 0
ENABLE Active 1
3107 AR AI<MIN Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for AI<MIN DISABLE
(analog input signal under the allowed minimum level) faults
AI1 LOSS (0007) and AI2 LOSS (0008). Automatically
resets the fault after the delay set by parameter 3103
DELAY TIME.
DISABLE Inactive 0
ENABLE Active 1
WARNING! The drive may restart even after a long
stop if the analog input signal is restored. Ensure that
the use of this feature will not cause danger.
3108 AR EXTERNAL Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for faults EXT DISABLE
FLT FAULT 1 (0014) and EXT FAULT 2 (0015). Automatically
resets the fault after the delay set by parameter 3103
DELAY TIME.
DISABLE Inactive 0
ENABLE Active 1
All parameters
32 SUPERVISION Signal supervision. Supervision status can be monitored
with relay or transistor output. See parameter groups 14
RELAY OUTPUTS and 18 FREQ IN & TRAN OUT.
3201 SUPERV 1 Selects the first supervised signal. Supervision limits are 103
PARAM defined by parameters 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO and 3203
SUPERV 1 LIM HI.
Example 1: If 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO < 3203 SUPERV 1
LIM HI
Case A = 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 value is set to SUPRV1
OVER. Relay energizes when value of the signal selected
with 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM exceeds the supervision limit
defined by 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI. The relay remains
active until the supervised value drops below the low limit
defined by 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO.
Case B = 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 value is set to SUPRV1
UNDER. Relay energizes when value of the signal selected
with 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM drops below the supervision
limit defined by 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO. The relay remains
active until the supervised value rises above the high limit
defined by 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI.
Value of supervised parameter
HI par. 3203
LO par. 3202
t
Case A
Energized (1)
0 t
Case B
Energized (1)
0 t
All parameters
Example 2: If 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO > 3203 SUPERV 1
LIM HI
The lower limit 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI remains active until
the supervised signal exceeds the higher limit 3202
SUPERV 1 LIM LO, making it the active limit. The new limit
remains active until the supervised signal drops below the
lower limit 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI, making it the active
limit.
Case A = 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 value is set to SUPRV1
OVER. Relay is energized whenever the supervised signal
exceeds the active limit.
Case B = 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 value is set to SUPRV1
UNDER. Relay is de-energized whenever the supervised
signal drops below the active limit.
Value of supervised parameter Active limit
LO par. 3202
HI par. 3203
t
Case A
Energized (1)
0 t
Case B
Energized (1)
0 t
0, x…x Parameter index in group 01 OPERATING DATA. For 1=1
example, 102 = 0102 SPEED. 0 = not selected.
3202 SUPERV 1 LIM Defines the low limit for the first supervised signal selected -
LO by parameter 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM. Supervision wakes
up if the value is below the limit.
x…x Setting range depends on parameter 3201 setting. -
3203 SUPERV 1 LIM Defines the high limit for the first supervised signal selected -
HI by parameter 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM. Supervision wakes
up if the value is above the limit.
3204 SUPERV 2 Selects the second supervised signal. Supervision limits are 104
SUPERV 2 LIM HI. See parameter 3201 SUPERV 1
PARAM.
All parameters
3205 SUPERV 2 LIM Defines the low limit for the second supervised signal -
LO selected by parameter 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM.
Supervision wakes up if the value is below the limit.
3206 SUPERV 2 LIM Defines the high limit for the second supervised signal -
HI selected by parameter 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM.
Supervision wakes up if the value is above the limit.
3207 SUPERV 3 Selects the third supervised signal. Supervision limits are 105
SUPERV 3 LIM HI. See parameter 3201 SUPERV 1
PARAM.
3208 SUPERV 3 LIM Defines the low limit for the third supervised signal selected -
LO by parameter 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM. Supervision wakes
up if the value is below the limit.
3209 SUPERV 3 LIM Defines the high limit for the third supervised signal selected -
HI by parameter 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM. Supervision wakes
up if the value is above the limit.
33 INFORMATION Firmware package version, test date etc.
3301 FIRMWARE Displays the version of the firmware package.
0000…FFFF For example, 241A hex
hex
3302 LOADING Displays the version of the loading package. type
PACKAGE dependent
2201…22FF 2201 hex = ACS355-0nE-
hex 2202 hex = ACS355-0nU-
3303 TEST DATE Displays the test date. 00.00
Date value in format YY.WW (year, week)
3304 DRIVE RATING Displays the drive current and voltage ratings. 0000 hex
0000…FFFF Value in format XXXY hex:
hex XXX = Nominal current of the drive in amperes. An “A”
indicates decimal point. For example if XXX is 9A8, nominal
current is 9.8 A.
Y = Nominal voltage of the drive:
1 = 1-phase 200…240 V
2 = 3-phase 200…240 V
4 = 3-phase 380…480 V
All parameters
3305 PARAMETER Displays the version of the parameter table used in the
TABLE drive.
0000…FFFF For example, 400E hex
hex
34 PANEL DISPLAY Selection of actual signals to be displayed on the panel
3401 SIGNAL1 Selects the first signal to be displayed on the control panel 103
PARAM in the Output mode.
Assistant control panel 3404 3405
LOC 15.0Hz
0137 15.0 Hz
0138 3.7 A
0139 17.3 %
DIR 00:00 MENU
0 = NOT Parameter index in group 01 OPERATING DATA. For 1=1

SELECTED example, 102 = 0102 SPEED. If value is set to 0, no signal
101…181
is selected.
3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Defines the minimum value for the signal selected by -
parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM.
Display
value
3407
3406
Source
3402 3403 value
Note: Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404

OUTPUT1 DSP FORM setting is DIRECT.
3403 SIGNAL1 MAX Defines the maximum value for the signal selected by -
parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM. See the figure for
parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN.
All parameters
3404 OUTPUT1 DSP Defines the format for the displayed signal (selected by DIRECT
FORM parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM).
+/-0 Signed/Unsigned value. Unit is selected by parameter 3405 0
+/-0.0 OUTPUT1 UNIT. 1
Example: PI (3.14159)
+/-0.00 2
+/-0.000 3404 value Display Range 3
+/-0 +3 -32768…+32767
+0 4
+/-0.0 + 3.1
+0.0 +/-0.00 + 3.14 5
+0.00 +/-0.000 + 3.142 6
+0 3 0…65535
+0.000 7
+0.0 3.1
+0.00 3.14
+0.000 3.142
BAR METER Bar graph 8

DIRECT Direct value. Decimal point location and units of measure 9
are the same as for the source signal.
Note: Parameters 3402, 3403 and 3405…3407 are not
effective.
3405 OUTPUT1 Selects the unit for the displayed signal selected by Hz
UNIT parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM.
Note: Unit selection does not convert values.
NO UNIT No unit selected 0
A ampere 1
V volt 2
Hz hertz 3
% percentage 4
s second 5
h hour 6
rpm revolutions per minute 7
kh kilohour 8
°C celsius 9
lb ft pounds per foot 10
mA milliampere 11
mV millivolt 12
kW kilowatt 13
W watt 14
kWh kilowatt hour 15
All parameters
°F fahrenheit 16
hp horsepower 17
MWh megawatt hour 18
m/s meters per second 19
m3/h cubic meters per hour 20
dm3/s cubic decimeters per second 21
bar bar 22
kPa kilopascal 23
GPM gallons per minute 24
PSI pounds per square inch 25
CFM cubic feet per minute 26
ft foot 27
MGD millions of gallons per day 28
inHg inches of mercury 29
FPM feet per minute 30
kb/s kilobytes per second 31
kHz kilohertz 32
ohm ohm 33
ppm pulses per minute 34
pps pulses per second 35
l/s liters per second 36
l/min liters per minute 37
l/h liters per hour 38
m3/s cubic meters per second 39
m3/m cubic meters per minute 40
kg/s kilograms per second 41
kg/m kilograms per minute 42
kg/h kilograms per hour 43
mbar millibar 44
Pa pascal 45
GPS gallons per second 46
gal/s gallons per second 47
gal/m gallons per minute 48
gal/h gallons per hour 49
ft3/s cubic feet per second 50
ft3/m cubic feet per minute 51
ft3/h cubic feet per hour 52
All parameters
lb/s pounds per second 53
lb/m pounds per minute 54
lb/h pounds per hour 55
FPS feet per second 56
ft/s feet per second 57
inH2O inches of water 58
in wg inches of water gauge 59
ft wg feet on water gauge 60
lbsi pounds per squared inch 61
ms millisecond 62
Mrev millions of revolutions 63
d days 64
inWC inches of water column 65
m/min meters per minute 66
Nm Newton meter 67
Km3/h thousand cubic meters per hour 68
min 69
m3 Reserved for solar pumps 70
m6 71
Reserved 72…116
%ref reference as a percentage 117
%act actual value as a percentage 118
%dev deviation as a percentage 119
% LD load as a percentage 120
% SP set point as a percentage 121
%FBK feedback as a percentage 122
Iout output current (as a percentage) 123
Vout output voltage 124
Fout output frequency 125
Tout output torque 126
Vdc DC voltage 127
3406 OUTPUT1 MIN Sets the minimum display value for the signal selected by -
parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM. See parameter 3402
SIGNAL1 MIN.
All parameters
3407 OUTPUT1 Sets the maximum display value for the signal selected by -
MAX parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM. See parameter 3402
SIGNAL1 MIN.
3408 SIGNAL2 Selects the second signal to be displayed on the control 104
PARAM panel in the Output mode. See parameter 3401 SIGNAL1
PARAM.
101…181
is selected.
SIGNAL1 MIN.
SIGNAL1 MIN.
3411 OUTPUT2 DSP Defines the format for the displayed signal selected by DIRECT
FORM parameter 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM.
See parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM. -
3412 OUTPUT2 Selects the unit for the displayed signal selected by -
See parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT. -
SIGNAL1 MIN.
SIGNAL1 MIN.
3415 SIGNAL3 Selects the third signal to be displayed on the control panel 105
PARAM in the Output mode. See parameter 3401 SIGNAL1
PARAM.
101…181
is selected.
All parameters
parameter 3415. See parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN.
x…x Setting range depends on parameter 3415 SIGNAL3 -
PARAM setting.
SIGNAL1 MIN.
PARAM setting.
3418 OUTPUT3 DSP Defines the format for the displayed signal selected by DIRECT
FORM parameter 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM.
See parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM. -
3419 OUTPUT3 Selects the unit for the displayed signal selected by -
See parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT. -
SIGNAL1 MIN.
PARAM setting.
SIGNAL1 MIN.
35 MOTOR TEMP Motor temperature measurement. See section Motor
MEAS temperature measurement through the standard I/O on
page 157.
3501 SENSOR Activates the motor temperature measurement function and NONE
TYPE selects the sensor type. See also parameter group 15
ANALOG OUTPUTS.
NONE The function is inactive. 0
1 x PT100 The function is active. The temperature is measured with 1
one Pt100 sensor. Analog output AO feeds constant current
through the sensor. The sensor resistance increases as the
motor temperature rises, as does the voltage over the
sensor. The temperature measurement function reads the
voltage through analog input AI1/2 and converts it to
degrees centigrade.
2 x PT100 The function is active. Temperature is measured using two 2
Pt100 sensors. See selection 1 x PT100.
3 x PT100 The function is active. Temperature is measured using three 3
Pt100 sensors. See selection 1 x PT100.
All parameters
PTC The function is active. The temperature is supervised using 4
one PTC sensor. Analog output AO feeds constant current
through the sensor. The resistance of the sensor increases
sharply as the motor temperature rises over the PTC
reference temperature (Tref), as does the voltage over the
resistor. The temperature measurement function reads the
voltage through analog input AI1/2 and converts it into
ohms. The figure below shows typical PTC sensor
resistance values as a function of the motor operating
temperature.
Temperature Resistance
Normal 0…1.5 kohm
Excessive > 4 kohm
ohm
4000
1330
550
100
THERM(0) The function is active. Motor temperature is monitored using 5

a PTC sensor (see selection PTC) connected to drive
through a normally closed thermistor relay connected to a
digital input. 0 = motor overtemperature.
THERM(1) The function is active. Motor temperature is monitored using 6
a PTC sensor (see selection PTC) connected to drive
through a normally open thermistor relay connected to a
digital input. 1 = motor overtemperature.
3502 INPUT Selects the source for the motor temperature measurement AI1
SELECTION signal.
AI1 Analog input AI1. Used when Pt100 or PTC sensor is 1
selected for the temperature measurement.
AI2 Analog input AI2. Used when Pt100 or PTC sensor is 2
selected for the temperature measurement
DI1 Digital input DI1. Used when parameter 3501 SENSOR 3
TYPE value is set to THERM(0)/THERM(1).
All parameters
3503 ALARM LIMIT Defines the alarm limit for motor temperature measurement. 0
Alarm MOTOR TEMP (2010) indication is given when the
limit is exceeded. When parameter 3501 SENSOR TYPE
value is set to THERM(0)/THERM(1): 1 = alarm.
x…x Alarm limit -
3504 FAULT LIMIT Defines the fault trip limit for motor temperature 0
measurement. The drive trips on fault MOT OVERTEMP
(0009) when the limit is exceeded. When parameter 3501
SENSOR TYPE value is set to THERM(0)/THERM(1): 1 =
fault.
x…x Fault limit -
3505 AO Enables current feed from analog output AO. Parameter DISABLE
EXCITATION setting overrides parameter group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS
settings.
With PTC the output current is 1.6 mA.
With Pt 100 the output current is 9.1 mA.
DISABLE Disabled 0
ENABLE Enabled 1
36 TIMED Time periods 1 to 4 and booster signal. See section Real-
FUNCTIONS time clock and timed functions on page 165.
3601 TIMERS Selects the source for the timed function enable signal. NOT SEL
ENABLE
NOT SEL Timed function is not selected. 0
DI1 Digital input DI. Timed function enable on the rising edge of 1
DI1.
ACTIVE Timed function is always enabled. 7
DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI1. Timed function enable on the -1
falling edge of DI1.
All parameters
3602 START TIME 1 Defines the daily start time 1. The time can be changed in 00:00:00
2-second steps.
00:00:00… hours:minutes:seconds.
23:59:58 Example: If parameter value is set to 07:00:00, timed
function 1 is activated at 7:00 (7 a.m).
3603 STOP TIME 1 Defines the daily stop time 1. The time can be changed in 00:00:00
2-second steps.
00:00:00… hours:minutes:seconds.
23:59:58 Example: If parameter value is set to 18:00:00, timed
function 1 is deactivated at 18:00 (6 p.m).
3604 START DAY 1 Defines the start day 1. MONDAY
MONDAY 1
TUESDAY 2
WEDNESDAY 3
Example: If parameter value is set to MONDAY, timed
THURSDAY 4
function 1 is active from Monday midnight (00:00:00).
FRIDAY 5
SATURDAY 6
SUNDAY 7
3605 STOP DAY 1 Defines the stop day 1. MONDAY
See parameter 3604 START DAY 1.
Example: If parameter is set to FRIDAY, timed function 1 is
deactivated on Friday midnight (23:59:58).
3606 START TIME 2 See parameter 3602 START TIME 1.
See parameter 3602 START TIME 1.
3607 STOP TIME 2 See parameter 3603 STOP TIME 1.
See parameter 3603 STOP TIME 1.
3608 START DAY 2 See parameter 3604 START DAY 1.
3609 STOP DAY 2 See parameter 3605 STOP DAY 1.
See parameter 3605 STOP DAY 1.
All parameters
3622 BOOSTER Selects the source for the booster activation signal. NOT SEL
SEL
NOT SEL No booster activation signal 0
DI1 Digital input DI1. 1 = active, 0 = inactive. 1
DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI1. 0 = active, 1 = inactive. -1
3623 BOOSTER Defines the time inside which the booster is deactivated 00:00:00
TIME after the booster activation signal is switched off.
00:00:00… hours:minutes:seconds
23:59:58 Example: If parameter 3622 BOOSTER SEL is set to DI1
and 3623 BOOSTER TIME is set to 01:30:00, the booster is
active for 1 hour and 30 minutes after digital input DI is
deactivated.
Booster active
DI
Booster time
All parameters
3626 TIMED FUNC 1 Selects the time periods for TIMED FUNC 1 SRC. Timed NOT SEL
SRC function can consist of 0…4 time periods and a booster.
NOT SEL No time periods selected 0
T1 Time period 1 1
T2 Time period 2 2
T1+T2 Time periods 1 and 2 3
T3 Time period 3 4
T1+T2+T3 Time periods 1, 2 and 3 7
T4 Time period 4 8
T1+T2+T3+T4 Time periods 1, 2, 3 and 4 15
BOOSTER Booster 16
T1+B Booster and time period 1 17
T1+T2+B Booster and time periods 1 and 2 19
T1+T2+T3+B Booster and time periods 1, 2 and 3 23
T1+2+3+4+B Booster and time periods 1, 2, 3 and 4 31
3627 TIMED FUNC 2 See parameter 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC.
SRC
See parameter 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC.
All parameters
SRC
SRC
40 PROCESS PID Process PID (PID1) control parameter set 1. See section
SET 1 PID control on page 151.
4001 GAIN Defines the gain for the process PID controller. High gain 1.0
may cause speed oscillation.
0.1…100.0 Gain. When value is set to 0.1, the PID controller output 1 = 0.1
changes one-tenth as much as the error value. When value
is set to 100, the PID controller output changes one hundred
times as much as the error value.
4002 INTEGRATION Defines the integration time for the process PID1 controller. 10.0 s
TIME The integration time defines the rate at which the controller
output changes when the error value is constant. The
shorter the integration time, the faster the continuous error
value is corrected. Too short an integration time makes the
control unstable.
A = Error
B = Error value step
C = Controller output with gain = 1
D = Controller output with gain = 10
A
B
D (4001 = 10)
C (4001 = 1)
4002
0.0 = NOT SEL Integration time. If parameter value is set to zero, integration 1 = 0.1 s
0.1…3600.0 s (I-part of the PID controller) is disabled.
All parameters
4003 DERIVATION Defines the derivation time for the process PID controller. 0.0 s
TIME Derivative action boosts the controller output if the error
value changes. The longer the derivation time, the more the
speed controller output is boosted during the change. If the
derivation time is set to zero, the controller works as a PI
controller, otherwise as a PID controller.
The derivation makes the control more responsive for
disturbances.
The derivative is filtered with a 1-pole filter. Filter time
constant is defined by parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER.
Error Process error value
100%
0%
t
PID output D-part of controller output
Gain
4001
t
4003
0.0…10.0 s Derivation time. If parameter value is set to zero, the 1 = 0.1 s
derivative part of the PID controller is disabled.
4004 PID DERIV Defines the filter time constant for the derivative part of the 1.0 s
FILTER process PID controller. Increasing the filter time smooths
the derivative and reduces noise.
0.0…10.0 s Filter time constant. If parameter value is set to zero, the 1 = 0.1 s
derivative filter is disabled.
4005 ERROR Selects the relationship between the feedback signal and NO
VALUE INV drive speed.
NO Normal: A decrease in feedback signal increases drive 0
speed. Error = Reference - Feedback
YES Inverted: A decrease in feedback signal decreases drive 1
speed. Error = Feedback - Reference
4006 UNITS Selects the unit for PID controller actual values. %
0…127 See parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT selections in the
given range.
All parameters
4007 UNIT SCALE Defines the decimal point location for PID controller actual 1
values.
0…4 Example: PI (3.141593) 1=1
4007 value Entry Display
0 00003 3
1 00031 3.1
2 00314 3.14
3 03142 3.142
4 31416 3.1416
4008 0% VALUE Defines together with parameter 4009 100% VALUE the 0.0
scaling applied to the PID controller’s actual values.
Units (4006)
Scale (4007) +1000%
4009
4008
Internal
0% 100% scale (%)
-1000%
x…x Unit and range depend on the unit and scale defined by
parameters 4006 UNITS and 4007 UNIT SCALE.
4009 100% VALUE Defines together with parameter 4008 0% VALUE the 100.0
scaling applied to the PID controller’s actual values.
4010 SET POINT Selects the source for the process PID controller reference INTERNA
SEL signal. L
KEYPAD Control panel 0
COMM Fieldbus reference REF2 8
COMM+AI1 Summation of fieldbus reference REF2 and analog input 9
page 320.
COMM*AI1 Multiplication of fieldbus reference REF2 and analog input 10
page 320.
All parameters
DI3U,4D(RNC) Digital input DI3: Reference increase. Digital input DI4: 11
zero. The reference is not saved if the control source is
changed from EXT1 to EXT2, from EXT2 to EXT1 or from
LOC to REM.
DI3U,4D(NC) Digital input DI3: Reference increase. Digital input DI4: 12
Reference decrease. The program stores the active
reference (not reset by a stop command). The reference is
not saved if the control source is changed from EXT1 to
EXT2, from EXT2 to EXT1 or from LOC to REM.
AI1+AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation: 14
REF = AI1(%) + AI2(%) - 50%
AI1*AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation: 15
REF = AI1(%) · (AI2(%) / 50%)
AI1-AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation: 16
REF = AI1(%) + 50% - AI2(%)
AI1/AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation: 17
REF = AI1(%) · (50% / AI2 (%))
INTERNAL A constant value defined by parameter 4011 INTERNAL 19
SETPNT.
DI4U,5D(NC) See selection DI3U,4D(NC). 31
SEQ PROG Sequence programming output. See parameter group 84 33
OUT SEQUENCE PROG.
4011 INTERNAL Selects a constant value as process PID controller 40
SETPNT reference, when parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL value is
set to INTERNAL.
All parameters
4012 SETPOINT Defines the minimum value for the selected PID reference 0.0%
MIN signal source. See parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL.
-500.0…500.0% Value as a percentage. 1 = 0.1%
Example: Analog input AI1 is selected as the PID reference
source (value of parameter 4010 is AI1). The reference
minimum and maximum correspond to the 1301 MINIMUM
AI1 and 1302 MAXIMUM AI1 settings as follows:
Ref Ref
MAX > MIN MIN > MAX
4013 4012
(MAX) (MIN)
4012 4013
(MIN) (MAX)
1301 1302 AI1 (%) 1301 1302 AI1 (%)
4013 SETPOINT Defines the maximum value for the selected PID reference 100.0%
MAX signal source. See parameters 4010 SET POINT SEL and
4012 SETPOINT MIN.
-500.0…500.0% Value as a percentage 1 = 0.1%
4014 FBK SEL Selects the process actual value (feedback signal) for the ACT1
process PID controller: The sources for the variables ACT1
and ACT2 are further defined by parameters 4016 ACT1
INPUT and 4017 ACT2 INPUT.
ACT1 ACT1 1
ACT1-ACT2 Subtraction of ACT1 and ACT2 2
ACT1+ACT2 Addition of ACT1 and ACT2 3
ACT1*ACT2 Multiplication of ACT1 and ACT2 4
ACT1/ACT2 Division of ACT1 and ACT2 5
MIN(ACT1,2) Selects the smaller of ACT1 and ACT2 6
MAX(ACT1,2) Selects the higher of ACT1 and ACT2 7
sqrt(ACT1-2) Square root of the subtraction of ACT1 and ACT2 8
sqA1+sqA2 Addition of the square root of ACT1 and the square root of 9
ACT2
sqrt(ACT1) Square root of ACT1 10
COMM FBK 1 Signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 value 11
COMM FBK 2 Signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 value 12
All parameters
4015 FBK Defines an extra multiplier for the value defined by 0.000
MULTIPLIER parameter 4014 FBK SEL. Parameter is used mainly in
applications where feedback value is calculated from
another variable (eg, flow from pressure difference).
-32.768… Multiplier. If parameter value is set to zero, no multiplier is 1 = 0.001
32.767 used.
4016 ACT1 INPUT Defines the source for actual value 1 (ACT1). See also AI2
parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM.
AI1 Uses analog input 1 for ACT1 1
AI2 Uses analog input 2 for ACT1 2
CURRENT Uses current for ACT1 3
TORQUE Uses torque for ACT1 4
POWER Uses power for ACT1 5
COMM ACT 1 Uses value of signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 for ACT1 6
COMM ACT 2 Uses value of signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 for ACT1 7
4017 ACT2 INPUT Defines the source for actual value ACT2. See also AI2
parameter 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM.
See parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT.
4018 ACT1 Sets the minimum value for ACT1. 0%
MINIMUM
Scales the source signal used as the actual value ACT1
(defined by parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT). For parameter
4016 values 6 (COMM ACT 1) and 7 (COMM ACT 2)
scaling is not done.
Par Source Source min. Source max.
4016
1 Analog input 1 1301 MINIMUM AI1 1302 MAXIMUM AI1
2 Analog input 2 1304 MINIMUM AI2 1305 MAXIMUM AI2
3 Current 0 2 · nominal current
4 Torque -2 · nominal torque 2 · nominal torque
5 Power -2 · nominal power 2 · nominal power
A = Normal; B = Inversion (ACT1 minimum > ACT1

maximum)
ACT1 (%) ACT1 (%)
A
4019 4018
B
4018 4019
Source min. Source max. Source min. Source max.

Source signal Source signal
-1000…1000% Value as a percentage 1 = 1%

All parameters
4019 ACT1 Defines the maximum value for variable ACT1 if an analog 100%
MAXIMUM input is selected as a source for ACT1. See parameter 4016
ACT1 INPUT. The minimum (4018 ACT1 MINIMUM) and
maximum settings of ACT1 define how the voltage/current
signal received from the measuring device is converted to a
percentage value used by the process PID controller.
See parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM.
-1000…1000% Value as a percentage 1 = 1%
4020 ACT2 See parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM. 0%
MINIMUM
-1000…1000% See parameter 4018. 1 = 1%
4021 ACT2 See parameter 4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM. 100%
MAXIMUM
-1000…1000% See parameter 4019. 1 = 1%
4022 SLEEP Activates the sleep function and selects the source for the NOT SEL
SELECTION activation input. See section Sleep function for the process
PID (PID1) control on page 155.
NOT SEL No sleep function selected 0
DI1 The function is activated/deactivated through digital input 1
DI1.1 = activation, 0 = deactivation.
The internal sleep criteria set by parameters 4023 PID
SLEEP LEVEL and 4025 WAKE-UP DEV are not effective.
The sleep start and stop delay parameters 4024 PID SLEEP
DELAY and 4026 WAKE-UP DELAY are effective.
INTERNAL Activated and deactivated automatically as defined by 7
parameters 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL and 4025 WAKE-UP
DEV.
DI1(INV) The function is activated/deactivated through inverted digital -1
input DI1. 1 = deactivation, 0 = activation.
The internal sleep criteria set by parameters 4023 PID
SLEEP LEVEL and 4025 WAKE-UP DEV are not effective.
The sleep start and stop delay parameters 4024 PID SLEEP
DELAY and 4026 WAKE-UP DELAY are effective.
All parameters
4023 PID SLEEP Defines the start limit for the sleep function. If the motor 0.0 Hz /
LEVEL speed is below a set level (4023) longer than the sleep 0 rpm
delay (4024), the drive shifts to the sleeping mode: The
motor is stopped and the control panel shows alarm
message PID SLEEP (2018).
Parameter 4022 SLEEP SELECTION must be set to
INTERNAL.
t
PID process feedback Wake-up delay
(4026)
Wake-up level
PID ref deviation (4025)
t
PID output level
Control
tsd = Sleep delay panel:
(4024)
t < tsd tsd PID SLEEP
Sleep level
(4023)
Stop Start
t
0.0…599.0 Hz / Sleep start level 1 = 0.1 Hz

0…30000 rpm 1 rpm
4024 PID SLEEP Defines the delay for the sleep start function. See parameter 60.0 s
DELAY 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL. When the motor speed falls below
the sleep level, the counter starts. When the motor speed
exceeds the sleep level, the counter is reset.
0.0…3600.0 s Sleep start delay 1 = 0.1 s
All parameters
4025 WAKE-UP DEV Defines the wake-up deviation for the sleep function. The 0
drive wakes up if the process actual value deviation from
the PID reference value exceeds the set wake-up deviation
(4025) longer than the wake-up delay (4026). Wake-up level
depends on parameter 4005 ERROR VALUE INV settings.
If parameter 4005 is set to 0:
Wake-up level = PID reference (4010) - Wake-up deviation
(4025).
If parameter 4005 is set to 1:
Wake-up level = PID reference (4010) + Wake-up deviation
(4025)
Wake-up level
when 4005 = 1
4025
PID reference
4025
Wake-up level
when 4005 = 0
t
See also figures for parameter 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL.

parameters 4026 WAKE-UP DELAY and 4007 UNIT
SCALE.
4026 WAKE-UP Defines the wake-up delay for the sleep function. See 0.50 s
DELAY parameter 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL.
0.00…60.00 s Wake-up delay 1 = 0.01 s
4027 PID 1 PARAM Defines the source from which the drive reads the signal SET 1
SET that selects between PID parameter set 1 and 2.
PID parameter set 1 is defined by parameters 4001…4026.
PID parameter set 2 is defined by parameters 4101…4126.
SET 1 PID SET 1 is active. 0
DI1 Digital input DI1. 1 = PID SET 2, 0 = PID SET 1. 1
SET 2 PID SET 2 is active. 7
TIMED FUNC 1 Timed PID SET 1/2 control. Timed function 1 inactive = PID 8
SET 1, timed function 1 active = PID SET 2. See parameter
group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS.
All parameters
DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI1. 0 = PID SET 2, 1 = PID SET 1. -1
41 PROCESS PID Process PID (PID1) control parameter set 2. See section
SET 2 PID control on page 151.
4101 GAIN See parameter 4001 GAIN.
4102 INTEGRATION See parameter 4002 INTEGRATION TIME.
TIME
4103 DERIVATION See parameter 4003 DERIVATION TIME.
TIME
4104 PID DERIV See parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER.
FILTER
4105 ERROR See parameter 4005 ERROR VALUE INV.
VALUE INV
4106 UNITS See parameter 4006 UNITS.
4107 UNIT SCALE See parameter 4007 UNIT SCALE.
4108 0% VALUE See parameter 4008 0% VALUE.
4110 SET POINT See parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL.
SEL
4111 INTERNAL See parameter 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT.
SETPNT
4112 SETPOINT See parameter 4012 SETPOINT MIN.
MIN
4113 SETPOINT See parameter 4013 SETPOINT MAX.
MAX
4114 FBK SEL See parameter 4014 FBK SEL.
4115 FBK See parameter 4015 FBK MULTIPLIER.
MULTIPLIER
4116 ACT1 INPUT See parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT.
4118 ACT1 See parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM.
MINIMUM
4119 ACT1 See parameter 4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM.
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
MAXIMUM
All parameters
4122 SLEEP See parameter 4022 SLEEP SELECTION.
SELECTION
4123 PID SLEEP See parameter 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL.
LEVEL
4124 PID SLEEP See parameter 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY.
DELAY
4125 WAKE-UP DEV See parameter 4025 WAKE-UP DEV.
4126 WAKE-UP See parameter 4026 WAKE-UP DELAY.
DELAY
42 EXT / TRIM PID External/Trim PID (PID2) control. See section PID control
on page 151.
4201 GAIN See parameter 4001 GAIN.
4202 INTEGRATION See parameter 4002 INTEGRATION TIME.
TIME
4203 DERIVATION See parameter 4003 DERIVATION TIME.
TIME
4204 PID DERIV See parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER.
FILTER
4205 ERROR See parameter 4005 ERROR VALUE INV.
VALUE INV
4206 UNITS See parameter 4006 UNITS.
4207 UNIT SCALE See parameter 4007 UNIT SCALE.
4210 SET POINT See parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL.
SEL
4211 INTERNAL See parameter 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT.
SETPNT
4212 SETPOINT See parameter 4012 SETPOINT MIN.
MIN
4213 SETPOINT See parameter 4013 SETPOINT MAX.
MAX
4214 FBK SEL See parameter 4014 FBK SEL.
4215 FBK See parameter 4015 FBK MULTIPLIER.
MULTIPLIER
MINIMUM
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
All parameters
MAXIMUM
4228 ACTIVATE Selects the source for the external PID function activation NOT SEL
signal. Parameter 4230 TRIM MODE must be set to NOT
SEL.
NOT SEL No external PID control activation selected 0
DI1 Digital input DI1. 1 = active, 0 = inactive. 1
DRIVE RUN Activation at drive start. Start (drive running) = active. 7
ON Activation at drive power-up. Power-up (drive powered) = 8
active.
TIMED FUNC 1 Activation by a timed function. Timed function 1 active = PID 9
control active. See parameter group 36 TIMED
FUNCTIONS.
DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI1. 0 = active, 1 = inactive. -1
4229 OFFSET Defines the offset for the external PID controller output. 0.0%
When PID controller is activated, controller output starts
from the offset value. When PID controller is deactivated,
controller output is reset to the offset value.
Parameter 4230 TRIM MODE must be set to NOT SEL.
0.0…100.0% Value as a percentage 1 = 0.1%
4230 TRIM MODE Activates the trim function and selects between the direct NOT SEL
and proportional trimming. With trimming it is possible to
combine a corrective factor to the drive reference. See
section Reference trimming on page 130.
NOT SEL No trim function selected 0
PROPORTION Active. The trimming factor is proportional to the rpm/Hz 1
AL reference before trimming (REF1).
DIRECT Active. The trimming factor is relative to a fixed maximum 2
limit used in the reference control loop (maximum speed,
frequency or torque).
All parameters
4231 TRIM SCALE Defines the multiplier for the trimming function. See section 0.0%
Reference trimming on page 130.
-100.0…100.0% Multiplier 1 = 0.1%
4232 CORRECTION Selects the trim reference. See section Reference trimming PID2REF
SRC on page 130.
PID2REF PID2 reference selected by parameter 4210 (ie, signal 0129 1
PID 2 SETPNT value)
PID2OUTPUT PID2 output, ie, signal 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT value 2
4233 TRIM Selects whether the trimming is used for correcting the SPEED/F
SELECTION speed or torque reference. See section Reference trimming REQ
on page 130.
SPEED/FREQ Speed reference trimming 0
TORQUE Torque reference trimming (only for REF2 (%)) 1
43 MECH BRK Control of a mechanical brake. See section Control of a
CONTROL mechanical brake on page 159.
4301 BRAKE OPEN Defines the brake open delay (= the delay between the 0.20 s
DLY internal open brake command and the release of the motor
speed control). The delay counter starts when the motor
current/torque/speed has risen to the level required at brake
release (parameter 4302 BRAKE OPEN LVL or 4304
FORCED OPEN LVL) and the motor has been magnetized.
Simultaneously with the start of the counter, the brake
function energizes the relay output controlling the brake and
the brake starts opening.
0.00…2.50 s Delay time 1 = 0.01 s
4302 BRAKE OPEN Defines the motor starting torque/current at brake release. 100%
LVL After start the drive current/torque is frozen to the set value,
until the motor is magnetized.
0.0…180.0% Value as a percentage of the nominal torque TN (in vector 1 = 0.1%
control) or the nominal current I2N (in scalar control).
The control mode is selected by parameter 9904 MOTOR
CTRL MODE.
4303 BRAKE Defines the brake close speed. After stop the brake is 4.0%
CLOSE LVL closed when drive speed falls below the set value.
0.0…100.0% Value as a percentage of the nominal speed (in vector 1 = 0.1%
control) or the nominal frequency (in scalar control). The
control mode is selected by parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL
MODE.
All parameters
4304 FORCED Defines the speed at brake release. Parameter setting 0.0 =
OPEN LVL overrides parameter 4302 BRAKE OPEN LVL setting. After NOT SEL
start, the drive speed is frozen to the set value, until the
motor is magnetized.
The purpose of this parameter is to generate enough start
torque to prevent the motor rotating into the wrong direction
because of the motor load.
0.0 = NOT SEL Value as a percentage of the maximum frequency (in scalar 1 = 0.1%
0.0…100.0% control) or the maximum speed (in vector control). If
parameter value is set to zero, the function is disabled. The
MODE.
4305 BRAKE MAGN Defines motor magnetizing time. After start drive 0 = NOT
DELAY current/torque/speed is frozen to the value defined by SEL
parameter 4302 BRAKE OPEN LVL or 4304 FORCED
OPEN LVL for the set time.
0 = NOT SEL magnetizing time. If parameter value is set to zero, the 1 = 1 ms
0…10000 ms function is disabled.
4306 RUNTIME Defines the brake close speed. When frequency falls below 0.0 =
FREQ LVL the set level during run, the brake is closed. The brake is re- NOT SEL
opened when the requirements set by parameters
4301…4305 are met.
0.0 = NOT SEL Value as a percentage of the maximum frequency (in scalar 1 = 0.1%
0.0…100.0% control) or the maximum speed (in vector control). If
parameter value is set to zero, the function is disabled. The
MODE.
4307 BRK OPEN Selects the torque (in vector control) or current (in scalar PAR 4302
LVL SEL control) applied at brake release.
PAR 4302 Value of parameter 4302 BRAKE OPEN LVL used. 1
MEMORY Torque value (in vector control) or current value (in scalar 2
control) saved in parameter 0179 BRAKE TORQ MEM
used.
Useful in applications where initial torque is needed to
prevent unintended movement when the mechanical brake
is released.
50 ENCODER Encoder connection.
For more information, see MTAC-01 pulse encoder interface
module user’s manual (3AFE68591091 [English]).
5001 PULSE NR States the number of encoder pulses per one revolution. 1024 ppr
32…16384 ppr Pulse number in pulses per round (ppr) 1 = 1 ppr
All parameters
5002 ENCODER Enables the encoder. DISABLE
ENABLE
DISABLE Disabled 0
ENABLE Enabled 1
5003 ENCODER Defines the operation of the drive if a failure is detected in FAULT
FAULT communication between the pulse encoder and the pulse
encoder interface module, or between the module and the
drive.
FAULT The drive trips on fault ENCODER ERR (0023). 1
ALARM The drive generates alarm ENCODER ERROR (2024). 2
5010 Z PLS ENABLE Enables the encoder zero (Z) pulse. Zero pulse is used for DISABLE
position reset.
DISABLE Disabled 0
ENABLE Enabled 1
5011 POSITION Enables the position reset. DISABLE
RESET
DISABLE Disabled 0
ENABLE Enabled 1
51 EXT COMM The parameters need to be adjusted only when a fieldbus
MODULE adapter module (optional) is installed and activated by
parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL. For more details on the
parameters, refer to the manual of the fieldbus module and
chapter Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter on page 339.
These parameter settings will remain the same even though
the macro is changed.
Note: In adapter module the parameter group number is 1.
5101 FBA TYPE Displays the type of the connected fieldbus adapter module.
NOT_DEFINE Fieldbus module is not found, or it is not properly 0
D connected, or parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL setting is
not EXT FBA.
PROFIBUS_D FPBA-01 PROFIBUS DP adapter module, FPBA-01-M 1
P PROFIBUS DP adapter module
LONWORKS FLON-01 LONWORKS® adapter module 21
CANOPEN FCAN-01 CANopen adapter module, FCAN-01-M CANopen 32
adapter module
DEVICENET FDNA-01 DeviceNet adapter module 37
CONTROLNET FCNA-01 ControlNet adapter module 101
ETHERNET FENA-01/-11/-21 Ethernet adapter module 128
ETHERCAT FECA-01 EtherCAT adapter module 135
ETHERN_PO FEPL-02 Ethernet POWERLINK adapter module 136
WERLINK
All parameters
RS-485 FSCA-01 RS-485 adapter module 485
5102 FB PAR 2 These parameters are adapter module-specific. For more
… … information, see the module manual. Note that not all of
these parameters are necessarily visible.
5126 FB PAR 26
5127 FBA PAR Validates any changed adapter module configuration
REFRESH parameter settings. After refreshing, the value reverts
automatically to DONE.
DONE Refreshing done 0
REFRESH Refreshing 1
5128 FILE CPI FW Displays the parameter table revision of the fieldbus adapter
REV module mapping file stored in the memory of the drive.
Format is xyz where:
• x = major revision number
• y = minor revision number
• x = correction letter.
0000…FFFF Parameter table revision 1=1
hex
5129 FILE CONFIG Displays the drive type code of the fieldbus adapter module
ID mapping file stored in the memory of the drive.
0000…FFFF Drive type code of fieldbus adapter module mapping file 1=1
hex
5130 FILE CONFIG Displays the fieldbus adapter module mapping file revision
REV stored in the memory of the drive in decimal format.
Example: 1 = revision 1.
0000…FFFF Mapping file revision 1=1
hex
5131 FBA STATUS Displays the status of the fieldbus adapter module
communication.
IDLE Adapter is not configured. 0
EXECUT INIT Adapter is initializing. 1
TIME OUT A time-out has occurred in the communication between the 2
adapter and the drive.
CONFIG Adapter configuration error: The major or minor revision 3
ERROR code of the common program revision in the fieldbus
adapter module is not the revision required by the module
(see parameter 5132 FBA CPI FW REV) or mapping file
upload has failed more than three times.
OFF-LINE Adapter is off-line. 4
ON-LINE Adapter is on-line. 5
RESET Adapter is performing a hardware reset. 6
All parameters
5132 FBA CPI FW Displays the common program revision of the adapter
REV module in format axyz, where:
• a = major revision number
• xy = minor revision numbers
• z = correction letter.
Example: 190A = revision 1.90A
Common program revision of the adapter module 1=1
5133 FBA APPL FW Displays the application program revision of the adapter
REV module in format axyz, where:
• a = major revision number
• xy = minor revision numbers
• z = correction letter.
Example: 190A = revision 1.90A
Application program revision of the adapter module 1=1
52 PANEL COMM Communication settings for the control panel port on the
drive
5201 STATION ID Defines the address of the drive. Two units with the same 1
address are not allowed on-line.
1…247 Address 1=1
5202 BAUD RATE Defines the transfer rate of the link. 9.6 kb/s
1.2 kb/s 1.2 kbit/s 1=
2.4 kb/s 2.4 kbit/s 0.1 kbit/s
4.8 kb/s 4.8 kbit/s

9.6 kb/s 9.6 kbit/s
19.2 kb/s 19.2 kbit/s
38.4 kb/s 38.4 kbit/s
57.6 kb/s 57.6 kbit/s
115.2 kb/s 115.2 kbit/s
5203 PARITY Defines the use of parity and stop bit(s). The same setting 8 NONE 1
must be used in all on-line stations.
8 NONE 1 8 data bits, no parity bit, one stop bit 0
8 NONE 2 8 data bits, no parity bit, two stop bits 1
8 EVEN 1 8 data bits, even parity indication bit, one stop bit 2
8 ODD 1 8 data bits, odd parity indication bit, one stop bit 3
5204 OK Number of valid messages received by the drive. During 0
MESSAGES normal operation, this number increases constantly.
0…65535 Number of messages 1=1
All parameters
5205 PARITY Number of characters with a parity error received from the 0
ERRORS Modbus link. If the number is high, check that the parity
settings of the devices connected on the bus are the same.
Note: High electromagnetic noise levels generate errors.
0…65535 Number of characters 1=1
5206 FRAME Number of characters with a framing error received by the 0
ERRORS Modbus link. If the number is high, check that the
communication speed settings of the devices connected on
the bus are the same.
5207 BUFFER Number of characters which overflow the buffer, ie, number 0
OVERRUNS of characters which exceed the maximum message length,
128 bytes.
5208 CRC ERRORS Number of messages with an CRC (cyclic redundancy 0
check) error received by the drive. If the number is high,
check CRC calculation for possible errors.
53 EFB PROTOCOL Embedded fieldbus link settings. See chapter Fieldbus
control with embedded fieldbus on page 313.
5302 EFB STATION Defines the address of the device. Two units with the same 1
ID address are not allowed on-line.
0…247 Address 1=1
5303 EFB BAUD Defines the transfer rate of the link. 9.6 kb/s
RATE
1.2 kb/s 1.2 kbit/s 1=
2.4 kb/s 2.4 kbit/s 0.1 kbit/s
4.8 kb/s 4.8 kbit/s

9.6 kb/s 9.6 kbit/s
19.2 kb/s 19.2 kbit/s
38.4 kb/s 38.4 kbit/s
57.6 kb/s 57.6 kbit/s
115.2 kb/s 115.2 kbit/s
5304 EFB PARITY Defines the use of parity and stop bit(s) and the data length. 8 NONE 1
The same setting must be used in all on-line stations.
8 NONE 1 No parity bit, one stop bit, 8 data bits 0
8 NONE 2 No parity bit, two stop bits, 8 data bits 1
All parameters
8 EVEN 1 Even parity indication bit, one stop bit, 8 data bits 2
8 ODD 1 Odd parity indication bit, one stop bit, 8 data bits 3
5305 EFB CTRL Selects the communication profile. See section ABB DRV
PROFILE Communication profiles on page 328. LIM
ABB DRV LIM ABB drives limited profile 0
DCU PROFILE DCU profile 1
ABB DRV ABB drives profile 2
FULL
5306 EFB OK Number of valid messages received by the drive. During 0
MESSAGES normal operation, this number increases constantly.
5307 EFB CRC Number of messages with an CRC (cyclic redundancy 0
ERRORS check) error received by the drive. If the number is high,
check CRC calculation for possible errors.
5310 EFB PAR 10 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 103
40005.
0…65535 Parameter index 1=1
40006.
40007.
40008.
40009.
40010.
40011.
40012.
All parameters
5318 EFB PAR 18 For Modbus: Sets an additional delay before the drive 0
begins transmitting response to the master request.
0…65535 Delay in milliseconds 1=1
5319 EFB PAR 19 ABB drives profile (ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL) 0000 hex
Control word.
0000…FFFF Control word
hex
5320 EFB PAR 20 ABB drives profile (ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL) 0000 hex
Status word.
0000…FFFF Status word
hex
54 FBA DATA IN Data from the drive to the fieldbus controller through a
fieldbus adapter. See chapter Fieldbus control with fieldbus
adapter on page 339.
5401 FBA DATA IN 1 Selects data to be transferred from the drive to the fieldbus
controller.
0 Not in use
1…6 Control and status data words
5401 setting Data word
1 Control word
2 REF1
3 REF2
4 Status word
5 Actual value 1
6 Actual value 2
101…9999 Parameter index

5402 FBA DATA IN 2 See 5401 FBA DATA IN 1.
… … …
5410 FBA DATA IN See 5401 FBA DATA IN 1.
10
All parameters
55 FBA DATA OUT Data from the fieldbus controller to the drive through a
fieldbus adapter. See chapter Fieldbus control with fieldbus
5501 FBA DATA Selects data to be transferred from the fieldbus controller to
OUT 1 the drive.
0 Not in use
1…6 Control and status data words
5501 setting Data word
1 Control word
2 REF1
3 REF2
4 Status word
5 Actual value 1
6 Actual value 2
101…9999 Drive parameter
5502 FBA DATA See 5501 FBA DATA OUT 1.
OUT 2
… … …
5510 FBA DATA See 5501 FBA DATA OUT 1.
OUT 10
84 SEQUENCE Sequence programming. See section Sequence
PROG programming on page 169.
8401 SEQ PROG Enables Sequence programming. DISABLE
ENABLE D
If Sequence programming enable signal is lost, the
Sequence programming is stopped, Sequence
programming state (0168 SEQ PROG STATE) is set to 1
and all timers and outputs (RO/TO/AO) are set to zero.
DISABLED Disabled 0
EXT2 Enabled in external control location 2 (EXT2) 1
EXT1 Enabled in external control location 1 (EXT1) 2
EXT1&EXT2 Enabled in external control locations 1 and 2 (EXT1 and 3
EXT2)
ALWAYS Enabled in external control locations 1 and 2 (EXT1 and 4
EXT2) and in local control (LOCAL)
All parameters
8402 SEQ PROG Selects the source for the Sequence programming NOT SEL
START activation signal.
When Sequence programming is activated, the
programming starts from the previously used state.
If Sequence programming activation signal is lost, the
Sequence programming is stopped and all timers and
outputs (RO/TO/AO) are set to zero. Sequence
programming state (0168 SEQ PROG STATE) remains
unchanged.
If start from the first Sequence programming state is
required, the Sequence programming must be reset by
parameter 8404 SEQ PROG RESET. If start from the first
Sequence programming state is always required, reset and
start signal sources (8404 and 8402 SEQ PROG START)
must be through the same digital input.
Note: The drive will not start if no Run enable signal is
received (1601 RUN ENABLE).
DI1(INV) Sequence programming activation through inverted digital -1
input DI1. 0 = active, 1 = inactive.
NOT SEL No Sequence programming activation signal 0
DI1 Sequence programming activation through digital input DI1. 1
1 = active, 0 = inactive.
DRIVE START Sequence programming activation at drive start 6
TIMED FUNC 1 Sequence programming is activated by timed function 1. 7
See parameter group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS.
RUNNING Sequence programming is always active. 11
All parameters
8403 SEQ PROG Selects the source for the Sequence programming pause NOT SEL
PAUSE signal. When Sequence programming pause is activated, all
timers and outputs (RO/TO/AO) are frozen. Sequence
programming state transition is possible only by parameter
8405 SEQ ST FORCE.
DI1(INV) Pause signal through inverted digital input DI1. 0 = active, 1 -1
= inactive.
NOT SEL No pause signal 0
DI1 Pause signal through digital input DI1. 1 = active, 0 = 1
inactive.
PAUSED Sequence programming pause enabled 6
8404 SEQ PROG Selects the source for the Sequence programming reset NOT SEL
RESET signal. Sequence programming state (0168 SEQ PROG
STATE) is set to the first state and all timers and outputs
(RO/TO/AO) are set to zero.
Reset is possible only when Sequence programming is
stopped.
DI1(INV) Reset through inverted digital input DI1. 0 = active, 1 = -1
inactive.
DI1 Reset through digital input DI1. 1 = active, 0 = inactive. 1
RESET Reset. After reset parameter value is automatically set to 6
NOT SEL.
All parameters
8405 SEQ ST Forces the Sequence programming to a selected state. STATE 1
FORCE Note: State is changed only when Sequence programming
is paused by parameter 8403 SEQ PROG PAUSE and this
parameter is set to the selected state.
STATE 1 State is forced to state 1. 1
8406 SEQ LOGIC Defines the source for the logic value 1. Logic value 1 is NOT SEL
VAL 1 compared to logic value 2 as defined by parameter 8407
SEQ LOGIC OPER 1.
Logic operation values are used in state transitions. See
parameter 8425 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2 / 8426 ST1 TRIG TO
ST N selection LOGIC VAL.
DI1(INV) Logic value 1 through inverted digital input DI1 -1
NOT SEL No logic value 0
DI1 Logic value 1 through digital input DI1 1
SUPRV1 Logic value according to supervision parameters 6
OVER 3201…3203. See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION.
UNDER
UNDER
All parameters
UNDER
TIMED FUNC 1 Logic value 1 is activated by timed function 1. See 12
parameter group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS. 1 = timed
function active.
8407 SEQ LOGIC Selects the operation between logic value 1 and 2. Logic NOT SEL
OPER 1 operation values are used in state transitions. See
parameter 8425 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2 / 8426 ST1 TRIG TO
ST N selection LOGIC VAL.
NOT SEL Logic value 1 (no logic comparison) 0
AND Logic function: AND 1
OR Logic function: OR 2
XOR Logic function: XOR 3
8408 SEQ LOGIC See parameter 8406 SEQ LOGIC VAL 1. NOT SEL
VAL 2
See parameter 8406.
8409 SEQ LOGIC Selects the operation between logic value 3 and the result NOT SEL
OPER 2 of the first logic operation defined by parameter 8407 SEQ
LOGIC OPER 1.
NOT SEL Logic value 2 (no logic comparison) 0
AND Logic function: AND 1
OR Logic function: OR 2
XOR Logic function: XOR 3
8410 SEQ LOGIC See parameter 8406 SEQ LOGIC VAL 1. NOT SEL
VAL 3
See parameter 8406.
8411 SEQ VAL 1 Defines the high limit for the state change when parameter 0.0%
HIGH 8425 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2 is set to, eg, AI 1 HIGH 1.
8412 SEQ VAL 1 Defines the low limit for the state change when parameter 0.0%
LOW 8425 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2 is set to, eg, AI 1 LOW 1.
8413 SEQ VAL 2 Defines the high limit for the state change when parameter 0.0%
HIGH 8425 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2 is set to, eg, AI 2 HIGH 1.
All parameters
8414 SEQ VAL 2 Defines the low limit for the state change when parameter 0.0%
LOW 8425 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2 is set to, eg, AI 2 LOW 1.
8415 CYCLE CNT Activates the cycle counter for Sequence programming. NOT SEL
LOC Example: When parameter is set to ST6 TO NEXT, the
cycle count (0171 SEQ CYCLE CNTR) increases every
time the state changes from state 6 to state 7.
NOT SEL Disabled 0
ST1 TO NEXT From state 1 to state 2 1
ST1 TO N From state 1 to state n. State n is defined by parameter 9
8427 ST1 STATE N.
8427 ST1 STATE N.
8427 ST1 STATE N.
8427 ST1 STATE N.
8427 ST1 STATE N.
8427 ST1 STATE N.
8427 ST1 STATE N.
8427 ST1 STATE N.
8416 CYCLE CNT Selects the source for the cycle counter reset signal (0171 NOT SEL
RST SEQ CYCLE CNTR).
DI1(INV) Reset through inverted digital input DI1. 0 = active, 1 = -1
inactive.
All parameters
DI1 Reset through digital input DI1. 1 = active, 0 = inactive. 1
STATE 1 Reset during state transition to state 1. Counter is reset, 6
when the state has been reached.
SEQ PROG Reset signal source defined by parameter 8404 SEQ PROG 14
RST RESET
8420 ST1 REF SEL Selects the source for the Sequence programming state 1 0.0%
reference. Parameter is used when parameter 1103 REF1
SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set to SEQ PROG /
AI1+SEQ PROG / AI2+SEQ PROG.
Note: Constant speeds in group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS
overwrite the selected Sequence programming reference.
COMM 0136 COMM VALUE 2. For scaling, see Fieldbus reference -1.3
scaling on page 322.
AI1/AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation: -1.2
REF = AI1(%) · (50% / AI2 (%))
AI1-AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation: -1.1
REF = AI1(%) + 50% - AI2(%)
AI1*AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation: -1.0
REF = AI1(%) · (AI2(%) / 50%)
AI1+AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation: -0.9
REF = AI1(%) + AI2(%) - 50%
All parameters
DI4U,5D Digital input DI4: Reference increase. Digital input DI5: -0.8
Reference decrease.
DI3U,4D Digital input DI3: Reference increase. Digital input DI4: -0.7
Reference decrease.
DI3U,4D(R) Digital input DI3: Reference increase. Digital input DI4: -0.6
Reference decrease.
AI2 JOY Analog input AI2 as joystick. The minimum input signal runs -0.5
the motor at the maximum reference in the reverse
direction, the maximum input at the maximum reference in
the forward direction. Minimum and maximum references
are defined by parameters 1104 REF1 MIN and 1105 REF1
MAX. See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT selection
AI1/JOYST for more information.
AI1 JOY See selection AI2 JOY. -0.4
AI2 Analog input AI2 -0.3
AI1 Analog input AI1 -0.2
KEYPAD Control panel -0.1
0.0 …100.0% Constant speed 1 = 0.1%
8421 ST1 Selects the start, stop and direction for state 1. Parameter DRIVE
COMMANDS 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS must be set to SEQ PROG. STOP
Note: If change of direction of rotation is required,
parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to REQUEST.
DRIVE STOP Drive coast or ramps to stop depending on parameter 2102 0
STOP FUNCTION setting.
START FRW Direction or rotation is fixed to forward. If the drive is not 1
already running, it is started according to parameter 2101
START FUNCTION settings.
START REV Direction or rotation is fixed to reverse. If the drive is not 2
already running, it is started according to parameter 2101
START FUNCTION settings.
8422 ST1 RAMP Selects the acceleration/deceleration ramp time for 0.0 s
Sequence programming state 1, ie, defines the rate of the
reference change.
-0.2/-0.1/ Time 1 = 0.1 s
0.0…1800.0 s When value is set to -0.2, ramp pair 2 is used. Ramp pair 2
is defined by parameters 2205…2207.
When value is set to -0.1, ramp pair 1 is used. Ramp pair 1
is defined by parameters 2202…2204.
With ramp pair 1/2, parameter 2201 ACC/DEC 1/2 SEL
must be set to SEQ PROG. See also parameters
2202…2207.
All parameters
8423 ST1 OUT Selects the relay, transistor and analog output control for AO=0
CONTROL Sequence programming state 1.
The relay/transistor output control must be activated by
setting parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 / 1805 DO
SIGNAL to SEQ PROG. Analog output control must be
activated by parameter group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS.
Analog output control values can be monitored with signal
0170 SEQ PROG AO VAL.
RO2=RO3 Relay outputs are energized (closed). Effective only with the -1.5
=RO4=1 MREL-01 option.
RO2=1, RO3=1 Relay outputs are energized (closed). Effective only with the -1.4
MREL-01 option.
RO4 = 1 Relay output is energized (closed). Effective only with the -1.3
MREL-01 option.
MREL-01 option.
MREL-01 option.
RST CNT Reserved for Enhanced Sequence Program (ESP). -1.0
NEXT
RST CNT ENT Reserved for ESP. -0.8
RST CNT Reserved for ESP. -0.9
STNX
R=0,D=1,AO=0 Relay output is de-energized (opened), transistor output is -0.7
energized and analog output is cleared.
R=1,D=0,AO=0 Relay output is energized (closed), transistor output is de- -0.6
energized and analog output is cleared.
R=0,D=0,AO=0 Relay and transistor outputs are de-energized (opened) and -0.5
analog output value is set to zero.
RO=0,DO=0 Relay and transistor outputs are de-energized (opened) and -0.4
analog output control is frozen to the previously set value.
RO=1,DO=1 Relay and transistor outputs are energized (closed) and -0.3
analog output control is frozen to the previously set value.
DO=1 Transistor output is energized (closed) and relay output is -0.2
de-energized. Analog output control is frozen to the
previously set value.
RO=1 Transistor output is de-energized (opened) and relay output -0.1
is energized. Analog output control is frozen to the
previously set value.
All parameters
AO=0 Analog output value is set to zero. Relay and transistor 0.0
outputs are frozen to the previously set value.
0.1…100.0% Value written to signal 0170 SEQ PROG AO VAL. Value can
be connected to control analog output AO by setting
parameter 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL value to 170 (ie,
signal 0170 SEQ PROG AO VAL). AO value is frozen to this
value until it is zeroed.
8424 ST1 CHANGE Defines the delay time for state 1. When delay has elapsed, 0.0 s
DLY state transition is allowed. See parameters 8425 ST1 TRIG
TO ST 2 and 8426 ST1 TRIG TO ST N.
0.0…6553.5 s Delay time 1 = 0.1 s
8425 ST1 TRIG TO Selects the source for the trigger signal which changes the NOT SEL
ST 2 state from state 1 to state 2.
Note: State change to state N (8426 ST1 TRIG TO ST N)
has a higher priority than state change to the next state
(8425 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2).
DI1(INV) Trigger through inverted digital input DI1. 0 = active, 1 = -1
inactive.
NOT SEL No trigger signal. If parameter 8426 ST1 TRIG TO ST N 0
setting is also NOT SEL, the state is frozen and can be reset
only with parameter 8402 SEQ PROG START.
DI1 Trigger through digital input DI1. 1 = active, 0 = inactive. 1
AI 1 LOW 1 State change when AI1 value < par. 8412 SEQ VAL 1 LOW 6
value.
AI 1 HIGH 1 State change when AI1 value > par. 8411 SEQ VAL 1 HIGH 7
value.
value.
value.
AI1 OR 2 LO1 State change when AI1 or AI2 value < par. 8412 SEQ VAL 1 10
LOW value.
All parameters
AI1LO1AI2HI1 State change when AI1 value < par. 8412 SEQ VAL 1 LOW 11
value and AI2 value > par. 8411 SEQ VAL 1 HIGH value.
AI1LO1 ORDI5 State change when AI1 value < par. 8412 SEQ VAL 1 LOW 12
value or when DI5 is active.
AI2HI1 ORDI5 State change when AI2 value > par. 8411 SEQ VAL 1 HIGH 13
value.
value.
value.
value.
AI1 OR 2 LO2 State change when AI1 or AI2 value < par. 8414 SEQ VAL 2 18
LOW value.
AI1LO2AI2HI2 State change when AI1 value < par. 8414 SEQ VAL 2 LOW 19
value and AI2 value > par. 8413 SEQ VAL 2 HIGH value.
AI1LO2 ORDI5 State change when AI1 value < par. 8414 SEQ VAL 2 LOW 20
AI2HI2 ORDI5 State change when AI2 value > par. 8413 SEQ VAL 2 HIGH 21
TIMED FUNC 1 Trigger with timed function 1. See parameter group 36 22
TIMED FUNCTIONS.
CHANGE DLY State change after delay time defined by parameter 8424 26
ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed.
DI1 OR DELAY State change after DI1 activation or after delay time defined 27
by parameter 8424 ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed.
DI2 OR DELAY See selection DI1 OR DELAY. 28
AI1HI1 ORDLY State change when AI1 value > par. 8411 SEQ VAL 1 HIGH 32
value or after delay time defined by parameter 8424 ST1
CHANGE DLY has elapsed.
AI2LO1 ORDLY State change when AI1 value < par. 8412 SEQ VAL 1 LOW 33
All parameters
AI1HI2 ORDLY State change when AI1 value > par. 8413 SEQ VAL 2 HIGH 34
AI2LO2 ORDLY State change when AI2 value < par. 8414 SEQ VAL 2 LOW 35
UNDER
UNDER
UNDER
SPV1OVRORD State change according to supervision parameters 42
LY 3201…3203 or when delay time defined by parameter 8424
ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed. See parameter group 32
SUPERVISION.
SUPERVISION.
SUPERVISION.
SPV1UNDORD See selection SPV1OVRORDLY. 45
LY
LY
LY
CNTR OVER State change when counter value exceeds the limit defined 48
by par. 1905 COUNTER LIMIT. See parameters
1904…1911.
CNTR UNDER State change when counter value is below the limit defined 49
by par. 1905 COUNTER LIMIT. See parameters
1904…1911.
LOGIC VAL State change according to logic operation defined by 50
parameters 8406…8410
All parameters
ENTER State change when drive output frequency/speed enters the 51
SETPNT reference area (ie, the difference is less than or equal to 4%
of the maximum reference).
AT SETPOINT State change when drive output frequency/speed equals the 52
reference value (= is within tolerance limits, ie, the error is
less than or equal to 1% of the maximum reference).
AI1 L1 & DI5 State change when AI1 value < par. 8412 SEQ VAL 1 LOW 53
and when DI5 is active.
value and when DI5 is active.
AI1 H1 & DI5 State change when AI1 value > par. 8411 SEQ VAL 1 HIGH 55
DLY AND DI1 State change when delay time defined by parameter 8424 61
ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed and DI1 is active.
DLY & AI2 H2 State change when delay time defined by parameter 8424 66
ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed and AI2 value > par. 8413
SEQ VAL 2 HIGH value.
DLY & AI2 L2 State change when delay time defined by parameter 8424 67
ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed and AI2 value < par. 8414
SEQ VAL 2 LOW value.
DLY & AI1 H1 State change when delay time defined by parameter 8424 68
ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed and AI1 value > par. 8411
SEQ VAL 1 HIGH value.
All parameters
DLY & AI1 L1 State change when delay time defined by parameter 8424 69
ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed and AI1 value < par. 8412
SEQ VAL 1 LOW value.
COMM VAL1 0135 COMM VALUE 1 bit 0. 1 = state change. 70
#0
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
AI2H2DI4SV1O State change according to supervision parameters 78
3201…3203 when AI2 value > par. 8413 SEQ VAL 2 HIGH
value and DI4 is active.
AI2H2DI5SV1O State change according to supervision parameters 79
3201…3203 when AI2 value > par. 8413 SEQ VAL 2 HIGH
value and DI5 is active.
STO State change when STO (Safe torque off) has been 80
triggered.
STO(-1) State change when STO (Safe torque off) becomes inactive 81
and the drive operates normally.
8426 ST1 TRIG TO Selects the source for the trigger signal which changes the NOT SEL
ST N state from state 1 to state N. State N is defined with
parameter 8427 ST1 STATE N.
Note: State change to state N (8426 ST1 TRIG TO ST N)
has a higher priority than state change to the next state
(8425 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2).
See parameter 8425 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2.
8427 ST1 STATE N Defines the state N. See parameter 8426 ST1 TRIG TO ST STATE 1
N.
STATE 1 State 1 1
STATE 2 State 2 2
STATE 3 State 3 3
STATE 4 State 4 4
STATE 5 State 5 5
All parameters
STATE 6 State 6 6
STATE 7 State 7 7
STATE 8 State 8 8
8430 ST2 REF SEL
… See parameters 8420…8427.
8497 ST8 STATE N
98 OPTIONS External serial communication activation
9802 COMM PROT Activates the external serial communication and selects the NOT SEL
SEL interface.
NOT SEL No communication 0
STD MODBUS Embedded fieldbus. Interface: EIA-485 provided by optional 1
FMBA-01 Modbus adapter connected to drive terminal X3.
See chapter Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus on
page 313.
EXT FBA The drive communicates through a fieldbus adapter module 4
connected to drive terminal X3. See also parameter group
51 EXT COMM MODULE.
See chapter Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter on page
339.
MODBUS Embedded fieldbus. Interface: RS-232 (ie, control panel 10
RS232 connector). See chapter Fieldbus control with fieldbus
99 START-UP DATA Language selection. Definition of motor set-up data.
9901 LANGUAGE Selects the display language used on the assistant control ENGLISH
panel.
Note: With the ACS-CP-D assistant control panel, the
following languages are available: English (0), Chinese (1),
Korean (2) and Japanese (3).
ENGLISH British English 0
ENGLISH (AM) American English 1
DEUTSCH German 2
ITALIANO Italian 3
ESPAÑOL Spanish 4
PORTUGUES Portuguese 5
NEDERLANDS Dutch 6
FRANÇAIS French 7
DANSK Danish 8
SUOMI Finnish 9
SVENSKA Swedish 10
RUSSKI Russian 11
All parameters
POLSKI Polish 12
TÜRKÇE Turkish 13
CZECH Czech 14
MAGYAR Hungarian 15
ELLINIKA Greek 16
CHINESE Chinese 17
KOREAN Korean 18
JAPANESE Japanese 19
9902 APPLIC Selects the application macro. See chapter Application ABB
MACRO macros on page 107. STANDA
RD
ABB Standard macro for constant speed applications 1
STANDARD
3-WIRE 3-wire macro for constant speed applications 2
ALTERNATE Alternate macro for start forward and start reverse 3
applications
MOTOR POT Motor potentiometer macro for digital signal speed control 4
applications
HAND/AUTO Hand/Auto macro to be used when two control devices are 5
connected to the drive:
• Device 1 communicates through the interface defined by
external control location EXT1.
• Device 2 communicates through the interface defined by
external control location EXT2.
EXT1 or EXT2 is active at a time. Switching between
EXT1/2 through digital input.
PID CONTROL PID control. For applications in which the drive controls a 6
process value, eg, pressure control by the drive running the
pressure boost pump. Measured pressure and the pressure
reference are connected to the drive.
TORQUE Torque control macro 8
CTRL
AC500 AC500 PLC macro. See section AC500 Modbus macro on 10
MODBUS page 117.
LOAD FD SET FlashDrop parameter values as defined by the FlashDrop 31
file. Parameter view is selected by parameter 1611
PARAMETER VIEW.
FlashDrop is an optional device for fast copying of
parameters to unpowered drives. FlashDrop allows easy
customization of the parameter list, eg, selected parameters
can be hidden. For more information, see MFDT-01
FlashDrop user’s manual (3AFE68591074 [English]).
All parameters
USER S1 User 1 macro loaded into use. Before loading, check that 0
LOAD the saved parameter settings and the motor model are
suitable for the application.
USER S1 Save User 1 macro. Stores the current parameter settings -1
SAVE and the motor model.
USER S2 User 2 macro loaded into use. Before loading, check that -2
USER S3 User 3 macro loaded into use. Before loading, check that -4
9903 MOTOR TYPE Selects the motor type. AM
Cannot be changed while the drive is running.
AM Asynchronous motor. Three-phase AC voltage-supplied 1
induction motor with squirrel cage rotor.
PMSM Permanent magnet synchronous motor. Three-phase AC 2
voltage-supplied synchronous motor with permanent
magnet rotor and sinusoidal back emf voltage.
9904 MOTOR CTRL Selects the motor control mode. SCALAR:
MODE FREQ
VECTOR: Sensorless vector control mode. 1
SPEED
Reference 1 = speed reference in rpm.
Reference 2 = speed reference as a percentage. 100% is
the absolute maximum speed, equal to the value of
parameter 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED (or 2001 MINIMUM
SPEED if the absolute value of the minimum speed is
greater than the maximum speed value).
VECTOR: Vector control mode. 2
TORQ Reference 1 = speed reference in rpm.
Reference 2 = torque reference as a percentage. 100%
equals nominal torque.
SCALAR: Scalar control mode. 3
FREQ
Reference 1 = frequency reference in Hz.
Reference 2 = frequency reference as a percentage. 100%
is the absolute maximum frequency, equal to the value of
parameter 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ (or 2007 MINIMUM
FREQ if the absolute value of the minimum speed is greater
than the maximum speed value).
All parameters
9905 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor voltage. For asynchronous 200 V
VOLT motors, must be equal to the value on the motor rating plate. units:
For permanent magnet synchronous motors, the nominal 230 V
voltage is the back emf voltage at nominal speed. 400 V
If the voltage is given as voltage per rpm, eg, 60 V per E units:
1000 rpm, the voltage for 3000 rpm nominal speed is 400 V
3 · 60 V = 180 V. 400 V
The drive cannot supply the motor with a voltage greater U units:
than the input power voltage. 460 V
Note that the output voltage is not limited by the nominal
motor voltage but increased linearly up to the value of the
input voltage.
Output voltage
Input voltage
9905
Output frequency
9907
WARNING! The stress on the motor insulations

depends on the drive supply voltage. This applies
also when the motor voltage rating is lower than the rating of
the drive and the supply voltage of the drive. The rms
voltage can be limited to motor nominal voltage by setting
the maximum frequency of the drive (parameter 2008) to the
motor nominal frequency.
200 V units: Voltage. 1=1 V
46…345 V
400 V E units:
80…600 V
400 V U units:
92…690 V
9906 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor current. Must be equal to the I2N
CURR value on the motor rating plate.
0.2…2.0 · I2N Current 1 = 0.1 A
9907 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor frequency, ie, the frequency at E: 50.0 Hz
FREQ which the output voltage equals the motor nominal voltage: U: 60.0 Hz
Field weakening point = Nom. frequency · Supply voltage /
Motor nom. voltage
0.0…599.0 Hz Frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz
9908 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor speed. Must be equal to the Type
SPEED value on the motor rating plate. dependent
50…30000 rpm Speed 1 = 1 rpm
All parameters
9909 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor power. Must equal the value on PN
POWER the motor rating plate.
0.2…3.0 · Power 1=
PN kW 0.1 kW /
0.1 hp
9910 ID RUN This parameter controls a self-calibration process called the OFF/IDM
Motor ID run. During this process, the drive operates the AGN
motor and makes measurements to identify motor
characteristics and create a model used for internal
calculations.
OFF/IDMAGN The Motor ID run process is not run. Identification 0
magnetization is performed, depending on parameter 9904
MOTOR CTRL MODE. In identification magnetization, the
motor model is calculated at first start by magnetizing the
motor for 10 to 15 s at zero speed (motor not rotating,
except that a permanent magnet synchronous motor can
rotate a fraction of a revolution). The model is recalculated
always at start after motor parameter changes.
• Parameter 9904 = 1 (VECTOR: SPEED) or 2 (VECTOR:
TORQ): Identification magnetization is performed.
• Parameter 9904 = 3 (SCALAR: FREQ): Identification
magnetization is not performed.
ON ID run. Guarantees the best possible control accuracy. The 1
ID run takes about one minute. An ID run is especially
effective when:
• vector control mode is used (parameter 9904 = 1
[VECTOR: SPEED] or 2 [VECTOR: TORQ]), and
• operation point is near zero speed and/or
• operation requires a torque range above the motor
nominal torque, over a wide speed range, and without
any measured speed feedback (ie, without a pulse
encoder).
Note: The motor must be de-coupled from the driven
equipment.
Note: Check the direction of rotation of the motor before
starting the ID run. During the run, the motor will rotate in
the forward direction.
Note: If motor parameters are changed after ID run, repeat
the ID run.
WARNING! The motor will run at up to approximately
50…80% of the nominal speed during the ID run.
ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR
BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN!
All parameters
9912 MOTOR NOM Calculated motor nominal torque in N·m (calculation is 0
TORQUE based on parameter 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER and 9908
MOTOR NOM SPEED values).
0…3000.0 N·m Read-only 1=
0.1 N·m
9913 MOTOR POLE Calculated motor pole pair number (calculation is based on 0
PAIRS parameter 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ and 9908 MOTOR
NOM SPEED values).
- Read-only 1=1
9914 PHASE Inverts two phases in the motor cable. This changes the NO
INVERSION direction of the motor rotation without having to exchange
the positions of two motor cable phase conductors at the
drive output terminals or at the motor connection box.
NO Phases not inverted 0
YES Phases inverted 1
9915 MOTOR COS When set to 0, an estimated cos phi value is used. 0
PHI
0 … 0.97 Active range of the parameter is 0.5 … 0.97 and should be 1 = 0.01
used when high efficiency motors (IE3 or IE4) are used.
Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 313
13
embedded fieldbus
The chapter describes how the drive can be controlled by external devices over a
communication network using embedded fieldbus.
System overview
The drive can be connected to an external control system through a fieldbus adapter
or embedded fieldbus. For the fieldbus adapter control, see chapter Fieldbus control
with fieldbus adapter on page 339.
The embedded fieldbus supports Modbus RTU protocol. Modbus is a serial,
asynchronous protocol. Transaction is half-duplex.
The embedded fieldbus can be connected with either EIA-485 (terminal X1 of the
optional FMBA-01 Modbus adapter connected to drive terminal X3) or RS-232
(control panel connector X2).
EIA-485 is designed for a multipoint application (a single master controlling one or
more slaves). RS-232 is designed for a point-to-point application (a single master
controlling one slave).
For more information on the FMBA-01 Modbus adapter module, see FMBA-01
Modbus adapter module user’s manual (3AFE68586704 [English]).
314 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus
The pin configuration of the RS-232 connector is shown below.The maximum length
of the communication cable with RS-232 is restricted to 3 meters (9.8 ft).
Drive
PC RS-232 RJ-45
DCD 1 1
RXD 2 2
TXD 3 3
DTR 4 4
GND 5 5
DSR 6 6
RTS 7 7
CTS 8 8
RI 9
Shield housing
Fieldbus controller
Fieldbus
Other
devices
Drive
RS-232 1)
panel connector
1)
X3 FMBA-01 EIA-485 1) Embedded fieldbus
Modbus adapter X1 (Modbus) connection is
either RS-232 or EIA-485.
Data flow
Control word (CW)
References
Status word (SW)
Actual values
Parameter R/W Service messages (acyclic)
requests/responses
The drive can be set to receive all of its control information through the fieldbus
interface, or the control can be distributed between the fieldbus interface and other
available sources, for example, digital and analog inputs.
Setting up communication through the embedded Modbus

Before configuring the drive for fieldbus control, the FMBA-01 Modbus adapter (if
used) must be mechanically and electrically installed according to the instructions
given in section Attach the optional fieldbus module on page 38, and the module
manual.
The communication through the fieldbus link is initialized by setting parameter 9802
COMM PROT SEL to STD MODBUS or MODBUS RS232. The communication
parameters in group 53 EFB PROTOCOL must also be adjusted. See the table below.
Parameter Alternative Setting for Function/Information
settings fieldbus control
COMMUNICATION INITIALIZATION
9802 COMM PROT NOT SEL STD MODBUS Initializes embedded fieldbus
SEL STD MODBUS (with EIA-485) communication.
EXT FBA MODBUS
RS232 (with
MODBUS
RS232 RS-232)
ADAPTER MODULE CONFIGURATION

5302 EFB STATION 0…247 Any Defines the station ID address of
ID the RS-232/EIA-485 link. No two
stations on line may have the
same address.
5303 EFB BAUD 1.2 kbit/s Defines the communication
RATE 2.4 kbit/s speed of the RS-232/EIA-485
4.8 kbit/s link.
9.6 kbit/s
19.2 kbit/s
38.4 kbit/s
57.6 kbit/s
115.2 kbit/s
5304 EFB PARITY 8 NONE 1 Selects the parity setting. The
8 NONE 2 same settings must be used in all
8 EVEN 1 on-line stations.
8 ODD 1
5305 EFB CTRL ABB DRV LIM Any Selects the communication profile
PROFILE DCU PROFILE used by the drive. See section
ABB DRV FULL Communication profiles on
page 328.
5310 EFB PAR 10 0…65535 Any Selects an actual value to be
… … mapped to Modbus register 400xx.
5317 EFB PAR 17
After the configuration parameters in group 53 EFB PROTOCOL have been set, the
drive control parameters (shown in section Drive control parameters on page 316)
must be checked and adjusted when necessary.
The new settings will take effect when the drive is next powered up, or when
parameter 5302 EFB STATION ID setting is cleared and reset.
Drive control parameters

After the Modbus communication has been set up, the drive control parameters listed
in the table below should be checked and adjusted when necessary.
The Setting for fieldbus control column gives the value to use when the Modbus
interface is the desired source or destination for that particular signal. The
Function/Information column gives a description of the parameter.
Parameter Setting for Function/Information Modbus register
fieldbus address
control
CONTROL COMMAND SOURCE SELECTION ABB DCU

DRV
1001 EXT1 COMM Enables 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bits 40031
COMMAND 0…1 (STOP/START) when EXT1 is bits 0…1
S
selected as the active control
location.
1002 EXT2 COMM Enables 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bits 40031
COMMAND 0…1 (STOP/START) when EXT2 is bits 0…1
S selected as the active control
location.
1003 DIRECTION FORWARD Enables the rotation direction control 40031
REVERSE as defined by parameters 1001 and bit 2
REQUEST 1002. The direction control is
explained in section Reference
handling on page 323.
1010 JOGGING COMM Enables jogging 1 or 2 activation 40032
SEL through 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 bits bits
20…21 (JOGGING 1 / JOGGING 2). 20…21
1102 EXT1/EXT2 COMM Enables EXT1/EXT2 selection 40001 40031
SEL through 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 5 bit 11 bit 5
(EXT2); with the ABB drives profile
5319 EFB PAR 19 bit 11 (EXT CTRL
LOC).
1103 REF1 COMM Fieldbus reference REF1 is used 40002 for REF1
SELECT COMM+AI when EXT1 is selected as the active
1 control location. See section
COMM*AI1 Fieldbus references on page 320 for
information on the alternative
settings.

fieldbus address
control
1106 REF2 COMM Fieldbus reference REF2 is used 40003 for REF2
SELECT COMM+AI when EXT2 is selected as the active
1 control location. See section
COMM*AI1 Fieldbus references on page 320 for
information on the alternative
settings.
OUTPUT SIGNAL SOURCE SELECTION ABB DCU

DRV
1401 RELAY COMM Enables relay output RO control by 40134 for signal
OUTPUT 1 COMM(-1) signal 0134 COMM RO WORD. 0134
1501 AO1 135 Directs the contents of the fieldbus 40135 for signal
CONTENT reference 0135 COMM VALUE 1 to 0135
SEL
analog output AO.
SYSTEM CONTROL INPUTS ABB DCU

DRV
1601 RUN COMM Enables the control of the inverted 40001 40031
ENABLE Run enable signal (Run disable) bit 3 bit 6
through 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 6
(RUN_DISABLE); with the ABB
drives profile 5319 EFB PAR 19 bit 3
(INHIBIT OPERATION).
1604 FAULT COMM Enables fault reset through the 40001 40031
RESET SEL fieldbus 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 4 bit 7 bit 4
(RESET); with the ABB drives profile
5319 EFB PAR 19 bit 7 (RESET).
1606 LOCAL COMM Local control mode lock signal - 40031
LOCK through 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit bit 14
14 (REQ_LOCALLOC)
1607 PARAM DONE Saves parameter value changes 41607
SAVE SAVE… (including those made through
fieldbus control) to permanent
memory.
1608 START COMM Inverted Start enable 1 (Start - 40032
ENABLE 1 disable) through 0302 FB CMD bit 18
WORD 2 bit 18 (START_DISABLE1)
1609 START COMM Inverted Start enable 2 (Start - 40032
ENABLE 2 disable) through 0302 FB CMD bit 19
WORD 2 bit 19 (START_DISABLE2)

fieldbus address
control
LIMITS ABB DCU
DRV
2013 MIN COMM Minimum torque limit 1/2 selection - 40031
TORQUE through 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit bit 15
SEL
15 (TORQLIM2)
2014 MAX COMM Maximum torque limit 1/2 selection - 40031
TORQUE through 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit bit 15
SEL
15 (TORQLIM2)
2201 ACC/DEC COMM Acceleration/deceleration ramp pair - 40031
1/2 SEL selection through 0301 FB CMD bit 10
WORD 1 bit 10 (RAMP_2)
2209 RAMP COMM Ramp input to zero through 0301 FB 40001 40031
INPUT 0 CMD WORD 1 bit 13 (RAMP_IN_0); bit 6 bit 13
with the ABB drives profile 5319 EFB
PAR 19 bit 6 (RAMP_IN_ ZERO)
COMMUNICATION FAULT FUNCTIONS ABB DCU

DRV
3018 COMM NOT SEL Determines the drive action in case 43018
FAULT FAULT the fieldbus communication is lost.
FUNC CONST SP
7
LAST
SPEED
3019 COMM 0.1… Defines the time between the 43019
FAULT TIME 600.0 s communication loss detection and
the action selected with parameter
3018 COMM FAULT FUNC.
PID CONTROLLER REFERENCE SIGNAL SOURCE SELECTION ABB DCU

DRV
4010/ SET POINT COMM PID control reference (REF2) 40003 for REF2
4110/ SEL COMM+AI
4210 1
COMM*AI1
Fieldbus control interface

The communication between a fieldbus system and the drive consists of 16-bit input
and output data words (with the ABB drives profile) and 32-bit input and output words
(with the DCU profile).
 Control word and Status word

The Control word (CW) is the principal means of controlling the drive from a fieldbus
system. The Control word is sent by the fieldbus controller to the drive. The drive
switches between its states according to the bit-coded instructions of the Control
word.
The Status word (SW) is a word containing status information, sent by the drive to the
fieldbus controller.
 References
References (REF) are 16-bit signed integers. A negative reference (eg, reverse
direction of rotation) is formed by calculating the two’s complement from the
corresponding positive reference value. The contents of each reference word can be
used as the speed, frequency, torque or process reference.
 Actual values
Actual values (ACT) are 16-bit words containing selected values of the drive.
Fieldbus references
 Reference selection and correction
Fieldbus reference (called COMM in signal selection contexts) is selected by setting a
reference selection parameter – 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT – to
COMM, COMM+AI1 or COMM*AI1. When parameter 1103 or 1106 is set to COMM,
the fieldbus reference is forwarded as such without correction. When parameter 1103
or 1106 is set to COMM+AI1 or COMM*AI1, the fieldbus reference is corrected using
analog input AI1 as shown in the following examples for the ABB drives profile.
Setting When COMM > 0 When COMM < 0
COM COMM(%) · (MAX-MIN) + MIN COMM(%) · (MAX-MIN) - MIN
M+AI1 + (AI(%) - 50%) · (MAX-MIN) + (AI(%) - 50%) · (MAX-MIN)
Corrected
reference (rpm)
COMM
Max. limit REF (%) -100 -50 0
1500 Min. limit 0
AI = 100%
AI = 100%
750 -750
AI = 50% AI = 50%
AI = 0% Min. limit AI = 0%
0 -1500
0 50 100 COMM Max. limit
REF (%)
Corrected
reference (rpm)
Corrected
reference (rpm)
COMM
REF (%) -100 -50 0
1500 0
Max limit -300
1200 Min. limit
AI = 100%
AI = 100%
750 -750
AI = 50% AI = 50%
AI = 0% Min limit AI = 0%
300 -1200
Max. limit
0 COMM -1500
0 50 100 REF (%)
Corrected
reference (rpm)
Maximum limit is defined by parameter 1105 REF1 MAX / 1108 REF2 MA.
Minimum limit is defined by parameter 1104 REF1 MIN / 1107 REF2 MIN.
Setting When COMM > 0 When COMM < 0

COM COMM(%) · (AI(%) / 50%) · (MAX-MIN) + COMM(%) · (AI(%) / 50%) · (MAX-MIN) -
M*AI1 MIN MIN
Corrected
reference (rpm)
COMM
Max. limit REF (%) -100 -50 0
1500 Min. limit 0
AI = 0%
AI = 50%
AI = 100%
750 -750
AI = 50%
AI = 100%
AI = 0% Min. limit Max. limit
0 -1500
0 50 100 COMM
REF (%)
Corrected
reference (rpm)
Corrected
reference (rpm)
COMM
REF (%) -100 -50 0
1500 0
Ma.x limit Min. limit AI = 0% -300
1200
AI = 100%
750 -750
AI = 50%
AI = 100%
Min. limit Max. limit AI = 50%
300 AI = 0%
-1200
0 COMM -1500
0 50 100 REF (%)
Corrected
reference (rpm)
 Fieldbus reference scaling

Fieldbus references REF1 and REF2 are scaled for the ABB drives profile as shown
in the following table.
Note: Any correction of the reference (see section Reference selection and
correction on page 322) is applied before scaling.
Reference Range Reference Scaling Remarks
type
REF1 -32767 Speed or -20000 = -(par. 1105) Final reference limited by
… frequency 0=0 1104/1105. Actual motor
+32767 +20000 = (par. 1105) speed limited by
(20000 corresponds to 100%) 2001/2002 (speed) or
2007/2008 (frequency).
REF2 -32767 Speed or -10000 = -(par. 1108) Final reference limited by
… frequency 0=0 1107/1108. Actual motor
+32767 +10000 = (par. 1108) speed limited by
(10000 corresponds to 100%) 2001/2002 (speed) or
Torque -10000 = -(par. 1108) Final reference limited by
0=0 2015/2017 (torque 1) or
+10000 = (par. 1108) 2016/2018 (torque 2).
(10000 corresponds to 100%)
PID -10000 = -(par. 1108) Final reference limited by
reference 0=0 4012/4013 (PID set 1) or
+10000 = (par. 1108) 4112/4113 (PID set 2).
(10000 corresponds to 100%)
Note: The settings of parameters 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN have no
effect on the reference scaling.
 Reference handling
The control of rotation direction is configured for each control location (EXT1 and
EXT2) using the parameters in group 10 START/STOP/DIR. Fieldbus references are
bipolar, ie, they can be negative or positive. The following diagrams illustrate how
group 10 parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce the
reference REF1/REF2.
Direction determined by Direction determined by digital
the sign of COMM command, eg, digital input,
control panel
Par. 1003 Resultant Resultant
DIRECTION REF1/2 REF1/2
= FORWARD
Max. ref. Max. ref.
Fieldbus Fieldbus
ref. 1/2 ref. 1/2
-100% 100% -100% 100%
-163% 163% -163% 163%
–[Max. ref.] –[Max. ref.]

DIRECTION REF1/2 REF1/2
= REVERSE
Max. ref. Max. ref.
-163% 163% -163% 163%

Fieldbus -100% 100% Fieldbus -100% 100%
ref. 1/2 ref. 1/2

DIRECTION REF1/2 REF1/2 Direction
= REQUEST command:
FORWARD
Max. ref. Max. ref.
-163%
Fieldbus -100% Fieldbus
ref. 1/2 ref. 1/2
100% -100% 100%
163% -163% 163%

Direction
command:
REVERSE
 Actual value scaling

The scaling of the integers sent to the master as Actual values depends on the
selected function. See chapter Actual signals and parameters on page 179.
Modbus mapping
The following Modbus function codes are supported by the drive.
Function Code Additional information
hex (dec)
Read Multiple 03 (03) Reads the contents of registers in a slave device.
Holding Parameter sets, control, status and reference values are mapped
Registers as holding registers.
Write Single 06 (06) Writes to a single register in a slave device.
Holding Parameter sets, control, status and reference values are mapped
Register as holding registers.
Diagnostics 08 (08) Provides a series of tests for checking the communication between
the master and the slave devices, or for checking various internal
error conditions within the slave.
The following subcodes are supported:
00 Return Query Data: The data passed in the request data field is
to be returned in the response. The entire response message
should be identical to the request.
01 Restart Communications Option: The slave device serial line
port must be initialized and restarted, and all of its communication
event counters cleared. If the port is currently in Listen Only Mode,
no response is returned. If the port is not currently in Listen Only
Mode, a normal response is returned before the restart.
04 Force Listen Only Mode: Forces the addressed slave device to
Listen Only Mode. This isolates it from the other devices on the
network, allowing them to continue communicating without
interruption from the addressed remote device. No response is
returned. The only function that will be processed after this mode
is entered is the Restart Communications Option function
(subcode 01).
Write Multiple 10 (16) Writes to the registers (1 to approximately 120 registers) in a slave
Holding device.
Registers Parameter sets, control, status and reference values are mapped
as holding registers.
Read/Write 17 (23) Performs a combination of one read operation and one write
Multiple operation (function codes 03 and 10) in a single Modbus
Holding transaction. The write operation is performed before the read
Registers operation.
 Register mapping
The drive parameters, Control/Status word, references and actual values are mapped
to the area 4xxxx so that:
• 40001…40099 are reserved for drive control/status, reference and actual values.
• 40101…49999 are reserved for drive parameters 0101…9999 (eg, 40102 is
parameter 0102). In this mapping, the thousands and hundreds correspond to the
group number, while the tens and ones correspond to the parameter number
within a group.
The register addresses that do not correspond with drive parameters are invalid.
If there is an attempt to read or write invalid addresses, the Modbus interface returns
an exception code to the controller. See Exception codes on page 327.
The following table gives information on the contents of the Modbus addresses
40001…40012 and 40031…40034.
Modbus register Access Information
40001 Control word R/W Control word. Supported only by the ABB drives
profile, ie, when 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE setting is
ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL. Parameter 5319
EFB PAR 19 shows a copy of the Control word in
hexadecimal format.
40002 Reference 1 R/W External reference REF1. See section Fieldbus
references on page 320.
40003 Reference 2 R/W External reference REF2. See section Fieldbus
references on page 320.
40004 Status word R Status word. Supported only by the ABB drives profile,
ie, when 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE setting is ABB
DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL. Parameter 5320 EFB
PAR 20 shows a copy of the Control word in
hexadecimal format.
40005 Actual 1…8 R Actual value 1…8. Use parameter 5310… 5317 to
… select an actual value to be mapped to Modbus
40012 register 40005…40012.
40031 Control word LSW R/W 0301 FB CMD WORD 1, ie, the least significant word
of the DCU profile 32-bit Control word.
Supported only by the DCU profile, ie, when 5305 EFB
CTRL PROFILE setting is DCU PROFILE.
40032 Control word MSW R/W 0302 FB CMD WORD 2, ie, the most significant word
of the DCU profile 32-bit Control word.
40033 Status word LSW R 0303 FB STS WORD 1, ie, the least significant word of
the DCU profile 32-bit Status word.
Modbus register Access Information

40034 ACS355 Status R 0304 FB STS WORD 2, ie, the most significant word of
word MSW the DCU profile 32-bit Status word.
Note: Parameter writes through standard Modbus are always volatile, ie, modified
values are not automatically stored to the permanent memory. Use parameter 1607
PARAM SAVE to save all changed values.
 Function codes
Supported function codes for the holding 4xxxx register:
Code Function name Additional information
hex
(dec)
03 Read 4X Register Reads the binary contents of registers (4X references) in a slave
(03) device.
06 Preset single 4X Presets a value into a single register (4X reference). When
(06) register broadcast, the function presets the same register reference in all
attached slaves.
10 Preset multiple Presets values into a sequence of registers (4X references). When
(16) 4X registers broadcast, the function presets the same register references in all
attached slaves.
17 Read/Write 4X Performs a combination of one read operation and one write
(23) registers operation (function codes 03 and 10) in a single Modbus
transaction. Write operation is performed before the read
operation.
Note: In the Modbus data message, register 4xxxx is addressed as xxxx -1. For
example, register 40002 is addressed as 0001.
 Exception codes
Exception codes are serial communication responses from the drive. The drive
supports the standard Modbus exception codes listed in the following table.
Code Name Description
01 Illegal Function Unsupported command
02 Illegal Data Address does not exist or is read/write protected.
Address
03 Illegal Data Value Incorrect value for the drive:
• Value is outside minimum or maximum limits.
• Parameter is read-only.
• Message is too long.
• Parameter write is not allowed when start is active.
• Parameter write is not allowed when factory macro is
selected.
Drive parameter 5318 EFB PAR 18 holds the most recent exception code.
Communication profiles
The embedded fieldbus supports three communication profiles:
• DCU communication profile (DCU PROFILE)
• ABB drives limited communication profile (ABB DRV LIM)
• ABB drives full communication profile (ABB DRV FULL).
The DCU profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits, and it is the
internal interface between the main drive application and the embedded fieldbus
environment. The ABB drives limited profile is based on the PROFIBUS interface.
The ABB drives full profile (ABB DRV FULL) supports two Control word bits not
supported by the ABB DRV LIM implementation.
Modbus Embedded fieldbus

network RS-232/EIA-485 Drive
ABB DRV LIM /
ABB DRV FULL
ABB drives profile DCU profile
Data conversion
Actual values
selected by
parameters
5310…5317
DCU PROFILE
DCU profile Control/Status word DCU profile
Data conversion
for REF1/2 Actual values
selected by
parameters
5310…5317
 ABB drives communication profile

Two implementations of the ABB drives communication profile are available: ABB
drives full and ABB drives limited. The ABB drives communication profile is active
when parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE is set to ABB DRV FULL or ABB DRV
LIM. The Control word and Status word for the profile are described below.
The ABB drives communication profiles can be used through both EXT1 and EXT2.
The Control word commands are in effect when parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS
or 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS (whichever control location is active) is set to COMM.
Control word
The table below and the state diagram on page 332 describe the Control word
content for the ABB drives profile. The upper case boldface text refers to the states
shown in the diagram.
ABB drives profile Control word, parameter 5319 EFB PAR 19
Bit Name Value Comments
0 OFF1 1 Enter READY TO OPERATE.
CONTROL
0 Stop along currently active deceleration ramp (2203/2206).
Enter OFF1 ACTIVE; proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON
unless other interlocks (OFF2, OFF3) are active.
1 OFF2 1 Continue operation (OFF2 inactive).
CONTROL
0 Emergency OFF, drive coast to stop.
Enter OFF2 ACTIVE; proceed to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
2 OFF3 1 Continue operation (OFF3 inactive).
CONTROL
0 Emergency stop, drive stops within time defined by par.
2208. Enter OFF3 ACTIVE; proceed to SWITCH-ON
INHIBITED.
WARNING! Ensure motor and driven machine can be
stopped using this stop mode.
3 INHIBIT 1 Enter OPERATION ENABLED. (Note: The Run enable
OPERATION signal must be active; see parameter 1601. If par. 1601 is
set to COMM, this bit also activates the Run enable signal.)
0 Inhibit operation. Enter OPERATION INHIBITED.
4 Note: Bit 4 is supported only by ABB DRV FULL profile.
RAMP_OUT_ 1 Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR: OUTPUT
ZERO ENABLED.
(ABB DRV
FULL) 0 Force Ramp function generator output to zero.
Drive ramps to stop (current and DC voltage limits in force).
5 RAMP_HOLD 1 Enable ramp function.
Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR: ACCELERATOR
ENABLED.
0 Halt ramping (Ramp function generator output held).
6 RAMP_IN_ 1 Normal operation. Enter OPERATING.
ZERO
0 Force Ramp function generator input to zero.
7 RESET 0=>1 Fault reset if an active fault exists. Enter SWITCH-ON
INHIBITED. Effective if par. 1604 is set to COMM.
0 Continue normal operation.
8… Not in use
9
ABB drives profile Control word, parameter 5319 EFB PAR 19

Bit Name Value Comments
10 Note: Bit 10 is supported only by ABB DRV FULL.
REMOTE_CMD 1 Fieldbus control enabled.
(ABB DRV 0 Control word =
/ 0 or reference =/ 0: Retain last Control word
FULL)
and reference.
Control word = 0 and reference = 0: Fieldbus control
enabled.
Reference and deceleration/acceleration ramp are locked.
11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 Select external control location EXT2. Effective if par. 1102
is set to COMM.
0 Select external control location EXT1. Effective if par. 1102
is set to COMM.
12 Reserved
…
15
Status word
The table below and the state diagram on page 332 describe the Status word content
for the ABB drives profile. The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in
the diagram.
ABB drives profile (EFB) Status word, parameter 5320 EFB PAR 20
Bit Name Value STATE/Description
(Correspond to states/boxes in the state diagram)
0 RDY_ON 1 READY TO SWITCH ON
0 NOT READY TO SWITCH ON
1 RDY_RUN 1 READY TO OPERATE
0 OFF1 ACTIVE
2 RDY_REF 1 OPERATION ENABLED
0 OPERATION INHIBITED
3 TRIPPED 1 FAULT. See chapter Fault tracing on page 349.
0 No fault
4 OFF_2_STA 1 OFF2 inactive
0 OFF2 ACTIVE
5 OFF_3_STA 1 OFF3 inactive
0 OFF3 ACTIVE
6 SWC_ON_INHI 1 SWITCH-ON INHIBITED
B
0 Switch-on inhibit not active
7 ALARM 1 Alarm. See chapter Fault tracing on page 349.
0 No alarm
ABB drives profile (EFB) Status word, parameter 5320 EFB PAR 20
Bit Name Value STATE/Description
(Correspond to states/boxes in the state diagram)
8 AT_SETPOINT 1 OPERATING. Actual value equals reference value (= is
within tolerance limits, ie, in speed control the difference
between the output speed and the speed reference is less
than or equal to 4/1%* of the nominal motor speed).
* Asymmetric hysteresis: 4% when speed exits the
reference area, 1% when speed enters the reference area.
0 Actual value differs from reference value (= is outside
tolerance limits).
9 REMOTE 1 Drive control location: REMOTE (EXT1 or EXT2)
0 Drive control location: LOCAL
10 ABOVE_LIMIT 1 Supervised parameter value exceeds the supervision high
limit. Bit value is 1 until the supervised parameter value falls
below the supervision low limit. See parameter group 32
SUPERVISION, parameter 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM.
0 Supervised parameter value falls below the supervision low
limit. Bit value is 0 until the supervised parameter value
exceeds the supervision high limit. See parameter group 32
SUPERVISION, parameter 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM.
11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 External control location EXT2 selected
0 External control location EXT1 selected
12 EXT RUN 1 External Run enable signal received
ENABLE
0 No external Run enable received
13 Reserved
…
15
State diagram
The state diagram below describes the start-stop function of Control word (CW) and
Status word (SW) bits for the ABB drives profile.
From any state From any state From any state
Emergency Stop Emergency Off

Fault
OFF3 (CW Bit2=0) OFF2 (CW Bit 1=0)
OFF3 OFF2 FAULT (SW Bit3=1)

(SW Bit5=0) (SW Bit 4=0)
ACTIVE ACTIVE
(CW Bit7=1)**
n(f)=0 / I=0
From any state

OFF1 (CW Bit0=0)
SWITCH-ON
OFF1 INPUT POWER OFF INHIBITED (SW Bit6=1)
(SW Bit1=0)
ACTIVE
Power ON (CW Bit0=0)
n(f)=0 / I=0
A B* C D NOT READY
(SW Bit0=0)
TO SWITCH ON
(CW Bit3 =0) (CW xxxx x1*xx xxxx x110)
OPERATION READY TO (SW Bit0=1)

(SW Bit2 =0)
INHIBITED SWITCH ON
OPERATION INHIBITED (CW= xxxx x1*xx xxxx x111)
B* C* D* READY TO
(SW Bit1=1)
OPERATE
(CW Bit4=0)* (CW Bit3=1 and
SW Bit12=1)
OPERATION
C D (SW Bit2=1)
ENABLED
A
State (CW Bit5=0) (CW=xxxx x1*xx xxx1* 1111,
State change ie, Bit4=1)*
Path described in example RFG OUTPUT
CW = Control word ENABLED*
D
SW = Status word (CW Bit6=0)
B*
(CW=xxxx x1*xx xx11* 1111,
RFG = Ramp function generator ie, Bit5=1)
I = Par. 0104 CURRENT
RFG: ACCELERATOR
f = Par. 0103 OUTPUT FREQ ENABLED
n = Speed
C
* Supported only by ABB DRV FULL (CW=xxxx x1*xx x111* 1111,
profile. ie, Bit6=1)
** State transition also occurs if the fault OPERATING (SW Bit8=1)
is reset from any other source (eg,
digital input). D
 DCU communication profile

Because the DCU profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits, two
different signals are needed for both the Control words (0301 and 0302) and Status
words (0303 and 0304).
Control words
The following tables describe the Control word content for the DCU profile.
DCU profile Control word, parameter 0301 FB CMD WORD 1
Bit Name Value Information
0 STOP 1 Stop according to either the stop mode parameter (2102) or
the stop mode requests (bits 7, 8 and 9).
Note: Simultaneous STOP and START commands result in
a stop command.
0 No operation
1 START 1 Start
Note: Simultaneous STOP and START commands result in
a stop command.
0 No operation
2 REVERSE 1 Reverse direction. The direction is defined by using the
XOR operation on bit 2 and 31 (= sign of the reference)
values.
0 Forward direction
3 LOCAL 1 Enter local control mode.
0 Enter external control mode.
4 RESET -> 1 Reset.
other No operation
5 EXT2 1 Switch to external control EXT2.
0 Switch to external control EXT1.
6 RUN_DISABLE 1 Activate Run disable.
0 Activate Run enable.
7 STPMODE_R 1 Stop along currently active deceleration ramp (bit 10). Bit 0
value must be 1 (STOP).
0 No operation
8 STPMODE_EM 1 Emergency stop. Bit 0 value must be 1 (STOP).
0 No operation
9 STPMODE_C 1 Coast to stop. Bit 0 value must be 1 (STOP).
0 No operation
10 RAMP_2 1 Use acceleration/deceleration ramp pair 2 (defined by
0 Use acceleration/deceleration ramp pair 1 (defined by

11 RAMP_OUT_0 1 Force ramp output to zero.
0 No operation
12 RAMP_HOLD 1 Halt ramping (Ramp function generator output held).
0 No operation
13 RAMP_IN_0 1 Force ramp input to zero.
0 No operation
14 REQ_LOCALLO 1 Enable local lock. Entering the local control mode is
C disabled (LOC/REM key of the panel).
0 No operation
15 TORQLIM2 1 Use minimum/maximum torque limit 2 (defined by
parameters 2016 and 2018).
0 Use minimum/maximum torque limit 1 (defined by
parameters 2015 and 2017).

16 FBLOCAL_CTL 1 Fieldbus local mode for Control word requested.
Example: If the drive is in remote control and the
start/stop/direction command source is DI for external
control location 1 (EXT1): by setting bit 16 to value 1, the
start/stop/direction is controlled by the fieldbus command
word.
0 No fieldbus local mode
17 FBLOCAL_REF 1 Fieldbus local mode Control word for reference requested.
See the example for bit 16 (FBLOCAL_CTL).
0 No fieldbus local mode
18 START_DISABL 1 No Start enable
E1
0 Enable start. Effective if parameter 1608 setting is COMM.
19 START_DISABL 1 No Start enable
E2
0 Enable start. Effective if parameter 1609 setting is COMM.
20 JOGGING 1 1 Activate jogging 1. Effective if parameter 1010 setting is
COMM. See section Jogging on page 162.
0 Jogging 1 disabled
21 JOGGING 2 1 Activate jogging 2. Effective if parameter 1010 setting is
COMM. See section Jogging on page 162.
0 Jogging 2 disabled
22 Reserved
…
26

27 REF_CONST 1 Constant speed reference request.
This is an internal control bit. Only for supervision.
0 No operation
28 REF_AVE 1 Average speed reference request.
0 No operation
29 LINK_ON 1 Master detected on fieldbus link.
0 Fieldbus link is down.
30 REQ_STARTIN 1 Start inhibit
H
0 No start inhibit
31 Reserved
Status words
The following tables describe the Status word content for the DCU profile.
DCU profile Status word, parameter 0303 FB STS WORD 1
Bit Name Value Status
0 READY 1 Drive is ready to receive start command.
0 Drive is not ready.
1 ENABLED 1 External Run enable signal received.
0 No external Run enable signal received.
2 STARTED 1 Drive has received start command.
0 Drive has not received start command.
3 RUNNING 1 Drive is modulating and following reference.
0 Drive is not running.
4 ZERO_SPEED 1 Drive is at zero speed.
0 Drive has not reached zero speed.
5 ACCELERATE 1 Drive is accelerating.
0 Drive is not accelerating.
6 DECELERATE 1 Drive is decelerating.
0 Drive is not decelerating.
7 AT_SETPOINT 1 Drive is at setpoint. Actual value equals reference
value (ie, is within tolerance limits).
0 Drive has not reached setpoint.

8 LIMIT 1 Operation is limited by internal protection limits or
group 20 LIMITS settings (excluding speed and
frequency limits).
0 Operation is within internal protection limits and
according group 20 LIMITS settings (excluding speed
and frequency limits).
9 SUPERVISION 1 A supervised parameter (group 32 SUPERVISION) is
outside its limits.
0 All supervised parameters are within limits.
10 REV_REF 1 Drive reference is in reverse direction.
0 Drive reference is in forward direction.
11 REV_ACT 1 Drive is running in reverse direction.
0 Drive is running in forward direction.
12 PANEL_LOCAL 1 Control is in control panel (or PC tool) local mode.
0 Control is not in control panel local mode.
13 FIELDBUS_LOCAL 1 Control is in fieldbus local mode
0 Control is not in fieldbus local mode.
14 EXT2_ACT 1 Control is in EXT2 mode.
0 Control is in EXT1 mode.
15 FAULT 1 Drive is in a fault state.
0 Drive is not in a fault state.

16 ALARM 1 An alarm is on.
0 No alarms are on.
17 NOTICE 1 A maintenance request is pending.
0 No maintenance request
18 DIRLOCK 1 Direction lock is ON. (Direction change is locked.)
0 Direction lock is OFF.
19 LOCALLOCK 1 Local mode lock is ON. (Local mode is locked.)
0 Local mode lock is OFF.
20 CTL_MODE 1 Drive is in vector control mode.
0 Drive is in scalar control mode.
21 JOGGING ACTIVE 1 Jogging function is active.
0 Jogging function is not active.

22… Reserved
25
26 REQ_CTL 1 Control word requested from fieldbus
0 No operation
27 REQ_REF1 1 Reference 1 requested from fieldbus
0 Reference 1 is not requested from fieldbus.
28 REQ_REF2 1 Reference 2 requested from fieldbus
0 Reference 2 is not requested from fieldbus.
29 REQ_REF2EXT 1 External PID reference 2 requested from fieldbus
0 External PID reference 2 is not requested from
fieldbus.
30 ACK_STARTINH 1 Start inhibit from fieldbus
0 No start inhibit from fieldbus
31 Reserved
Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter 339
14
fieldbus adapter
The chapter describes how the drive can be controlled by external devices over a
communication network through a fieldbus adapter.
System overview
The drive can be connected to an external control system through a fieldbus adapter
or embedded fieldbus. For embedded fieldbus control, see chapter Fieldbus control
with embedded fieldbus on page 313.
The fieldbus adapter is connected to drive terminal X3.
340 Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter
Fieldbus
controller
Drive Fieldbus
Other
devices
X3 Fieldbus
adapter
Data flow
Control word (CW)
References
Status word (SW)
Actual values
Parameter R/W Service messages (acyclic)
requests/responses
The drive can be set to receive all of its control information through the fieldbus
interface, or the control can be distributed between the fieldbus interface and other
available sources, eg, digital and analog inputs.
The drive can communicate to a control system through a fieldbus adapter using, for
example, the following serial communication protocols. Other protocols may be
available; contact your local ABB representative.
• PROFIBUS-DP (FPBA-01 adapter)
• CANopen (FCAN-01 adapter)
• DeviceNet™ (FDNA-01 adapter)
• Ethernet (FENA-01 adapter)
• Modbus RTU (FMBA-01 adapter. See chapter Fieldbus control with embedded
fieldbus on page 313.)
The drive detects automatically which fieldbus adapter is connected to the drive
terminal X3 (with the exception of FMBA-01). The DCU profile is always used in
communication between the drive and the fieldbus adapter (see section Fieldbus
control interface on page 344). The communication profile on the fieldbus network
depends on the type and settings of the connected adapter.
The default profile settings are protocol-dependent (for example, vendor-specific
profile (ABB drives) for PROFIBUS and industry-standard drive profile (AC/DC Drive)
for DeviceNet).
Setting up communication through a fieldbus adapter

module
Before configuring the drive for the fieldbus control, the adapter module must be
mechanically and electrically installed according to the instructions given in section
Attach the optional fieldbus module on page 38, and the module manual.
The communication between the drive and the fieldbus adapter module is activated
by setting parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL to EXT FBA. The adapter-specific
parameters in group 51 EXT COMM MODULE must also be set. See the table below.
Parameter Alternative Setting for Function/Information
settings fieldbus
control
COMMUNICATION INITIALIZATION
9802 COMM PROT NOT SEL EXT FBA Initializes the
SEL STD MODBUS communication between the
EXT FBA drive and the fieldbus
MODBUS adapter module.
RS232
ADAPTER MODULE CONFIGURATION

5101 FBA TYPE - - Displays the type of the
fieldbus adapter module.
5102 FB PAR 2 These parameters are adapter module-specific. For more
… … information, see the module manual. Note that not all of these
parameters are necessarily used.
5126 FB PAR 26
5127 FBA PAR (0) DONE - Validates any changed
REFRESH (1) REFRESH adapter module
configuration parameter
settings.
Note: In adapter module, the parameter group number is A (group 1) for group 51 EXT
COMM MODULE.
TRANSMITTED DATA SELECTION

5401 FBA DATA IN 1 0 Defines the data transmitted
… …
1…6 from the drive to the fieldbus
5410 FBA DATA OUT
10 101…9999 controller.
5501 FBA DATA OUT 0 Defines the data transmitted

… 1
… 1…6 from the fieldbus controller
5510 101…9999 to the drive.
FBA DATA OUT
10
Note: In adapter module, the parameter group number is C (group 3) for group 54 FBA DATA
IN and B (group 2) for group 55 FBA DATA OUT.
After the module configuration parameters in groups 51 EXT COMM MODULE, 54

FBA DATA IN and 55 FBA DATA OUT have been set, the drive control parameters
(shown in section Drive control parameters on page 342) must be checked and
adjusted when necessary.
The new settings will take effect when the drive is next powered up, or when
parameter 5127 FBA PAR REFRESH is activated.
Drive control parameters

After the fieldbus communication has been set up, the drive control parameters listed
in the table below should be checked and adjusted where necessary.
The Setting for fieldbus control column gives the value to use when the fieldbus
interface is the desired source or destination for that particular signal. The
Function/Information column gives a description of the parameter.
Parameter Setting for Function/Information
fieldbus control
CONTROL COMMAND SOURCE SELECTION

1001 EXT1 COMM Selects the fieldbus as the source for the start
COMMANDS and stop commands when EXT1 is selected as
the active control location.
1002 EXT2 COMM Selects the fieldbus as the source for the start
COMMANDS and stop commands when EXT2 is selected as
the active control location.
1003 DIRECTION FORWARD Enables the rotation direction control as defined
REVERSE by parameters 1001 and 1002. The direction
REQUEST control is explained in section Reference
handling on page 323.
1010 JOGGING SEL COMM Enables jogging 1 or 2 activation through the
fieldbus.
1102 EXT1/EXT2 COMM Enables EXT1/EXT2 selection through the
SEL fieldbus.
1103 REF1 SELECT COMM Fieldbus reference REF1 is used when EXT1 is
COMM+AI1 selected as the active control location. See
COMM*AI1 section Reference selection and correction on
page 346.
1106 REF2 SELECT COMM Fieldbus reference REF2 is used when EXT2 is
COMM+AI1 selected as the active control location. See
COMM*AI1 section Reference selection and correction on
page 346.
OUTPUT SIGNAL SOURCE SELECTION

1401 RELAY COMM Enables relay output RO control by signal 0134
OUTPUT 1 COMM(-1) COMM RO WORD.
Parameter Setting for Function/Information

fieldbus control
1501 AO1 135 (ie, 0135 Directs the contents of fieldbus reference 0135
CONTENT SEL COMM VALUE 1) COMM VALUE 1 to analog output AO.
SYSTEM CONTROL INPUTS

1601 RUN ENABLE COMM Selects the fieldbus interface as the source for
the inverted Run enable signal (Run disable).
1604 FAULT RESET COMM Selects the fieldbus interface as the source for
SEL the fault reset signal.
1606 LOCAL LOCK COMM Selects the fieldbus interface as the source for
the local lock signal.
1607 PARAM SAVE DONE Saves parameter value changes (including
SAVE… those made through fieldbus control) to the
permanent memory.
1608 START COMM Selects the fieldbus interface as the source for
ENABLE 1 the inverted Start enable 1 (Start disable)
signal.
1609 START COMM Selects the fieldbus interface as the source for
ENABLE 2 the inverted Start enable 2 (Start disable)
signal.
LIMITS
2013 MIN TORQUE COMM Selects the fieldbus interface as the source for
SEL the minimum torque limit 1/2 selection.
2014 MAX TORQUE COMM Selects the fieldbus interface as the source for
SEL the maximum torque limit 1/2 selection.
2201 ACC/DEC 1/2 COMM Selects the fieldbus interface as the source for
SEL acceleration/deceleration ramp pair 1/2
selection
2209 RAMP INPUT 0 COMM Selects the fieldbus interface as the source for
forcing ramp input to zero.
COMMUNICATION FAULT FUNCTIONS

3018 COMM FAULT NOT SEL Determines the drive action in case the fieldbus
FUNC FAULT communication is lost.
CONST SP 7
LAST SPEED
3019 COMM FAULT 0.1 … 60.0 s Defines the time between the communication
TIME loss detection and the action selected with
parameter 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC.
PID CONTROLLER REFERENCE SIGNAL SOURCE SELECTION

4010 SET POINT COMM PID control reference (REF2)
/411 SEL COMM+AI1
0/42
10 COMM*AI1
Fieldbus control interface

The communication between a fieldbus system and the drive consists of 16-bit input
and output data words. The drive supports at the maximum the use of 10 data words
in each direction.
Data transformed from the drive to the fieldbus controller is defined by parameter
group 54 FBA DATA IN and data transformed from the fieldbus controller to the drive
is defined by parameter group 55 FBA DATA OUT.
Fieldbus network
Fieldbus module Start, stop,

Data in dir select
select 1)
4 = Status word
NOT SEL
DATA IN 5 = ACT1 1) …
1 6 = ACT2 1) 2)
COMM
Fieldbus- …
specific Par. 0101…9915
10
interface 1001/1002
5401/…/5410
REF1 select
DATA Data out
OUT select
1 1 = Control word 1) KEYPAD
… 2 = REF1 1) …
2) COMM
10 3 = REF2 1)
Par. 0101…9915
1103
5501/…/5510
REF2 select
1)
Some fieldbus adapters map this data automatically. For
the use of virtual addresses, see the user's manual of KEYPAD
the appropriate fieldbus adapter. …
2)
See also other COMM selection parameters. 2)
COMM
1106
 Control word and Status word

The Control word (CW) is the principal means of controlling the drive from a fieldbus
system. The Control word is sent by the fieldbus controller to the drive. The drive
switches between its states according to the bit-coded instructions of the Control
word.
The Status word (SW) is a word containing status information, sent by the drive to the
fieldbus controller.
 References
References (REF) are 16-bit signed integers. A negative reference (indicating
reversed direction of rotation) is formed by calculating the two’s complement from the
corresponding positive reference value. The contents of each reference word can be
used as speed or frequency reference.
 Actual values
Actual values (ACT) are 16-bit words containing information on selected operations of
the drive.
Communication profile
The communication between the drive and the fieldbus adapter supports the DCU
communication profile. The DCU profile extends the control and status interface to 32
bits.
Fieldbus Fieldbus adapter Drive

network
Industry standard drive

profile (eg, PROFIdrive)
1)
Data conversion
Select
ABB drives
1)
Data conversion
2)
Transparent 16
Optional reference,
actual value scaling
Transparent 32
1) DCU profile
2)
Selection through fieldbus adapter configuration parameters (parameter group 51 EXT
COMM MODULE)
For the DCU profile Control and Status word contents, see section DCU
Fieldbus references
 Reference selection and correction
Fieldbus reference (called COMM in signal selection contexts) is selected by setting a
reference selection parameter – 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT – to
COMM, COMM+AI1 or COMM*AI1. When parameter 1103 or 1106 is set to COMM,
the fieldbus reference is forwarded as such without correction. When parameter 1103
or 1106 is set to COMM+AI1 or COMM*AI1, the fieldbus reference is corrected using
analog input AI1 as shown in the following examples for the DCU profile.
With the DCU profile the fieldbus reference type can be Hz, rpm or percentage. In the
following examples the reference is in rpm.
Setting When COMM > 0 rpm When COMM < 0 rpm
COM COMM/1000 + (AI(%) - 50%) · (MAX-MIN) COMM/1000 + (AI(%) - 50%) · (MAX-
M+AI1 MIN)
Corrected
reference (rpm)
COMM
Max. limit REF -1500000 -750000 0
1500 Min. limit 0
AI = 100%
AI = 100%
750 -7500
AI = 50% AI = 50%
AI = 0% Min. limit AI = 0%
0 -1500
0 750000 1500000 COMM Max. limit
REF
Corrected
reference (rpm)
Corrected
reference (rpm)
COMM
REF -1500000 -750000 0
1500 0
Max limit -300
1200 Min. limit
AI = 100%
AI = 100%
750 -750
AI = 50% AI = 50%
AI = 0% Min limit AI = 0%
300 -1200
Max. limit
0 COMM -1500
0 750000 1500000 REF
Corrected
reference (rpm)
Setting When COMM > 0 rpm When COMM < 0 rpm

COM (COMM/1000) · (AI(%) / 50%) (COMM/1000) · (AI(%) / 50%)
M*AI1
Corrected
reference (rpm)
COMM
Max. limit REF -1500000 -750000 0
1500 Min. limit 0
AI = 0%
AI = 50%
AI = 100%
750 -750
AI = 50%
AI = 100%
AI = 0% Min. limit Max. limit
0 -1500
0 750000 1500000 COMM
REF Corrected
reference (rpm)
Corrected
reference (rpm)
COMM
REF -1500000 -750000 0
1500 0
Ma.x limit Min. limit AI = 0% -300
1200
AI = 100%
750 -750
AI = 50%
AI = 100%
Min. limit Max. limit AI = 50%
300 AI = 0%
-1200
0 COMM -1500
0 750000 1500000 REF
Corrected
reference (rpm)
If the network employs the ODVA AC/DC drive profile and the drive is operating in the
scalar mode, the fieldbus speed reference unit is always rpm. The fieldbus adapter
module can provide the drive with a frequency reference, if parameter FB PAR 23
ODVA SPEED SCALE or FB PAR 10 ODVA SPEED SCALE is set, but this might not
guarantee the accurate speed reference. If there is no accurate speed reference and
the EXT1 reference is used, set parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT to ODVA HZ REF
(36) to convert the ODVA AC/DC speed reference and actual value type to Hz. In
addition, you can set the decimal point location for ODVA frequency reference values
by selecting the correct scaling format with parameter 1109 ODVA HZ REF SEL.
Note: The ODVA AC/DC reference conversion is available only for EXT1 in the scalar
mode. The supported networks are Ethernet/IP and DeviceNet.
 Fieldbus reference scaling

Fieldbus references REF1 and REF2 are scaled for the DCU profile as shown in the
following table.
Note: Any correction of the reference (see section Reference selection and
correction on page 346) is applied before scaling.
Reference Range Reference Scaling Remarks
type
REF1 -214783648 Speed or 1000 = 1 rpm / 1 Hz Final reference limited by
… frequency 1104/1105. Actual motor speed
+214783647 limited by 2001/2002 (speed) or
REF2 -214783648 Speed or 1000 = 1% Final reference limited by
… frequency 1107/1108. Actual motor speed
+214783647 limited by 2001/2002 (speed) or
Torque 1000 = 1% Final reference limited by
2015/2017 (torque 1) or
2016/2018 (torque 2).
PID 1000 = 1% Final reference limited by
reference 4012/4013 (PID set 1) or
4112/4113 (PID set 2).
Note: The settings of parameters 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN have no
effect on the reference scaling.
 Reference handling
Reference handling is the same for the ABB drives profile (embedded fieldbus) and
DCU profile. See section Reference handling on page 323.
 Actual value scaling

The scaling of the integers sent to the master as Actual values depends on the
selected function. See chapter Actual signals and parameters on page 179.
Fault tracing 349
15
Fault tracing
The chapter tells how to reset faults and view the fault history. It also lists all alarm
and fault messages including the possible cause and corrective actions.
Safety
WARNING! Only qualified electricians are allowed to maintain the drive. Read
the safety instructions in chapter Safety on page 17 before you work on the
drive.
Alarm and fault indications

A fault is indicated with a red LED. See section LEDs on page 372.
An alarm or fault message on the panel display indicates an abnormal drive status.
Using the information given in this chapter, most alarm and fault causes can be
identified and corrected. If not, contact your local ABB representative.
To display the alarms on the control panel, set parameter 1610 DISPLAY ALARMS to
value 1 (YES).
The four-digit code number in parenthesis after the fault is for the fieldbus
communication. See chapters Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus on page 313
and Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter on page 339.
350 Fault tracing
How to reset
RESET
EXIT
The drive can be reset either by pressing the keypad key (basic control panel) or
RESET
(assistant control panel), through digital input or fieldbus, or by switching the
supply voltage off for a while. The source for the fault reset signal is selected by
parameter 1604 FAULT RESET SEL. When the fault has been removed, the motor
can be restarted.
Fault history
When a fault is detected, it is stored in the fault history. The latest faults are stored
together with the time stamp.
Parameters 0401 LAST FAULT, 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 and 0413 PREVIOUS
FAULT 2 store the most recent faults. Parameters 0404…0409 show drive operation
data at the time the latest fault occurred. The assistant control panel provides
additional information about the fault history. See section Fault logger mode on page
99 for more information.
Fault tracing 351
Alarm messages generated by the drive

CODE ALARM CAUSE WHAT TO DO
2001 OVERCURRENT Output current limit Check ambient conditions. Load
0308 bit 0 controller is active. capacity decreases if installation site
High ambient ambient temperature exceeds 40 °C
(programmable fault (104 °F). See section Derating on
function 1610) temperature.
page 376.
For more information, see fault 0001
in Fault messages generated by the
drive on page 357.
2002 OVERVOLTAGE DC overvoltage For more information, see fault 0002
0308 bit 1 controller is active. in Fault messages generated by the
drive on page 357.
(programmable fault
function 1610)
2003 UNDERVOLTAGE DC undervoltage For more information, see fault 0003
0308 bit 2 controller is active. in Fault messages generated by the
drive on page 351.
2004 DIR LOCK Change of direction is Check parameter 1003 DIRECTION
0308 bit 3 not allowed. settings.
2005 IO COMM Fieldbus Check status of fieldbus

0308 bit 4 communication break communication. See chapter Fieldbus
control with embedded fieldbus on
(programmable fault page 313, chapter Fieldbus control
function 3018, 3019) with fieldbus adapter on page 339 or
appropriate fieldbus adapter manual.
Check fault function parameter
settings.
Check connections.
Check if master can communicate.
2006 AI1 LOSS Analog input AI1 signal For more information, see fault 0007
0308 bit 5 has fallen below limit in Fault messages generated by the
defined by parameter drive on page 357.
(programmable fault 3021 AI1 FAULT
function 3001, 3021) LIMIT.
2007 AI2 LOSS Analog input AI2 signal For more information, see fault in
0308 bit 6 has fallen below limit 0008 Fault messages generated by
defined by parameter the drive on page 357.
(programmable fault 3022 AI2 FAULT
function 3001, 3022) LIMIT.
2008 PANEL LOSS Control panel selected For more information, see fault 0010
0308 bit 7 as active control in Fault messages generated by the
location for drive has drive on page 357.
(programmable fault ceased
function 3002) communicating.
2009 DEVICE Drive IGBT Check ambient conditions. See also
OVERTEMP temperature is section Derating on page 376.
0308 bit 8 excessive. Alarm limit Check air flow and fan operation.
depends on the drive
type and size. Check motor power against drive
power.
352 Fault tracing

2010 MOTOR TEMP Motor temperature is For more information, see fault 0009
0308 bit 9 too high (or appears to in Fault messages generated by the
be too high) due to drive on page 357.
(programmable fault excessive load,
function insufficient motor
3005…3009 / 3503) power, inadequate
cooling or incorrect
start-up data.
Measured motor
temperature has
exceeded alarm limit
set by parameter 3503
ALARM LIMIT.
2011 UNDERLOAD Motor load is too low Check for problem in driven
0308 bit 10 due to, eg, release equipment.
mechanism in driven Check fault function parameters.
(programmable fault equipment.
function Check motor power against drive
3013…3015) power.
2012 MOTOR STALL Motor is operating in Check motor load and drive ratings.
0308 bit 11 stall region due to, eg, Check fault function parameters.
excessive load or
(programmable fault insufficient motor
function power.
3010…3012)
2013 AUTORESET Automatic reset alarm Check parameter group 31
1)
0308 bit 12 AUTOMATIC RESET settings.
2018 PID SLEEP Sleep function has See parameter groups 40 PROCESS
1)
0309 bit 1 entered sleeping PID SET 1… 41 PROCESS PID SET
mode. 2.
(programmable fault
function 1610)
2019 ID RUN Motor Identification run This alarm belongs to normal start-up
0309 bit 2 is on. procedure. Wait until drive indicates
that motor identification is completed.
2021 START ENABLE 1 No Start enable 1 Check parameter 1608 START
MISSING signal received ENABLE 1 settings.
0309 bit 4 Check digital input connections.
Check fieldbus communication
settings.
2022 START ENABLE 2 No Start enable 2 Check parameter 1609 START
MISSING signal received ENABLE 2 settings.
0309 bit 5 Check digital input connections.
Check fieldbus communication
settings.
2023 EMERGENCY Drive has received Check that it is safe to continue
STOP emergency stop operation.
0309 bit 6 command and ramps Return emergency stop push button to
to stop according to normal position.
ramp time defined by
parameter 2208
EMERG DEC TIME.
Fault tracing 353

2024 ENCODER ERROR Communication fault Check pulse encoder and its wiring,
0309 bit 7 between pulse pulse encoder interface module and
encoder and pulse its wiring and parameter group 50
(programmable fault encoder interface ENCODER settings.
function 5003) module or between
module and drive.
2025 FIRST START Motor identification Wait until drive indicates that motor
0309 bit 8 magnetization is on. identification is completed.
This alarm belongs to
normal start-up
procedure.
2026 INPUT PHASE Intermediate circuit DC Check input power line fuses.
LOSS voltage is oscillating Check for input power supply
0309 bit 9 due to missing input imbalance.
power line phase or
(programmable fault blown fuse. Check fault function parameters.
function 3016)
Alarm is generated
when DC voltage
ripple exceeds 14% of
nominal DC voltage.
2029 MOTOR BACK EMF Permanent magnet If start to rotating motor is required,
0309 bit 12 synchronous motor is select start mode 1 (AUTO) with
rotating, start mode 2 parameter 2101 START FUNCTION.
(DC MAGN) is Otherwise drive starts after motor has
selected with stopped.
parameter 2101
START FUNCTION,
and run is requested.
Drive warns that
rotating motor cannot
be magnetized with
DC current.
2035 SAFE TORQUE STO (Safe torque off) If this was not expected reaction to
OFF requested and it safety circuit interruption, check
0309 bit 13 functions correctly. cabling of safety circuit connected to
Parameter 3025 STO STO terminals X1C.
OPERATION is set to If different reaction is required, change
react with alarm. value of parameter 3025 STO
OPERATION.
Note: Start signal must be reset
(toggled to 0) if STO has been used
while drive has been running.
1) Even when the relay output is configured to indicate alarm conditions (eg, parameter 1401
RELAY OUTPUT 1 = 5 (ALARM) or 16 (FLT/ALARM)), this alarm is not indicated by a relay
output.
354 Fault tracing
Alarms generated by the basic control panel

The basic control panel indicates control panel alarms with a code, A5xxx.
ALARM CODE CAUSE WHAT TO DO
5001 Drive is not responding. Check panel connection.
5002 Incompatible Contact your local ABB representative.
communication profile
5010 Corrupted panel parameter Retry parameter upload.
backup file Retry parameter download.
5011 Drive is controlled from Change drive control to local control mode.
another source.
5012 Direction of rotation is Enable change of direction. See parameter
locked. 1003 DIRECTION.
5013 Panel control is disabled Start from panel is not possible. Reset
because start inhibit is emergency stop command or remove 3-wire
active. stop command before starting from panel.
See section 3-wire macro on page 111 and
parameters 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS, 1002
EXT2 COMMANDS and 2109 EMERG STOP
SEL.
5014 Panel control is disabled Reset drive fault and retry.
because of drive fault.
5015 Panel control is disabled Deactivate local control mode lock and retry.
because local control See parameter 1606 LOCAL LOCK.
mode lock is active.
5018 Parameter default value is Contact your local ABB representative.
not found.
5019 Writing non-zero Only parameter reset is allowed.
parameter value is
prohibited.
5020 Parameter or parameter Contact your local ABB representative.
group does not exist or
parameter value is
inconsistent.
5021 Parameter or parameter Contact your local ABB representative.
group is hidden.
5022 Parameter is write Parameter value is read-only and cannot be
protected. changed.
5023 Parameter change is not Stop drive and change parameter value.
allowed when drive is
running.
5024 Drive is executing a task. Wait until task is completed.
5025 Software is being uploaded Wait until upload/download is complete.
or downloaded.
5026 Value is at or below Contact your local ABB representative.
minimum limit.
5027 Value is at or above Contact your local ABB representative.
maximum limit.
5028 Invalid value Contact your local ABB representative.
Fault tracing 355

5029 Memory is not ready. Retry.
5030 Invalid request Contact your local ABB representative.
5031 Drive is not ready for Check input power supply.
operation, eg, due to low
DC voltage.
5032 Parameter error Contact your local ABB representative.
5040 Parameter download error.
Selected parameter set is Perform upload function before download.
not in current parameter
backup file.
5041 Parameter backup file Contact your local ABB representative.
does not fit into memory.
5042 Parameter download error. Perform upload function before download.
Selected parameter set is
not in current parameter
backup file.
5043 No start inhibit
5044 Parameter backup file Check that file is compatible with drive.
restoring error
5050 Parameter upload aborted Retry parameter upload.
5051 File error Contact your local ABB representative.
5052 Parameter upload has Retry parameter upload.
failed.
5060 Parameter download Retry parameter download.
aborted
5062 Parameter download has Retry parameter download.
failed.
5070 Panel backup memory Contact your local ABB representative.
write error
5071 Panel backup memory Contact your local ABB representative.
read error
5080 Operation is not allowed Switch to local control mode.
because drive is not in
local control mode.
5081 Operation is not allowed Check cause of fault and reset fault.
because of active fault.
5083 Operation is not allowed Check parameter 1602 PARAMETER LOCK
because parameter lock is setting.
on.
5084 Operation is not allowed Wait until task is completed and retry.
because drive is
performing a task.
5085 Parameter download from Check that source and destination drive types
source to destination drive are same, ie, ACS355. See type designation
has failed. label of the drive.
5086 Parameter download from Check that source and destination drive type
source to destination drive designations are the same. See type
has failed. designation labels of the drives.
356 Fault tracing

5087 Parameter download from Check that source and destination drive
source to destination drive information are same. See parameters in group
has failed because 33 INFORMATION.
parameter sets are
incompatible.
5088 Operation has failed Contact your local ABB representative.
because of drive memory
error.
5089 Download has failed Contact your local ABB representative.
because of CRC error.
5090 Download has failed Contact your local ABB representative.
because of data
processing error.
5091 Operation has failed Contact your local ABB representative.
because of parameter
error.
5092 Parameter download from Check that source and destination drive
source to destination drive information are same. See parameters in group
has failed because 33 INFORMATION.
parameter sets are
incompatible.
Fault tracing 357
Fault messages generated by the drive

CODE FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO
0001 OVERCURRENT Output current has
(2310) exceeded trip level.
0305 bit 0 Sudden load change or Check motor load and mechanics.
stall.
Insufficient acceleration Check acceleration time (2202 and
time. 2205). Check the possibility of using
vector control.
Incorrect motor data. Check that motor data (Group 99) is
equal to motor rating plate values. If
using vector control, perform ID run
(9910).
Motor and/or drive is too Check sizing.
small for the application.
Damaged motor cables, Check motor, motor cable and
damaged motor or wrong connections (including phasing).
motor connection
(star/delta).
Internal fault of the drive. Replace the drive.
Drive gives an
overcurrent fault after
start command even
when the motor is not
connected (use scalar
control in this trial).
High frequency noise in Check the STO cabling and remove
STO lines. the noise sources nearby.
0002 DC OVERVOLT Excessive intermediate
(3210) circuit DC voltage. DC
overvoltage trip limit is
0305 bit 1 420 V for 200 V drives
and 840 V for 400 V
drives.
Supply voltage is too Check input voltage level and check
high or noisy. Static or power line for static or transient
transient overvoltage in overvoltage
the input power supply.
If the drive is used in a In a floating network, remove the EMC
floating network, DC screw from the drive.
overvoltage fault may
appear
358 Fault tracing

If the overvoltage fault
appears during
deceleration, possible
causes are:
• Overvoltage controller • Check that overvoltage controller is
disabled. on (parameter 2005 OVERVOLT
CTRL).
• Deceleration time is • Check deceleration time (2203,
too short. 2206).
• Faulty or undersized • Check brake chopper and resistor
braking chopper. (if used). DC overvoltage control
must be deactivated when brake
chopper and resistor is used
(parameter 2005 OVERVOLT
CTRL). Retrofit drive with brake
chopper and brake resistor.
0003 DEV OVERTEMP Drive IGBT temperature
(4210) is excessive. The fault
trip limit depends on the
0305 bit 2 drive type and size.
Ambient temperature is Check ambient conditions. See also
too high. section Derating on page 376.
Airflow through the Check air flow and free space above
inverter is not free. and below the drive (see section Free
space around the drive on page 34).
Fan is not working Check fan operation.
properly
Overloading of the drive. 50% overload is allowed for one
minute in ten minutes. If higher
switching frequency (parameter 2606)
is used, follow the Derating rules on
page 376.
0004 SHORT CIRC Short-circuit in motor
(2340) cable(s) or motor.
0305 bit 3 Damaged motor or motor Check motor and cable insulation.
cable. Check motor winding
Internal fault of the drive. Replace the drive.
Drive gives an
overcurrent fault after
start command even
when the motor is not
connected (use scalar
control in this trial).
High frequency noise in Check the STO cabling and remove
STO lines. the noise sources nearby.
0006 DC UNDERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC Check input power supply and fuses.
(3220) voltage is not sufficient.
0305 bit 5 Undervoltage controller Check that undervoltage controller is
disabled. on (parameter 2006 UNDERVOLT
CTRL).
Fault tracing 359

Missing input power line Measure the input and DC voltage
phase. during start, stop and running by using
a multimeter or check parameter 0107
DC BUS VOLTAGE.
Blown fuse Check the condition of input fuses.
Rectifier bridge internal Replace the drive.
fault.
0007 AI1 LOSS Analog input AI1 signal
(8110) has fallen below limit
defined by parameter
0305 bit 6 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT.
(programmable
fault function Analog input signal is Check the source and wire
weak or does not exist. connections of the analog input.
3001, 3021)
Analog input signal is Check parameters 3001 AI<MIN
lower than fault limit. FUNCTION and 3021 AI1 FAULT
LIMIT.
0008 AI2 LOSS Analog input AI2 signal .
(8110) has fallen below limit
defined by parameter
0305 bit 7 3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT.
(programmable
fault function Analog input signal is Check the source and wire
weak or does not exist. connections of analog input.
3001, 3022)
Analog input signal is Check parameters 3001 AI<MIN
lower than fault limit. FUNCTION and 3021 AI1 FAULT
LIMIT.
360 Fault tracing

0009 MOT OVERTEMP Motor temperature
(4310) estimation is too high.
0305 bit 8 Excessive load or Check motor ratings, load and cooling.
insufficient motor power
(programmable
fault function Incorrect start-up data. Check start-up data.
3005…3009 /
Check fault function parameters
3504) 3005...3009.
Minimize IR compensation to avoid
heating (parameter 2603 IR COMP
VOLT).
Check frequency of the motor (low
running frequency of motor with high
input current can cause this fault).
Let the motor cool down. The
necessary cooling time period
depends on the value of parameter
3006 MOT THERM TIME. Motor
temperature estimation is counted
down only when the drive is powered
on.
Measured motor Check value of fault limit.
temperature has Check that actual number of sensors
exceeded the fault limit corresponds to value set by parameter
set by parameter 3504 3501 SENSOR TYPE.
FAULT LIMIT.
Let the motor cool down. Ensure
proper motor cooling: Check the
cooling fan, clean cooling surfaces,
etc.
0010 PANEL LOSS Control panel selected Check panel connection.
(5300) as active control location Check fault function parameters.
for drive has ceased
0305 bit 9 communicating. Check parameter 3002 PANEL
(programmable COMM ERR.
fault function Check control panel connector.
3002) Refit control panel in mounting
platform.
If the drive is in external control mode
(REM) and is set to accept start/stop,
direction commands or references
through control panel:
Check group 10 START/STOP/DIR
and 11 REFERENCE SELECT
settings.
0011 ID RUN FAIL Motor ID run is not Check motor connection.
(FF84) completed successfully. Check start-up data (group 99 START-
0305 bit 10 UP DATA).
Check maximum speed (parameter
2002). It should be at least 80% of
motor nominal speed (parameter
9908).
Ensure ID run has been performed
according to instructions in section ID
run procedure on page 71.
Fault tracing 361

0012 MOTOR STALL Motor is operating in stall Check motor load and drive ratings.
(7121) region due to, eg, Check fault function parameters
excessive load or 3010...3012.
0305 bit 11 insufficient motor power.
(programmable
fault function
3010…3012)
0014 EXT FAULT 1 External fault 1 Check external devices for faults.
(9000) Check parameter 3003 EXTERNAL
0305 bit 13 FAULT 1 setting.
(programmable
fault function
3003)
0015 EXT FAULT 2 External fault 2 Check external devices for faults.
(9001) Check parameter 3004 EXTERNAL
0305 bit 14 FAULT 2 setting.
(programmable
fault function
3004)
0016 EARTH FAULT Drive has detected earth Check motor.
(2330) (ground) fault in motor or Check motor cable. Motor cable
motor cable. length must not exceed maximum
0305 bit 15
specifications. See section Motor
(programmable connection data on page 385.
fault function
3017) Note: Disabling earth fault (ground
fault) may damage drive.
Drive internal fault. Internal short-circuit may cause earth
fault indication. This has happened if
fault 0001 appears after disabling the
earth fault. Replace the drive.
0017 UNDERLOAD Motor load is too low due Check for problem in driven
(FF6A) to, eg, release equipment.
mechanism in driven Check fault function parameters
0306 bit 0 equipment. 3010...3012.
(programmable
fault function Check motor power against drive
3013…3015) power.
0018 THERM FAIL Temperature of the drive Check that the ambient temperature is
(5210) exceeds the operating not too low.
level of the thermistor.
0306 bit 1
Drive internal fault. Replace the drive.
Thermistor used for drive
internal temperature
measurement is open or
short-circuited
0021 CURR MEAS Drive internal fault. Replace the drive.
(2211) Current measurement is
out of range.
0306 bit 4
362 Fault tracing

0022 SUPPLY PHASE Intermediate circuit DC Check input power line fuses and
(3130) voltage is oscillating due installation.
to missing input power Check for input power supply
0306 bit 5 line phase or blown fuse. imbalance.
(programmable
fault function Check the load.
3016) Trip occurs when DC Check fault function parameter 2619
voltage ripple exceeds DC STABILIZER.
14% of nominal DC
voltage.
0023 ENCODER ERR Communication fault Check pulse encoder and its wiring,
(7301) between pulse encoder pulse encoder interface module and
and pulse encoder its wiring and parameter group 50
0306 bit 6 interface module or ENCODER settings.
(programmable between module and
fault function drive.
5003)
0024 OVERSPEED Motor is turning faster Check minimum/maximum frequency
(7310) than 120% of the highest settings (parameters 2001 MINIMUM
allowed speed due to SPEED and 2002 MAXIMUM
0306 bit 7 incorrectly set SPEED).
minimum/maximum Check adequacy of motor braking
speed, insufficient torque.
braking torque or
changes in load when Check applicability of torque control.
using torque reference. Check need for brake chopper and
Operating range limits resistor(s).
are set by parameters
2001 MINIMUM SPEED
and 2002 MAXIMUM
SPEED (in vector
control) or 2007
MINIMUM FREQ and
2008 MAXIMUM FREQ
(in scalar control).
0027 CONFIG FILE Internal configuration file Replace the drive.
(630F) error
0306 bit 10
0028 SERIAL 1 ERR Fieldbus communication Check status of fieldbus
(7510) break communication. See chapter Fieldbus
control with embedded fieldbus on
0306 bit 11 page 313, chapter Fieldbus control
(programmable with fieldbus adapter on page 339 or
fault function appropriate fieldbus adapter manual.
3018, 3019) Check fault function parameter 3018
COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019
COMM FAULT TIME settings.
Check connections and/or noise on
the line.
Check if master can communicate.
0029 EFB CON FILE Configuration file reading Error in reading the configuration files
(6306) error of the embedded fieldbus. See
fieldbus user’s manual.
0306 bit 12
Fault tracing 363

0030 FORCE TRIP Trip command received Fault trip was caused by fieldbus. See
(FF90) from fieldbus fieldbus user’s manual.
0306 bit 13
0034 MOTOR PHASE Motor circuit fault due to Check motor and motor cable.
(FF56) missing motor phase or Check motor thermistor relay (if used).
motor thermistor relay
0306 bit 14 (used in motor
temperature
measurement) fault.
0035 OUTP WIRING Incorrect input power Possible power wiring error detected.
(FF95) and motor cable Check that input power connections
connection (ie, input are not connected to drive output.
0306 bit 15 power cable is Fault can be declared if input power is
(programmable connected to drive motor delta grounded system and motor
fault function connection). cable capacitance is large. This fault
3023) can be disabled by parameter 3023
WIRING FAULT.
0036 INCOMPATIBLE Loaded software is not Loaded software is not compatible
SW compatible. with the drive. Contact your local ABB
(630F) representative.
0307 bit 3
0037 CB OVERTEMP Drive control board Check for excessive ambient
(4110) overheated. Fault trip temperature.
limit is 95 °C. Check for fan failure.
0305 bit 12
Check for obstructions in air flow.
Check the dimensioning and cooling
of cabinet.
0044 SAFE TORQUE STO (Safe torque off) If this was not expected reaction to
OFF requested and it safety circuit interruption, check
(FFA0) functions correctly. cabling of safety circuit connected to
STO terminals X1C.
0307 bit 4
Parameter 3025 STO If different reaction is required, change
OPERATION is set to value of parameter 3025 STO
react with fault. OPERATION.
Reset fault before starting.
0045 STO1 LOST STO (Safe torque off) Check STO circuit cabling and
(FFA1) input channel 1 has not opening of contacts in STO circuit.
de-energized, but
0307 bit 5 channel 2 has. Opening
contacts on channel 1
might have been
damaged or there is a
short-circuit.
0046 STO2 LOST STO (Safe torque off) Check STO circuit cabling and
(FFA2) input channel 2 has not opening of contacts in STO circuit.
de-energized, but
0307 bit 6 channel 1 has. Opening
contacts on channel 2
might have been
damaged or there is a
short-circuit.
364 Fault tracing

0101 SERF CORRUPT Drive internal error. Replace the drive.
(FF55)
0307 bit 14
0103 SERF MACRO
(FF55)
0307 bit 14
0201 DSP T1 Drive internal error. If fieldbus is in use, check the
OVERLOAD communication, settings and contacts.
(6100) Write down fault code and contact
0307 bit 13 your local ABB representative.
0202 DSP T2
OVERLOAD
(6100)
0307 bit 13
0203 DSP T3
OVERLOAD
(6100)
0307 bit 13
0204 DSP STACK
ERROR
(6100)
0307 bit 12
0206 CB ID ERROR Drive internal error. Replace the drive.
(5000)
0307 bit 11
1000 PAR HZRPM Incorrect Check parameter settings. Check that
(6320) speed/frequency limit following applies:
parameter setting • 2001 MINIMUM SPEED <
0307 bit 15
2002 MAXIMUM SPEED
• 2007 MINIMUM FREQ <
2008 MAXIMUM FREQ
• 2001 MINIMUM SPEED /
9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED,
2002 MAXIMUM SPEED /
9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED,
2007 MINIMUM FREQ /
9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ and
2008 MAXIMUM FREQ /
9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ are
within range.
1003 PAR AI SCALE Incorrect analog input AI Check parameter group 13 ANALOG
(6320) signal scaling INPUTS settings. Check that following
applies:
0307 bit 15
• 1301 MINIMUM AI1 <
1302 MAXIMUM AI1
• 1304 MINIMUM AI2 <
1305 MAXIMUM AI2.
Fault tracing 365

1004 PAR AO SCALE Incorrect analog output Check parameter group 15 ANALOG
(6320) AO signal scaling OUTPUTS settings. Check that
following applies:
0307 bit 15
• 1504 MINIMUM AO1 <
1505 MAXIMUM AO1.
1005 PAR PCU 2 Incorrect motor nominal Check parameter 9909 MOTOR NOM
(6320) power setting POWER setting. Following must
apply:
0307 bit 15
• 1.1 < (9906 MOTOR NOM CURR ·
9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT · 1.73 /
PN) < 3.0
Where PN = 1000 · 9909 MOTOR
NOM POWER (if units are in kW)
or PN = 746 · 9909 MOTOR NOM
POWER (if units are in hp).
1006 PAR EXT RO Incorrect relay output Check parameter settings. Check that
(6320) extension parameters following applies:
0307 bit 15 • Output relay module MREL-01 is
connected to drive. See parameter
(programmable 0181 EXTENSION.
fault function
3027) • 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2, 1403
RELAY OUTPUT 3 and 1410
RELAY OUTPUT 4 have non-zero
values.
See MREL-01 output relay module
user's manual (3AUA0000035974
[English]).
1007 PAR FBUSMISS Fieldbus control has not Check fieldbus parameter settings.
(6320) been activated. See chapter Fieldbus control with
fieldbus adapter on page 339.
0307 bit 15
1009 PAR PCU 1 Incorrect motor nominal Check parameter settings. Following
(6320) speed/frequency setting must apply for induction motor:
0307 bit 15 • 1 < (60 · 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ
/ 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED) < 16
• 0.8 < 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED /
(60 · 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ /
9913 MOTOR POLE PAIRS) <
0.992
Following must apply for permanent
magnet synchronous motor:
• 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED /
(60 · 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ /
9913 MOTOR POLE PAIRS) = 1.0
1015 PAR USER U/F Incorrect voltage to Check parameter 2610 USER
(6320) frequency (U/f) ratio DEFINED U1 … 2617 USER
voltage setting. DEFINED F4 settings.
0307 bit 15
366 Fault tracing

1017 PAR SETUP 1 Only two of the following Disable frequency output, frequency
(6320) can be used input or encoder:
simultaneously: MTAC- • change transistor output to digital
0307 bit 15 01 pulse encoder mode (value of parameter 1804 TO
interface module, MODE = 0 [DIGITAL]), or
frequency input signal or
frequency output signal. • change frequency input selection to
other value in parameter groups
11 REFERENCE SELECT,
40 PROCESS PID SET 1,
41 PROCESS PID SET 2 and
42 EXT / TRIM PID, or
• disable (parameter 5002
ENCODER ENABLE) and remove
MTAC-01 pulse encoder interface
module.
Fault tracing 367
Embedded fieldbus faults

Embedded fieldbus faults can be traced by monitoring group 53 EFB PROTOCOL
parameters. See also fault/alarm SERIAL 1 ERR (0028).
 No master device
If there is no master device on line, parameter 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES and 5307
EFB CRC ERRORS values remain unchanged.
What to do:
• Check that the network master is connected and properly configured.
• Check the cable connection.
 Same device address

If two or more devices have the same address, parameter 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS
value increases with every read/write command.
What to do:
• Check the device addresses. No two devices on line may have the same address.
 Incorrect wiring
If the communication wires are swapped (terminal A on one device is connected to
terminal B on another device), parameter 5306 EFB OK MESSAGESS value remains
unchanged and parameter 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS increases.
What to do:
Check the RS-232/EIA-485 interface connection.
368 Fault tracing
Maintenance and hardware diagnostics 369
16
Maintenance and hardware
diagnostics
The chapter contains preventive maintenance instructions and LED indicator
descriptions.
Maintenance intervals
If installed in an appropriate environment, the drive requires very little maintenance.
The table lists the routine maintenance intervals recommended by ABB.
Maintenance Interval Instruction
Reforming of capacitors Every year when See Capacitors on page 371.
stored
Check of dustiness, corrosion Every year
and temperature
Replacement of the cooling fan Every three years See Cooling fan on page 370.
(frame sizes R1…R4)
Check and tightening of the Every six years See Power connections on page 371.
power terminals
Replacement of the battery in Every ten years See Changing the battery in the
the assistant control panel assistant control panel on page 372.
Testing of Safe torque off (STO) Every year See Appendix: Safe torque off (STO)
operation and reaction on page 417.
Consult your local ABB Service representative for more details on the maintenance.
On the Internet, go to http://www.abb.com/drives and select Drive Services –
Maintenance and Field Services.
370 Maintenance and hardware diagnostics
Cooling fan
The life span of the cooling fan depends on the drive usage and ambient
temperature. Automatic fan on/off control increases the life span (see parameter
1612 FAN CONTROL).
When the assistant control panel is in use, the Notice handler assistant informs when
the definable value of the operating hour counter is reached (see parameter 2901
COOLING FAN TRIG). This information can also be passed to the relay output (see
group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS) regardless of the used panel type.
Fan failure can be predicted by the increasing noise from the fan bearings. If the drive
is operated in a critical part of a process, fan replacement is recommended once
these symptoms start appearing. Replacement fans are available from ABB. Do not
use other than ABB specified spare parts.
 Replacing the cooling fan (frame sizes R1…R4)

Only frame sizes R1…R4 include a fan; frame size R0 has natural cooling.
WARNING! Read and follow the instructions in chapter Safety on page

17. Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death, or
damage to the equipment.
1. Stop the drive and disconnect it from the AC power source.

2. Remove the hood if the drive has the NEMA 1 option.
3. Lever the fan holder off the drive frame with, eg, a screwdriver and lift the hinged
fan holder slightly upward from its front edge.
4. Free the fan cable from the clip.
5. Disconnect the fan cable.
6. Remove the fan holder from the hinges.
3
5
4
Maintenance and hardware diagnostics 371
7. Install the new fan holder including the fan in reverse order.
8. Restore power.
Capacitors
 Reforming the capacitors
The capacitors must be reformed if the drive has been stored for a year. See section
Type designation label on page 30 for how to find out the manufacturing time from the
serial number. For information on reforming the capacitors, refer to Guide for
capacitor reforming in ACS50, ACS55, ACS150, ACS310, ACS350, ACS355,
ACS550 and ACH550 (3AFE68735190 [English]), available on the Internet (go to
http://www.abb.com and enter the code in the Search field).
Power connections
WARNING! Read and follow the instructions in chapter Safety on page

17. Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death, or
damage to the equipment.
1. Stop the drive and disconnect it from the power line. Wait for five minutes to let the
drive DC capacitors discharge. Ensure by measuring with a multimeter
(impedance at least 1 Mohm) that there is no voltage present.
2. Check the tightness of the power cable connections. Use the tightening torques
given in section Terminal and lead-through data for the power cables on page
384.
3. Restore power.
372 Maintenance and hardware diagnostics
Control panel
 Cleaning the control panel
Use a soft damp cloth to clean the control panel. Avoid harsh cleaners which could
scratch the display window.
 Changing the battery in the assistant control panel

A battery is only used in assistant control panels that have the clock function
available and enabled. The battery keeps the clock operating in memory during
power interruptions.
The expected life for the battery is greater than ten years. To remove the battery, use
a coin to rotate the battery holder on the back of the control panel. Replace the
battery with type CR2032.
Note: The battery is NOT required for any control panel or drive functions, except the
clock.
LEDs
There is a green and a red LED on the front of the drive. They are visible through the
panel cover but invisible if a control panel is attached to the drive. The assistant
control panel has one LED. The table below describes the LED indications.
Where LED off LED lit and steady LED blinking
On the front of No power Green Power supply on Green Drive in an alarm
the drive. the board OK state
If a control panel Red Drive in a fault Red Drive in a fault state.
is attached to the state. To reset To reset the fault,
drive, switch to the fault, press switch off the drive
remote control RESET from the power.
(otherwise a fault control panel or
will be switch off the
generated), and drive power.
then remove the
panel to be able
to see the LEDs.
At the top left Panel has no Green Drive in a normal Green Drive in an alarm
corner of the power or no state state
assistant control drive Red Drive in a fault Red -
panel connection. state. To reset
the fault, press
RESET from the
control panel or
switch off the
drive power.
Technical data 373
17
Technical data
The chapter contains the technical specifications of the drive, eg, ratings, sizes and
technical requirements as well as provisions for fulfilling the requirements for CE and
other marks.
374 Technical data
Ratings
Type Input 3) Input with Output Frame
choke 3) size
ACS355- I1N I1N I1N I1N I2N I2,1 I2max PN
(480 V) (480 V) min/10 min
4) 4) 2)
1)
x = E/U A A A A A A A kW hp
1-phase UN = 200…240 V (200, 208, 220, 230, 240 V)
01x-02A4-2 6.1 - 4.5 - 2.4 3.6 4.2 0.37 0.5 R0
01x-04A7-2 11 - 8.1 - 4.7 7.1 8.2 0.75 1 R1
01x-06A7-2 16 - 11 - 6.7 10.1 11.7 1.1 1.5 R1
01x-07A5-2 17 - 12 - 7.5 11.3 13.1 1.5 2 R2
01x-09A8-2 21 - 15 - 9.8 14.7 17.2 2.2 3 R2
3-phase UN = 200…240 V (200, 208, 220, 230, 240 V)
03x-02A4-2 4.3 - 2.2 - 2.4 3.6 4.2 0.37 0.5 R0
03x-03A5-2 6.1 - 3.5 - 3.5 5.3 6.1 0.55 0.75 R0
03x-04A7-2 7.6 - 4.2 - 4.7 7.1 8.2 0.75 1 R1
03x-06A7-2 12 - 6.1 - 6.7 10.1 11.7 1.1 1.5 R1
03x-07A5-2 12 - 6.9 - 7.5 11.3 13.1 1.5 2 R1
03x-09A8-2 14 - 9.2 - 9.8 14.7 17.2 2.2 3 R2
03x-13A3-2 22 - 13 - 13.3 20.0 23.3 3 3 R2
03x-17A6-2 25 - 14 - 17.6 26.4 30.8 4 5 R2
03x-24A4-2 41 - 21 - 24.4 36.6 42.7 5.5 7.5 R3
03x-31A0-2 50 - 26 - 31 46.5 54.3 7.5 10 R4
03x-46A2-2 69 - 41 - 46.2 69.3 80.9 11.0 15 R4
3-phase UN = 380…480 V (380, 400, 415, 440, 460, 480 V)
03x-01A2-4 2.2 1.8 1.1 0.9 1.2 1.8 2.1 0.37 0.5 R0
03x-01A9-4 3.6 3.0 1.8 1.5 1.9 2.9 3.3 0.55 0.75 R0
03x-02A4-4 4.1 3.4 2.3 1.9 2.4 3.6 4.2 0.75 1 R1
03x-03A3-4 6.0 5.0 3.1 2.6 3.3 5.0 5.8 1.1 1.5 R1
03x-04A1-4 6.9 5.8 3.5 2.9 4.1 6.2 7.2 1.5 2 R1
03x-05A6-4 9.6 8.0 4.8 4.0 5.6 8.4 9.8 2.2 3 R1
03x-07A3-4 12 9.7 6.1 5.1 7.3 11.0 12.8 3 3 R1
03x-08A8-4 14 11 7.7 6.4 8.8 13.2 15.4 4 5 R1
03x-12A5-4 19 16 11 9.5 12.5 18.8 21.9 5.5 7.5 R3
03x-15A6-4 22 18 12 10 15.6 23.4 27.3 7.5 10 R3
03x-23A1-4 31 26 18 15 23.1 34.7 40.4 11 15 R3
03x-31A0-4 52 43 25 20 31 46.5 54.3 15 20 R4
03x-38A0-4 61 51 32 26 38 57 66.5 18.5 25 R4
03x-44A0-4 67 56 38 32 44 66 77.0 22.0 30 R4
00353783.xls L
Technical data 375
1)
E = EMC filter connected (metal EMC filter screw installed),
U = EMC filter disconnected (plastic EMC filter screw installed), US parametrization.
2)
Overloading not allowed through Common DC connection.
3)
Input current is based on the rated motor nominal power (PN), supply network, line
inductance and load motor.
Input values with choke can be met with ABB CHK-xx or typical 5% chokes.
4)
480 V values are based on the fact that the motor load current is lower with the same output
power.
 Definitions
Input
I1N continuous rms input current (for dimensioning cables and fuses)
I1N (480 V) continuous rms input current (for dimensioning cables and fuses) for drives
with 480 V input voltage
Output
I2N continuous rms current. 50% overload is allowed for one minute every ten
minutes.
I2,1 min/10 min maximum (50% overload) current allowed for one minute every ten minutes
I2max maximum output current. Available for two seconds at start, otherwise as long
as allowed by the drive temperature.
PN typical motor power. The kilowatt ratings apply to most IEC 4-pole motors. The
horsepower ratings apply to most NEMA 4-pole motors. This is also the
maximum load through the Common DC connection and must not be
exceeded.
R0…R4 ACS355 is manufactured in frame sizes R0…R4. Some instructions and other
information that only concern certain frame sizes are marked with the symbol
of the frame size (R0…R4).
 Sizing
Drive sizing is based on the rated motor current and power. To achieve the rated
motor power given in the table, the rated current of the drive must be higher than or
equal to the rated motor current. Also the rated power of the drive must be higher
than or equal to compared to the rated motor power. The power ratings are the same
regardless of the supply voltage within one voltage range.
Note 1: The maximum allowed motor shaft power is limited to 1.5 · PN. If the limit is
exceeded, motor torque and current are automatically restricted. The function
protects the input bridge of the drive against overload.
Note 2: The ratings apply at ambient temperature of 40 °C (104 °F) for I2N.
Note 3: It is important to check that in Common DC systems the power flowing
through the common DC connection does not exceed PN.
376 Technical data
 Derating
I2N: The load capacity decreases if the installation site ambient temperature exceeds
40 °C (104 °F), the altitude exceeds 1000 meters (3300 ft) or the switching frequency
is changed from 4 kHz to 8, 12 or 16 kHz.
Temperature derating, I2N

In the temperature range +40 °C…+50 °C (+104 °F…+122 °F), the rated output
current (I2N) is decreased by 1% for every additional 1 °C (1.8 °F). The output current
is calculated by multiplying the current given in the rating table by the derating factor.
Example: If the ambient temperature is 50 °C (+122 °F), the derating factor is
100% - 1 % · 10 °C = 90% or 0.90. The output current is then 0.90 · I2N.
°C
Altitude derating, I2N
In altitudes 1000…2000 m (3300…6600 ft) above sea level, the derating is 1% for
every 100 m (330 ft).
For 3-phase 200 V drives, the maximum altitude is 3000 m (9800 ft) above sea level.
In altitudes 2000…3000 m (6600…9800 ft), the derating is 2% for every 100 m
(330 ft).
Switching frequency derating, I2N

The drive derates itself automatically when parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL =
1 (ON).
Switching Drive voltage rating
frequency
UN = 200…240 V UN = 380…480 V
4 kHz No derating No derating
8 kHz I2N derated to 90%. I2N derated to 75% for R0 or to 80% for R1…R4.
12 kHz I2N derated to 80%. I2N derated to 50% for R0 or to 65% for R1…R4
and maximum ambient temperature derated to
30 °C (86 °F).
16 kHz I2N derated to 75%. I2N derated to 50% and maximum ambient
temperature derated to 30 °C (86 °F).
When parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL = 2 (ON (LOAD)), the drive controls the
switching frequency towards the selected switching frequency 2606 SWITCHING
FREQ if the drive’s internal temperature allows.
Technical data 377
Power cable sizes and fuses

Cable dimensioning for rated currents (I1N) is shown in the table below together with
the corresponding fuse types for short-circuit protection of the input power cable. The
rated fuse currents given in the table are the maximums for the mentioned fuse
types. If smaller fuse ratings are used, check that the fuse rms current rating is larger
than the rated I1N current given in section Ratings on page 374. If 150% output power
is needed, multiply current I1N by 1.5. See also section Selecting the power cables on
page 41.
Check that the operating time of the fuse is below 0.5 seconds. The operating
time depends on the fuse type, the supply network impedance as well as the cross-
sectional area, material and length of the supply cable. In case the 0.5 seconds
operating time is exceeded with the gG or T fuses, ultra rapid (aR) fuses will in most
cases reduce the operating time to an acceptable level.
Note 1: Larger fuses must not be used when the input power cable is selected
according to this table.
Note 2: Choose the correct fuse size according to the actual input current which
depends on the input line voltage and the input choke selection.
Note 3: Other fuse types can be used if they meet the ratings and the melting curve
of the fuse does not exceed the melting curve of the fuse mentioned in this table.
Type Fuses Size of copper conductor in cablings
ACS355- gG UL Class Supply Motor PE Brake
T or CC (U1, V1, W1) (U2, V2, W2) (BRK+, BRK-)
(600 V)
x = E/U A A mm2 AWG mm2 AWG mm2 AWG mm2 AWG
1-phase UN = 200…240 V (200, 208, 220, 230, 240 V)
01x-02A4-2 10 10 2.5 14 0.75 18 2.5 14 2.5 14
01x-04A7-2 16 20 2.5 14 0.75 18 2.5 14 2.5 14
01x-06A7-2 16/20 1) 25 2.5 10 1.5 14 2.5 10 2.5 12
01x-07A5-2 20/25 1) 30 2.5 10 1.5 14 2.5 10 2.5 12
01x-09A8-2 25/35 1) 35 6 10 2.5 12 6 10 6 12
3-phase UN = 200…240 V (200, 208, 220, 230, 240 V)
03x-02A4-2 10 10 2.5 14 0.75 18 2.5 14 2.5 14
03x-03A5-2 10 10 2.5 14 0.75 18 2.5 14 2.5 14
03x-04A7-2 10 15 2.5 14 0.75 18 2.5 14 2.5 14
03x-06A7-2 16 15 2.5 12 1.5 14 2.5 12 2.5 12
03x-07A5-2 16 15 2.5 12 1.5 14 2.5 12 2.5 12
03x-09A8-2 16 20 2.5 12 2.5 12 2.5 12 2.5 12
03x-13A3-2 25 30 6 10 6 10 6 10 2.5 12
03x-17A6-2 25 35 6 10 6 10 6 10 2.5 12
03x-24A4-2 63 60 10 8 10 8 10 8 6 10
03x-31A0-2 80 80 16 6 16 6 16 6 10 8
03x-46A2-2 100 100 25 2 25 2 16 4 10 8
378 Technical data
Type Fuses Size of copper conductor in cablings

ACS355- gG
UL Class Supply Motor PE Brake
T or CC (U1, V1, W1) (U2, V2, W2) (BRK+, BRK-)
(600 V)
x = E/U A A mm2 AWG mm2 AWG mm2 AWG mm2 AWG
3-phase UN = 380…480 V (380, 400, 415, 440, 460, 480 V)
03x-01A2-4 10 10 2.5 14 0.75 18 2.5 14 2.5 14
03x-01A9-4 10 10 2.5 14 0.75 18 2.5 14 2.5 14
03x-02A4-4 10 10 2.5 14 0.75 18 2.5 14 2.5 14
03x-03A3-4 10 10 2.5 12 0.75 18 2.5 12 2.5 12
03x-04A1-4 16 15 2.5 12 0.75 18 2.5 12 2.5 12
03x-05A6-4 16 15 2.5 12 1.5 14 2.5 12 2.5 12
03x-07A3-4 16 20 2.5 12 1.5 14 2.5 12 2.5 12
03x-08A8-4 20 25 2.5 12 2.5 12 2.5 12 2.5 12
03x-12A5-4 25 30 6 10 6 10 6 10 2.5 12
03x-15A6-4 35 35 6 8 6 8 6 8 2.5 12
03x-23A1-4 50 50 10 8 10 8 10 8 6 10
03x-31A0-4 80 80 16 6 16 6 16 6 10 8
03x-38A0-4 100 100 16 4 16 4 16 4 10 8
03x-44A0-4 100 100 25 4 25 4 16 4 10 8
1)
If 50% overload capacity is needed, use the larger fuse alternative. 00353783.xls L
 Alternate short-circuit protection

The ABB Type E manual motor protectors MS132 & S1-M3-25, MS451-xxE, MS495-
xxE can be used as an alternate to the recommended fuses as a means of branch
circuit protection. This is in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC).
When the correct ABB Type E manual motor protector is selected from the table and
used for branch circuit protection, the drive is suitable for use in a circuit capable of
delivering not more than 65 kA RMS symmetrical amperes at the drive maximum
rated voltage. See the following table for the appropriate ratings.
IP20 open type and IP21 UL Type 1 ACS355 can use ABB type E manual motor
protectors for branch circuit protection. See the MMP rating table for the minimum
enlcosure volume of IP20 open type ACS355 mounted in an enclosure.
Technical data 379
Type Input Frame MMP type E1,2) Min. encl. vol.5)

ACS355- Amps size dm3 cu in
1-phase UN = 200…240 V (200, 208, 220, 230, 240 V)
01x-02A4-2 6.1 R0 MS132-6.3 & S1-M3-253) 18.9 1152
01x-04A7-2 11.0 R1 MS451-16E 18.9 1152
01x-06A7-2 16.0 R1 MS451-20E 18.9 1152
01x-07A5-2 17.0 R2 MS451-20E - -
01x-09A8-2 21.0 R2 MS451-25E - -
3-phase UN = 200…240 V (200, 208, 220, 230, 240 V)4)
03x-02A4-2 4.3 R0 MS132-6.3 & S1-M3-253) 18.9 1152
03x-03A5-2 6.1 R0 MS132-6.3 & S1-M3-253) 18.9 1152
03x-04A7-2 7.6 R1 MS132-10 & S1-M3-253) 18.9 1152
03x-06A7-2 11.8 R1 MS451-16E 18.9 1152
03x-07A5-2 12.0 R1 MS451-16E 18.9 1152
03x-09A8-2 14.3 R2 MS451-16E - -
03x-13A3-2 22.0 R2 MS451-25E - -
03x-17A6-2 25.0 R2 MS451-32E - -
03x-24A4-2 41.0 R3 MS451-45E - -
03x-31A0-2 50.0 R4 MS495-63E - -
03x-46A2-2 69.0 R4 MS495-75E - -
3-phase UN = 380, 400, 415 V4)
03x-01A2-4 2.2 R0 MS132-2.5 & S1-M3-253) 18.9 1152
03x-01A9-4 3.6 R0 MS132-4.0 & S1-M3-253) 18.9 1152
03x-02A4-4 4.1 R1 MS132-6.3 & S1-M3-253) 18.9 1152
03x-03A3-4 6.0 R1 MS132-6.3 & S1-M3-253) 18.9 1152
03x-04A1-4 6.9 R1 MS132-10 & S1-M3-253) 18.9 1152
03x-05A6-4 9.6 R1 MS132-10 & S1-M3-253) 18.9 1152
03x-07A3-4 12.0 R1 MS451-16E 18.9 1152
03x-08A8-4 14.0 R1 MS451-16E 18.9 1152
03x-12A5-4 19.0 R3 MS451-20E - -
03x-15A6-4 22.0 R3 MS451-25E - -
03x-23A1-4 31.0 R3 MS451-32E - -
03x-31A0-4 52.0 R4 MS495-63E - -
03x-38A0-4 61.0 R4 MS495-63E - -
03x-44A0-4 67.0 R4 MS495-75E - -
3-phase UN = 440, 460, 480 V4)
03x-01A2-4 1.8 R0 MS132-2.5 & S1-M3-253) 18.9 1152
03x-01A9-4 3.0 R0 MS132-4.0 & S1-M3-253) 18.9 1152
03x-02A4-4 3.4 R1 MS132-4.0 & S1-M3-253) 18.9 1152
03x-03A3-4 5.0 R1 MS132-6.3 & S1-M3-253) 18.9 1152
03x-04A1-4 5.8 R1 MS132-6.3 & S1-M3-253) 18.9 1152
03x-05A6-4 8.0 R1 MS132-10 & S1-M3-253) 18.9 1152
380 Technical data
Type Input Frame MMP type E1,2) Min. encl. vol.5)

ACS355- Amps size dm3 cu in
03x-07A3-4 9.7 R1 MS132-10 & S1-M3-253) 18.9 1152
03x-08A8-4 11.0 R1 MS451-16E 18.9 1152
03x-12A5-4 16.0 R3 MS451-20E - -
03x-15A6-4 18.0 R3 MS451-20E - -
03x-23A1-4 26.0 R3 MS451-32E - -
03x-31A0-4 43.0 R4 MS451-45E - -
03x-38A0-4 51.0 R4 MS495-63E - -
03x-44A0-4 56.0 R4 MS495-63E - -
3AUA0000173741
1) All manual motor protectors listed are Type E self-protected up to 65 kA. See ABB publication AC1010 for
complete technical data on ABB Type E manual motor protectors.
2) Manual motor protectors may require adjusting the trip limit from the factory setting at or above the drive
input Amps to avoid nuisance tripping. If the manual motor protector is set to the maximum current trip
level and nuisance tripping is occurring, select the next size MMP. (MS132-10 is the highest size in the
MS132 frame size to meet Type E at 65kA; the next size up is MS451-16E.)
3) Requires the use of the S1-M3-25 line side feeder terminal with the manual motor protector to meet Type
E self-protection class.
4) 480Y/277V only
5) For all drives, the enclosure must be sized to accommodate the specific thermal considerations of the
application as well as provide free space for cooling. See section Free space requirements on page 381.
For UL only: The minimum enclosure volume is specified in the UL listing for R0 & R1 frame drives when
applied with the ABB Type E MMP shown in the table. ACS355 drives are intended to be mounted in an
enclosure unless a NEMA 1 kit is added.
Technical data 381
Dimensions, weights and free space requirements

 Dimensions and weights
Frame Dimensions and weights
size IP20 (cabinet) / UL open
H1 H2 H3 W D Weight
mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in kg lb
R0 169 6.65 202 7.95 239 9.41 70 2.76 161 6.34 1.2 2.6
R1 169 6.65 202 7.95 239 9.41 70 2.76 161 6.34 1.4 3.0
R2 169 6.65 202 7.95 239 9.41 105 4.13 165 6.50 1.8 3.9
R3 169 6.65 202 7.95 236 9.29 169 6.65 169 6.65 3.1 6.9
R4 181 7.13 202 7.95 244 9.61 260 10.24 169 6.65 5.2 11.5
00353783.xls L
Frame Dimensions and weights

size IP20 / NEMA 1
H4 H5 W D Weight
mm in mm in mm in mm in kg lb
R0 257 10.12 280 11.02 70 2.76 169 6.65 1.6 3.5
R1 257 10.12 280 11.02 70 2.76 169 6.65 1.8 3.9
R2 257 10.12 282 11.10 105 4.13 169 6.65 2.2 4.8
R3 260 10.24 299 11.77 169 6.65 177 6.97 3.7 8.2
R4 270 10.63 320 12.60 260 10.24 177 6.97 5.8 12.9
00353783.xls L
Symbols
IP20 (cabinet) / UL open
H1 height without fastenings and clamping plate
H2 height with fastenings, without clamping plate
H3 height with fastenings and clamping plate
IP20 / NEMA 1
H4 height with fastenings and connection box
H5 height with fastenings, connection box and hood
Weight is calculated as the measured drive weight + cable clamps + 50 g (for

component tolerances).
 Free space requirements

Frame Free space required
size Above Below On the sides
mm in mm in mm in
R0…R4 75 3 75 3 0 0
00353783.xls L
382 Technical data
Losses, cooling data and noise

 Losses and cooling data
Frame size R0 has natural convection cooling. Frame sizes R1…R4 are provided
with an internal fan. The air flow direction is from bottom to top.
The table below specifies the heat dissipation in the main circuit at nominal load and
in the control circuit with minimum load (I/O and panel not in use) and maximum load
(all digital inputs in the on state and the panel, fieldbus and fan in use). The total heat
dissipation is the sum of the heat dissipation in the main and control circuits.
Type Heat dissipation Air flow
ACS355- Main circuit Control circuit
x = E/U Rated /1N and /2N Min Max
W W W m3/h ft3/min
1-phase UN = 200…240 V (200, 208, 220, 230, 240 V)
01x-02A4-2 25 6.1 22.7 - -
01x-04A7-2 46 9.5 26.4 24 14
01x-06A7-2 71 9.5 26.4 24 14
01x-07A5-2 73 10.5 27.5 21 12
01x-09A8-2 96 10.5 27.5 21 12
3-phase UN = 200…240 V (200, 208, 220, 230, 240 V)
03x-02A4-2 19 6.1 22.7 - -
03x-03A5-2 31 6.1 22.7 - -
03x-04A7-2 38 9.5 26.4 24 14
03x-06A7-2 60 9.5 26.4 24 14
03x-07A5-2 62 9.5 26.4 21 12
03x-09A8-2 83 10.5 27.5 21 12
03x-13A3-2 112 10.5 27.5 52 31
03x-17A6-2 152 10.5 27.5 52 31
03x-24A4- 2 250 16.6 35.4 71 42
03x-31A0-2 270 33.4 57.8 96 57
03x-46A2-2 430 33.4 57.8 96 57
Technical data 383
Type Heat dissipation Air flow

ACS355- Main circuit Control circuit
x = E/U Rated /1N and /2N Min Max
W W W m3/h ft3/min
3-phase UN = 380…480 V (380, 400, 415, 440, 460, 480 V)
03x-01A2-4 11 6.6 24.4 - -
03x-01A9-4 16 6.6 24.4 - -
03x-02A4-4 21 9.8 28.7 13 8
03x-03A3-4 31 9.8 28.7 13 8
03x-04A1-4 40 9.8 28.7 13 8
03x-05A6-4 61 9.8 28.7 19 11
03x-07A3-4 74 14.1 32.7 24 14
03x-08A8-4 94 14.1 32.7 24 14
03x-12A5-4 130 12.0 31.2 52 31
03x-15A6-4 173 12.0 31.2 52 31
03x-23A1-4 266 16.6 35.4 71 42
03x-31A0-4 350 33.4 57.8 96 57
03x-38A0-4 440 33.4 57.8 96 57
03x-44A0-4 530 33.4 57.8 96 57
00353783.xls L
 Noise
Frame Noise level
size dBA
R0 <30
R1 50…62
R2 50…62
R3 50…62
R4 <62
00353783.xls L
384 Technical data
Terminal and lead-through data for the power cables

Frame Max. cable U1, V1, W1, U2, V2, W2, PE
size diameter for NEMA 1 BRK+ and BRK-
U1, V1, W1, BRK+ and Terminal size Tightening Clamp size Tightening
U2, V2, W2 BRK- torque torque
mm in mm in mm2 AWG N·m lbf·in mm2 AWG N·m lbf·in
R0 16 0.63 16 0.63 4.0/6.0 10 0.8 7 25 3 1.2 11
R1 16 0.63 16 0.63 4.0/6.0 10 0.8 7 25 3 1.2 11
R2 16 0.63 16 0.63 4.0/6.0 10 0.8 7 25 3 1.2 11
R3 29 1.14 16 0.63 10.0/16.0 6 1.7 15 25 3 1.2 11
R4 35 1.38 29 1.14 25.0/35.0 2 2.5 22 25 3 1.2 11
00353783.xls L
Terminal and lead-through data for the control cables

Conductor size Tightening torque
Min/Max Min/Max
mm2 AWG N·m lbf·in
0.25/1.5 24/16 0.5 4.4
Technical data 385
Electric power network specification

Voltage (U1) 200/208/220/230/240 V AC 1-phase for 200 V AC drives
200/208/220/230/240 V AC 3-phase for 200 V AC drives
380/400/415/440/460/480 V AC 3-phase for 400 V AC drives
±10% variation from converter nominal voltage is allowed as default.
Short-circuit capacity Maximum allowed prospective short-circuit current at the input power
connection as defined in IEC 61439-1:2009 and UL 508C is 100 kA.
The drive is suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering not
more than 100 kA rms symmetrical amperes at the drive maximum
rated voltage.
Frequency 50/60 Hz ± 5%, maximum rate of change 17%/s
Imbalance Max. ±3% of nominal phase-to-phase input voltage
Motor connection data

Motor type Asynchronous induction motor or permanent
magnet synchronous motor
Voltage (U2) 0 to U1, 3-phase symmetrical, Umax at the field weakening point
Short-circuit protection The motor output is short-circuit proof by IEC 61800-5-1 and
(IEC 61800-5-1, UL 508C.
UL 508C)
Frequency 0…599 Hz
Frequency resolution 0.01 Hz
Current See section Ratings on page 374.
Power limit 1.5 · PN
Field weakening point 10…599 Hz
Switching frequency 4, 8, 12 or 16 kHz (in scalar control)
Speed control See section Speed control performance figures on page 145.
Torque control See section Torque control performance figures on page 146.
386 Technical data
Maximum Operational functionality and motor cable length

recommended The drive is designed to operate with optimum performance with the
motor cable length following maximum motor cable lengths. The motor cable lengths may
be extended with output chokes as shown in the table.
Frame Maximum motor cable length

size m ft
Standard drive, without external options
R0 30 100
R1…R4 50 165
With external output chokes
R0 60 195
R1…R4 100 330
Note: In multimotor systems, the calculated sum of all motor cable
lengths must not exceed the maximum motor cable length given in
the table.
EMC compatibility and motor cable length

To comply with the European EMC Directive (standard
IEC/EN 61800-3), use the following maximum motor cable lengths
for 4 kHz switching frequency.
All frame Maximum motor cable length, 4 kHz

sizes m ft
With internal EMC filter
Second environment 30 100
(category C3 1))
With optional external EMC filter
Second environment 30 (at least) 2) 100 (at least) 2)
(category C3 1))
First environment 30 (at least) 2) 100 (at least) 2)
(category C2 1))
First environment 10 (at least) 2) 30 (at least) 2)
(category C1 1))
1)
See the terms in section Definitions on page 391.
2)
Maximum motor cable length is determined by the drive’s
operational factors. Contact your local ABB representative for the
Note 1: The internal EMC filter must be disconnected by removing
the EMC screw (see the figure on page 50) while using the low
leakage current EMC filter (LRFI-XX).
Note 2: Radiated emissions are according to C2 with and without an
external EMC filter.
Note 3: Category C1 with conducted emissions only. Radiated
emissions are not compatible when measured with standard
emission measurement setup and should be checked or measured
on cabinet and machine installations case by case.
Technical data 387
Control connection data

Analog inputs Voltage signal, unipolar 0 (2)…10 V, Rin = 675 kohm
X1A: 2 and 5 bipolar -10…10 V, Rin = 675 kohm
Current signal, unipolar 0 (4)…20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm
(AI1 and AI2)
bipolar -20…20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm
Potentiometer reference
value (X1A: 4) 10 V ± 1%, max. 10 mA, R < 10 kohm
Resolution 0.1%
Accuracy ±2%
Analog output 0 (4)…20 mA, load < 500 ohm
X1A: 7
(AO)
Auxiliary voltage 24 V DC ± 10%, max. 200 mA
X1A: 9
Digital inputs Voltage 12…24 V DC with internal or external
X1A: 12…16 supply. Max. voltage for digital inputs
(DI1…DI5) 30 V DC.
Type PNP and NPN
Input impedance,
X1A: 12…15 Rin = 2 kohm
X1A: 16 Rin = 4 kohm
Frequency input X1A: 16 can be used either as a digital or as a frequency input.
X1A: 16 Frequency Pulse train 0…10 kHz with 50% duty
(DI5) cycle. 0…16 kHz between two
ACS355 drives.
Relay output Type NO + NC
X1B: 17…19 Max. switching voltage 250 V AC / 30 V DC
(RO 1) Max. switching current 0.5 A / 30 V DC; 5 A / 230 V AC
Max. continuous current 2 A rms
Digital output Type Transistor output PNP
X1B: 20…21 Max. switching voltage 30 V DC
Max. switching current 100 mA / 30 V DC, short-circuit
(DO) protected
Frequency 10 Hz …16 kHz
Resolution 1 Hz
Accuracy 0.2%
Frequency output X1A: 20…21 can be used either as a digital or as a frequency output.
X1B: 20…21
(FO)
STO interface See Appendix: Safe torque off (STO) on page 417.
X1C: 23…26
Clearance and creepage distance

Clearance and creepage distance between I/O connections and the main circuit is
5.5 mm (0.20 in). This meets the requirement for the reinforced insulation of
overvoltage category 3 when the installation altitude is below 2000 m (6562 ft). (EC
61800-5-1).
388 Technical data
Brake resistor connection

Short-circuit protection The brake resistor output is conditionally short-circuit proof by
(IEC 61800-5-1, IEC/EN 61800-5-1 and UL 508C. For correct fuse selection, contact
IEC 60439-1, UL 508C) your local ABB representative. Rated conditional short-circuit current
as defined in IEC 60439-1 and the Short-circuit test current by
UL 508C is 100 kA.
Common DC connection
Maximum power through common DC connection is equal to the
drive nominal power. See ACS355 Common DC application guide
(3AUA0000070130 [English]).
Efficiency
Approximately 95 to 98% at nominal power level, depending on the
drive size and options.
Degrees of protection
IP20 (cabinet installation) / UL open: Standard enclosure. The drive
must be installed in a cabinet to fulfil the requirements for shielding
from contact.
IP20 / NEMA 1: Achieved with an option kit (MUL1-R1, MUL1-R3 or
MUL1-R4) including a hood and a connection box.
Technical data 389
Ambient conditions
Environmental limits for the drive are given below. The drive is to be used in a heated indoor
controlled environment.
Operation Storage Transportation
installed for in the protective in the protective
stationary use package package
Installation site altitude 0…2000 m (6600 ft) - -
above sea level
(above 1000 m
[3300 ft], see section
Derating on page
376)
Air temperature -10 … +50 °C -40 … +70 °C ±2% -40 … +70 °C ±2%
(14 … 122 °F). (-40 … +158 °F ±2%) (-40 … +158 °F ±2%)
No frost allowed. See
section Derating on
page 376.
Relative humidity 0 … 95% Max. 95% Max. 95%
No condensation allowed. Maximum allowed relative humidity is
60% in the presence of corrosive gases.
Contamination levels No conductive dust allowed.
(IEC 60721-3-3, According to According to According to
IEC 60721-3-2, IEC 60721-3-3, IEC 60721-3-1, IEC 60721-3-2,
IEC 60721-3-1) chemical gases: chemical gases: chemical gases:
Class 3C2 Class 1C2 Class 2C2
solid particles: solid particles: solid particles:
Class 3S2. Class 1S2 Class 2S2
Note: The drive must
be installed in clean
air according to
enclosure
classification.
Note: Cooling air
must be clean, free
from corrosive
materials and
electrically conductive
dust.
Sinusoidal vibration Tested according to - -
(IEC 60721-3-3) IEC 60721-3-3,
mechanical
conditions: Class 3M4
2…9 Hz, 3.0 mm
(0.12 in)
9…200 Hz, 10 m/s2
(33 ft/s2)
390 Technical data
Shock Not allowed According to ISTA 1A. According to ISTA 1A.

(IEC 60068-2-27, Max. 100 m/s2 Max. 100 m/s2
ISTA 1A) (330 ft/s2), 11 ms. (330 ft/s2), 11 ms.
Free fall Not allowed 76 cm (30 in) 76 cm (30 in)
Materials
Drive enclosure • PC/ABS 2 mm, PC+10%GF 2.5…3 mm and PA66+25%GF
1.5 mm, all in color NCS 1502-Y (RAL 9002 / PMS 420 C)
• hot-dip zinc coated steel sheet 1.5 mm, thickness of coating
20 micrometers
• extruded aluminum AlSi.
Package Corrugated cardboard.
Disposal The drive contains raw materials that should be recycled to preserve
energy and natural resources. The package materials are
environmentally compatible and recyclable. All metal parts can be
recycled. The plastic parts can either be recycled or burned under
controlled circumstances, according to local regulations. Most
recyclable parts are marked with recycling marks.
If recycling is not feasible, all parts excluding electrolytic capacitors
and printed circuit boards can be landfilled. The DC capacitors
contain electrolyte, which is classified as hazardous waste within the
EU. They must be removed and handled according to local
regulations.
For further information on environmental aspects and more detailed
recycling instructions, please contact your local ABB distributor.
Applicable standards
The drive complies with the following standards:
• EN ISO 13849-1: Safety of machinery - Safety related parts of control systems - Part 1:
2008 general principles for design
• IEC/EN 60204-1: Safety of machinery. Electrical equipment of machines. Part 1:
2006 General requirements. Provisions for compliance: The final
assembler of the machine is responsible for installing
- an emergency-stop device
- a supply disconnecting device.
• IEC/EN 62061: Safety of machinery – Functional safety of safety-related electrical,
2005 electronic and programmable electronic control systems
• IEC/EN 61800-3: Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems. Part 3: EMC
2004 requirements and specific test methods
• IEC/EN 61800-5-1: Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems – Part 5-1: Safety
2007 requirements – Electrical, thermal and energy
• IEC/EN 61800-5-2: Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems – Part 5-2: Safety
2007 requirements. Functional.
• UL 508C UL Standard for Safety, Power Conversion Equipment, third edition
Technical data 391
CE marking
The CE mark is attached to the drive to verify that the drive follows the provisions of
the European Low Voltage and EMC Directives.
 Compliance with the European EMC Directive

The EMC Directive defines the requirements for immunity and emissions of electrical
equipment used within the European Union. The EMC product standard
(EN 61800-3:2004) covers requirements stated for drives. See section Compliance
with EN 61800-3:2004 on page 391.
Compliance with EN 61800-3:2004

 Definitions
EMC stands for Electromagnetic Compatibility. It is the ability of electrical/electronic
equipment to operate without problems within an electromagnetic environment.
Likewise, the equipment must not disturb or interfere with any other product or
system within its locality.
First environment includes establishments connected to a low-voltage network which
supplies buildings used for domestic purposes.
Second environment includes establishments connected to a network not directly
supplying domestic premises.
Drive of category C1: drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V, intended for use in the
first environment.
Drive of category C2: drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V and intended to be
installed and commissioned only by a professional when used in the first
environment.
Note: A professional is a person or organization having necessary skills in installing
and/or commissioning power drive systems, including their EMC aspects.
Category C2 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier class first environment
restricted distribution. EMC standard IEC/EN 61800-3 does not any more restrict the
distribution of the drive, but the using, installation and commissioning are defined.
Drive of category C3: drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V, intended for use in the
second environment and not intended for use in the first environment.
Category C3 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier class second
environment unrestricted distribution.
392 Technical data
 Category C1
The emission limits are complied with the following provisions:
1. The optional EMC filter is selected according to the ABB documentation and
installed as specified in the EMC filter manual.
2. The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual.
3. The drive is installed according to the instructions given in this manual.
4. For the maximum motor cable length with 4 kHz switching frequency, see page
386.
WARNING! In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio inference, in
which case supplementary mitigation measures may be required.
 Category C2
1. The optional EMC filter is selected according to the ABB documentation and
installed as specified in the EMC filter manual.
4. For the maximum motor cable length with 4 kHz switching frequency, see page
386.
WARNING! In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio inference, in
which case supplementary mitigation measures may be required.
 Category C3
The immunity performance of the drive complies with the demands of
IEC/EN 61800-3, second environment (see page 391 for IEC/EN 61800-3
definitions).
1. The internal EMC filter is connected (the metal screw at EMC is in place) or the
optional EMC filter is installed.
4. With the internal EMC filter: motor cable length 30 m (100 ft) with 4 kHz switching
frequency. For the maximum motor cable length with an optional external EMC
filter, see page 386.
WARNING! A drive of category C3 is not intended to be used on a low-voltage public
network which supplies domestic premises. Radio frequency interference is expected
if the drive is used on such a network.
Technical data 393
Note: It is not allowed to install a drive with the internal EMC filter connected on IT
(ungrounded) systems. The supply network becomes connected to ground potential
through the EMC filter capacitors which may cause danger or damage the drive.
Note: It is not allowed to install a drive with the internal EMC filter connected on a
corner-grounded TN system as this would damage the drive.
UL marking
See the type designation label for the valid markings of your drive.
The UL mark is attached to the drive to verify that it meets UL requirements.
 UL checklist
Input power connection – See section Electric power network specification on page
385.
Disconnecting device (disconnecting means) – See Selecting the supply
disconnecting device (disconnecting means) on page 40.
Ambient conditions – The drives are to be used in a heated indoor controlled
environment. See section Ambient conditions on page 389 for specific limits.
Input cable fuses – For installation in the United States, branch circuit protection
must be provided in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC) and any
applicable local codes. To fulfil this requirement, use the UL classified fuses given in
section Power cable sizes and fuses on page 377.
For installation in Canada, branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance
with Canadian Electrical Code and any applicable provincial codes. To fulfil this
requirement, use the UL classified fuses given in section Power cable sizes and
fuses on page 377.
Power cable selection – See section Selecting the power cables on page 41.
Power cable connections – For the connection diagram and tightening torques, see
section Connecting the power cables on page 51.
Overload protection – The drive provides overload protection in accordance with
the National Electrical Code (US).
Braking – The drive has an internal brake chopper. When applied with appropriately
sized brake resistors, the brake chopper will allow the drive to dissipate regenerative
energy (normally associated with quickly decelerating a motor). Brake resistor
selection is discussed in Appendix: Resistor braking on page 405.
394 Technical data
C-Tick marking
See the type designation label for the valid markings of your drive.
C-Tick marking is required in Australia and New Zealand. A C-Tick mark is attached
to the drive to verify compliance with the relevant standard (IEC 61800-3:2004 –
Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems – Part 3: EMC product standard
including specific test methods), mandated by the Trans-Tasman Electromagnetic
Compatibility Scheme.
The Trans-Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme (EMCS) was introduced
by the Australian Communication Authority (ACA) and the Radio Spectrum
Management Group (RSM) of the New Zealand Ministry of Economic Development
(NZMED) in November 2001. The aim of the scheme is to protect the radio frequency
spectrum by introducing technical limits for emission from electrical/electronic
products.
For fulfilling the requirements of the standard, see section Compliance with
EN 61800-3:2004 on page 391.
TÜV NORD Safety Approved mark

The presence of the TÜV NORD Safety Approved mark verifies that the drive has
been evaluated and certified by TÜV NORD according to the following standards for
the realization of the Safe torque off function (STO): IEC 61508-1:2010, IEC 61508-
2:2010; IEC/EN 62061:2005 and EN ISO 13849-1:2008. See Appendix: Safe torque
off (STO).
RoHS marking
The RoHS mark is attached to the drive to verify that the drive follows the provisions
of the European RoHS Directive. RoHS = the restriction of the use of certain
hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.
Compliance with the Machinery Directive

The drive is a machinery component that can be integrated into a wide range of
machinery categories as specified in European Commission’s Guide to application of
the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC 2nd Edition – June 2010.
Dimension drawings 395
18
Dimension drawings
This chapter contains the dimension drawings of the drive.
Dimension drawings of the ACS355 are shown below. The dimensions are given in
millimeters and [inches].
396 Dimension drawings
Frame sizes R0 and R1, IP20 (cabinet installation) / UL open

R1 and R0 are identical except for the fan at the top of R1.
Frame sizes R0 and R1, IP20 (cabinet installation) / UL open

Extension modules add 26 mm (1.02 in) to the depth measure.
1)
3AUA0000067784-A
1)
Frame sizes R0 and R1, IP20 / NEMA 1

R1 and R0 are identical except for the fan at the top of R1.
Frame sizes R0 and R1, IP20 / NEMA 1

1)
3AUA0000067785-B
1)
1)
Frame size R2, IP20 (cabinet installation) / UL open
1)
3AUA0000067782-A Frame size R2, IP20 (cabinet installation) / UL open
1)
Frame size R2, IP20 / NEMA 1
1)
3AUA0000067783-B Frame size R2, IP20 / NEMA 1

1)
1)
1)
1) Extension modules add 26 mm (1.02 in) to the depth measure.

3AUA0000067787-A Frame size R3, IP20 / NEMA 1
1)
1)
1)
1) Extension modules add 26 mm (1.02 in) to the depth measure.

3AUA0000067883-A Frame size R4, IP20 / NEMA 1
Appendix: Resistor braking 405
19
Appendix: Resistor braking
The chapter tells how to select the brake resistor and cables, protect the system,
connect the brake resistor and enable resistor braking.
Planning the braking system

 Selecting the brake resistor
ACS355 drives have an internal brake chopper as standard equipment. The brake
resistor is selected using the table and equations presented in this section.
1. Determine the required maximum braking power PRmax for the application. PRmax
must be smaller than PBRmax given in the table on page 406 for the used drive
type.
2. Calculate resistance R with Equation 1.
3. Calculate energy ERpulse with Equation 2.
4. Select the resistor so that the following conditions are met:
• The rated power of the resistor must be greater than or equal to PRmax.
• Resistance R must be between Rmin and Rmax given in the table for the used
drive type.
• The resistor must be able to dissipate energy ERpulse during the braking
cycle T.
406 Appendix: Resistor braking
Equations for selecting the resistor:

150000 ton
Eq. 1. UN = 200…240 V: R = PRmax
PRmax
450000 PRave
UN = 380…415 V: R =
PRmax T
615000
UN = 415…480 V: R =
PRmax
Eq. 2. ERpulse = PRmax · ton
ton
Eq. 3. PRave = PRmax · For conversion, use 1 hp = 746 W.
T
where
R = selected brake resistor value (ohm)
PRmax = maximum power during the braking cycle (W)
PRave = average power during the braking cycle (W)
ERpulse = energy conducted into the resistor during a single braking pulse (J)
ton = length of the braking pulse (s)
T = length of the braking cycle (s).
Resistor types shown in the table are pre-dimensioned resistors using the maximum
braking power with cyclic braking shown in the table. Resistors are available from
ABB. Information is subject to change without further notice.
Type Rmin Rmax PBRmax Selection table by resistor type
ACS355- CBR-V / CBT-H 2) Braking time 3)
1)
x = E/U ohm ohm kW hp 160 210 260 460 660 560 s
1-phase UN = 200…240 V (200, 208, 220, 230, 240 V)
01x-02A4-2 70 390 0.37 0.5 90
01x-04A7-2 40 200 0.75 1 45
01x-06A7-2 40 130 1.1 1.5 28
01x-07A5-2 30 100 1.5 2 19
01x-09A8-2 30 70 2.2 3 14
3-phase UN = 200…240 V (200, 208, 220, 230, 240 V)
03x-02A4-2 70 390 0.37 0.5 90
03x-03A5-2 70 260 0.55 0.75 60
03x-04A7-2 40 200 0.75 1 42
03x-06A7-2 40 130 1.1 1.5 29
03x-07A5-2 30 100 1.5 2 19
03x-09A8-2 30 70 2.2 3 14
03x-13A3-2 30 50 3.0 4 16
03x-17A6-2 30 40 4.0 5 12
03x-24A4- 2 18 25 5.5 7.5 45
03x-31A0-2 7 19 7.5 10 35
03x-46A2-2 7 13 11.0 15 23
Type Rmin Rmax PBRmax Selection table by resistor type

ACS355- CBR-V / CBT-H 2) Braking time 3)
1)
x = E/U ohm ohm kW hp 160 210 260 460 660 560 s
3-phase UN = 380…480 V (380, 400, 415, 440, 460, 480 V)
03x-01A2-4 200 1180 0.37 0.5 90
03x-01A9-4 175 800 0.55 0.75 90
03x-02A4-4 165 590 0.75 1 60
03x-03A3-4 150 400 1.1 1.5 37
03x-04A1-4 130 300 1.5 2 27
03x-05A6-4 100 200 2.2 3 17
03x-07A3-4 70 150 3.0 4 29
03x-08A8-4 70 110 4.0 5 20
03x-12A5-4 40 80 5.5 7.5 15
03x-15A6-4 40 60 7.5 10 10
03x-23A1-4 30 40 11 15 10
03x-31A0-4 16 29 15 20 16
03x-38A0-4 13 23 18.5 25 13
03x-44A0-4 13 19 22.0 30 10
1) E =EMC filter connected (metal EMC filter screw installed), 00353783.xls K
U=EMC filter disconnected (plastic EMC filter screw installed), US
parametrization.
2)
CBR-V / CBT-H resistor types available in selected countries.
3)
Braking time = maximum allowed braking time in seconds at PBRmax
every 120 seconds, at 40 °C (104 °F) ambient temperature.
Symbols
Rmin = minimum allowed brake resistor that can be connected to the brake chopper
Rmax = maximum allowed brake resistor that allows PBRmax
PBRmax = maximum braking capacity of the drive, must exceed the desired braking power.
Ratings by resistor type CBR-V CBR-V CBR-V CBR-V CBR-V CBT-H

160 210 260 460 660 560
Nominal power (W) 280 360 450 790 1130 2200
Resistance (ohm) 70 200 40 80 33 18
WARNING! Never use a brake resistor with a resistance below the minimum
value specified for the particular drive. The drive and the internal chopper are
not able to handle the overcurrent caused by the low resistance.
 Selecting the brake resistor cables

Use a shielded cable with the conductor size specified in section Power cable sizes
and fuses on page 377. The maximum length of the resistor cable(s) is 5 m (16 ft).
 Placing the brake resistor

Install all resistors in a place where they will cool.
WARNING! The materials near the brake resistor must be non-flammable. The
surface temperature of the resistor is high. Air flowing from the resistor is of
hundreds of degrees Celsius. Protect the resistor against contact.
 Protecting the system in brake circuit fault situations

Protecting the system in cable and brake resistor short-circuit situations
For short-circuit protection of the brake resistor connection, see Brake resistor
connection on page 388. Alternatively, a two-conductor shielded cable with the same
cross-sectional area can be used.
Protecting the system in brake resistor overheating situations

The following setup is essential for safety – it interrupts the main supply in fault
situations involving chopper shorts:
• Equip the drive with a main contactor.
• Wire the contactor so that it opens if the resistor thermal switch opens (an
overheated resistor opens the contactor).
Below is a simple wiring diagram example.
L1 L2 L3
Fuses
Q Thermal switch of the resistor
1 3 5
K1
2 4 6
ACS355
U1 V1 W1
Electrical installation
For the brake resistor connections, see the power connection diagram of the drive on
page 51.
Start-up
Note: When the brake resistor is used for the first time, it is possible that some smoke
appears as the protective oil or lacquer on the resistor burns off. Therefore it is
important to have adequate ventilation when the brake resistor is used for the first
time.
To enable resistor braking, switch off the drive’s overvoltage control by setting
parameter 2005 OVERVOLT CTRL to 0 (DISABLE). If parameter 2005 OVERVOLT
CTRL is set to 2 (EN WITH BRCH) both braking chopper and overvoltage controller
are enabled so that the braking chopper capability is used to its maximum and the
overvoltage controller is activated above that.
Appendix: Extension modules 411
20
Appendix: Extension
modules
The appendix describes common features and mechanical installation of the optional
extension modules for the ACS355: MPOW-01 auxiliary power extension module,
MTAC-01 pulse encoder interface module and MREL-01 output relay module.
The appendix also describes specific features and electrical installation for the
MPOW-01; for information on the MTAC-01 and MREL-01, refer to the corresponding
user’s manual.
Extension modules
 Description
Extension modules have similar enclosures and they are mounted between the
control panel and the drive. Therefore, only one extension module can be used for a
drive. ACS355 IP66/67 / UL Type 4X drives are not compatible with extension
modules due to space restrictions.
The following optional extension modules are available for the ACS355. The drive
automatically identifies the module (parameter 0181 EXTENSION shows the value),
which is ready for use after the installation and power-up.
• MTAC-01 pulse encoder interface module
• MREL-01 output relay module
• MPOW-01 auxiliary power extension module.
412 Appendix: Extension modules
Generic extension module layout
Grounding stand-off
Panel port adapter
 Installation
Checking the delivery
The option package contains:
• extension module
• grounding stand-off with an M3 × 12 screw
• panel port adapter (fixed to the MPOW-01 module at the factory).
Installing the extension module
WARNING! Follow the safety instructions given in chapter Safety on page 17.
To install the extension module:

1. If not already off, remove input power from the drive.
2. Remove the control panel or panel cover: remove the terminal cover by
simultaneously pushing the recess and sliding the cover off the frame.
3. Remove the grounding screw in the top left corner of the drive’s control panel slot
and install the grounding stand-off in its place.
4. For the MREL-01 and MTAC-01, ensure that the panel port adapter is attached to
either the panel port of the drive or the mate part of the extension module. The
adapter of the MPOW-01 is already fixed to the extension module at the factory.
5. Gently and firmly install the extension module to the drive’s panel slot directly from
the front.
Note: The signal and power connections to the drive are automatically made through
a 6-pin connector.
6. Ground the extension module by inserting the screw removed from the drive in
the top left corner of the extension module. Tighten the screw using a torque of
0.8 N·m (7 lbf·in).
Note: Correct insertion and tightening of the screw is essential for fulfilling the EMC
requirements and proper operation of the extension module.
7. Install the control panel or panel cover on the extension module.
8. Electrical installation is module-specific. For MPOW-01, see section Electrical
installation on page 415. For MTAC-01, see MTAC-01 pulse encoder interface
module user’s manual (3AFE68591091 [English]), and for MREL-01, see
MREL-01 output relay module user’s manual (3AUA0000035957 [English]).
3
4
5
 Technical data
Dimensions
Extension module dimensions are shown in the figure below.
64 [2.52]
70 [2.77]
45 [1.79]
118 [4.63]
Generic extension module specifications

• Enclosure degree of protection: IP20
• All materials are UL/CSA-approved.
• When used with ACS355 drives, the extension modules comply with EMC
standard EN/IEC 61800-3:2004 for electromagnetic compatibility and
EN/IEC 61800-5-1:2005 for electrical safety requirements.
MTAC-01 pulse encoder interface module

See MTAC-01 pulse encoder interface module user’s manual (3AFE68591091
[English]) delivered with this option.
MREL-01 output relay module

See MREL-01 output relay module user’s manual (3AUA0000035957 [English])
delivered with this option.
MPOW-01 auxiliary power extension module

 Description
The MPOW-01 auxiliary power extension module is used in installations where the
drive's control part is required to be powered during network failures and
maintenance interruptions. The MPOW-01 provides auxiliary voltages to the control
panel, fieldbus and I/O.
Note: If you change any of the drive parameters when the drive is powered
through the MPOW-01, you have to force parameter saving with parameter 1607
PARAM SAVE by setting the value to (1) SAVE…; otherwise all changed data
will be lost.
 Electrical installation
Wiring
• Use 0.5…1.5 mm2 (20…16 AWG) shielded cable.
• Connect the control wires according to the diagram in section Terminal
designations below. Use a tightening torque of 0.8 N·m (7 lbf·in).
Terminal designations
The diagram below shows the MPOW-01 terminals and how the MPOW-01 module is
connected to the external power supply and how the modules are daisy chained.
External SCR MPOW-01

power supply SCR
+ + +24 V DC or 24 V AC ± 10%
GND - Terminal SCR is internally connected
SCR to the analog ground (AGND) of the
drive.
All terminals are connected together

+ inside the module allowing daisy
- chaining of the signals.
SCR
SCR
Next
MPOW-01
 Technical data
Specifications
• Input voltage: +24 V DC or 24 V AC ± 10%
• Maximum load 1200 mA rms
• Power losses with maximum load 6 W
• Designed lifetime of the MPOW-01 module is 50 000 hours in the specified
ambient conditions of the drive (see section Ambient conditions on page 389).
Appendix: Safe torque off (STO) 417
21
Appendix: Safe torque off
(STO)
What this appendix contains
The appendix describes the Safe torque off (STO) function of the drive and gives
instructions for its use.
Description
The Safe torque off function can be used, for example, to construct safety or
supervision circuits that stop the drive in case of danger. Another possible application
is a prevention of unexpected start-up switch that enables short-time maintenance
operations like cleaning or work on non-electrical parts of the machinery without
switching off the power supply to the drive.
Note: The Safe torque off function does not disconnect the voltage from the drive,
see the warning on page 424.
When activated, the Safe torque off function disables the control voltage of the power
semiconductors of the drive output stage (A, see diagrams on page 419), thus
preventing the drive from generating the torque required to rotate the motor. If the
motor is running when Safe torque off is activated, it coasts to a stop.
The Safe torque off function has a redundant architecture, that is, both channels must
be used in the safety function implementation. The safety data given in this manual is
calculated for redundant use, and does not apply if both channels are not used.
418 Appendix: Safe torque off (STO)
The Safe torque off function of the drive complies with these standards:
Standard Name
EN 60204-1:2005 + Safety of machinery – Electrical equipment of machines – Part 1:
A1:2008 General requirements
IEC 61326-3-1:2008 Electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use –
EMC requirements – Part 3-1: Immunity requirements for safety-
related systems and for equipment intended to perform safety-
related functions (functional safety) – General industrial
applications
IEC 61508-1:2010 Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic
safety-related systems – Part 1: General requirements
IEC 61508-2:2010 Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic
safety-related systems – Part 2: Requirements for
electrical/electronic/programmable electronic safety-related
systems
IEC 61511:2003 Functional safety – Safety instrumented systems for the process
industry sector
IEC/EN 61800-5-2:2007 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems –
Part 5-2: Safety requirements – Functional
IEC/EN 62061:2005 + Safety of machinery – Functional safety of safety-related electrical,
A1:2013 electronic and programmable electronic control systems
EN ISO 13849-1:2008 + Safety of machinery – Safety-related parts of control systems –
AC:2009 Part 1: General principles for design
EN ISO 13849-2:2012 Safety of machinery – Safety-related parts of control systems – Part
2: Validation
The Safe torque off function also corresponds to Prevention of unexpected start-up
as specified by EN 1037:1995 + A1:2008 and Uncontrolled stop (stop category 0) as
specified in EN 60204-1:2006 + AC:2010.
 Compliance with the European Machinery Directive

See section Compliance with the Machinery Directive on page 394.
Connection principle
 Connection with internal +24 V DC power supply
Control unit Drive
K STO
X1C:1 OUT1
+ 24 V DC
X1C:2 OUT2
+ 24 V DC
X1C:3 IN1
X1C:4 IN2 UDC+
T1/U,
Control logic
A T2/V,
T3/W
UDC-
 Connection with external +24 V DC power supply
24 V DC Drive
- + Control unit
STO
K X1C:1 OUT1
+ 24 V DC
X1C:2 OUT2
+ 24 V DC
X1C:3 IN1
X1C:4 IN2 UDC+
T1/U,
Control logic
A T2/V,
T3/W
X1A:3/6/8/10
GND
UDC-
Wiring examples
An example of a Safe torque off wiring with internal +24 V DC power supply is shown
below.
ACS355 Safe PLC
OUT
X1C: OUT1
X1C: OUT2
13 23 31 Y1 Y2
Safety relay
14 24 32 A1 A2
X1C:3 IN1
X1C:4 IN2 GND
X1A:SCR
An example of a Safe torque off wiring with external +24 V DC power supply is shown
below.
ACS355 +24 V DC external Safe PLC

power supply
- +
OUT
X1A:GND 13 23 31 Y1 Y2
Safety relay
X1C:1 OUT1
X1C:2 OUT2
14 24 32 A1 A2
X1C:3 IN1
X1C:4 IN2 GND
X1A:SCR
For information on the specifications of the STO input, see section Control connection
data (page 385).
 Activation switch
In the wiring diagram above (page 419), the activation switch has the designation (K).
This represents a component such as a manually operated switch, an emergency
stop push button switch, or the contacts of a safety relay or safety PLC.
• If a manually operated activation switch is used, the switch must be of a type that
can be locked out to the open position.
• Inputs IN1 and IN2 must open/close within 200 ms of each other.
 Cable types and lengths

• Double-shielded twisted-pair cable is recommended.
• Maximum cable length 300 m (984 ft) between activation switch (K) and drive
control unit.
Note: A short-circuit in the wiring between the switch and an STO terminal causes a
dangerous fault and therefore it is recommended to use a safety relay (including
wiring diagnostics), or a wiring method (shield grounding, channel separation) which
reduces or eliminates the risk caused by the short-circuit.
Note: The voltage at the INx terminals of each drive must be at least 13 V DC to be
interpreted as “1”.
 Grounding of protective shields

• Ground the shield in the cabling between the activation switch and the control
board at the control board.
• Ground the shield in the cabling between two control boards at one control board
only.
Operation principle
1. The Safe torque off activates (the activation switch is opened, or safety relay
contacts open).
2. The STO inputs IN1 and IN2 on the drive control board de-energize.
3. The STO cuts off the control voltage from the drive IGBTs.
4. The control program generates an indication as defined by parameter 3025 STO
OPERATION.
The parameter selects which indications are given when one or both Safe torque
off (STO) signals are switched off or lost. The indications also depend on whether
the drive is running or stopped when this occurs.
Note: This parameter does not affect the operation of the STO function itself. The
STO function will operate regardless of the setting of this parameter: a running
drive will stop upon removal of one or both STO signals, and will not start until
both STO signals are restored and all faults reset.
Note: The loss of only one STO signal always generates a fault as it is interpreted
as a malfunction of STO hardware or wiring.
5. Motor coasts to a stop (if running). The drive cannot restart while the activation
switch or safety relay contacts are open. After the contacts close, a new start
command is required to start the drive.
Start-up including acceptance test

To ensure the safe operation of a safety function, validation is required. The final
assembler of the machine must validate the function by performing an acceptance
test. The acceptance test must be performed
• at initial start-up of the safety function
• after any changes related to the safety function (circuit boards, wiring,
components, settings, etc.)
• after any maintenance work related to the safety function.
 Competence
The acceptance test of the safety function must be carried out by a competent person
with adequate expertise and knowledge of the safety function as well as functional
safety, as required by IEC 61508-1 clause 6. The test procedures and report must be
documented and signed by this person.
 Acceptance test reports

You must store the signed acceptance test reports in the logbook of the machine. The
report must include documentation of start-up activities and test results, references to
failure reports and resolution of failures. You must store any new acceptance tests
performed due to changes or maintenance in the logbook of the machine.
 Acceptance test procedure

After wiring the Safe torque off function, validate its operation as follows.
Action
WARNING! Follow the instructions in chapter Safety, page 17. Ignoring the
instructions can cause physical injury or death, or damage to the
equipment.
Ensure that the drive can be run and stopped freely during start-up.
Stop the drive (if running), switch the input power off and isolate the drive from the
power line by a disconnector.
Check the Safe torque off circuit connections against the wiring diagram.
Close the disconnector and switch the power on.
Test the operation of the STO function when the motor is stopped.
• Give a stop command for the drive (if running) and wait until the motor shaft is at a
standstill.
Ensure that the drive operates as follows:
• Open the STO circuit. The drive generates an indication as defined in parameter
3025 STO OPERATION. For the description of the warning, see chapter Fault
tracing.
• Give a start command to verify that the STO function blocks the drive’s operation.
The drive displays a warning. The motor should not start.
• Close the STO circuit.
• Reset any active faults. Restart the drive and check that the motor runs normally.
Test the operation of the STO function when the motor is running.
• Start the drive and ensure the motor is running.
• Open the STO circuit. The motor should stop. The drive generates an indication if
one is defined for the ‘running’ state in parameter 3025 STO OPERATION. For the
description of the warning, see chapter Fault tracing.
• Reset any active faults and try to start the drive.
• Ensure that the motor stays at a standstill and the drive operates as described
above in testing the operation when the motor is stopped.
• Close the STO circuit.
• Reset any active faults. Restart the drive and check that the motor runs normally.
Document and sign the acceptance test report which verifies that the safety function is
safe and accepted for operation.
Use
1. Open the activation switch, or activate the safety functionality that is wired to the
STO connection.
2. STO inputs on the drive control unit de-energize, and the drive control unit cuts off
the control voltage from the drive IGBTs.
3. The control program generates an indication as defined by parameter 3025 STO
OPERATION.
4. The motor coasts to a stop (if running). The drive will not restart while the
activation switch or safety relay contacts are open.
5. Deactivate the STO by closing the activation switch, or resetting the safety
functionality that is wired to the STO connection.
6. Reset any faults before restarting.
WARNING! The Safe torque off function does not disconnect the voltage of
the main and auxiliary circuits from the drive. Therefore maintenance work
on electrical parts of the drive or the motor can only be carried out after
isolating the drive from the main supply.
WARNING! (With permanent magnet motors only) In case of a multiple

IGBT power semiconductor failure, the drive system can produce an
alignment torque which maximally rotates the motor shaft by 180/p
degrees regardless of the activation of the Safe torque off function. p
denotes the number of pole pairs.
Notes:
• If a running drive is stopped by using the Safe torque off function, the drive will cut
off the motor supply voltage and the motor will coast to a stop. If this causes
danger or is not otherwise acceptable, stop the drive and machinery using the
appropriate stop mode before activating the Safe torque off function.
• The Safe torque off function overrides all other functions of the drive unit.
• The Safe torque off function is ineffective against deliberate sabotage or misuse.
• The Safe torque off function has been designed to reduce the recognized
hazardous conditions. In spite of this, it is not always possible to eliminate all
potential hazards. The assembler of the machine must inform the final user about
the residual risks.
Maintenance
After the operation of the circuit is validated at start-up, the STO function shall be
maintained by periodic proof testing. In high demand mode of operation, the
maximum proof test interval is 20 years. In low demand mode of operation, the
maximum proof test interval is 2 years. The test procedure is given in section
Acceptance test procedure (page 423).
In addition to proof testing, it is a good practice to check the operation of the function
when other maintenance procedures are carried out on the machinery.
Include the Safe torque off operation test described above in the routine maintenance
program of the machinery that the drive runs.
If any wiring or component change is needed after start up, or the parameters are
restored, follow the test given in section Acceptance test procedure (page 423).
Use only ABB approved spare parts.
 Proof test interval

The safety integrity of the function does not require any proof testing within the
specified lifetime of the safety function. Regardless of the mode of operation (high or
low demand as defined in IEC 61508, EN/IEC 62061, IEC 61511 and EN ISO 13849-
1), it is a good practice to check the operation of the safety function at least once a
year. Do the test as described in section Acceptance test procedure on page 423.
The person responsible for the design of the complete safety function should also
note the Recommendation of Use CNB/M/11.050 published by the European co-
ordination of Notified Bodies for Machinery concerning dual-channel safety-related
systems with electromechanical outputs:
• When the safety integrity requirement for the safety function is SIL 3 or PL e (cat.
3 or 4), the proof test for the function must be performed at least every month.
• When the safety integrity requirement for the safety function is SIL 2 (HFT = 1) or
PL d (cat. 3), the proof test for the function must be performed at least every 12
months.
This is a recommendation and depends on the required (not achieved) SIL/PL. For
example, safety relays, contactor relays, emergency stop buttons, switches etc. are
typically safety devices which contain electromechanical outputs. The STO circuit of
the drive does not contain any electromechanical components.
Fault tracing
The indications given during the normal operation of the Safe torque off function are
selected by parameter 3025 STO OPERATION.
The diagnostics of the Safe torque off function cross-compare the status of the two
STO channels. In case the channels are not in the same state, a fault reaction
function is performed and the drive trips on an “STO hardware failure” fault. An
attempt to use the STO in a non-redundant manner, for example activating only one
channel, will trigger the same reaction.
For the indications generated by the drive, see chapter Fault tracing, and for details
on directing fault and warning indications to an output on the control unit for external
diagnostics.
Any failures of the Safe torque off function must be reported to ABB.
Safety data
The safety data for the Safe torque off function is given below.
Note: The safety data is calculated for redundant use, and does not apply if both STO
channels are not used.
Type Frame IEC 61508 and IEC/EN 61800-5-2
ACS355- size SIL SC PFH HFT SFF T1 PFD
(1/h) (%) (a) (T1=2a)
1-phase UN = 200…240 V (200, 208, 220, 230, 240 V)
01x-02A4-2 R0 3 3 6.20E-09 1 91 10 4.77E-08
01x-04A7-2 R1 3 3 6.20E-09 1 91 10 4.77E-08
01x-06A7-2 R1 3 3 6.20E-09 1 91 10 4.77E-08
01x-07A5-2 R2 3 3 6.16E-09 1 92 10 4.85E-08
01x-09A8-2 R2 3 3 6.16E-09 1 92 10 4.85E-08
3-phase UN = 200…240 V (200, 208, 220, 230, 240 V)
03x-02A4-2 R0 3 3 6.20E-09 1 91 10 4.65E-04
03x-03A5-2 R0 3 3 6.20E-09 1 91 10 4.65E-04
03x-04A7-2 R1 3 3 6.20E-09 1 91 10 4.65E-04
03x-06A7-2 R1 3 3 6.20E-09 1 91 10 4.65E-04
03x-07A5-2 R1 3 3 6.20E-09 1 91 10 4.65E-04
03x-09A8-2 R2 3 3 6.16E-09 1 92 10 4.61E-04
03x-13A3-2 R2 3 3 6.16E-09 1 92 10 4.61E-04
03x-17A6-2 R2 3 3 6.16E-09 1 92 10 4.61E-04
03x-24A4-2 R3 3 3 6.16E-09 1 92 10 4.62E-04
03x-31A0-2 R4 3 3 6.16E-09 1 93 10 4.62E-04
03x-46A2-2 R4 3 3 6.16E-09 1 93 10 4.62E-04
3-phase UN = 380…480 V (380, 400, 415, 440, 460, 480 V)
03x-01A2-4 R0 3 3 6.16E-09 1 92 10 4.61E-04
03x-01A9-4 R0 3 3 6.16E-09 1 92 10 4.61E-04
03x-02A4-4 R1 3 3 6.16E-09 1 92 10 4.61E-04
03x-03A3-4 R1 3 3 6.16E-09 1 92 10 4.61E-04
03x-04A1-4 R1 3 3 6.16E-09 1 92 10 4.61E-04
03x-05A6-4 R1 3 3 6.16E-09 1 92 10 4.61E-04
03x-07A3-4 R1 3 3 6.16E-09 1 92 10 4.61E-04
03x-08A8-4 R1 3 3 6.16E-09 1 92 10 4.61E-04
03x-12A5-4 R3 3 3 6.16E-09 1 92 10 4.62E-04
03x-15A6-4 R3 3 3 6.16E-09 1 92 10 4.62E-04
03x-23A1-4 R3 3 3 6.16E-09 1 92 10 4.62E-04
03x-31A0-4 R4 3 3 6.16E-09 1 93 10 4.62E-04
03x-38A0-4 R4 3 3 6.16E-09 1 93 10 4.62E-04
03x-44A0-4 R4 3 3 6.16E-09 1 93 10 4.62E-04
3AXD00000353783.xls L
Type Frame EN ISO 13849-1 IEC/EN IEC 61511

ACS355- size 62061
CCF MTTFd1 DC 2 Category
PL SILCL SIL
(%) (a) (%)
1-phase UN = 200…240 V (200, 208, 220, 230, 240 V)
01x-02A4-2 R0 e 80 3419 >90% 3 3 3
01x-04A7-2 R1 e 80 3419 >90% 3 3 3
01x-06A7-2 R1 e 80 3419 >90% 3 3 3
01x-07A5-2 R2 e 80 3491 >90% 3 3 3
01x-09A8-2 R2 e 80 3491 >90% 3 3 3
3-phase UN = 200…240 V (200, 208, 220, 230, 240 V)
03x-02A4-2 R0 e 80 3419 >90% 3 3 3
03x-03A5-2 R0 e 80 3419 >90% 3 3 3
03x-04A7-2 R1 e 80 3419 >90% 3 3 3
03x-06A7-2 R1 e 80 3419 >90% 3 3 3
03x-07A5-2 R1 e 80 3419 >90% 3 3 3
03x-09A8-2 R2 e 80 3491 >90% 3 3 3
03x-13A3-2 R2 e 80 3491 >90% 3 3 3
03x-17A6-2 R2 e 80 3491 >90% 3 3 3
03x-24A4-2 R3 e 80 3488 >90% 3 3 3
03x-31A0-2 R4 e 80 3486 >90% 3 3 3
03x-46A2-2 R4 e 80 3486 >90% 3 3 3
3-phase UN = 380…480 V (380, 400, 415, 440, 460, 480 V)
03x-01A2-4 R0 e 80 3491 >90% 3 3 3
03x-01A9-4 R0 e 80 3491 >90% 3 3 3
03x-02A4-4 R1 e 80 3491 >90% 3 3 3
03x-03A3-4 R1 e 80 3491 >90% 3 3 3
03x-04A1-4 R1 e 80 3491 >90% 3 3 3
03x-05A6-4 R1 e 80 3491 >90% 3 3 3
03x-07A3-4 R1 e 80 3491 >90% 3 3 3
03x-08A8-4 R1 e 80 3491 >90% 3 3 3
03x-12A5-4 R3 e 80 3488 >90% 3 3 3
03x-15A6-4 R3 e 80 3488 >90% 3 3 3
03x-23A1-4 R3 e 80 3488 >90% 3 3 3
03x-31A0-4 R4 e 80 3486 >90% 3 3 3
03x-38A0-4 R4 e 80 3486 >90% 3 3 3
03x-44A0-4 R4 e 80 3486 >90% 3 3 3
3AXD00000353783.xls L
1
100 years must be used for calculation of a safety loop.
2
According to standard EN ISO 13849-1 table E.1
• The following temperature profile is used in safety value calculations:

• 670 on/off cycles per year with T = 71.66 °C
• 32 °C board temperature at 2.0% of time

• 60 °C board temperature at 1.5% of time
• 85 °C board temperature at 2.3% of time.
• The STO is a type A safety component as defined in IEC 61508-2.
• Relevant failure modes:
• The STO trips spuriously (safe failure)
• The STO does not activate when requested
A fault exclusion on the failure mode “short circuit on printed circuit board” has
been made (EN 13849-2, table D.5). The analysis is based on an assumption that
one failure occurs at one time. No accumulated failures have been analyzed.
• STO reaction time (shortest detectable break): 10 microseconds
• STO response time: 2 ms (typical), 5 ms (maximum)
• Fault detection time: Channels in different states for longer than 200 ms
• Fault reaction time: Fault detection time + 10 ms
• STO fault indication (parameter 3025) delay: < 200 ms
• STO warning indication (parameter 3025) delay: < 200 ms
• Maximum cable length 300 m (984 ft) between activation switch (K) and drive
control unit.
• The voltage at the INx terminals of each drive must be at least 13 V DC to be
interpreted as “1”.
 Abbreviations
Abbreviation Reference Description
CCF EN ISO 13849-1 Common cause failure (%)
DC EN ISO 13849-1 Diagnostic coverage
HFT IEC 61508 Hardware fault tolerance
MTTFd EN ISO 13849-1 Mean time to dangerous failure: (The total number of life
units) / (the number of dangerous, undetected failures)
during a particular measurement interval under stated
conditions
PFD IEC 61508 Probability of failure on demand
PFH IEC 61508 Probability of dangerous failures per hour
PL EN ISO 13849-1 Performance level. Levels a…e correspond to SIL
SC IEC 61508 Systematic capability
SFF IEC 61508 Safe failure fraction (%)
SIL IEC 61508 Safety integrity level (1…3)
SILCL EN 62061 Maximum SIL (level 1…3) that can be claimed for a safety
function or subsystem
STO IEC/EN 61800-5-2 Safe torque off
T1 IEC 61508 Proof test interval. T1 is a parameter used to define the
probabilistic failure rate (PFH or PFD) for the safety
function or subsystem. Performing a proof test at a
maximum interval of T1 is required to keep the SIL
capability valid. The same interval must be followed to keep
the PL capability (EN ISO 13849) valid. Note that any T1
values given cannot be regarded as a guarantee or
warranty.
See also section Maintenance (page 425).
 Declaration of conformity
Declaration of conformity (3AXD10000414701) is available on the Internet. See
section Document library on the Internet on the inside of the back cover.
 Certificate
TÜV certificate (3AXD00000600767) is available on the Internet. See section
Document library on the Internet on the inside of the back cover.
Appendix: Permanent magnet synchronous motors (PMSMs) 431
22
Appendix: Permanent
magnet synchronous motors
(PMSMs)
This chapter gives basic guidelines on how the ACS355 drive parameters should be
set when using permanent magnet synchronous motors (PMSMs). In addition, some
hints are given for tuning the motor control performance.
Setting the parameters

With PMSMs special attention must be paid on setting the motor nominal values
correctly in parameter group 99 START-UP DATA. It is always recommended to use
vector control. If the nominal back-emf of the motor is not available, a full ID run
should be performed for improving performance.
432 Appendix: Permanent magnet synchronous motors (PMSMs)
The following table lists the basic parameter settings needed for permanent magnet
synchronous motors.
No. Name Value Description
9903 MOTOR 2 Permanent magnet synchronous motor
TYPE
9904 MOTOR 1 VECTOR: SPEED
CTRL 2 VECTOR:TORQ
MODE Note: Scalar control mode (3) can also be selected, but it is not
recommended because in the scalar control mode the
permanent magnet synchronous motor may get unstable and
damage either the process, the motor or the drive.
9905 MOTOR Note: If the back emf voltage of the motor is not available, set
NOM VOLT the rated value here and run the ID run. If the voltage is given as
a proportional value, such as 103 V/1000 rpm in a 3000 rpm
motor, set 309 V here. Sometimes the value is given as the
peak value. In this case, divide the value by the square root of 2
(1.41).
Note: It is recommended to use the back emf voltage. If it is not
used, a full ID run must be performed.
9906 MOTOR Rated current of the motor. Do not use the peak value.
NOM
CURR
9907 MOTOR Rated electrical frequency of the motor. If the frequency is not
NOM FREQ given in the motor rating plate, it can be calculated using the
following formula:
frequency [Hz] = speed [rpm] x (number of pole pairs) / 60
9908 MOTOR Rated mechanical speed of the motor. If it is not given, it can be
NOM calculated using the following formula:
SPEED speed [rpm] = frequency [Hz] x 60 / (number of pole pairs)
9909 MOTOR Motor nominal power. If it is not given, it can be calculated using
NOM the following formula:
POWER Power [kW] = Rated torque [Nm] x 2 x pi x rated speed [rpm] /
60000
2102 STOP RAMP It is recommended to use ramp stop with a PMSM.
FUNCTION
Appendix: Permanent magnet synchronous motors (PMSMs) 433
Start mode
The default value of parameter 2101 START FUNCTION is 1 (AUTO). In most cases
this is suitable for starting the rotation. If fast start with low inertia is required, it is
recommended to set parameter 2101 START FUNCTION to 2 (DC MAGN).
Smooth start
The Smooth start function can be used if the motor is not able to start or when
rotation at low speeds needs to be improved. The following table lists the needed
parameter settings.
No. Name Value Description Default
2621 SMOOTH 0 Disabled 0
START 1 Enabled always
2 Start only
2622 SMOOTH 10…100% Current applied to the motor when the Smooth start 50%
START is active. Increasing the current helps enable starting
CUR with a load or with a large inertia. Decreasing the
current can prevent the rotor from turning into a
wrong direction during the start.
2623 SMOOTH 2…100% Set the smooth start frequency range as small as 10%
START possible. This should be tuned so that the rotation is
FRQ stable throughout the whole speed range.
Speed controller tuning

In vector control mode, it is recommended to tune the speed controller. In
applications where the motor can be rotated freely, automatic tuning can be used.
See parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN for more information.
Usually it is enough to adjust the proportional gain (parameter 2301 PROP GAIN) of
the speed controller to a higher value. The default value is 5 which results in rather
conservative speed controller tuning. Increase the proportional gain value by 5 until
the performance is satisfactory. If the application becomes unstable, divide the last
gain value by 2, and you have reached rather robust speed controller tuning.
Note: It is recommended to use encoder feedback if accurate torque control, high
torque production, or sustained operation is required at low speeds (below 20% of the
motor nominal speed).
 Adjusting motor speed estimation gain in case of an over current

failure
The inertia of the PM motor application may cause over current trips. If the drive fails
constantly to over current with the PM motor (Fault 01), the speed estimation gain
may need to be adjusted. This is done by changing the parameter 2626 SPD EST
BW TRIM.
434 Appendix: Permanent magnet synchronous motors (PMSMs)
Further information
Product and service inquiries
Address any inquiries about the product to your local ABB representative, quoting
the type designation and serial number of the unit in question. A listing of ABB sales,
support and service contacts can be found by navigating to
www.abb.com/searchchannels.
Product training
For information on ABB product training, navigate to new.abb.com/service/training.
Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals

Your comments on our manuals are welcome. Navigate to
new.abb.com/drives/manuals-feedback-form.
Document library on the Internet

You can find manuals and other product documents in PDF format on the Internet at
www.abb.com/drives/documents.
Contact us
www.abb.com/drives
www.abb.com/drivespartners
3AUA0000066143 Rev C (EN) EFFECTIVE: 2015-04-30
3AUA0000066143C

Binder1 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Binder1 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Binder1 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operations & Maintenance (O&M)

Sr.NO Description Page No.

3 INITIAL INSPECTION, SHIPPING ARRANGEMENTS 5

6 OPERATING & MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS FOR -TOP ENTRY 9

8 REPLACING THE MECHANICAL SEAL 10

9 MECHANICAL SEAL INSTALLATION 11

11 BOLT TIGHTENING TORQUE RECOMMENDATIONS 12

12 MOTOR MAINTENANCE AND STORAGE 14

13 GEAR DRIVE LUBRICATION 16

14 OIL CHANGE INTERVALS 17

15 GEAR DRIVE BEARING LUBRICATION 17

17 MOTOR - O & M MANUAL 18

18 GEARBOX - O & M MANUAL 31

3. DO NOT operate shaft-sealing devices at temperatures or pressures higher than

4. Prior to servicing the mixer, electrically disconnect power.

5. DO NOT touch rotating mixer parts.

9. Before operating the mixer, it is important to check the following items:

10. DO NOT enter the mixing vessel UNLESS:

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR GALAXY INDUSTRIAL EQUIPMENTS PVT. LTD.

WARNING: Before attempting any maintenance or service on this machine, it is

2.1 Refer to the Installation Drawings OR G.A. Drawing

a. Proper mixer location and off bottom distance.

c. Motor Power Connections - In order to ensure proper functioning of the unit, it is

2.3 MECHANICAL SEALS - Wherever Applicable !!!

b) Connect seal lubricant lines if required.

3.1 STORAGE CONSIDERATIONS

3.2 STORAGE OF NEW UNITS

 Uninstalled, Protected Storage and Installed, Inoperative Units - Depending on the

 Periodic Inspection -All protective coatings and wrappings must be maintained in

3.3 STORAGE OF DEACTIVATED UNITS

3.4 START-UP PREPARATION

1. Remove all wrappings and-coverings.

3. Install all safety guards.

OPERATING & MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS FOR GALAXY INDUSTRIAL EQUIPMENTS

SECTION 1 - OPERATING THE MIXER

SECTION 2- REPLACING THE MECHANICAL SEAL

2.1 MECHANICAL SEAL REMOVAL:

Remove the single shaft bolt in the shaft drive collar

3. Remove the thrust ring

4. Remove any screws securing the mechanical seal.

2.2 MECHANICAL SEAL INSTALLATION:

7. Add lubricant and pressurize mechanical seal chambers per instructions

Recommended torques for tightening bolts and screws on GALAXY INDUSTRIAL

UNLESS SPECIFICALLY LISTED ELSEWHERE IN THE DETAILED INSTRUCTIONS, TIGHTEN THE

Table 7 - Recommended Tightening Torques

Stainless Steel Grade 8.8

M5-0.8 3.6 4.6

M16-2.O 127 164

M18-2.5* 175 233

M20-2.5 248 331

M22-2.5* 338 450

M24-3.O 429 572

* These are Non-Preferred Sizes

1. ALL BOLTS SHOULD BE COATED WITH OIL, GREASE, OR AN ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND

3. Insulation resistance should be checked at operative temperature and humidity

Types of General Conditions HP Range Re-Lubrication

Standard 8 Hrs per day, normal or light loading, 1 ½ -7 ½ 3Yrs

Clean,100ºF Maximum Ambient 10-40 1Yrs

Severe 24 Hrs per day operation or Shock 1 ½ -7 ½ 1 ½ Yrs